;/\v -/V' //%1 



* 4 


























^ 






,%^ :\ \^ 



\w 











"<.% 



<W* : 



^3 :S 



S> ,.< "0 



v v 



^^ -J 



o„ '/ 





C -9 , 




°<> \v 



f^' ?ss%-\ 














w 







V 



ts V * * * ° , *%> 




°,^J S V ^ 







,*«. 



%, ^ 





^■A .* := ^>„A -^ 






&.V 






s .tf> 




o, '/ 




s^ <xV 



THE 

COMPLETE 

ITALIAN MASTER; 

The best and easiest llules for attaining that 
Language: 

By Slgnor VENERONI, 

Italian Secretary to the late French King. 

Translated into English, and compared with the 
last Lyons' Edition, 

■■ , ..;-—.,. ii ■ < i . ■ . f 

i 

a new edition, 
Carefully Revised and Improved, 

And the Italian Words properly accented, to facilitate 
the Pronunciation to Learners. 



LONBOJSf: 

Printed for F. WINGRAVE, in the Strand; 
Successor to Mr. Nourse. 

1303. 



.1*1$. 



c. Uaueara, Primer, reteri»orowjh-court, Fleet-SUecU 



5 ,N~^DP THE 

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE, 

TO THIS f C> 

NEJV EDITION. 

WHEN we reflect on the nuniber of great men in 
every department of sciences and arts, whom Italy 
lias been continually producing since the glorious age 
of Leo X. as likewise on the pleasure and instruction 
to be obtained by visiting that happy country, and the 
necessity of understanding the Italian language, to make 
that visit to any purpose; it is no wonder that the Gram- 
mars and Dictionaries, written to propagate the know- 
ledge of the Italian tongue, have been so greatly multi- 
plied. Without a proper acquaintance with this idiom, 
all the treasures of Italian learning and literature, ail 
the discoveries and inventions of genius and industry in 
that nation, would be lost to the rest of mankind. No 
doubt, a translation, which requires a knowledge of the 
original in one man only, may supply the want of that 
blessing in thousands. But where the interpreters are few, 
the mistakes and inaccuracies must, from man's natural 
aversion to much trouble, when his interest does not 
lead him to discoveries, be proportionably numerous. Be- 
sides, there is a fine spirit so peculiar to every language, 
ay to evaporate, almost entirely, in the most studied and 
cautious endeavours to transfuse it into others: and, 
though the bulk of mankind may take up with the body 
only, there will always be, in every civilized nation, a 
number of refined and philosophical minds, ambitious of 
possessing the better part sufficient to justify any pains 
taken to help them to the acquisition of that rational and 
sublime enjoyment. 

It was upon these principles, the editor undertook, 
some years ago, a translation from the French, with im- 
provements and additions, to make it suit the English 
A 2 idiom, 



PREFACE. 

idiom, of the then best as well as newest edition of Vene- 
roni's Grammae, a work far surpassing all other in- 
troductions to that elegant tongue, which, for its richness 
and softness, and the stores of every kind of useful know- 
ledge and polite entertainment locked up in its authors, 
is inferior to no language in Europe. These improve- 
ments consisted of an Introduction to Syntax; an Essay 
on Italian Poetry, or a Treatise on ihe Italian Ver- 
sification; the different Compositions in Verse, and 
Poetic Licences; a Treatise on compound Words 
Capitals, and Stops ; and finally, a Discourse on Exple- 
tives, the' energy and beauty of which constitute great 
part of the merit of most languages. 

But, non omnia possumus omnes. Such is the reputation 
of Veneroni's Grammar on the Continent ; and so great 
the number of those Who wish to be able not only to 
understand but to speak the Italian language ; that very 
material observations _upon that work have been pub- 
lished abroad since our iast edition of it in English. 
This consideration, joined to that translation's being out 
of print, has induced us to offer the public the following 
New Edition, in which we have combined the fruits of 
our own enquiries and remarks, with those of learned 
foreigners. We "have likewise added some new Gram- 
matical Observations on the Italian language ; with 
Remarks on the Letters of the Alphabet; some new 
Dialogues, new Phrases, Letters, and Stories; also the 
Italian words properly accented, to facilitate the pro- 
nunciation to learners. After all, we must not take 
upon us to say that it is impossible any better edition of 
this Work should ever appear. But this we may safely 
liffirm, that it will be many years before Veneroni's 
Grammar of the Italian language can be carried to a 
greater degree of perfection than that in which we 
now offer it to the English reader; and, therefore, we 
venture not only to offer it, but recommend it: and 
besides, stake our credit on the justness of that recom- 
mendation. 



INTRO- 



INTRODUCTION 



ITALIAN TONGUE, 

For the Use of those who do not understand 
Latin. 



THE most expeditious am] the surest way of wilt- 
ing ami- -speak i#g Italian, French, and all other 
languages, with propriety, is to learn therm by fl*e 
principles of Grammar. Yet, nobody has hitherto un- 
dertaken to explain the terms of that art, which arc 
puzzling to such as do not understand Latin, and parti- 
cularly to the Fair Sex. In order therefore to facilitate 
the method of acquiring this agreeable language, I have 
given an explanation of the necessary terms in the follow- 
ing Introduction. 

But hefore I enter upon the subject, I must acquaint 
the reader, that in the present Grammar, I have made 
use of the orthography embraced by the modern Ita- 
lians, as the safest, and best adapted for rendering the 
study of this language easy to foreigners ; as also with a 
view of serving a great many Italians themselves, who 
perhaps are not perfectly acquainted with the orthogra- 
phy which now prevails among the best writers of their 
own nation. 

N.B. In order, therefore, to establish this modern 
orthography, I have omitted a great number of accents 
with which most Italian Grammars were formerly 
crowded; and I have retained only a few grave ones, 
where they may be of use to distinguish one word from 
another, or for the right pronunciation of some par- 
ticular term. For which reason, 1 have retained the 
grave accent on the last vowel of the third person sin- 

A 3 gulur 



2 INTRODUCTION to the 

gular in the preterperfect definitive, whose first person of 
the same tense terminates in ai, ei, and ii, (the latter is 
always written with a j, agreeable to the principles of 
the new orthography) ; as amid, I loved ; amo, he loved ; 
tre'dei, I believed ; crede, he believed ; sentn (sentj), I 
felt; sent), he felt. Were it not for this accent amo, 
the third person of the preterperfect definite, would be 
confounded with amo, the first person of the present in- 
dicative ; and credit, the third person of the preterper- 
fect definite, could not be distinguished from crede, the 
third person of the present indicative; sent), the third 
person of the preterperfect definite, might be mistaken 
for senti, the second person of the present indicative. I 
have likewise continued the grave accent on the first and 
third person singular of the future tense ; as sard, I shall 
be 5 sara, he shall be; for without this accent, saro 
would have no signification, and Sara would denote the 
wife of Abraham. I have moreover suffered it to re- 
main on ail nouns substantive of the feminine gender, 
which in Latin terminate mtas, as bonitas, ckaritas ; in 
English in ty ; and in Italian in ta, with the grave ac- 
cent ; as bounty, bonta ; charity, carita : and on all 
Italian words ending in u ; as virtu, virtue ; Giesu, 
Jesus; piii, more; fit, he was &c. Yet many . of the 
modern Italians, and even men of great learning, are 
against retaining this grave accent on words terminating 
in u; for they look upon it as superfluous, since u is 
always u, whether it be marked with a grave accent or 
not. In short, I have preserved the grave accent on la, 
an adverb of place, signifying there, in Latin Ulic, to 
distinguish it from the feminine article la; as also on 
cost?, and costa, signifying at that place, to distinguish 
them from cost i, thou dost cost; and costa, he does cost: 
the second and third persons of the verb costare, to cost : 
though indeed I think it needless on this account, since 
the context points out the feminine article, and the 
adverb of place; yet it may be proper to retain it for 
another reason, that. of the difference of pronunciation; 
as the words marked in that manner are uttered with a 
greater emphasis, and longer pause, than those which, 

are 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 3 

are not accented. This new method of orthography, or 
pronunciation, you will find in the second Treatise of 
this Grammar; whereas the former editions give you 
only the rules and explication of the grave and acute 
accents. 

I shall mention a word or two concerning the vowels 
e and o, the pronunciation of which, to some persons, 
appears more difficult. The vowel e has always a clear 
and acute sound, like the French 6 masculine in malgrt, 
particularly when it is the penultimate vowel of the in- 
finitive mood, and of the future and indefinite tenses i 
as crtdere, to believe; amerb, I will love; anura, I 
should love : for, if you do not pronounce the vowel e 
full and strong, it will sound* like credre, amrd, amrei. 
The vowel o is pronounced as in Latin and English; 
and if there be any difference, it is so trifling, that it 
would be needless to mention it here, since it is best 
learned by the ear, and the instruction of a master. 



An 



INTRODUCTION to tk* 



An Explanation ofthcTzRMS of Grammar. 

TTHE first terms of grammar are the Letters. There 
are no more than twenty letters in the Italian 
tongue, according to the opinion of some grammarians, 
Viz. a, b y c, d y e,f, g% h, i, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, w, z. 

According to others there are twenty-two : and the 
letters which they add, are j and v consonants. The 
latter opinion deserves the preference. The Italians do 
cot make use of k, x, y. 

The letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 

The vowels are a f e, i, o, u. They are called vowels, 
from their forming a perfect sound alone, without the 
assistance of the other letters; as a is pronounced single; 
e the same ; and hi like manner the other vowels. 

The consonants are the other letters, b, c, d, f, g,j f 
1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t f v, z. We give them the name of 
consonants, because we cannot pronounce (hem without 
the help of a vowel before or after them : example, b is 
pronounced as if there was a b and e together, to wit, 
be ; f, as ef, and so of the rest. 

H, especially at the beginning of a word, is not pro- 
perly a letter, but only a note of aspiration ; therefore 
it is never pronounced in Italian : yet the use made of 
it in the middle of words, is greater than most people 
imagine. See what we say of it, in treating of the pro- 
nunciation of consonants. 

It is the mixture of the letters, that generally forms 
the different words which every language is capable of 
producing-: and, that seme order may be observed in 
the infinite number of words< they have been reduced 
to nine heads, or parts of speech, though most Italians 
reckon no more than eight. 

A speech is composed of sentences. 

Sentences are composed of words. 

Words of syllables. 

Syllables of letters. 

Letters 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 5 

Letters are certain marks or characters, which serve 
to form the syllables and words, as, a t h, c, d, t> 
&c. 

A syllable is part of a word pronounced with a sin- 
gle sound, aud composed of one, two, or three letters, 
as, astrologo, an astrologer, is composed of four sylla- 
bles, as-tro-lo-go, the second of which is composed of 
three letters, and the rest of two. ' A-mo, I love, is 
composed of two syllables, the former of a single letter, 
and the latter of two. 

Sometimes a word contains but one syllable, and then 
we call it a monosyllable (a term of Greek derivation),, 
that is to say, having but one syllable ; as re, a king ; 
me, nic ; tc, thee, &c. 

A word consists either of one or more syllables ; as rp, 
cmbre. 

A sentence is composed of many words, that form a 
complete sense y as, per ben parldre Italiano, bisogna 
parhire Toscdno, e prununcidre come i Romani ; to speak 
good Italian, we must speak as they do in Tuscany, and 
pronounce as they do at Rome. 

A speech, or discourse, is composed of nine parts; 
which are-Mhe Article, Noun, Pronoun, Verb, Parti- 
ciple, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, aud Interjec- 
tion— rWe cannot name any word but what is contained 
under one of these parts, which are all comprised in the 
following Treatise. Those who reckon but eight parts 
of speech, leave out the Article, 



AS An 



INTRODUCTION to thi 



An Explanation of the Parts of Speech. 

JN order to understand a language with ease, we should 
endeavour to attain -\ perfect knowledge of the parts 
of speech, and their meaning ; otherwise it is impossible 
ever to understand, or speak it correctly. According to 
the above order, I should begin with the Article ; but, 
that I may be the better understood, I shall commence 
with the Noun. 

Of the NOUNS. 

A Noun is a word which serves to name and distin- 
guish some thing; as, Dm, God; dngelo, an an- 
gel ; nemo : a man ; cUlo, heaven ; terra, earth ; c a- 
x>allo, a horse ; libro, a bock ; capptllo, a hat ; tdvola, a 
table 5 pane, bread ; vino, wine, &c. 

There are two sorts of nouns : one is called a noun- 
substantive, and the other a noun-adjective. 

The noun-substantive is that which subsists by itself, or 
that expresses the name of a thing, which we presently 
understand upon the first mentioning ; as heaven, earth, 
the king, a horse, a book; we know the meaning of the 
words, heaven, earth, the king, &c. 

The noun-adjective is a word that denotes the qualities 
of the substantive, and that cannot be understood when 
mentioned by itself; as great, grande ; tme,bello; little, 
piccolo; red, 7^6sso : we know not what is great, fair, 
little, or red, unless we join a substantive to it; as, a 
great book, a fine book, a little book, a red book ; a 
great hat, a fine hat, a little hat, a red hat. 

Every noun is either of the masculine or the feminine 
gender. 

The masculine gender is marked by the article il, or 
lo, in English Me. 

The feminine gender is marked by the article la, in 
Engtah also by the. 

All nouns, before which we may place il or lo, are of 
the masculine gender; and those, before which we place 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 7 

la, are of the feminine gender; example, il libro, the 
book : il fubco, the tire ; lo specckio, the looking-glass- ; 
are of the masculine gender; La terra, the earth, la 
camera, the chamber, la penna, the pen; are of the femi- 
nine gender. 

%* Observe, that the noun substantive is riever but of 
one gender ;- that is to say, either masculine or feminine, 
as Dio, God, cielo, heaven, gia'rdmo, garden, are always 
of the masculine gender, and never of the feminine. Ter- 
ra, the earth, camera, a chamber, are feminine and never 
masculine. 

The noun adjective ought to agree with the substan- 
tive: when it terminates in 0, it is masculine ; and when 
it terminates in a, it is feminine. Take notice, that 
all nouns adjective masculine, ending in 0, may become 
feminine, by changing into a ; Mllo, bella, handsome ; 
piccolo, piccola, little ; Jnibno, bubna, good; santo, sunta, 
holy. 

There are some nouns adjective, which, without 
changing their termination, are of both genders ; and 
they are those which, in Italian, end in e in the singular 
number, as, illustre, ammirabile, facile,, &c. One may 
say, un' uorno illustre, an illustrious man; una donna 
illustre, an illustrious woman ; una spirit o ammirabile, 
a wonderful wit ; ana bdUzza ammirabile, a wonderful 
beauty; un libra facile, an easy book ; una lezione facile, 
an easy lesson. 

*** Observe, that all nouns adjective, which end in e in 
Italian, are of the common gender. 

All nouns before which il or lo and la, in English the, 
may be placed indifferently, are adjectives; as, il prudtnle, 
la prudente, prudent ; il dbtto, la dot fa, learned. 

The nouns, before which il or lo, and la, in English thr, 
must not be placed indifferently, but only one of them, are 
nouns substantive ; as, il sole, the sun ; la lima, the moon; 
il giardino, the garden; il frutto, the fruit; la virtu, 
virtue ; la prudenza, prudence. 

Nouns that can change into a are also adjectives ; 

thus of dbtto, learned, you may form dbita, learned ; 

'AG' „ but 



i INTRODUCTION to the 

but of luna, giardmo, terra, &c. which are nouns subs-tan* 
live, you cannot form luno,giardina t terro, &c. 

A noun is also of the singular or the plural number. 

The singular number is used where we speak of one 
thing only; as, the prince, il principc, the body, il corpo; 
the horse, il cavallo : where we speak but of one priute, of 
one body, and of one horse. 

The plural number is used when we speak of more than 
one; as, the princes, i principi; the bodies, i cbrpi; the 
horses, i cavalli : here we speak of many princes, many 
bodies, and many horses. 

These little words of two or three letters, as ■// or lo, la, 
in English the ; gli or ?', which signify the in the plural, 
tuid are placed before nouns to mark the gender, number, 
and case, are called Articles. 



Of the ARTICLES. 

TTIE Article is a declinable word, of one, two, or three 
letters, which is put before the nouns to shew their 
gender, number, and case. 

The gender and number have been explained al~ 
leady. 

But, not to perplex ttie memory, I have inserted the ex- 
planation of the cases after the parts of speech, as it will 
be time enough then to learn them ; and it is sufficient, at 
present, to know that -he articles in English are the, of the, 
to the, from the; and they are used both in the singular 
arid plural number. 

You cannot always know the gender, number, or case of 
nouns, except by the article that precedes them. If one 
should ask, for example, what gender the word piide, a 
loot, is of, it would be impossible to know, without prefix- 
ing an article to it: the articles il and lo serve for the 
masculine, and la for the feminine ; so that in saying il 
pudr, the foot, the article il shews it is of the masculine 
gender. 

In like manner, if a person should ask what number 

any 



ITALIAN TONGUE. £ 

any other word is of, the question could not always be 
resolved, without putting the articles il, lo, i, or gli, before^ 
it, to mark the singular or the plural number. 

*** Observe, that when an article comes before a 
Word beginning with a vowel, the last letter of the 
article must be cut off; that is to say, you retrench the 
vowel at the end of the article, and in the place of it, 
you put an apostrophe, which is made thus('). Example : 
in prefixing an article to amore, onbre, dnima, you must 
not pronounce, or write, lo amore, lo onbre, la dnima ; 
but remove, V onbre, I 'dnima, &c. 

In like manner you retrench the vowel in other cases : 
deir amore, dtlV onbre, d ell ' dnima ; alV amore, all onbre, 
clT dnima; dalV amore, dalV onbre, dull' dnima. 

The Italians never make an elision before words 
beginning with a j or r, because the letters j and v are 
properly consonants ; and those who confound them with 
the vowels i and u, are mistaken. 



Of the PRONOUNS. 

A Pronoun, which the Italians call Pi online, or Vice- 
name, is a declinable part of speech ; so named, be- 
cause it is used instead of a noun. There are seven soits 
of pronouns ; to wit, 

fPersonal, 

I Conjunctive, 
Possessive, 
Pronouns -{ Demonstrative, 
Interrogative, 
Relative, 
Improper. 

Some, by useless subdivisions, have, to the preceding* 
added 

f Reciprocal 

Pror,ou D .J £ euter >., ,. 
j Monosyllabic, 

\ Disjunctive, &c» 

I shall 



10 INTRODUCTION tq the 

I shall mention a word or two, by the way, of the for- 
mer seven. 

Of Pronouns perfonaL 

The pronoun personal marks the three persons ; to 
wit, the first, second, and third, as well in the singular as 
plural. 

The first person is he, or she, who speaks ; and it is ex- 
pressed by I, ig ; we, ?ioi. 

The pronoun persona], io, marks the first person sin- 
gular; as, I speak, io parlo ; I sing, io canto; T believe, h 
credo: not marks the first person plural; as, we speak, not 
parUdmo, &c. 

The pronouns personal I, io ; we, mot ; belong as well to 
the masculine gender as to the feminine : so that a 
woman as well as a man may say, I sing, io canto ; 
I see, io vedo : we sing,- not cantidmo', we see, no i redid- 
mo, &c. 

The second person is that to whom we speak ; and it 
serves also for the masculine and feminine; to wit, thou, 
tu, in the singular number ; you, voi, in the plural ; 
example, thou speakest, tu pdrii; thou dost sing, tu 
cdnti; you speak, vol parldie : you sin?, vci centals, 
&c. 

The third person is that of whom we speak; to wit, he, 
eg7/, for the masculine ; she, elia, for the feminine; and, 
in the plural, the masculine makes iglino, they; the femi- 
nine, eltino : as, he speaks, egli pdrla ; lie sings, egU 
canto. : she speaks, ctla parla : they speak, eglino pdrlano, 
m. elltno pdrlano, f. 

* # * Observe, that there is only / and ive for the first 
person ; there is also only ikcu and you for the second ; 
consequently, every sentence, in which there is neither 
/, we, thou, nor you, must be of the third person ; as, 
the king is willing, il re vuble ; the master teaches, il 
maestro insfgna, &c. both which sentences belong to the 
third person, because they have neither /, we, thou, nor 
you. 



Of 



ITALIAN TONGUE. II 



Of the Pronouns conjunctive. 

The pronouns conjunctive in Italian are mi, me or to 
me; ti, thee or to thee ; si, himself or to himself, herself, 
or to herself; ci, us, or to us ; vi, you, or to you; foro, 
them or to them. 

The pronouns conjunctive have a very great resem- 
blance and affinity with the pronouns persona 1, as they are 
always put before the verb, except loro ; but with this 
difference, that the pronouns personal make the action 
of the verb, before which they are placed, and the pro- 
nouns conjunctive receive it ; example, io canto, I sing ; 
vbi parlate, you speak; it is / and you that make the 
action of the verbs sing and speak, before which they 
are placed ; and, consequently, they are pronouns 
personal. But when we say, Dio ml vede, God be- 
holds me, it is God makes the action of the verb be- 
hold, and me receives it. In like manner, when we say, 
w vi prego, I pray yon ; vbi ci considerate ; you consider 
us; I want to know which are the words in these 
wo phrases, that make the action of the verbs, pray 
and consider ? It is / that pray ; therefore io, I, is the 
pronoun personal ; and ci, you, is the pronoun con- 
junctive. 

In the second phrase vbi ci consider ate, you consider us; 
it is vbi, you, that is the pronoun personal, and causes the 
action of the verb consider : but the word ci, us, that re- 
ceives it, is the pronoun conjunctive, &c. 

Of Pronouns possessive. 

The pronouns possessive mark the possession of a thin?: 
the pronouns possessive are my, thy, his or her, their, our 
your : example, my horse ; thy hat ; his or her book ; my 
chamber ; thy daughter ; his house ; our judgment ; our 
intention ; your wit ; your pen ; my children ; my land ; 
thy pleasures ; thy actions ; his glass ; his chaise; our 
horses ; our towns ; your clothes ; your hands ; their 
father ; their kindred. 

Of 



22 INTRODUCTION to the 

Of Pronouns demonstrative. 

iTie pronouns demonstrative serve to point" out, as if 
Here, to a person or thing; as this, and that ; these, and 
those: example, this coach ; this ivoman ; that man ; these 
hooks, &c. 

Of Pronouns Interrogative. 

The pronoun interrogative is used in asking a ques- 
tion ; there are but three in English, to wit, who? what t 
wHch ? example, what would you have? who is there? 
what woman is thai ? what do you mean? which man do 
you mean ? 

Of Pronouns relative. 

A pronoun relative has reference to a thing or person 
spoken of before; as, which, who, that, when they are 
not intei rogatives; example, the book that I read; the mas- 
ter who teaches ; the lesson which I study. 

Of Pronouns improper. 

The pronouns improper are, every, c.'jry one, all, any ; 
or, nobody, none, several, some other, &c. They are 
called improper, because, strictly speaking, they are not 
pronouns. 

%* Note, that those pronouns improper are very much 
like adjectives, being most of them of the masculine and 
feminine gender in Italian: but as there is no such 
distinction as masculine and feminine in the English 
pronouns improper, tli^re can be no example of them 
given here: so that I refer beginners to the third chap- 
ter, concerning pronouns, where it will be rendered more 
intelligible to them. 

The pronouns improper have also their distinction of 
singular and plural number; but this, as well as the 
gender, cannot be explained here by example ; it shall 
be done with more convenience and perspicuity in its 
proper place. 

0/ 



ITALIAN TONGUE. U 

Of the VERBS. 

HPHE Verb, and the Noun, are the two principal parts of 
Speech. 

The Noun serves to name any thing. 

The Verb serves to denote every action that may bt 
performed, by expressing the person and tense ; us, to 
laugh; to love; to sleep ; to ?un ; to nourish ; to die; to 
si fig; to teach: I love, we love; [laugh, we laugh, &c. ; 
/ will love, w& will love ; I will laugh, we will laugh, 
&c. 

The verb lias neither masculine nor feminine gender; but 
is distinguished by three times, viz. the jtresent ; Xhepreter- 
perfect, or time past; the future, or the time to come. 
Generally before the verb, there is a pronoun personal; 
as, I sing, he sings, we sing; you dance; the?/ sing ; J 
sing, I sung, I will sing, ye shall sing. In which exam- 
ples the difference of the time of performing the action is 
obvious. 

The change of time or lenses is, in the grammatical 
phrase known by the name of conjugation. 

The conjugation of verbs is composed of four parts, 
viz. of moods, tenses, persons, and number. 



Of the MOODS. 

A Mood is a grammatical term, used to express the 
internal operation of the mind and will, and the 
different ways and manners of acting. 

Now this may be done after five manners or moods ; 
and these moods are called indicative, imperative, opta- 
tive, subjunctive, and infinitive. 

The indicative, or demonstrative, as others call it, is 
the first mood: it shews and declares simply and abso- 
lutely, and without any condition, the thing signified by 
the verb; as when 1 say, I sing; T have suns;; 1 will 
sing; one may plainly perceive, that there are in !hese 
three examples, the time present, past, and to come ; 
without our being obliged to enquire, whether this verb 
depends on some particle, or mark, as that, provided 

ihat k 



34 INTRODUCTION to the 

that, &c in which case, the verb would not be in the 
indicative, but in the subjunctive. 

The imperative marks the action of the verb in com- 
manding and fojrbidding: example, sing; y on, do not sing; 
go thou, do not go. It is obvious that, in the foregoing 
examples, the person speaks either in the way of com- 
mand or prohibition ; and of course, in the imperative. 

The optative expresses the action of the verb by wish- 
ing and desiring; as would Iliad fifty thousand pounds a 
year ; could I but go to Rome ; had I but that, how happy 
should I be ! 

The subjunctive or conjunctive, is so called, because 
it is generally used, with conjunctions before it; such 
as, that, although, to the end that, provided that: example, 
my master is willing that I do my duty ; although he say 
that I may write ; provided that he come ; he desires that 
I may sing. The verbs, do,, say, write, come and sing, 
which follow the conjunctions, are of the subjunctive 
mood. 

The manner of applying conjunctions to verbs will be 
illustrated when we come to speak of tbe syntax of verbs, 
in the second part of this grammar, to which we refer the 
reader. 

TJfe infinitive represents the action of the verb, with- 
out marking either the number or person; as, to love, 
to ivrite; one cannot tell what number of persons this 
action to love, or to ivrite, is to be done, nor who is 
to do it: 



GJ the TENSES. 

\7ERBS have properly but three Tenses; the present, 
the preter, and the future. 

The present denotes a thing done at the very time we 
are speaking; as, I sing, you sing, &c. 

The preter, or time past, denotes an action which is 
no lor.ger present; as, 1. I did sing; 2. 1 sung; 3. lhave 
sting ; 4. / had su?ig. 

These four examples plainly shew that an action may 

be past in four different manners, which is the reason 

v that 



ITALIAN TONGUE. IB 

that there are four different bdases that mark the time past ; 
they are, 

1. The preteriinperfect, | 3.- Tlie preterperfect, 

2. The preterpeifect definite, | 4. The preterpluperfect. 
The preterimperfect serves for the actions which were 

present at a certain time; example, / did sing, or I was 
singing, when yen came in : the word, / did sing, shews 
that the action of singing was doing when you came in. 

The preterimperfect definite marks and defines the time, 
the year, or the day, when the action was done; as, / 
$ung yesterday ; I spoke to the king last year. 

We also make use of this tense, in telling or relating 
any action : example, last year the king took the field ; 
he made himself master of several toivns, and conquered 
whole provinces ; he defeated the enemy, who made a vigor ~ 
ous defence ; he struck a terror into his neighbours, and 
at last forced them to accept of such a peace as he pleased 
to prescribe. All the verbs of this example are in the preter- 
perfect definite. 

Those who do not understand Latin, have some difficul- 
ty to distinguish the preterimperfect from the preterperfect 
definite : in order to clear this matter, let them read the 
two following observations. 

*** 1. Note, that the preterimperfect may be applied 
to a time past, or to that which is still in being. By the 
time still in being, or not quite past, we are to understand 
a day, a night, a week, a month, a year, the age we 
live in. 

By the time past or that which is no more, we under- 
stand yesterday, the day before yesterday, last week, last 
month, last year, last age. Hence we may use the 
preterimperfect thus : I did write to-day, I did sing this 
week, I did read this month. On the contrary the pre- 
terperfect definite is applied to the time past, and never 
t > that in being ; we may say, / ivrote yesterday ; I read- 
last week; but we must not say, I wrote to-day, I read 
to-day. 

c 2. But, to make the difference between the preterim- 
perfect, and the preterperfect definite, more plain and 

easy 



16 INTRODUCTION to the 

easy to the ladies, it suffices to know that the first person 
of the pretei imperfect is always terminated in v* ( or va, in 
Italian ; as amavo, I did love ; cantdvo, I did sing ; godtvo, 
I did enjoy, &c. The preterimperfect definite never 
has that termination: as am/ii, I loved: godti, I enjoyed, 
&c. 

The preterperfect expresses actions perfectly past ; as, 
I have sung, ho eantdto ; I have enjoyed, ho goduto. 

Observe, that we always make use of two verbs to 
express the preterperfect or compounded tense; as, 
1 have written, ho scritto; I had written avevo scrittb. 
It is obvious, that ho is one verb, and seritto } another. 
These two verbs are expressed in Italian, as well as in 
English ; but in Latin they make use of a single verb 
only. 

We generally use the preterperfect, to express an action 
done at a time v. hich is still in being, and not entirely 
elapsed, as, I have given ; I have written ; / have spoken 
to-day, this morning, this week, this month, in my life.' 
time, &c. and not as some people, who confound the pre- 
terperfect definite with the preterperfect, saying,, I game, I 
spoke to-day, this month, &c. because to day, this month, 
&c. are times still in being, which we ought to express by 
the preterperfect, I have given, I have spoken, &c. to-day, 
this month, &c. 

The preterplupeifect denotes not only an action per- 
fectly past, but likewise shews that it was over before 
another action, of which we are speaking, began: example, 
I had supped, when ycu was singing ; I had done ivriting, 
when yon entered. 

Here it appears plainly that there are four preterits, or 
past tenses; viz. two simple, and two compound. 

The simple are the pi etei imperfect, and the preterper- 
fect definite, which in Italian are expressed by a single 
verb, with a pronoun personal before it; as, leggtvo, I 
did read ; hggtvi, thou didst read; tegg&sa, he did lead ; 
llssi, I read; Jeggesti, thou readest; lesse, he read. In 
those examples, there is no more than one verb. 

The two compound preterits are the preterperfect and 
the preterplupeifect ; which arc always expressed by two 

verbs, 






ITALIAN TONGUE. 17 

ter'is, with a pronoun personal before them ; as, / have 
written, thou hast written, he has written, &c. / had 
given, thou hadst given, he had given, &c. In these ex^ 
aniples there are two verbs. 

The future is a tense that signifies something to come; 
as, I will sing, I will speak, &c. It is either simple or 
compound ; simple in the examples above mentioned ; 
compound when I say, / shall have read; I shall have 
written, &c. 



Of the PERSONS. 

TTHE tenses of verbs are composed of three Persons. 

The first is always expressed by / in the singular 
number, and by tee in the plural; as, I sing, we sing. 

The second person is marked by thou iu the singular* 
and you in the plural; as thou singest, you sing. 

The third is he and she in the singular, and tliey in the 
plural; as, he speaks, she speaks, they speak. 



Of the NUMBERS. 

HPHE tenses of the verbs have also two Numbers, the 
singular and the plural; singular, J love, thou lovest, he 
loves ; plural, we love, ye love, they love. 



Of the PARTICIPLES. 

'"PHE Participles are so called, because, although 
they are verbs, they partake of the nature and 
quality of adjectives; as amato, amata, loved; ornato, 
ornata, adorned : one may say, / loved, and / liave 
loved; I adored, I have adored; which are verbs: we 
also say, a man beloved, a woman loved, a God adored, 
a divinity adored; then those words loved, beloved, 
adored, &c. are nouns adjective, and consequently par- 
ticiples, from their partaking of the nature of adjec- 
tive! 



18 INTRODUCTION to the 

tives and verbs, and from their serving to form the pre- 
terperfect. 

*** Observe that whenever two verbs follow one 
another in the same phrase, and that the first-is one of 
the tenses of the verbs to have or to he, the second, is a 
participle ; as, I have seen, you have spoken, he had written, 
I am loved, we are commended: the words seen, spoken, 
written, loved \ and commended, are participles. 

The former five parts of speech, namely, the Article, 
Noun, Pronoun, Verb, and Participle, change their termi- 
nation in Italian : example, il cavullo del pr'mcipe e hello, 
the prince's horse is handsome ; i cavatli de pr'mcipi sono 
lelli, the princes' horses are handsome. By those two 
examples, you may see the change of the articles, nouns, 
and verbs, f By the two following you will see a 
change of the pronouns and participles : La vbstra Uttera 
€ scritta in una maniera affettubsa e famiglidre ; your 
letter is written in an affectionate and familiar style : Le 
vostre let tere sono scritte in termini off ettubsi efamiglidri; 
your letters are written in affectionate and famiiiar 
terms. 

The other four parts of speech admit of no alteration: 
as, mblto, a great deal, which is an adverb ; con, with, 
a preposition; die, that, a conjunction; oime, alas, an 
interjection : they are constantly pronounced and written 
in the same manner; and it may be observed, that those 
words have neither gender, number, case, nor time. 

--'.■"".", ■ -'' , :•• ',- ' '■■»■ .■" ' ■ ': r =i— ^, , r . ', ' ■ ..n ., i 

Of ADVERBS. 
AD VERBS are words that help to express in a better 
manner what the verb denotes, and add more or less 
force and significancy to it ; as, well, ill, more, clearly, 
better, hardly: example, when 1 say, I teach, this expres- 
sion shows what I do, that is, / teach; but it does not 
point out the manner how I teach. To convey this 
meaning, I add an adverb, thus, / teach plainly. We 
have already observed, that adverbs have neither gender, 
number, nor case. 

There 



ITALIAN TONGUE. W 

There are a great many sorts of adverbs ; but I shall 
here only give examples of two or three cf the most com- 
mon sort 

Adverbs of time; such as, when, yesterday, to-night, 
to-day, to-morrow, late, soon, a long while, always, never, 
&c. 

Adverbs of place ; as, where, here, there, above, below, 
towards, far, near, &c. 

Adverbs of quantity ; as", how much, how many, much, 
as much, little, &c. 



Of PREPOSITIONS. 

■•T'HE Prepositions, like the Adverbs, have neither gen- 
der, number, nor case : they are always prefixed to 
nouns, articles, and verbs, and therefore are called pre- 
positions from the Latin word prceponei'e, to set before ; 
as, upon, near, before, without, out, in, against, for; as, 
upon the house, near the palace, in the garden, against 
reason, in court. 

'%* Observe, that there is a great difference between 
the adverb and preposition ; as the adverb requires no- 
thing after it, but the sense is complete without the addi- 
tion of another word; example, he teaches well, you speak 
learnedly, you write fast. But on the contrary, the pre- 
position always requires some word to follow it ; fo v ex- 
ample, you are before me, it is upon the table, they are in 
the garden, &c. 

%* Observe also, that the prepositions sometimes be- 
come adverbs, when we speak absolutely, and there is 
neither article, noun, nor pronoun, after the prepositions : 
for example, my brother walks before, he ivill come after, 
they are behind, she is near. 

In those four examples, before, after, behind, and near, 
are adverbs ; but if we said, my. brother ivalks before his 
company, he will come after us, the servant is behind us, 
she is near ws ; then before, after, behind, near, are prepo- 
sitions. 



20 INTRODUCTION to the 

Of CONJUNCTIONS. 

'T'HE Conjunctions serve to join and connect words 
and sentences together ; such as, and, or, but, though, 
that, as, provided that, in short, &c. example, Peter or 
Paul, black or white ; I promised it to you, but you must 
give it me again. . 

" ■ i . ■■ '"— — ' - ■ 

Of INTERJECTIONS. 
"T^HE Interjections are words that make sense of them- 
selves, and serve to express any violent emotion ; as, 
alas! fie! courage! halt! hush! There are also inter^ 
jections of cursing and swearing. 



An explanation of the CASES. 
TX/'E have already taken notice, that there are four 
parts of speech which never change, viz. Adverbs, 
Conjunctions, Prepositions and Interjections ; for example, 
prudently, and, upon, alas! These words are always writ- 
ten and pronounced after the same manner; and have 
neither masculine nor feminine gender, neither singular 
nor plural number. 

The live others, which are, the Article, the Noun, the 
Pronoun, the Verb, and *he Participle, alter their termina- 
tion ; the, as, day ; I, we; I love, I loved. 

This variation of articles, nouns, and pronouns, is called 
a Declension. 

The Aange of verbs is called a Conjugation. 

A declension has six variations, which are called Cases ; 
viz. nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, and 
ablative. 

The case, or variation of nouns, is known only by the 
article. 

I must 

* A greut part of this treatise of cases is applicable only to tfte 
learned, and to some foreign languages, such as French and Italian ± for 
in English zve h«vc no variation in the noun, except the genitive, 
as man, man's ; and none at all in the article, since u>e only male 
use of the Utile signs, or particles, to distinguish the cases ; as, of, to, for, 
from, &c. 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 21 

I must put you in mind of what I observed before, 
when treating of the articles, viz. when an article happens 
to precede a word beginning with a vowel, the vowel at 
the end of the article is retrenched, and an apostrophe is 
placed in its stead. 

The articles of the nominative are the, both in the 
singular and plural in English : as the sun, the earth, the 
ladies. 

This case is called the nominative, from nominare, to 
name ; because it declares the name of any thing with the 
article the, and this article, with the following noun, makes 
the nominative ; as, the sun, the moon,the earth, the horses, 
the men, the women. 

The articles of the genitive are of the, and of: for ex- 
ample, of the sun, of the moon, of the men, of London. 

We give the name of the genitive to this case, because it 
shows the author or cause of the noun of which we speak: 
an example will make it clearer. 

When we say, the heat of the sun; in thi3 example, of the 
sun is the genitive, because the sun is the author and the 
cause that produced the name heat : and so, in the following 
examples, the length of the earth, the father s son, the fruit 
of the tree, the beauty of Paris. 

The word genitive comes from gignere, which signiiies 
to beget, or produce. 

The dative is marked by the articles to the, and to, for 
the singular and plural: example, to the sun, to the prince, 
to London, to the men, to the houses, &c. 

The dative serves to make known to wbom, or to what, 
we give or address the thing spoken of; as, to give alms to 
the poor ; to write to the king, to the queen, to London, 
to Rome. The word dative comes from dare, to give. 

The accusative is like the nominative, and the ar'ucles are 
the same; as, the sun, the earth, the women, 

The word accusative is derived from the Latin accusctre, 
to accuse. 

The only difference between these two cases is, that the 
nominative is before the verb, and the accusative after 
it. 

To distinguish the nominative from the accusative, 

you have only to remember, that the nominative names 

B the 



22 INTRODUCTION to the 

the person or thing that makes the action of the verb, and 
the accusative accuses or names that which receives it ; ex- 
ample, the king loves ike queen. 

The king is the nominative case, because it is the king 
that makes the action of loving; and the queen is the accu- 
sative, because it is the queen that receives the action of 
loving from the king. 

%*Note, that the accusative is generally put after verbs 
aclive, and prepositions; as, I behold the sun, with the 
princes, for the king, &c. 

' The vocative is always distinguished by the article 6 : it 
is used in calling Gut to a person : example, 6 Peter, 6 Paul, 
dec. Most commonly we put no article at all to express 
the vocative: as, sir, madam, Mary, Peter, &c. 

The word vocative comes from voeare, to call. 

The ablative, in English, is expressed by the articles 
from the, from, and by. 

The ablative is generally put after the verbs passive. 
Now the ladies, and those who do not understand Latin, 
will easily know what a verb passive is, being always com- 
posed of two verbs ; the first of which is some tense of the 
verb esse re, to be; a*id the other a participle; so that 
these two together make a verb passive, after which the 
ablative case is put : example, / am esteemed by the king. 

The ablative is also used after the following verbs ; to 
take away, to receive, to obtain, to separate, &c. Ex- 
ample. 

To take from the hands, "J 

J have received from the prince, f The last words ar« 

He is separated from me, ("in the ablative case. 

I am driven from London. ) 

The ward ablative derives its original from the Latin ab- 
Jatum, which signifies taken away ; / am beloved by the 
prince. I have received a hundred croivns from the 
prince* 

It is the same thing as if I should say, / have taken 
from the prince love, and a hundred crowns. 

V Remember, that though the articles of the genitive 
and ablative are the same in English in both numbers, yet 
they are differently expressed in the Italian. 

After a master i as exercised his scholars in these parts 

of 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 23 

of speech, and made them understand the meaning of 
tenses, genders, numbers, and persons, he ought to propose 
parts of speech contained therein ; for example, the sol- 
diers that fight bravely for the king, are esteemed and 
praised by the whole kingdom. 

The, is a definite article, of the plural number, of the 
masculine gender, and the nominative case. 

Soldiers, is a noun substantive, of the same number, 
gender, and case. 

That, a pronoun relative of the plural number, and no- 
minative case. 

Fight , a verb of the present indicative, and third person 
plural. 

Bravely, an adverb. 

For, a preposition. 

Their, a pronoun possessive. 

King, A noun substantive, masculine* in the accusative 
singular. 

Are, a verb in the third person plural, and present mdk 
cative. 

Esteemed, a participle. 

Are esteemed, a verb passive, of the third person plural, 
and present indicative. 

And, a conjunction. 

Praised, a participle. 

Are praised, a verb passive, of the third person plural, 
and present indicative. 

By, a preposition. 

All, a pronoun improper. 

The, an article definite. 

Kingdom, a noun substantive, masculine. 

By the whole, in the ablative; because are esteemed, and 
are praised, are both verbs passive, and require an ablative 
case after them. 

It is extremely difficult for those who do not under- 
stand Latin, ever to speak or write Italian correctly, with- 
out perusing this short introduction ; which will not only 
be a great assistance to them in learning it, but also save 
them much time and trouble, as those, whom I have had 
the honour to teach, can testify. 

b 2 After 



m INTRODUCTION, &c. 

After this iutroduction is perfectly understood, the next 
thing to be done is, to learn how to find out the words in 
the Dictionary, where they are all placed in an alphabetical 
order. 

The nouns substantive are to be found by their singular 
number, and not by their plural: therefore you must not 
look for heavens, horses, but heaven, horse, 

The nouns adjective are sought for by the masculine, 
and not by the feminine : for example, to know the Italian 
of fair, you must look for hello, and not bella. 

The way of finding out the verbs in the Dictionary, is 
by their infinitives. In English, the infinitive is known by 
the particle to, placed before the verb ; as, to love, to sing. 
In Italian, the infinitives terminate in are, ere, or ire. So 
that, if I want to know the infinitive of amidmo, credidmo, 
sentiamo, I must not look for dmo, credo, stnto, but for 
amdre, credere, sentire ; and so form them according to 
the rules of each conjugation. 



The End of the Introduction. 



t 25 ] 
THE 

ITALIAN MASTER, 

PART I. 



r THE first thing that ought to be learnt, is the Italian 
Pronunciation: this is confined to some syllables, 
which the Italians pronounce after a different manner from 
the English, as may be seen at the end of this discourse, 
where the whole difficulty of the Italian Pronunciation i* 
included in a Period of seven lines. 



Of the Italian Pronunciation, 

Hp II E Italian tongue has two and twenty letters, which 
are pronounced after the following manner, by the 
Tuscans : the difference between them and the other Itali- 
ans is, that the latter pronounce the letters b, c, d, g, p, 
t, z, with a single e after them, saying be, tche, de> 
&c. 



Al 




" aw, 


KT 




Cemme, 


B 




bee, 


N 




enne, 


C 




tehee, 


O 




o> 


D 


*d 


dee, 


P 


*6 


pee, 


E 


<j 


?, 


Q 


s ■ 


coo, 


F 
G 


> i I 

a 
© 


efe, 
dgee, 


11 

S 


a 


erre, 

esse, 


H 




ace a, 


T 


£ 


te, 


1 




ee, 


U 


• 


00, 


J 




j consonant, 


V 




v consonant 


L, 




fc 3 


£. 




s dstta. 

Hence 



26 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 

Hence it appears, that the Italian pronunciation is very 
different from the English, and we must take care to 
.sound the letters exactly as they are marked in the preced- 
ing alphabet: 

The Italians have no such letter as k, on, or y; at least 
they never make use of them, but in mentioning foreign 
names, as Stockholm, Xenocrate, &c. and then they pro- 
nounce the former word, as if it were a c instead of k ; and 
the latter, as if it were an s in the room of the letters. You 
are also at liberty to write Stccolm, and Senocrate. 

The tetters are divided into vowels and consonants, as I 
have already remarked in the Introduction. 



Of the Pronunciation of the Vowels, 

*~Y H E vowels, which are a, e, i, o, it, are pronounced 
aw, a, ee, o, oo. The vowel o has two sounds; one 
open, like o in fibre and store: the other close, like u in 
stumble or turret. It is close in words where o is ac- 
cented ; in words ending in one, bra, ere, oso, except when 
u goes before, and then it is pronounced open, as in Eng- 
lish; thus, cuore pronounce core, a heart. It is also close 
before I, in, n, r ; as cblmo, ponte, sound nilmo, pimte, 
except when t or u comes before it. It is close too before 
gn: as Bologna, sound Bolunnia ; but every Where else 
it is pronounced open. 

%,* Observe, that u, when a vowel, is pronounced like 
og In English, as pubheuzibne read pooblkattibne. You see, 
by this example, the pronunciation of the five vowels. 

Note also, that u becomes a consonant, when it begins a 
syllable with another vowel; and then it is pronounced as 
in English ; example, voso, vt.ro, vbsiro, virt,}. 

The diphthongs, which arc nothing more than the union 
of two or three vowels, are prouounced distinctly, and yet 
form but one syllable; as, m/;i, never; i mitt, mine; 
v ;', thine; i subi, his; but to pronounce them properly, 
we should hear them sounded try a master. See the collec- 
tion 



The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 27 

Hon of syllables and words, the most difficult to pro- 
nounce, when we speak of-w before o, after treating of the 
pronunciation of consonants. 



Of the Pronunciation of Consonants. 

COME of the consonants vary from the English pro- 
nunciation, especially, c, g, %, to which may be added 
h, £, and s, upon each of which there are several particu- 
lars to be observed. 

C, before the vowels a, o, u, and before the consonants 
/, r, is pronounced the same as in English ; for instance, 
cam, cqIIo, euro, Chrkto, clemtnza, crud&le, a house, a 
neck, care, Christ, clemency, cruel. 

C, before the vowels e, or i, rounds like che and chi, in 
the English words cherry and chick: example, Chare, 
Caesar; cecita, blindness; citta, a city; pronounce Chesare, 
chechita, chitta. 

\* Observe, that to speak according to the nicety and 
delicacy of the Italian language, we ought to sdund a t 
in Chesare, chechita, chitta, &c. so smoothly as not to be 
able to distinguish whether we pronounce a t or a d. 

If two cc's come before the vowels e or i, the former is 
sounded as a t, and the latter like che'm cherry : example 
accent o, an accent; braccio, an arm; pronounce atc/ientc, 
hrdtchio. 

When, after ci, there is a vowel ; as, cia, cie, cio, ciu, 
you must pronounce them in one syllable, so as to drown, in 
some measure, the sound of the vowel i: example, Frdn~ 
cia, cielo, bdcio, pronounce Frimchia,chizlo, bachio. 

The syllables see, sci, are pronounced she, shi: example, 
sctmare, diminish ; lascidre, to let alone ; read shemare, 
lashiure. 

The syllables che, chi, whether in the beginning, or at 
the end of a word, are pronounced ke, Id: example cheru- 
b'mo, a cherubim; chiodo, a nail; giovmchi, heifers; pro- 
nounce kerubmo, kivdo, giovmki. 

b4 G, before 



28 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 

G, before the vowels, a, o, u, and before consonants, 
is pronounced as in English: example, gabbia, a cage; 
gbbbo, hunchbacked; gusto, taste; grudo, a degree ; grido, 
a cry. 

G, before Use vowels e or i, as ge, gi, is pronounced as 
if there was a d before the g: example, gelo, frost ; giro, 
a turn : pronounce dgalo, dgiro. 

When two gg's come before tiie vowels e, f, the former 
g is pronounced as a d, and the latter as a g : for example, 
oggetto, an object; o^, to-day ; read odgtfto, odgh But 
as well in gP l0 , and g$r* f as in oggctio, and oggi,&c: we 
must not lean too hard on the d, but pronounce it so 
smoothly, as to render it ah nost imperceptible to the ear. 

W-hea after the syllable gi there is a vowel, as gia, gio, 
giu, the g must not be rounded at all, and thel' is pro- 
nounced like an English J consonant: for example/ gi- 
ordmo, givrno, giudioe, pronounce jardino, jcrno, job- 
dliche. 

G, -before an /, is melted into another /.• example, figUo, 
fbgllo, piglidre, read fill lo, follio, piUiure; except isegH- 
genza, negtitto, Ingltee, glbbo, and conglutinare, where 
the sound is the same as in English. - 

The syllables gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, are pronounced 
as nnia, nnie, nni, tniio, nniu : for example, guadagnare, 
to gi:in ; agntllo, a lamb; ignudo, naked; incognito, un- 
known ; read guadannidre, anniello, inniudo, inconnito. 
In short gn, before a vowel, retains the same sound, as in 
the French words Espagne, Allemagne. 

The syllables ghe, ghi, are pronounced like gue, and gut, 
in the English words guest and guide ; as, botttghe, shops, 
sound bottcgue ; lubghi, places, sound lubgui. 

The letter h is never aspirated, nor pronounced at 
the beginning of words ; as, hbra y an hour ; ho, I have ; 
hu.rtta.no, humane. But, according to the modern or- 
thography, all those words are written without an h ; 
except the three persons singular, and the third person 
plural of the present indicative of the verb avere ; 
and tbis in order to distingush the verb ho from 
the sign of the vocative 6, or from o the conjunction : 
as likewise hui from ai the article, in the dative 

plural 



Thb ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION t§ 

plural masculine gender, at signbri, to the lords ; and, 
lastly, ha from the dative indefinite, a Pietro, or 
Pietri, to Peter ; and hdnno from anno, which signifies a 
year. 

The Italians never pronounce the letter h, and in 
their present practice they even omit it in writing, ex- 
cept when it happens to be preceded by a c or g, as 
in the words chidro, clear ; chidve, a key ; pidghe, wounds, 
&c. However, there are but very few words in 
which they make use of the letter h, for now they 
write ubmo, onbre, wnxno, &c. and not hubmo, honfae, 
humdno, &c. 

The letter j is not the same as the vowel i, as some 
would have it, but a real consonant, being written in a 
different manner ; and besides, of itself, it is incapable 
of forming a syllable ". example, ajuto, help; we do not 
say a-i-uto, but a-ju-to. This letter ought to be pro- 
nounced in the same manner as i in the French words 
voielle and bdionttte. N. B. The letter j is used at pre- 
sent in the beginning of words, which were formerly 
spelt with an h, followed by a vowel : example, jeri, 
instead of kltri, yesterday; jdrbpico foxhidrbpico, dropsi- 
cal, &c. It is likewise put in the room of y, which was 
formerly made use of at the end of words : for example, 
it was the custom to make the plural of studio, study; but 
now they write siudj, study, and studies ; senty, I felt ; 
but now stmtj. Is is, moreover, inserted in all words, 
where ihc-re are three successive vowels, in order to sepa- 
rate them: example, aiuto, help, now, ajuto, &c. 

The letter s, in the beginning of words, is pronounced 
as in English : for example salute, sole, sale, singoldre 9 
servo, sbpra. 

So, in these words ; cosa, a thing; rbso % gnawed; must 
be pronounced like the first syllable of salute, that is to say, 
strong. 

The same may be said of all adjectives ending in 6so ; 
as gloribso, glorious ; vittoribso, victorious ; as well in the 
singular as in the plural, masculine and feminine. 

With regard to adjectives terminating in ese, and to 

words in use, the letter s must be pronounced as in the 

b 5 English 



30 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION: 

English words, misery, desire, Sec. except fuso, a distaff 
where the letter s must be sounded, as in salirfe, 

Cos), in like manner, is pronounced cossi, that is, with 
a strong hissing, as if there were two ss.% and dwelling, 
upon the last. The Neapolitans say cousi, which pro- 
nunciation must be avoided. 

Pronounce then the letter s between two vowels, like 
as; as sa, se, si, so, read and pronounce them as if they 
were written za, ze, zi, zo; but in all words that have si 
added to them; s.s scrivesi, they write, s preserves its na- 
tural sound. 

Observe, that all other pronunciations of the letter s 
are condemned at Rome and Siena, which are the two 
cities where they speak the best Italian : and from thence 
came the proverb, lingua Toscana in bocca Rmndna. 

The syllable ti is pronounced tsi ; as natwne, gratia, 
p-ronounce natsibne, grutsia. But the modern Italians 
write those words, and the like, with a z, instead of the 
letter t ; as nazione, grazia, vizio, silcnzw, ike. 

In the following words, the syllable ti is pronounced 
hard; as simpatm, sympathy; natio, native, genuine; ma- 
lattia, distemper ; question?, question ; moitstia, trouble ; 
and a few verbs, as tUne, potiate, patiamo, patiate, which 
are to be learnt only by practice. 

Z is" pronounced three ways, like, as, like s, and like 
ts : the general rule is to pronounce it like ds in all word3 
that are written in Italian and English with a z: for 
example, zona, a zone; zodtaco, the ^odiac ; Ldzaro, 
Lazarus ; gazttta, a gazette ; read dsona, dsodiaco, LZ- 
dsaro, and gadsttta. 

Z is pronounced also like ds in the following words; 
mho, or mezzo, the middle; rozzo, homely; zibttto, civet; 
z'fffera, 2l cypher ; zigrino, chagrin ; ztnzero, ginger. 

Take notice that both the single and double z are al- 
ways pronounced like ds, when they happen to come after 
the vowel e, as mezzo, middle; and after the vowel o t as 
rozzo, homely. 

Z is pronounced like s in safe, in all Words terminating 
m tnza ; as prudvnza, diligenza, pazitnza, &c. pronounce 
j)rud(nsa, ddigtnsa, patsiensa, &c. 

The 



THE ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 31 

The same may be said in regard to words terminating 
in amen or in onza, and when the z follows the letter I : 
for example, ignorfmza, Magonza, pblzo, hoho, &c. Nay, 
we find some of these words written with an s : yet most 
people make use of the s. 

All the other z% single as well as double, are pronounc- 
ed like te: example, ^faizoUtto, a handkerchief; gen- 
tilezza, a genteel air ; pozzo, a well ; nozze; a wedding ; 
orazibne, prayer ; pronounce faisolttto, ge/itilttsa, pbtso, 
nptse, oratsione ; and be sure to dwell a little upon the 
sound of the t before s. 

The other consonants, b, d,f, I, m, ii, p, r, are pro- 
nounced as in English. Instead of k, we use ch ; instead 
ofph,f. 

The Italian v is pronounced as in^ English ; but it is 
not the same letter as the vowel w, as some pretend. See 
what has been said concerning j consonant, and apply the 
arguments to the present case. 

*k< Observe that when two vv's come between two 
vowels, we ought to pronounce only one of them. The 
Italians make use of two, to show that those verbs" a re de- 
rived from the Latin. Only you must mind to dwell 
somewhat longer upon the vowel which precedes the two 
it's. Hence it ought to be pronounced as if it were de- 
tached from the remainder of the word, as if they wrote 
a-venire, a-venlhio, instead of avvenire, avventizzio. 
We meet with some Italian words, which are written \$Sth 
two vv's, and yet are not of Latin origin ; as for instance, 
avvantaggio, avverare, &c. But I apprehend it is wrong 
to spell them after that manner, and that the right ortho- 
graphy is avantaggio, averare, &c. - 



b6 



m *»* ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 

A Collection of Words and Syllables \ the most diffi- 
cult to be pronounced, 

T> EFOttE you read this collection, mind the pronun- 
"*^ ciation of the syllables, cia, cie, do, ciui see, scii 
gia, gic, gid, giu / gli, gtia, glio. 

Ce, ci, pronounce as che, chi, in cherry and chicle. 

Cicerone, ceci, cecitd, cenere, cena, cendre, cerchio, cibo, 
eittd, citdrt, accknto, baccio, ciascheduno, citlo, cioc, ci* 
iirma. 

Che, chi, pronounce he, hi. 

Che dite ? chefdte 1 che votcte 1 chi ceredte ? chi voltte? 
chi domanddte % 

Ge, gi, gli, prdnounce dge, dgi, Hi. 

Gesto,gcnio, geto 9 gintti giro, giudice, ma^gibre, leggid- 
dro, leggiddra, gibrno, zibvane, giiigno, figlio, figlia, pig- 
Hare; gionchiglia, fbglio, orgbglio,fdggio, mdggio. 
Gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, pronounce nia, nie, ni, nio, niu, 

in one syllable; as we have already observed, wherl 

treating of the pronunciation of consonants. 

Bagndre, guadagtidre, Ugnd, ingegnero, magnjfico, 
p'tgno, Itgno, signbre, ingigno, igfiudo. 
Scia, scie, sci, scio, sciu,pionounce shia, shie, she, shio, skin. 

Sciatica, sciegliere, discifrdre, discibgliere, asciutto. 

Sd, se, si, so. 
Mind the pronunciation of salute, cbsa, rbsa, rbso, spbsd^ 
c4sa, virtuoso, cosh 

Ti, pronounce si. 
Natibne, ostinatibne, inclindtibne, gratia, giurisditibne, 
attibne. The present orthography of all those words 
and such like derived from the Latin, is with a z instead 
of t ; thus they write nazione, vhio, grdzia, &c. This 
is the most approved orthography, as we have already 
observed. 

U, pronounce oo. 
Tu, virtu, pugndre } pugno, mdti<ro,ftinc'sto ) miiro, brdno. 

t/feefor* 



The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 3$ 

U before o, pronounce o. 
But when those two vowels form but one syllable, you 
are to pronounce the u almost insensibly. 
Bubno,fubco,giubco,jigliublo,figliubla, subcero, suocerao 
Except from this rule, duo, tub, sua, virtuoso, &c. be- 
cause here the « and o are two syllables. k 
The Florentines in the words bubno, fubco, &c. pro* 
nounce the u somewhat stronger than the Romans, who 
indeed sound those words in such a manner, as if there 
were no u at all. 

Vv, pronounce v. 
Avvenirc, inavvertenza, avvezzo, avvenlo. 
Remember what has been said of the pronunciation of 
the consonant v. 

Z, or zz, pronounce ts. 
In the words nbzze, fazzoletto, pbzzo, pazzia, pdzzo. 

Z, or zz, pronounce ds. 
In the words mezo, mezzo, Lazdro, zona, zodoidco, zig- 
rinOj rbzzo. 

Z, pronounce s. 

In words ending in anza, enza, onza, and after Ihe 
letter I : example, ignordnza, diligenza, Magbnza, pblzo, 
bblzo. 

To get true Italian accent, it will be sufficient to 
read over the following lines, where all the difficulty is 
in the syllables marked with a star ; whosoever has learnt 
to pronounce them properly, will soon be master of the 
Italian pronunciation. 

**# * * ^ * * t- 

Ciascheduno sa, che come non ve cosa, che piu dispiaccia a 

Dio, che Vingratitudine, ed inosservdnza, de' subi precctti; 

* -* * * • 

cosi non v'e nitnte die cagibni maggiormente la desolazibne 

*■..- * ** * * . 

dell universo, che la cecittd, e superbia degli ubmini, la 

* * * * #, * 

ipazzia de* Gentili, Vignordnza, ed ostmazibne de' Giudei, 

* * 
t tcismdtici. 

«■ Every 



34 



The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION-. 



" Every one knows, that as there is nothing that moi 
displeases God, than ingratitude and the neglect of his 
commandments ; so there is nothing that occasions more 
the desolation of this world, than the blindness and pride 
of men, the folly of the Gentiles, the ignorance and ob- 
stinacy of the Jews and schismatics." 



A Recapitulation 


of 


the Italian Pronunciation* 




Proiiomice 




Example. 


Read 


? e 


eta* 




etna 


chena 


ci 


chif 




citta 


chitta 


cia 


ehia 




ciasevno 


chiascuno 


tie 


chie 




citlo 


chielo 


cio 


tchio 




bdcio 


batchio 


S e 


dge 




gtnio 


dgenio 


gi 


dgi 




giro 


dgiro 


gin 


J3 




giardino 


jardino 


gie 


■- J e 




Giesii 


Jesu 


gio 


jo 




Glove 


Jove 


giu 


j-oo 




giusio 


joosto 


gli 


iii 




pigtidre 


piliiare 


gnu, gne, 


&c. nnia, nnie 


regndre 


renniare 


che 


ke 




che 


ke 


chi 


hi 




chi 


ki 


see 


she 




scemdre 


she mare 


sci 


,shi 




laseidre 


lashiare 


ti 


tsi 




natibne 


natsione, or 
nazione 


u 


00 




\)irta 


virtoo 


u before o 


O i 




buono 


bono 


vv 


V 




avvenire 


a- venire 


- 


( s 




diligenza 


diligensa 


z 


< ds, or 




zefiro 


dsefiro 




Its 




nezzb 


notse 




* As in 


che-rish. 






f As in 


chi-valry. 





Of the ARTICLES. 35 



CHAP. I. 

Of Articles in general. 

""THERE are two sorts of articles, one definite, the other 
indefinite. 

The definite marks the gender, number, and case of 
the nouns which it precedes ; as, 

The prince, il principe ; of the prince, del principe ; to 
the prince, al principe ; from or by the prince, dal prin- 
cipe: the princes, i principi; of the princes, dei principi ; 
to the princes, di principi; from or by the princes, ddi 
principi: the earth, la terra; of the earth, delta terra; 
to the earth, alia terra; from or by the earth, ddlla 
terra : the earths, le terre; of the earths, delle terre ; to 
the earths, dlle terre; from or by the earths, dalle terre. 

Tiie articles il, or lo, la, del, dello, al, alio, dal, dailo, 
della, alia, dalla, i, gli, k, are called definite articles, be- 
cause they mark and define the masculine or feminine gen- 
der, the singular or plural number of nouns, to which they 
are prefixed. 

The definite articles have six cases, the nominative, geni- 
tive, dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative. 

The indefinite article may be put -before the masculine 
as well as the feminine gender, before the singular as well 
as the plural number. 

Tiie indefinite articles in Italian are the following mono- 
syllables : 

di, a or ad before a vowel, da. 

One may put di before a noun masculine as well as a femi- 
nine; as una corona di ra, a king's crown : una libra di 
pane, a pound of bread : the words re and pane are mas- 
culine : un cappello di pdglia, tre lihre di came, a hat of 
straw, three pounds of meat ; the words pdglia and cdrne 
are of the feminine gender. 

The indefinite article di is also put before the plural as well 
as the singular number : example, una cordna di Jibri, a 
crown of flowers j un tbndo di cdppari } a plate of capeis. 

The 



36 Of the ARTICLES. 

The indefinite article has but three cases, the genitive, 
dative, and ablative. 

Of is expressed in Italian by di ; toby a or ad before a 
vowel ; from by da. 



Of the definite Articles. 

HPHE English Tongue has but one definite article, 
namely the, which serves for both numbers. 

The Italian has three, viz. il and lo for the masculine, 
and la for the feminine. 

The article il is prefixed to masculine nouns beginning 
with a consonant, and makes i in the plural ; as il pddre, i 
padri ; il fratello, i fratclli ; il tibro, i libri ; il cielo, i 
riflL 

The article lo makes in the plural gli, and is put before 
two sorts of nouns, viz. before masculine nouns beginning 
with s, and followed by a consonant ; as, lo studio, lo spi- 
rito, lo scoldre; gli studj,gli spiriti, gli scoldri; lo^pecchio, 
gli speccki. 

If the letter s be followed by a vowel, we must make use 
of the article il, and not lo, as, il soldo to, il sacramento, il 
signbre, il stcolo, il superbo ; and not lo solddto, lo sacra- 
mtnto, &c. 

When the article lo happens to be before nouns beginning 
with a "iowel, then we retrench the vowel, aud insert an 
apostrophe: example, Vambre, I'onbre, Vingegno, and not 
to amore, lo cnore, lo ingbgno ; gli amori, gli onori, gl' 
ingegni, in the plural. The same may be said in regard \o 
the article la for the feminine. We have touched upon this 
subject in the introduction to the Italian tongue, where we 
delivered some rules concerning the articles. 

The article la serves for the feminine, and makes le in 
the plural : as, la casa, le case ; la chiesa, le chiese ; la 
mtssa, le mhse ; la terra, le terre ; la camera, le earner e ; 
la porta, le pdrte ; la strdda, le strade ; la stella, le stelle. 

The 



Or the ARTICLES. W 

The Declension of the Masculine Articles il and lo. 

f Do not put the accusative, because it is the same with 
the nominative ; nor the vocative, because it is expressed 
by o in both languages. 



Sing. Nom. 




il 


lo 


the 


Gen. 




del 


dello 


of the 


Dat. 




al 


alio 


to the 


Abl. 




dal 


dallo 


from, and by th* 


Plur* Nom. 




i 


gli 


the 


Gen. 


dei 


,de 


dtgli 


of the 


Dat. 


at, a' 


agli 


to the 


Abl. 


dai, 


da' 


dagli 


from or by the. 



We do not use in the plural the articles //, delli, alii, dalli, 
as the ancients did. Yet they may be used in verse, and 
in Dante they occur frequently, though a great number of 
our best poets endeavour to avoid them. 

%* Note, that to write correctly we must not abridge 
the article lo in the plural, unless the following noun begins 
with an 2; therefore you must write gl'ingegni, gVincSnaj, 
with an apostrophe, and gli amori, gli onori, without 
one. Nevertheless you are to make but one syllable of the 
article and the subsequent vowel ; so that you must pro- 
nounce glia-mori, glio-n6ri, and not gli-a-mori, glio-nori. 
In this respect the Italian language is extremely delicate. 

The Declension of the Feminine Articled 



Sing. Nora. 


la 


the 


Gen. 


dtlla 


of the 


Dat. 


alia 


to the 


Abl. 


ddlla - 


from the 


Plur. Nom. 


le 


the 


Gen. 


d^Ue 


of the 


Dat. 


alle 


to the 


Abl. 


dttle 


from and by the 



%* You must not abridge la in the plural, unless the 
following word begins with an e ; and therefore we write 
Veminenze t Vesecuzwni, with an apostrophe, and le dnime, 



38 Of the ARTICLES. 

h uliime, le invenzioni, le ombre, without one. And yet 
we write le ejfigie in the plural, to distinguish it from the 
singular, because this noun hath the same termination in 
both numbers; you are to observe the same in regard to 
the word esequie. 



The declension of the Article il with a masculine nam, 
whose Jirst letter is a consonant. 

Sing. Nom. il lihro . the book 

Gen. delUbro of the book 

Dat. al libro to the book 

Abl. dat libro from or by llie book 

Plur. Norn, i Ithri the books 

Gen. del, or de* libri of the books 
I^at. at, or a' libri to the books 
Abl. dm, or da' libri from, or by the books. 



The declension cf the Article lo before a masculine noun, 
whose Jirst letter is an & t followed by a consonant. 

Sing. Nom. lo specchio the glass 

Gen. dello specchio of the glass 

Dat. alia specchio to the glass 

Abi. ddllo specchio from the glass. 

Plur. Nom. gli speech) the glasses 

Gen., degli specchj of- the glasses 

Dat. dgli speedy to the glasses 

Abl. ddgti speech] from the glasses. 






The declension of the Article la before a feminine noun, 
beginning with a consonant. 

Sing. Nom. la edsa the house 

Gen. delta edsa of the house 

Dat. alia edsa to the house 

Abl. ddt la edsa from the house. 

Plur. Nom le edsa the houses 

Gen. delle case of the houses 

Dat. alle case to the houses 

Abl. dalle case from the houses. 

The 



Of the ARTICLES. $9 

The article Im is also prefixed to feminine nouns begin- 
ning with an s, followed by a consonant ; as la strdda, It 
strdde % the street &c. 



The declension of the Article lo, with an apostrophe, or 
elision. 

Sing. Nom. I' amove the love 

Gen. deir amove of the love 

Pat. all' amove to the love 

Abl. dair amove from the love 

Plur. Nom. gli ambvi the loves 

Gen. degli ambvi of the love# 

Dat. dgli ambri to the loves 

Abl. ddgli umfrri from the loves. 



• 



The declension of the Article la, with an apostrophe. 

Sing. Nom. V dnima the soul 

Gen. dell' dnima of the soul 

Dat. all' dnima to the soul 

Abl. dall' dnima from the soul 

Plur. Nom. le dnime the souls 

Gen. delle dnime of the souls 

Dat. dlle dnime to the souls 

Abl. dalle dnime from the souls. 

*„* Observe, that the English have no variation in their 

articles for the plural ; they say, the men, the women ; the 

Italians have an article for each gender in the plural, gli 

uomini, le dbnne, i Ubri, le stelle. 



Of the indefinite Article, 

HpHE indefinite article has but three cases and serves as 
we have already mentioned, for the singular and plural, 
for the masculine and feminine. 

Gen. di of 

Dat. a, or ad before a vowel, to 
Abl. da from, ov by. 

The 



40 Of the ARTICLES. 

The following example will show, that nouns declined by 
the indefinite article have no article in the nominative, 
accusative, or vocative. 



Nom. 


Roma 


Pvome 


Gen. 


di Roma 


of Rome 


Dat. 


a Roma 


to Rome 


Ace. 


Roma 


Rome 


Voc. 


o Roma 


o Rome 


AM. 


da Roma 


from R-ome. 



The indefinite article is used in declining the nouns that 
have no article in the nominative; such as the names of an- 
gels, d 7 dngeli ; of men, d' ubmini ; of cities, di citta ; of 
months, di mesi ; as also the pronouns personal, demonstra- 
tive, interrogative, and, relative ; for example, London, Ja~ 
nuary, February, March, April; me, thee, him, we, you> 
this, that, those, these, who, &c. 

Who, or which, in Italian quale, may be declined by the 
definite articles : for we say, il quale, and la quale, del 
quale, and delta quale, &c. 

The indefinite article may also be prefixed to all other 
sorts of nouns, as I have already observed : for we say» 
una libra di pane, a pound of bread; un capptllo di 
pdglia, a hat of straw ; una tdzza aV argenio, a cup of sil- 
ver ; un vestito di pdnno, a suit of cloth. 

If the indefinite article di, or. da, precedes a noun, begin- 
ning with a vowel, we must make an elision in the genitive 
and ablative, and use ad in the dative, as, nominative, An- 
tonio; genitive, d' Antonio ; dative, ad Antonio; accusa- 
tive, Antonio ; ablative, d' Antonio, or rather da Antonio, 
the better to distinguish the ablative from the genitive, which 
makes d' Antonio. 

fj* Observe, that in speaking of any part of the body, it 
is more elegant to make use of the indefinite than definite 
article: hence we say, mi trarraV dnima di cbrpo, he will 
tear my soul from my body ; mi toglie il libro di mdno, &c. 
he snatches a book out of my hand, fyc. 

The indefinite article is also put before infinitives, and 
signifies to ; as, it is time to speak, to sleep, to read, to study, 
to write, to love, to go; e tempo di parldre, di dormire, di 

Uggere, 



Of the ARTICLES. 41 

leggere, di studidre, dl scrivere, d' amdre, d f anddre : but 
we make an elision when the verbs begin with a vowel ; as 
d' amare, d' andare. 

%* Note whenever you meet with of and to in Eng- 
lish, remember they are the indefinite articles ; and then 
you must make use of the indefinite article a or ad in 
Italian. 

Remarks on the Articles. 
First, TJJM or it before a verb is always expressed by 
lo : as, I see him or it, io lo vedo ; we know it, 
not lo sappidmo, I know it, io lo so. 

Secondly, Her or it before a verb is expressed by la : 
example, I know her, io la conbsco, I do not know her, 
non la conosco. 

Thirdly, Them before a verb is expressed by li for th« 
masculine, and by le for the feminine : example, to li 
vedo, or io le vedo, according to the gender. 

Fourthly, The words lo, la, li, le, must be always 
put after the adverb ecco, and also after the infinitives and 
gerunds ; as, there he is, eccolo ; there she is, eccol* ; 
there they are, eccoli for the masculine, and eccole for the 
feminine ; to see him, instead of saying, per lo vedere, we 
must say, per vederlo, because vedere is in the infinitive : 
in like manner, to express seeing him, we must not say, 
lo vedendo, but vedendolo, because vedendo is a gerund, 
and the Italian rule requires that these words lo, la, li, le, 
should always follow the infinitive and gerund, as also the 
word ecco, but never precede them. 

%? Remember, that I have been speaking of the 
words lo, la, li, le, and not of the articles lo, la, li, le, 
and that a little above I said also the words, lo, la, li, 
le, because these words lo, la, li, le, when they precede 
the verbs, are not articles, bnt pronouns relative. They 
are articles only, when they precede the nouns or pro- 
nouns. 

Fifthly, The preposition in is sometimes expressed in 
Italian by in; as, in Paris, in Parigij in France, in 
Francia ; in a chamber, in una camera ; in a fire, in ttn 
fuoco ; in all the earth, in tutta la terra ; in.a glass, in un 
bicchierre ; in a bottle, in una botttglia* 

Whea 



42 Of the ARTICLES* 

When the preposition in is followed by the article the 
or by a pronoun possessive, as, in the, in my, in thy, 
in his ; we must render it by nel, nello, nella, nei, negli, 
nel mio, nel tuo, nel suo : example, in the garden, nel giar- 
dino, and not in il giardmo. 

In the spirit, nello spirito, and not in lo spirito : the 
ancients made use of in lo and in la. 

Come in lo specchio il sol, non altrimente, 
La dbppia fera dhiti^o vi raggibva. 

And as for the feminine, we find in Petrarch, 
Ma hen ti prego in la terza sfera. 
II dl sesto d' April in I' bra prima. 

We say, nello spirito, because spirito begins with an s 
followed by a consonant. 

In the bouse, nella casa. 

In the gardens, nei or ne giardini. 

In the iires, nei, or ne fubchi. 

In the spirits, negli spirit L 

In the houses, nelle ease. 

In my garden, nel mio giardino. 

In thy book, nel tuo libro. 

In his bed, nel suo letto. 

In her chamber, nella sua camera. 

In his books, ne' subi libri. 

In her chambers, nelle sue camere. 
When in precedes the pronouns possessive of the mas- 
culine gender, in the plural, it is expressed by ne' with an 
apostrophe, and not by nei ; as, in my book, ne' miei 
libri; at least this is the common practice. 

Sixthly, You see by these examples that in the is ex- 
pressed in Italian by nel or nello; in the feminine by 
nSlla. 

Nel is placed before the same nouns that we put the ar- 
ticle il, and in the plural it makes nei or ne', in the. 

Nello is put before the same nouns that we put the ar- 
ticle lo, and in the plural it makes negli. 

Nella is put before the same nouns as the article la, 
and in the plural it makes nelle. 

We may express in by in, when it is before a pro- 
noun possessive feminine, by transposing the pronoun 
possessive at the end of the phrase ; as, in my chamber, 



or a 


pro- 




's; 


. 


coi, 


cipe, 


\ 



Oethe ARTICLES. 43 

hi camera mia ; in your house, in cdsa vostra ; in her shop, 
i>i bottega sua ; but this rule is only. for feminine nouns, 
and not masculine. 

Seventhly, When after the preposition with, which in 
Italian is expressed by con, we find the article th 
noun possessive, as, with the, with r 
we must not say, con il, con lo, con. la, 
con gli, colle: example, with the prince, coi ]/r 
not con il principe. 

Willi the hand, colla memo. 
With the scholar, collo scblare. 
Willi the princes, coi prmcipi. 
With the princesses, colle principesse. 
With the scholars, con gli scolari. 
With my book, col mio libro. 
With my pen, colla mia pinna. 
With your friends, co' vostri amid. 
With my books, co 1 miei libri. 
Col makes the plural coi and co'. 
Collo makes con gli ; colla makes colle. 
Nevertheless, when the following words begin with the 
letter s and another consonant, it is more elegant to write 
con lo and con gli ; thus you will say, con lo stride, con lo 
scholar e t con gli studi ; and coll or coV when the word 
begins with a single consonant, or with a vowel. 

Eighthly, When the preposition with is followed by a 
pronoun possessive, and this by a noun of quality, or kin- 
dred ; as, with your majesty, with your highness, with 
your excellency, with his brother, with her mother, with 
her sister: with must then be rendered by cow, as, con vostra 
rnaestd,con sua alihza, con vostra eccellvnza, con suofrdtel- 
lo, con sua madre, consua sorella, without using the article. 

\* Observe, we may also make use of co/ and colla, by 
transposing the pronouns possessive after the noun, and say 
colla maestd v6stra, coll' eccellhtza sua, col fratello suo, 
colla madre sua, &c. 

Ninthly, If the pronouns possessive are in the plu- 
ral, then we must express with by co' for the masculine, 
and by colle for the feminine : example, with my 
brothers, co' miei fratelli, and not con inieifralelli\ with 

my 



441 * Of the NOUNS. 

my sisters, colle mie s&relle, and not con mie sorelle: if you 
have a mind to insert the article, you must use the same 
transposition, and say, coifratelli misi, coi parent i vbstri, 
colle sorelle tue, colic mddri nbstre, &c. 

%* Note, that the ancient authors, and some modern 
©nes say, con il t con la, &c. 



CHAP. II. 

Of NOUNS. 

'T'HE Italian nouns have but five terminations, viz. those 
of the five vowels, a, e, i, o, u. 

They have but two genders, the masculine and the femi- 
nine. 

The Italian nouns have no variation of cases, like the 
Latin; and it is the article only, that distinguishes the case: 
example, nom. il signore; gen. del signore; dat. al signore; 
ace. il signore ; voc. 6 signore; abl. dal signbre. Nom. 
plur. i signbri; gen. del signbri ; dat. ai signbri, &C. 

\* Take notice as a general rule, that all masculine 
nouns make their plural in i ; example, ilpdpa, the pope, t 
pdpi; It padre, the father, i padri; il libido, the book, t 
libri, &c. 



Of Nouns ending in a. 

If^OUNS ending in a are feminine, and form their plural 
in e; as, la cdsa t the house ; le case, the houses; 
ia chiesa, the church ; le chitse, the churches ; la carrbzza, 
the coach ; le carrbzze, the coaches. 

Exceptions.— First, All nouns ending in ca and ga, have 
an h in the plural between the c ot g and the final vowel, 
to avoid the harshness of sound; as, la mdnica, the sleeve, 
h m&niche ; la pidga, the wound, le pidgke, 

Secondly, 



Of the NOUNS. 45 

Secondly, Nouns ending in Italian in t(), and in Eng- 
lish in ty, never change their termination in the plural ; 
as, la pur ita, le paritc), purity; la castita, le castita, chas- 
tity, S)C. 

* # * Yet observe, that those nouns are syncopated or 
shortened, and their real termination is in ade or ate, ac- 
cording to the most ancient poets. In the plural they 
change their termination into i ; so we say, beltade or 
heltate in the singular, and beltadi or beltati in the plural. 
I do not remember to have ever seen these nouns written in 
the plural with a t. Though they make use of the termi- 
nation in ade, yet it is better and more usual to say bontd 
than bontade, and generosita, than generositdde, &c. 

Thirdly, Nouns masculine ending ih a, form their plu- 
ral in i, as papa, papi; prof eta, prof eti. 

We must except potesta in the masculine , which signi- 
fies a power or state, and retains in the plural the same ter- 
mination ; for we say, tutt' i potesta uniti, all the powers 
united. I say in the masculine, because in the feminine, 
when this word denotes capacity or ability^ it follows th« 
general rule. 



Of Nouns ending in e. 



A LL 



Nouns ending in e, whether masculine or femi- 
nine, substantives or adjectives, form their plural in 
i ; example, il padre, the father; ipddri, fathers ; la madrt, 
a mother; le mddri, the mothers: prudent e s prudenti, 
prudent. 

Exceptions. — First, Mille, a thousand, which makes in 
the plural mila. 

Secondly, These five nouns, re, a king ; specie, a sort ; 
superficie, a superficies ; effigie, an effigy ; Vesequie, a fune- 
ral; which have no change of termination in the plural; 
for we say, il re, i re ; le specie, la specie ; la superficie, le 
superficie; Vejfigie, Veffigie; le esequie, leesequie: without 
C curtailing 



4,6 Of the NOUNS. 






curtailing the article of the two last nouns in the plural to 
distinguish it from the singular, /' effigie, Vestquie. 

Observe that we seldom make use of the word esequie in 
the singular. 

I have taken no notice here of the noun rtquie, repose, 
coming from the Latin word requies ; because I never saw 
an instance where it was used ill the plural. However, it 
would admit of no variation in the plural more than re, 
&c. 



Rules for Jin ding out the Gender of Nouns in e. 

First, J^OUNS ending in me are masculine: example, 
il costume y a custom ; il flume, a river ; il rdme, 
brass ; il vbrme, a worm. 

There are two feminine nouns in me, viz. la fame, hun- 
ger, and la speme, hope. 

Secondly, there are but four feminine nouns in re ;. viz. 
la fibre, a fever ; la mddre, a mother ; la tbrre, a tower ; 
la pblvere, dust. 

All the nouns in ore are masculine : as il fibre, a flower; 
il colore, heat; il furore, rage ; lo splendor e, splendor; il 
more, the heart ; il predicatbre, a preacher. 

There are four nouns in re of both genders, viz. il and 
la car cere, a prison; il and la centre, ashes; il and lafbl- 
gore, lightning; //and la lepre, a hare. 

Thirdly, The Italian nouns ending in ine, ione, and 
one, are some masculine and some feminine, as, Vbrdine, 
order; la gr Undine, hail; laprigibne, a prison; ilbdstbne, 
a stick; we say, il fme, when we take it for aim or 
design; and la fine, when we mean the end; though in 
the latter signification it is usual also to say, il fine and la 
fine. 

Fourthly, There are but two nouns in nte, feminine ; to 
wit, la gtnt.e, a nation, and la mvnte, the mind : all the 
other nouns ending in nte are masculine : as il dhite, a 
tooth ; il pbnte, a bridge; il mcmie, a mountain; il gigdnte, 
a giant, &c. We are soeaking here only of nouns-sub- 
stantive, but not of adjectives; 

There 



Op the NOUNS. 



4r 






There are three nouns in nte that have two genders; viz. 
il and la f ante, a servant, il and lafronte, the forehead ; il 
and lafonte, a fountain. 

Fifthly, The other different terminations in e keep the 
same gender, as in French aud Latin : example, il pesce, 
fish; la voce, a voice; la croce, across; illdtte, miik; la 
lode, praise : except, 

La siepe, a hedge ; la gregge, a flock or herd. We say 
likewise il gregge, in the masculine. 



rpHE 



Of Nouns in i. 

Italian language has hut seventeen nouns termi- 
nated in i ; they are the same in the plural as in the 
singular, and are distinguished by the articles ; 

To wit, 

il di, the day, i d), the days, 

il Lunedt, Monday, i Lunedi. 

il Martedl Tuesday, i Martedh 

il Mercord), Wednesday, i Mercordi. 

il Giovedi, Thursday, i Gi&vedt. 

U Venerd), Friday, t Venerd). 

la dibcesi, a diocese, le dibcesi. 

il barbagianni, an owl, i barbagiannu 

r ecclissi, an eclipse, le ecclissi. 

V estasi, an ecslacy, gli estasi. 
la yerifrasi, a periphrasis, le perifrasi. 

V enfasi, an emphasis, le enfasi. 

la metambrfosi, a metamorphosis, le metamorfosi. 

la crisi, a crisis, le nisi. 

la thi, a thesis, le lesi. 

la Genesi, Genesis, 

un pari, such a one, i & le pari. 

This last noun is of all genders and numbers; and we 
say, u?i pari vvsfro, such a man as you ; una pari vbstra, 
such a woman as you. 

Genesi has no plural, and is of all genders- In Dante 
we meet with to Genesi, but the generality of good writers 
say la Genesi 

c 2 There 



48 



Of the NOUNS. 



There are also some proper names in i, as, Giovanni, 
Parigi, Ndpoli; and the numeral nouns, as, died, undid, 
dbdici, tredid, quatlbrdici, quindid, sedici, vtnti. 



Of the Nouns in o. 

C\Y all the nouns in o, as well substantive as adjective, 
there are but very few feminine; la memo, and I'eco, 
are of this gender. Generally speaking the rest are mas- 
culine, and make their plural in i: for example*, ilfraUllo, 
a brother ; i fratelli, brothers : il fazzoletto, a handker- 
chief; i fazzoletti : la mono, le mdni ; ubmo, a man, makes 
ubmini in the plural. 

%* Note, that the nouns substantive in aro frequently 
change their termination into aio : for we say, 

Genndro and Gennaio, January. 

Febrdro, and Febraio, February. 

Calzoldro and calzoldio, a shoemaker. 

Mortar o and niortdio, a mortar. 

There are some nouns in o that end more elegantly in 
the plural in a than in i, and then they are feminine in the 
plural ; they are as follow : 



I' anello, 


le an'ella, 


the rings. 


il brdecio, 


le brdecia, 


the arms. 


il budello, 


le budella, 


the guts. 


il calcdgno, 


le calcdgna, 


the heels. 


il cerchio, 


le cerchia, 


the hoops. 


il ctglio, 


le ciglia, 


the eyebrows. 


il cbrno, 


le coma, 


the horns. 


U dito, 


le dita, 


the fingers. 


il ditello, 


le ditella, 


the armpits. 


il filo, 


lefila, 


the threads. 


il frutto, 


lefrxdta, 


fruit. 


il gesto, 


le gesta, 


actions, feats. 


il grido, 


le gr'ida, 


the cries. 


il guscio, 


le gusda, 


the shells. 


il ginbechio, 


le ginbechia, 


the knees. 


il labro, 


le Idbra, 


the lips. 


il lenzublo, 


le lenzubla, 


the sheets. 

il tegnc, 



Of the NOUNS. 



4-9 



il legtiOf 


le Ugna, 


the sticks. 


il melo, 


le m'ela, 


the apples. 


il membro, 


le membra, 


the members. 


il tnuro, 


le miira, 


the walls. 


il miglidio, 


le miglidia, 


thousands. 


il miglio, 


le miglia, 


miles. 


V orecehio, 


le orecchia, 


the ears. 


V bsso, 


le bssa, 


the bones. 


il pdio, 


le pdia, 


pairs. 


il pbmo, 


le pbma, 


apples. 


il pugno, 


le pugna, 


fists. 


lo stdio, 


le stdia, 


the bushels. 


il riso, 


le rka, 


laughters. 


V ubvo, 


le ubva, 


the eggs. 


il rubbio, 


le riibhia, 


the measures, 


it vestigio, 


h vestigia, 


•the footsteps. 



Nouns ending in co and go, of two syllables, take an h 
in the plural to avoid a harsh pronunciation : example, il 
fubco, the fire, i fubchi, the fires ; il lubgo, the place, i 
liibghi, the places. 

Two are excepted. 

llpbrco, a hog ; iporci, hogs : il Greco, Greek ; i Greet, 
Greeks. » 

The other nouns in co and go, of more than two sylla- 
bles, do not take an h in the plural : as, amko, amici, friends ; 
domestic o, domestici, domestics; canbnico, canbnici, ca- 
nons; cattblico, cattblici, catholics ; medico, medici, phy- 
sicians; mendko, mendlci, beggars. 

The following words are excepted. 

Albergo, alMrghi, dwellings. 
Antko, antkhi, ancients. 

Astrblogo, astrologer, makes astrbloghi "andastrologL 
In like manner mbnaco, a monk, forms in the plural mb- 
nachi, and mbnaci. 

Antko, antkhi, the ancients. 
Beccafko, beccaficki, beccafigos. 
BifblcO, bifblchi, labourers. 
Catafdlco, catafdlchi, scaffolds.. 
Didlogo, didloghi, dialogues.. 

C a Fia~ 



50 Of the NOUNS. 

Fiamriigo, Fiaminghi, Flemings. 
Recrproeo, reciproclti, reciprocals. 
Siniscalco, siniscalchi, stewards. 
Tedesco, Tedtsch^Gemvdns. 
Trajjico, trdjfichi, tradings. 

%* Some authors are generally for retrenching the final 
o, in the words ending in io, to form their plural. They 
are in the right, if the final io makes but one syllable; as ba- 
ch, baci, kisses; figlio,figli, sons; saggio, saggi , sages ; 
bcchie, bcchi, eyes: but if the final io happens to be a 
dissyllable, then there must be a long j m the plural; as 
natw, native, in the plural we ought to write notj. 

In the other examples above produced, the reason why 
we do not put the long j, is to avoid the harsh pronuncia- 
tion which would follow from the junction of two its. 
And yet the long j is sometimes admitted in order to avoid 
any ambiguity in the sense. And for this reason we 
write tempj, temples, and principj, principles, which 
otherwise would be confounded with tempi, times, an4 
principi, princes. 

Nouns ending in cio, chio, gio, and glio, generally make 
but one syllable of io, and their plural by changing io into 
i : as impaccio, trouble, implied ; bechio, an eye, bcchi ; 
pdggio, a page, paggi ; figlio, a leaf,fbgli. 



Of Nouns in u. 

r T'HE Italian language has but very few nouns in w; 
they do not change their termination in the plural : ex- 
ample : . 

la grit, a cane, le gru. 

gioventu, youth, le giaventii. 

la servitii, servitude, le servitu. 

la tribu, a tribe, le tribii. 

la virtu, virtue, le virtu. 

la schiavitii. slavery, le, schiavitii. 

Rem aria 






Of the NOUNS. 51 

Remarks on the Nouns, 

*,* When the letter / is found in Latin and French after 
Ub,p, we must change I into /. Example, fieur, fibre; 
Wane, bumcho; blanche, bidnca ; piein, pltno ; temple, 
ttmpio ; plumb, piombo. 

%* Note, the Italians never put a c or p before a t, 
but the p and c are changed into i : example, doctus, dot to ; 
doctor, dbttore ; act, at to ; aptitude, attitudine ; adoption, 
adozione. 

Ph is changed into/: example, philosopher^/t/so/b ; x 
is changed into s or ss, and sometimes into c ; as Xerxes, 
Strse ; Alexander, Alessdndro ; excellent, eccelltnU. 



Of the ' Augmentative* . 



T HE 



Italians "have this peculiarity in their language, 
that they can augment or diminish the signification of 
the nouns, by only adding certain syllables to \\\t end oi 
them, which they' call augmentatives or diminutives. 

Augmentatives are words which by the increase o( a 
syllable, increase also in their signification. 

There are two sorts of augmentatives ; the "first termi- 
nated in one, to express any thing great and large ; as, cdp- 
pello, a hat, change the last Jetter o into one, and you make- 
it cappellbne, a great large hat ; said, a hall, change a into 
one, and you will find salbne, a great large hall ; frate, a 
friar, jratbne, a fat overgrown friar ; casa, a house, casbne, 
a great house ; libro, a book, librene, a huge large book: 
and so of the rest. 

%* Observe, that the augmentatives ending in one are 
always masculine, though the nouns from whence they are 
formed be feminine ; example, una porta, unportone; la 
camera, il earner one, 

The other augmentatives are formed by changing the 
last letter of the word into accio, for the masculine, and into 
accia for the feminine: but then these augmentatives declare 
the thing somewhat contemptible ; as cappello } a hat, cap- 
pelldccio, a great us-lv hat. 

c 4 Sdla, 



32 Of the NOUNS, 

$<ila, saldccia, a great nasty hall. 
Cdsa, casdcda, a great filthy house. 
Nouns terminating in ame denote plenty or abundance ; 
as gentdme, abundance of people, ossdme, abundance of 
bones. 

Observe, nevertheless, that in those terminations there 
are nouns which are not augmentatives ; for instance, in 
one, we find bastone ; in ame, flame ; in actio, and in accia, 
IdcciOffdccia, &c. 



Of Diminutives, 
^LTHOUGH the diminutives are increased by the ad- 
dition of one or more syllables, yet they lessen the 
signification of their primitives. 

There are two sorts of diminutives, one of kindness and 
flattery, another of compassion. 

The diminutives of kindness and flattery have their ter- 
minations in ino, etto, ello, for the masculine ; and in ina, 
etta, ella, for the feminine ; example, from pbvero, poor, 
come poverrno, poveretto, poverelle, a poor little man ; po- 
verina, poveretta, povertlla, a poor little woman. 

The diminutives of compassion end in uccio, uzzo, icci- 
uvio, for the masculine, and in uccia, uzza, icciuola, for 
the feminine; example, from ubmo, a man, is formed, 
uomiiccio, uomuzzo, uomicciuolo, a poor little man. 
"%* Note, the diminutives convey no bad meaning 
like the augmentatives ; so that to express a little old man, 
you may use indifferently vecchietto, veccMno, vecchiettmo, 
vecchiarello, vecchiarellmo, vecchiuzzo : as also casina, ca~ 
setta, casuzza, casuccia, to express a small house. 

* # * Note also, that the diminutives in ino and ina, have 
something of tenderness, flattery, and cajoling in them ; 
example, the little pretty prince, il principino ; the little 
pretty princess, la principma. 

In her pretty little chamber, net suo bel camerino. 

Cdne, a dog, makes its diminutive cagnuolino, a little 
pretty dog. 

Tavola, makes tawlino, a little table. 

Cdsa, & house ; casino, a little house. 

Cdmera p 




Of the NOUNS.. 53 

Camera, a chamber ; camermo, a little chamber. 
Berretta, berrettino, a little cap: which shews that 
several feminine nouns in a make their diminutives in ino. 



Of Nouns-Adjective, 

npHE adjectives always agree with their substantives hi 
gender, number, and case. 

There are two sorts of adjectives, one terminated in o % 
the other in e. The adjectives in o serve for the masculine : 
example, Mllo, santo, dotto, ricco, povero : these adjectives, 
and all others ending 'in <?, form their plural in i ; as belli, 
sdnti, dbtti, rkchi, poveri. 

To make these adjectives of the feminine gender, you 
must change into a, as Mllo, btlla ; dotto, dbtta ; ricco, 
ricca : and iu the plural you must change a into e ; as belle f 
dctte, rice he. 

The other adjectives ending in e are of the masculine and 
feminine gender, without ever changing their termination, 
and they form their plural in 1, as well for the masculine as 
feminine : examples, un utmo prudente, vna donna pru~ 
dmte, dubi uornini prudtnii ; due dbnne prudenti. 

From the adjectives we may form comparatives and; 
superlatives. 



I Of Comparatives. 

r T*HE English comparatives are adjectives, before- 
which are put the particles-, more, less, belter, or worse,, 
&c. 
The Italian comparatives have before them, piu, ineno, 
or meglio; as, piu dotto, more learned; meno dotto, less 
learned ; piu bella, more handsome ; meno btlla, less hand- 
some. 

The comparatives serve to compare one thing with ano- 
ther: the sun is larger than the earth ; your sister is bet- 
ter drest than your niece. In these examples we compare- 
the sun with the earth, the sister with the niece. 

There are four Italian comparatives, which end in 

ore ; they may also be expressed by piu, except migliorc 

c 5 on 



54 Of the NOUNS. 

or meglio, which are comparatives without the help of the 
particle piii. 



maggiore, 


more great, 


piu grdnde. 


minore, 


less, 


piii piccolo. 


peggiore, 


worse, 


piu cattivo. 


megliore, 


better, 


meglio. 



To which may be added superiore, superior, and infe- 
riore, inferior, or lower. 

Observe, that the Italians never make use of the words 
peggio and meglio, but when they want to express the 
French words pire and mieux, that is worse and better, 
taken as adverbs. When the comparative is to agree with 
the substantive, they say, peggiore and miglibre. 

%* Observe also, that there can be no comparison 
made without the word than, and that this word is not 
expressed in Italian by che, but by the articles of the geni- 
tive, di, del, dello, della, dei, degli, delle. 

* # * When the word than, which is after the compara- 
tive, is followed by an article, or a pronoun possessive, as, 
then the, than my, than thy, than his, than ours, than 
yours, than theirs, &c. in that case the word than is ex- 
pressed by the definite articles, del, dello, della , dei, degli, 
delle. Example. 

Clearer than the sun, piu chidro del sole. 
More white than the snow, piii bianco della neve. 
More learned than the scho- 
lar, piii dbtto dello scoldre. 
Longer than the days, piu lunghi dei gibrni. 
Fairer than the stars, piii belle delle stelle. 
Clearer than the glasses, piu chidri degli speech]. 
Bigger than my bock, piii grdnde del mio libro. 
Larger than my hand, piii larga della mi a mono. 
Richer than your relations, piii ricchi de' vostri parent L 

\* But if the word than is not followed by an article, 
or a pronoun possessive, than is expressed by the indefinite 
article di. Example, 

More 



Of the NOUNS. 55 

More learned than Cicero, piu dotto di Cicerone, 

More esteemed than I, piii stimdto di me. 

Bigger than the whole earth, piu grdnde di tutta la terra. 

Richer than that man, piu ricco di quhto ubmo. 

%* If after than there happens to be a pronoun pos- 
sessive, followed by a noun of quality or kindred in the 
singular, than is expressed by the indefinite articled: ex- 
ample. 

More handsome than my brother, my sister, your ex- 
cellency, &c. piii hello di mio fratello, di mia sorilla, di 
vostra eccellenza, &c. We may likewise make use of the 
definite article, but in that case we must place the pronoun 
after the noun substantive, according to what has been ob- 
served at the end of the first chapter ; and we must say, 
piu hello del fratello mio, delta sorella mia, dell' eccellenza 
vostra, &c. 

%;* If the pronoun possessive is in the plural number, 
as, my brothers, their aunts, their highnesses, we must 
use the definite articles, de' and dtlle ; example, more 
powerful than my brothers, piii potenti de' miei frattlliy 
delle mie zie, delle alttzze loro. 

*.£* If the word than is followed by an adjective or by 
a verb, or adverb, it is rendered by che : example, 

More white than yellow, piii bidncho che giallo. 

More poor than rich, piu porero che ricco: 

He writes more than he speaks, 'sbrive piii che nan parla. 
It is better late than never, e meglio tdrdi che mat. 

When the Italians have a mind to heighten their compa- 
risons, they make use of via piii, assai piii, molto piu, a 
great deal or much more: as also of via rhino, assai meno, 
mblio meno, a great deal or "much less. 

Example — Caesar is much more esteemed than Pompey -; 
Cesar e t via piii stimdto di Pompeo. 
Chare e assai piii stimdto di Pompeo. 
Chare h molto piii stimdto di Pompeo. 
Pompey was much less happy than Caesar. 
Pompeo e stato via meno, assai meno, molto meno Jelice 
di Chare. In all these examples one may say also, eke 
Pompto, che Chare. 

« 6 * • See- 



5& Of the NOUNS. 

* # f See the second part of tin's book, in the chapter of 
the concord of nouns, the rule concerning the comparison, 
when it is made by as, as much as, so, &e. 

Of Superlatives. 
'■pHE English superlative is nothing but a noun adjective, 
to which you prefix the particle most, in order to 
heighten the sense ; as most learned, most honoured. 

The Italian superlative is formed from the noun adjective, 
by changing the last letter into issimo, for the masculine, 
and into issima, for the feminine ; thus from grande you 
form grandtssimo, most great ; from hella, bellissima, most 
handsome. 

The most is expressed by il piu, la piu ; as, the most 
fair, or fairest, il piu hello, la piu Mlla, i piu belli, le piu 
belle ; the most large, or largest, il piu grande. 

*** Observe, that by changing the last letter of adjectives 
in issimamente, the superlative adverbs are composed ; as, 
from dbtto, learned, dottissimamtnte, most learnedly; 
from ricco, rich, ricchissimamente, most richly ; from pru- 
dtnte, prudent, prudentissimamente, most prudently. 

You are also to take notice, that th#posiiive is some- 
limes used in the Italian language instead of the superla- 
tive, as, e la hella dtlle belle', as if one were to say, she is 
the fairest of the fair. 

Tnere is also another species of superlative ; for we say, 
un iiomo dbtto dbtto, to signify a very learned man. 



Observations on some Nouns. 
'X'AKE notice that these six words, imo, hello, grande, 
sdnto, quello, bubno, are abridged or retrenched, be- 
fore masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, and we 
only put 

Un, bel, gran, san, quel, buon ; as un libro, bel cane, 
granfubco, san MicMle, quel bastbne, buonjigliublo. 
Before the feminine nouns we put 
Una, hella, grande, savta, quella, hubna. 
None but gran is shortened before feminities. 
See, in the second part, the chapter concerning words 
that are to be abridged, 

Frate 



Of the NOUNS. 



Frdte signifies a friar, or brother of a religious order. 

In this sense we abridge the word frdte before the pro- 
per names of men, and we only use fra; as, brother 
Peter, fra Pietro ; brother Paul, fra Paolo ; brother Au- 
gustine, fra Agostino ; brother John,/r« Giovanni. 

We must remember that fra., before numeral nouns, 
signifies in: example, in a year, fra un anno ; in two 
months, fra dubimesi; in fifteen days, fra quindici gibrjii. 

Of Numeral Nouns. 
/"\NE, two, three, four, TTN> un0 > una, ditoi, & 



five, six, seven, eight, 
nine, ten, eleven, twelve, 
thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, 
sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, 
nineteen, twenty, twenty- 
one, twenty-two, twenty- 
three, &c. thirty, forty, 
fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, 
ninety, a hundred, two 
hundred, three hundred, a 
thousand, two thousand, a 
million, a tenth, a dozen, 
a score, a thirtieth. 



due, tre, qudttro, cinque, 
set, sette, otto, nbve, died, 
undid, dbdici, tredici, quat- 
tbrdici,qiimdici,sedici,dieci- 
setie, or dcciasette, died ot- 
to, or dida-otto, dicci-nove r 
or dicw-nbve, venti, vent- 
uno, ve?iti-iliie, vertti-tre,&;c* 
trtnta, quardnta, cinqudn- 
ta, sessdnta, sett ant a, ot- 
tdnta, nondiita, cento, du- 
ctule, trecento, mille, \ due 
mila, millibne, or migUbne, 
una decina, una dozzma, 
una ventina, una trentina. 



Ordinal 
JTIRST, second, third, 
fourth, fifth, sixth, se- 
venth, eighth, ninth, tenth, 
eleventh, twelfth, thir- 
teenth, fourteenth, fif- 
teenth, sixteenth, seven- 
teenth, twentieth, one-and- 
twentieth, thirtieth, forti- 
eth, fiftieth, sixtieth, se- 
ventieth, eightieth, nine- 
tieth, the hundredth, the 
thousandth, the last. 



Nouns. 

pRI'MO, seecndo, terzo? 
quarto, quint o, sesto, set- 
timo, ottdvo, nono, decimo, 
undecimo, duodecimo, deci- 
mo-terzo, dedmo-qudrto, de- 
cimo-qumtOidecimo-sestOyde- 
cimo-settimo, decimo-otiavo, 
dtcinio-nbno,ventesi'mo y ven- 
tesirrto prrno, irentesime, 
quarantesimo, cinquantss i- 
mo, sessantesimo, settantesi- 
mo, oiiantesimo, nonantesi- 
mo, centesimo, millesimOy 
ultimo. 



58 Of the NOUNS. 

The proportional numbers are semplice, dbppio, tripli- 
catOy quadruplicate, centuplicato, single, double, three- 
fold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 

The distributive nouns are ad uno ad uno, one by one : 
a due a due, two by two, &c. 

In French and English all ordinal numbers may be 
formed into adverbs, but in Italian they have only primi- 
eramenie, and secondariamente. 

To express thirdly, fourthly, &c. they say in terzo 
luogo, in qudrto luogo, &c. in the third place, in the fourth 
place, &c. 



A Method (for those who understand FRENCH) to 
learn a great many ITALIAN IVords in a short time. 
nrHOUGH Italian is said to be corrupted Latin, yet 
it has a greater conformity and resemblance with 
the French than with any other language ; for the 
French words, with a very little variation, are all Ita- 
lian, as may be seen by the following examples; only 
we must observe, that the French syllable cha is always 
expressed in Italian by ca, rejecting h : example, Charbon, 
chariie, chastete, chapon, charette, chandelle, chapeau ; 
the Italians say, Carbbne, caritd^ castitdfcapbne, earretta, 
candtla, cappello. 

To learn a great number of Italian words in a short 
time, we must observe the following rules. 



FRENCH Terminations that end in ITALIAN in a. 

French words ending in ancc ; as Constance, vigilance* 

he. in Italian end in anza fcost&rtza, vigilanza, &c. 
Those in ence in French ; as clemence, diligence, 

prudence, end in Italian in enza ; clembnza, diligenza, 

prudenza. 

Agne makes agna; montagne, montagna ; campagne, 
campagna. 

Ogne makes ogna; Catalogue, Catalbgna; charogne, 
carbgna. 

Ie makes ia ; comedie, comedia ; here you lean the ac- 
cent upon the e, and not upon the i as in French, poesie, 
pocsia. 

OlEE 



Of the NOUNS. 59 

Oire makes orla ; gloire, gloria ; victoire, vittbria. 

Te makes t a ; purete, purita ; liberalite, liberalitd. See 
what has been said in the exceptions of nouns termi- 
nating in a. 

Ure makes ura ; avanture, ventura; imposture, imposturq* 



FRENCH Terminations ending in ITALIAN in e. 

Al, ale ; cardinal, cardinale ; mal, mule. 

Af.le, evole ; charitable, caritatevole ; honorable, onore- 

vole ; louable, lodevole. 
Ant, ante; vigilant, vigiUtnte ; amant, amdnte. 
Ent, adjective, ente ; prudent, prudente; diligent, dili- 

gente. 
Eur, ore: honneur, onwe ; chaleur, colore. 
Ier, iere ; cavalier, cavalitre ; picquier, picchiere. 
Ion, ione ; union, unibne ; portion, porzibne. 
Ison, gione : raison, ragibne ; prison, prigibne. 
On, one; charbon, carbbne; canon, canbne ; baron, ba- 

rbne. 
Ont, onte; front, fronte ; pont, ponte . 
Ois, names of nations, ese; Francois, Fruncese; Hollan- 

dois, Olandese ; Anglois, Inglese. 
Ude, udine ; inquietude, inquietudine. 
Ulier, olare ; regulief, regoldre ; pzxlicnMer, particolare* 



FRENCH Terminations ending in 17 ALLAN in o. 

Age, aggio; page, pdggio ; equipage, equipdggio. 

A in, ano ; vilain, villano ; humain, umano. 

AiN and Ten, names of nations, ano and mo; Romain, 

Romano; Italien, Italidno; Napolitain, Napolitdno ; 

Parisien, Parigino. 
Aire, ario; salaire, saldrw; temeraire, temerdrio. 
Eau, elh; chapeau, capcllo; manteau, mant'tllo. 
Ent, substantive, ento ; sacrement, sacramento. 
Eux, oso ; genereux, generuso ; graoieux, grarMso. 
In, ino ; vin, vino ; jardin, giardino. 
I F, ivo ; actif, attivo ; passif, passivo. 
C, co ; pore, pbrco ; Tare, Tiireo ; Grec, Greco ; escroc, 

scrbeco, doubling the letter c. 

Change 



60 Of the NOUNS. 






Change of Terminations of VERBS and 
PARTICIPLES. 



Er, are ; aimer, amare ; parler, parlare. 

Endre, endere ; prendre, prendere ; rendre, rendere. 

Is, he; partir, partire ; sentir, sentire. 

The participles in t make ato; aime, amuto; orne, 
orndto ; chante, cantuto ; parle, parldio. 

The particles in i make tYo; dormi, dormito; senti, 
sentUo ; pati, patito ; menti, mentito. 

There are a great many Italian words that have no 
manner of analogy or resemblance with the French ; as 
h ciglia, the eyebrows; fazzoleito, a handkerchief; 
gbbbo, crooked ; chiamare, to call ; scherzdre, to play ; 
and many others, which hinder these rules from being 
general. 



Other Terminations of the ITALIAN Nouns, 
derived from the Latin. 

The Latin ablatire generally makes the Italian no- 
minative; as, colore, onhre, petihic, vcrgine. 

The natural nominatives change their lalt syllable 
intoa; as sacerdotium, sacerdbzio, &c. But if the last 
syllable of the nominative begins with a consonant, the 
consonant continues, and the vowel o is added to it : 
examples, tempus, say tempo ; cornu, corno ; retaining the 
p and n, which are the first letters of the last syllable of 
the nominative tempus, tempo, and the nominative cornu, 
corno. 

The neutral nominatives in en drop the letter n ; as 
nomen, nbme; flumen, flume; changing also the letter 
I into i, as hath been already observed, where we treated 
of nouns ending in u. 

The greatest part of the Latin infinitives, of the se- 
cond and third conjugation, make the Italian infinitives ; 
as, dolere, tenere, solere, tcmere, vedere, credere, leggere, 
dijendere : but the e } in those words which are accented, 
is pronounced in a different manner, being the close f, 
like that in the French word malgre. 



Of the PRONOUNS. €l 

. CHAP. II. 

Of PRONOUNS. 

HPHE pronouns are either personal, conjunctive, pes 

sessive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or im~ 
proper. 



Of Pronouns Personal. 

HTHE pronouns personal are io and noi for the first 
person, and they serve for the masculine and femi- 
nine. 

Ikt and voi, for the second, and these serve also for the 
masculine and feminine. 

Egli for the third person of the masculine gender, and 
it makes eglino in the pluml. 

Ella or m&z (because lui for the musculine, and let for 
the feminine, are never used in the nominative) for the 
third person in the feminine gender form in the plural 
elleno; but esse is preferable. Hence we never say lui or 
tee mi dia una presa di tobacco, give me a pinch of snuff. 
But signbre, V. S. or essa, or la di lei persona mi dia una 
presa di tobacco. 

The pronouns personal are declined by the article inde» 
finite, di, a, da. 



The Declension 


of Pronouns Personal 






First Person. 


Sing. Nom. 


I 






io. 


Gen. 


of me, 






di me. 


Dat. 


to me, 






a me, or ml. 


Ace. 


me, 






me, or mi. 


Abl. 


from me, 




dame. 


Plur. Nom. 


we, 






noi. 


Gen. 


of us, 






di noi. 


Dat. 


to us, 






a noi, or ci. 


Ace. 


us, 






noi or ci. 


Abl. 


from or 


by 


us, 


da noi. 



With 



€2 Of the PRONOUNS. 

With me, is rendered by con me, or mico ; me after the 
imperatives, is expressed by mi ; as speak to me, parla* 
iemi ; tell me, ditemi ; send me, mandattmi ; write to mc, 
scrivetenii. 

Us, after the imperative, is rendered by cj; example, 
tell us, diteci: give us, dated; show us, mostrnttci. 
. In these examples gu is not a pronoun personal, but con- 
junctive as you will see hereafter. 





Second Pe 


rson. 


Sing. Nom. 


thou, 


iu. 


Gen. 


of thee, 


di te. 


Dat. 


to thee, 


a te, or ti. 


Ace. 


thee, 


te, or ti t 


Abi. 


from thee, 


da ie^ 


Plur. Nom. 


you or ye, 


voi. 


Gen. 


of you, 


di voi, 


Dat. 


to you, 


a voi, or vi 


Ace. 


you, 


voi, or ti. 


Abl. 


from you, 


da voi. 



With thee, is rendered by con te, or teco, with you; after 
imperatives, by vi, and not by voi ; as, be you contented, 
content&tevi ; show yourself, mostratevi : hide yourself, 
nascondetevi : dress yourself, vestitevi; thee, or thyself, 
is expressed after imperatives by ti ; as, most rati, show 
thyself. 



1 


Third Person. Fer the masculine. 


Sing. Nom. 


he, egli. 


Gen. 


of him, di lui. 


Dat. 


to him, a lui, or gli. 


Ace. 


him, lui. 


Abl. 


from him, da lui. 


Plur. Nom, 


they, eglino. 


Gen. 


of them, di loro. 


Dat. 


to them, a loro, or loro. 


Ace. 


them, loro. 


Abl. 


from them, da loro. 



Re* 



Op the PRONOUNS. €3 

*i* Remember that the pronoun him, or to him, 
when joined to a verb, is always rendered in Italian by 
gli, and her, by le, as you will see in the pronouns con- 
junctive. 





Third person. Feminine. 


Sing. Nom. 


she, 


ella, or esse. 


Gen. 


of her, 


di lei. 


Dat. 


to her, 


a lei, or le. 


Ace. 


her, 


lei, or la. 


Abl. 


from or by her, 


da hi. 


Plur. Nom. 


they, 


elleno, or esse. 


Gen. 


of them, 


di loro. 


Dat. 


to them, 


a loro, or loro 


Ace. 


them, 


loro, or le. 


Abl. 


from or by them, 


da loro. 



Though there are instances of lui, lei, and loro, 
being used hi the nominative, .yet it is better to say 
egli pdrla, ella cdnia, than lui pdrla, lei cdnta ; because 
lui is not commonly used in the nominative, but in 
other cases, in which it is better to make use of lui, lei, 
and loro, than of egli, ella, eglino, elleno. We therefore 
say, for him, per lui ; for her, per hi ; for them, per 
loro ; with him, con lui, or seco ; with her, con lei, or 
seco ; with them, con loro. 



Of the Pronoun se, one s self, or himself. 

There is another pronoun personal, that serves in- 
differently for the masculine and feminine : this is se, 
one's self; it has no nominative. 

Gen. of one's self, himself, or herself, di se. 

Dat. to one's self, S$G. a se, or si. 

Ace. one's self, fyc. se, or si. 

Abl. from or by one's self, 8fc. da se. 

It is often joined with the pronoun stesso or stessa, and 
then it is more elegant: per se stesso, by, or for himself; 
per se stessa, for herself. 
r Of 



64, Of the PRONOUNS. 

6f Pronouns Conjunctive, 

npHE pronouns conjunctive bear a great resem- 
blance to the pronouns personal: the pronouns 
personal are, 

/, thou, he, we, ye, they. 

There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. to me, or 
me ; to thee, or thee; to himself, or himself; to herself, 
or herself ; to him, or him; to us, or us ; to you, or you ; 
to them, or them. 

They are expressed in Italian by 
mi, ti, si, gli, or le, ci, w t loro. 

It is easy to remember, that the pronouns conjunc- 
tive, me, thee, one's self or himself; to him, them 4 , or to 
them, fyc, are always rendered in Italian by mt t ti^ ti, gli, 
or le, loro : example, that pkases mi, q uedo mi pm§» 

God sees thee, Dio ti vide. 

The sun rises, il sole si Uva% 

I will tell biin, io gli dirb. 

I will tell her, io le dirt). 

I promise them, promitto loro ; as well for the mascu* 
line as the feminine. 

%'* The pronoun conjunctive loro h always put after 
the verb in Italian: as, you will tell them, dirtte loro. 

The pronoun conjunctive, to him, is expressed in 
Italian by gli, and to her, by le: example, I speak, to 
him, io gli pdrlo ; I speak to her, io le pdrlo. We like- 
wise make use of gli in the plural, to signify loro ; but 
then observe, that you are to put gli before the finite 
mood ; as, io gli ho initso dire cose mirabili ; and lor o after 
the infinite mood, as ho veduto far loro cose mirabili. 
JSf. B. But gli for loro is seldom used in prose. 

%.* The pronouns we and ye are expressed in Italian 
by Hoi and mi, when they precede the verbs whose ac- 
tion they make, and to whieh they are nominatives ; as, 
we pray, noi preghidmo ; you sing, voi cantate. We is 
the nominative of to pray, of which it makes the action ; 
and so ye is the nominative of to sing : then we and^e are 
pronouns personal. 

*#* When we and ye, in Italian noi and voi, precede 
verbs to which they are not the nominative, and there 

is. 



Of the PRONOUNS. 65 

is some other word that goes before and makes the action 
of the verb, then they are pronouns conjunctive, and must 
be expressed by ci and vi, in English us and you : exam- 
ple, the master speaks to us, il maestro ci parla, and not 
not parla: because the master makes the action, and is 
the nominative to the verb. In like manner, to render in 
Italian, we speak to you, we must say, not vi parliamo, 
and not noi voi parliamo ; because we is the nominative, 
and makes the action of the verb, and not you, which in- 
stead of making it, receives it. Yet we may say, il ma- 
estro parla a noi, noi parliamo a voi. 

\* One of the chief difficulties to the learners of the 
Italian language, is to express the pronouns conjun- 
tive mi, ti, ci, gli, ci, vi, when tuey are followed by the 
particles lo, la, li, le or ne. 

To clear up this matter, you must express them here 
as underneath, changing the letter i of the pronoun 
conjunctive into e; as to say to me of it instead of mine, 
you must say mene ; in like manner, instead of mi lo, you 
are to say melo, pronouncing the two syllables short. And 
the same is to be observed in all the following pronouns 
conjunctive. 

* T r. C it, to me, melo, mas. 

Me, mi ; me of).' . , £ 

.. < it, to me, mela, rem. 

(.them, to me, meli, mele, m. &. f. 

rru .. ., rCn, to thee, telo, mas. 
Thee, ti ; thee of J ..* .. ., •' . , ■'■ 1 

it tene ) ' ° ' ' m * 

Ctheni, to thee, teli, tele, m. and f. 

himself, selo, mas. 

himself, sela, fem. 

himself, seli, sele, in. and f. 

rr< u: 7 - . C it, to him, g-lielo, mas. 

To him, %li, to ) . ' . . ■ te /. 7 r 

i • c I i- \ it, to him, gliela, fem. 

him or it, grliene. ),,' , • fe ,. 7 . ' 7 . , « ~ 

& C them, to him, glieh, gliele, m. & f. 

T r . c -. ( it, to us, celo, mas. 

Ls, ci : us of it, j - * . , ' c 

\ < it, to us, ce la, fem. 
cene. 



tt. ,/. , • fit, to hu 

Himself, se ; him- ) ..' . ,. 

ie c •* % »t, to hi! 

self of .t,^. ^^ em> to hil 

him, gli, tojj' 
of it,«-/iene. "^ 

of it, j i'- 

' < it, to us, 
t them, to us, 

l, vi; you offc * J "' 

it, vene. 1 '*• fJ w - 
Cthem, to you, 



«*,*'.*» rfte *** S&ST: 



cefl, cele, m. & f. 
re/o, mas. 
vela, fem. 
»«//, t>e&, m, k f. 



To 



66 Of the PRONOUNS. 

To them, loro ; to them of it, ne loro ; putting always 
loro after the verb. 

If the verbs are in the infinitive, or the gerund, the 
pronouns conjunctive must be transposed ; as to tell 
me, per dirmi ; to tell me of it, per dirmene ; to give it 
to me, per darmelo ; in telling me it, dicendomclo ; to 
give it to us, per darcelo ; so as to make, it as it were, 
but one word of it, remembering that we must always pro- 
nounce short melo, mene, telo, tene, celo, celi, cele, and the 
rest after the same manner. 

Other examples concerning the pronoun conjunctive 
loro, them. 

I promise them, prometto loro. 

To promise them some, per promttterne loro. 

In promising them some, promettundone loro. 

After imperatives, and before infinitives and gerunds, 
the pronouns are never personal, but conjunctive ; ex- 
ample, give us, dated ; to see you, per vedervi ; in 
speaking to you, parldndovi. 

After verbs, when a question is asked, the pronouns 
are personal, and not conjunctive : example, have you 1 
avfte voi? shall we sing ? canter emo noil 

The poets always use ne, instead of ci, to express the 
pronoun conjunctive us, as we may see irr Guarini's 
Pastor Fido. 

Perche, irudo destin, ne drsunisci tu, s' amor ne strtnge? 
E tu perche ne str'mgi, se ne parte il destin, perfido amort ? 

Why, cruel fate, dost thou part us, if love unites us ? 
And thou, perfidious love, why dost thou unite us, if 
fate parts us. 



Of Pronouns Possessive. 



T H , E 



E English have no article in the nominative be- 
fore the pronouns possessive, but the Italians have ; 
as my, il mio, la tnta, fern. Plur. i miti, le mie, fern. 

There are six pronouns possessive, viz. /'/ mio, il tiio, 
il suo, il nostra, il vbstro, il loro : my, thy, bis, our, your, 
their : in the plural they make t mki, i tuci, i suci, i nostri, 
i vbbtri, i loro. 

The 



Op the PRONOUNS. 67 

The feminine pronouns possessive are, la mta, la tua, 
la sua, fa nostra, la vostra, la 16? : in the plural, le ink, 
le tue y le sue, le nostre, le vbstre, le loro. 

Loro, as you see, never changes, but is always loro ; 
it is put before the masculine as well as the feminine, before 
the singular as well as the plural number. 

The pronouns possessive are declined by the definite ar- 
ticle il for the masculine, and by la for the feminine. 

To render them easy to decline, I shall give the follow- 
ing example. 

Sing. Norn, my book, il mio libro, 

Gen. of my book, del mio libro. 

Dat. to my book, al mio libro. 

Abl. from or by my book, dalmio libro. 
Plur. Norn, my books, i miei libri. 

Gen. of my books, de* miei libri. 

Dat. to my books, a' miei lilrri. 

Abl. from or by my books, da' miei libri. 

Decline all the other masculines after the same man- 
ner, and the feminiues by the article la ; as, la mia serva, 
della mia serva, alia mia serva, dalla mia serva : le mie 
serve, delle mie serve, alle mie serve, dalle mie serve. 

\* Note, you must not use the definite article when 
the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality 7 , but the 
indefinite articles di, a, da: example. 

Your majesty, vostra maesta. 

Of your majesty, di vostra maesta. 

To your majesty, a vostra maesta. 

From your majesty, da vostra maesta. 

%/ ;: Remember also, that names of kindred conform to 
this rule ; thus we say, mio padre, a mio padre, da" mio 
padre ; mia mddre, di mia madre, a mia mddre, da mia 
mddre ; mio fraiello, di mio j'rateUo, a miofratello, da 
mio fratello ; inia sorella, di mia sorella, a mia sorella, 
da mia sorella ; mio marito, &c. 

%* From the above examples it appears, that nouns 
declined by the iudeiinite ariicie have no article in the 
nominative. 

If the nouns of ..quality or relation be in the plural, we 
must make use of the detinite article i or le, de or delle : 
example. 

Your 



&S * Of the PRONOUNS. 

Your brothers, i vbstrifratelli, or ifratelli vbstrL 

Your sisters, It vbstre sorelle, or le sorelle vbstre. 

Of your brothers, de' vbstrifraUlli, or de'fratelli vbstrL 

Of your sisters, delle vbstre sorelle. 

To your brothers, a' vbstrifratelli. 

To your sisters, alle vbstre sorelle. 

Their highnesses, le altezze loro, or le loro altezxe. 

Of their highnesses, delle altezze loro. 

To their highnesses, alle altezze loro. 

Though the definite article" sometimes occurs in ancient 
■and modern authors before nouns of kindred in the singu- 
lar number, yet we ought not to imitate them ; according 
to the old proverb, tu vivendo bonos, scribendo sequerc 
peritos. 

Take notice, that when the pronoun possessive is ac- 
companied by a pronoun demonstrative, they do not put 
the article in the nominative. We do not say, il questo mio 
Jibro, but questo mio Ubro. In all other cases they make 
use of the indefinite article : thus they say, di questo vbs- 
tro Ubro, a quella nostra casa, &c. 



Of Pronouns Demonstrative. 

HTHE pronouns demonstrative are the following: this, 
that, these, those. 

They are called pronouns demonstrative, because they 
serve to point out or demonstrate any thing or person ; as, 
this book, tliat man, that woman, &c. 

They are expressed in Italian after the following man- 
ner : 

This man or thing, Questo Sf questi, or quelle, 

quel $f quegli, colui, costiii. 

This woman or thing, Questa, quella, or colei. 

He, or that thing, Quel, or quello, or colui. 

She, or that thing, fyc. Quella, or colei. 

This, fem. questa, questa-qut, costei. 

That, fern, quella, quella-la, colei* 



This thing, questo or cio, 



These 



Of the PRONOUNS. 69 

These men or things, Questi, quelli # costbro. 

These women or things, Queste, quelle, 3f costbro. 

They, or those, fyc. Quelli^quei, masc. or colbro. 

They, or those, Sfc. Quelle, fern, or colbro. 

That, Questo, or do. 

These here, fem. queste or costbro. 
Those there, fem. quelle, or costbro. 

They make use of questo, questi, questa, queste, ia 
shewing a thing near at hand ; and quel, quello, quelli, 
quel, quella, quelle, in shewing or speaking of a thing at a 
distance. 

Cosiiri, colui, costei, colei, are also pronouns demonstra- 
tive, and never used but in speaking of a rational sub- 
stance ; as, of a boy, a man, a woman, Sfc. and not a 
horse, a dog, fyc. example, it is for this man, do not give 
it to that, e per costuj, non lo date a colui ; pay this wo- 
man, and send away that, pagdte costei, e rimanddte colei ; 
you may also say, e per questo, non lo date a quello ; 
pagdte questa, rimanddte quella. 

They do not often make use of colui, costui, colei, costei, 
in the nominative. 

Costui and costei, form in the plural, costbro, these men 
or women ; colid and colei make in the plural colbro, they 
or those men and women. 

They seldom make use of colbro or costbro, either in the 
feminine or nominative. 

We make use of costui, colui, costei, colei, costbro, colbro, 
when they are the last words of a sentence, but never in 
the beginning or middle of it. 

We frequently meet with cotesto and cotesta, and they 
signify that man or thing, that woman or thing : but you 
are to observe, that there is a difference between questo, 
and cotesto. Foreigners, and sometimes the Italians them- 
selves, are mistaken in the use of those two pronouns. 
We ought never to use cotesto, but in speaking of a thing 
which concerns the person who hears us. Therefore you 
must not say, cotesto mio dbito, but questo mio dhito. 

* # * Observe, questi and quegli are often used for the 
singular number; as this man was happy, that unfor- 
tunate, questi fii felice, quegli sfortundto ; but it is used 
D only 



70 Of the PRONOUNS. 

only in speaking of a rational substance, as of a man, a 
woman, an angel, &c. and not in speaking of a beast, or 
any inanimate thing, for then we are to make use of qucsio 
and quel. 

%* Note, what is often expressed by il che ; but in 
that case it must refer to some antecedent phrase; exam- 
ple, my father is dead, which obliges me to go, mio padre 
e morto, il che m obliga a part ire. In the beginning of a 
sentence, we must say, cie che: example, that which pleaseth 
me, I have not, cio che me pidce, non Vho. 



•yHE 



Of Pronouns Interrogative. 

pronouns interrogative serve to ask questions, and 
are as follow; who? what? which? chi? che! quale? 
Example, 

Who is it? chi el 

Who told you so ? chi vlia dttto cio ? 

What will you have? che volete? 

What are you doing? che fate? 

What book is this? che libro t? 

What house is it ? quaV e la casa ? 

What ? che ? of what ? di che ? to what ? a che ? 

* # * Che is often used for quale ; and then the phrase 
is more elegant ; example, what man is thai? che u'omo 
e? what affairs have you; che affari avete? instead of 
saying, qual' ubmo e? quali affari avete? 



Of Pronouns Relative. 
THERE are three pronouns relative in English, that f 
■*■ who, and ivhich. 

That, when it is a pronoun relative, is expressed in 
Italian, by che, or by il quale in the masculine, and by 
la quale in the .feminine: example, il libra che io tfg'go, 
or il quaV io leggo, the book that I read. La mbglie ch' ho' 
or la qual' ho, the wife that I have. But it is better lo 
make use of che than of qu.h. 

I said when it is a pronoun relative, because when 
it is a conjunction or adverb, it is rendered by che ; 

yon 



Of the PRONOUNS. fl 

vou must therefore say, credo ch' andrb, &c. I believe that 
I shall go, &C 

Who, except it be interrogative, is also expressed by 
che: example, the master who teaches, il maestro che 
insegna : the fools who laugh, gli sciecchi che ridono* 
But if it be interrogative, it is rendered by chi. 

Of whom or whose is expressed by di chi or di cut, 
' To whom is expressed by a cki or a cui. 
From whom, in the ablative, by da chi. 
Which, 'masc- is expressed by il quale; of which, del 
quale ; to which, al quale ; from which, dal quale ; 
which, plural, i qudli; of which, dei or de* qudli ; to 
which, ai, or a qualt ; from which, dai or da* qudli. 

Which, feminine, la quale, della quale, alia quale, dalla 
quale ; in the plural, It qudli, &c. 

* # * Observe, that the pronouns relative, that, ivho, 
which, are also expressed by che ; so that instead of saying 
quale, qudli, il quale, i qudli, la quale, le qudli; we may 
say and write che, which is more received. 

*. x .* The purest authors place the pronoun cui between 
the definite article of the noun. See the following 
examples ; but observe, that you will never find this pro- 
noun there in the nominative. 

Whose fair visage, il cui bel viso, or il di cui Uel viso, 
for il hel vrso di cui. 

YY hose beauties, le cui bellezae, or le di cui bellezzc, for 
le bellezze di cui. 

To whose father, al cui padre, or al di cui padre, for 
al padre di cui. 

From whose brother I have received, dal cui, or dal di 
cui fratello horicevuto. See Boccdcio, Lodovico, I>ulce, 
Man/mi, Davila, and cardinal Bentivbglitr, who often 
make use of these examples. 

The French relative, dont, of ivkich or of whom, is 
rendered in Italian by di cui. 
Dont le, il di cui, or il cui. 
Dont la, la de cui, or la cui. 
Dont les, i di cui, or * cui, for the masculine. 
Dont tes, le di cui, for the feminine. 
%* Lo, la, li, le, are the pronouns relative, when 
before verbs. 

o * Him. 



72 Of the PRONOUNS. 

Him, as we have already observed in the chapter of 
articles, is rendered by lo : example, I see him, io lo vedo ; 
you know him, rot lo conoscete. 

If the verb begins with a vowel, there must be elision ; 
as, I caress him, io Vaccarezzo. 

Her, is expressed by la ; example, I know her, io la 
conosco ; you want her, vol la volete. 

Them is expressed by li for the masculine, and by le 
for the feminine ; as, 1 see them, li vedo, or le redo. 

* # * Remember that the pronouns relative, lo, la, li, 
le, must be transposed after infinitives, gerunds, and the 
word ecco. 

Esso, he himself, or it, is likewise a pronoun relative ; 
it makes in the plural essi, themselves ; essa, she herself, 
or it, makes esse, themselves, fern. 



Of improper Pron 



ouns. 



TpHESE pronouns are called improper, because indeed 
they are not properly pronouns, but have a great 
resemblance to pronouns as well as lo adjectives. They 
are the following, 

Tidto, tutti, m. tutta, tirfte, f. all or every ; bgni, each 
or every ; dltro, dltra, dltri, dltre, other, others, qudlche, 
some, chiunque, whosoever; qualcheduno, qualcheduna, 
some one ; alcuno, some one man or thing ; uleuna, some 
one woman or thing ; ciascheduno, ciascheduni, rnasc. cia- 
tcheduna, ciaschedune, fern, every one ; nissuno, nobody ; 
ilmedesimo, il mtdcmo, to sttsso, mas. la medtsima, la jnedv- 
ma, la sttssa, Visthsa, fern, the same; ciascuno, masc. 
eiascuua, fern, each or every one ; alirui, dltri, others, &c. 

Veruno, veruiia, not one man or woman, is used for 
the affirmative as well as for the negative. 

Tutto, comprehends a totality, and agrees with the 
thing spoken of; example, all the world, tutto il mbndo, 
or tutto 7 mondo; all the men, tutti gli ubmini. 

The whole earth, tutta la terra. 
All the women, tutte le dbnne. 

* * We 



Or the PRONOUNS. 73 

* # * We must use tiltto and tiitta, when the word c// 
is followed by an article or a numeral noun ; as, all 
the world, tulto 'I mbndo ; all the eartii, tutta la terra ;, 
all three, tutt' i ire. 

But if after the word all there is no article, we must 
use ogni; example, all men that say so, speak amiss, 
ogni umno die dice questo, pdrla male ; all women that, 
ogni donna che. 

Observe, nevertheless, that this pronoun is used with- 
out the article; and is productive of great elegance, 
especially in verse, 

Che tutte altre vellhze indietro vanno. 
Sciblti da tutte qtialitdde umdne. 

*** Ogni is put with the singular number, and never 
with the plural ; and it is indeclinable. It is used be- 
fore masculines as well as feminines, and especially when 
the pronoun all may be rendered by each or every; exam- 
ple, all or every scholar, ogni scblare ; for all or every 
thing, per ogni cosa. 

There are some examples of ogni in the plural. Cres. 
236', says appresso la feat a d'ogni sdnti, after the feast of 
All Saints. Fiam. 29, i miei affdnni ogni dltri trap&ssano. 
But the examples are so uncommon, that they hardly de- 
serve notice. 

Altro makes in the plural altri; altra, feminine, makes 
altre. The oblique cases are always altrui; nom. dltro; 
jren. altriU\ or d' altrui ; dat. altrui or ad altrui ; ace. 
The feminine, as well in the singular as plural, always 
makes, like the nominative, Altra. 

AltrOy when it is not followed by a noun, signifies 
another thing. 

Altri is often put for the singular number; as, dltri 
pidnge, dltri ride, one weeps, another laughs. 

%* Qudlche is only placed before the singular, and 
never witli the plural:. it is not right to say, qudlche 
signori, qudlche donne, some gentlemen, some ladies ; you 
must say, alcuni signori, ale line donne. - 

Qualsivvglia, whatsoever, is likewise used as an impro- 
per noun; whatsoever book, quahivbglia libro ; what- 
soever wax, qualsivoglia cera» 

D3 CHAP. 



[ 74 ] 
CHAP. IV. 

Of VERBS. 
WHATEVER relates to the verbs, will be rendered 
much easier to learn by attending to the following 
remarks. 

Important Remarks on the Conjugation, 
Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it will be 
proper to observe, that all the verbs may be conjugated 
without the pronouns personal, io, tu, egli, noi, voi, eglino, 
so you are at liberty to form them -with or without the 
pronouns ; and it will be right in you to follow the Latin 
rule, 

Supprimit orator, que rustic us edit inept e. 

%* You must also mind, that the tenses marked with 
a star, in the conjugation of the verb avere, to have, 
are terminated, and conjugated, after the same manner in 
all the other verbs: example, we say in the preterimperfect 
of the verb avere, 

* Avtvo, or aveva, avevi, aveva, avevamo, &c. 

All the verbs follow the same rule ; example, 

Amdvo, or amdva, amdvi, amdva, amavdmo, &c. 

Credevo, or credeva, credevi, credeva, credevdmo, &c. 

Sentivo, or sentiva, sentivij, sentiva, sentivdmo, &c. 

And in like manner all other tenses are distinguished by a 
star, except the single verb essere, to be. 



Conjugation 


of the auxiliary verb avere, to have* 




INDICATIVE. 








Present. 








Singular. 




I have, 




io ho, or 


ho. 


Thou hast. 




tu hdi 


hoi. 


He has, 




egli ha, 


Jia. 



* The best writers in the Italian language terminate the first 
person of the preterperfect of all verbs in a ; aveva, not aveya , 
umdva, not amdvo \ and the latter termination is used by the vulgar. 

Plural. 



Of the VERBS. 7$ 





Plural. 


We have, 


noi abbiamo, abbiamo 


You have, 


voi auete, avete 


They have, 


eglino hanno, hanno. 




Preterimperfect. 


I had, 


*ioavevo, or aveva 


Thou hadst, 


tu avevi 


He had, 


egli aveva. 


We had, 


noi avevamo 


You had, 


voi avev/tte 


They had, 


eglino avevano. 


Preterperfect Definite. 


I had, 


io ebbi 


Thou hadst, 


tu a vest i 


He had, 


egli ebbe. 


We had, 


noi avemma. 


You had, 


voi avSste 


They had, 


eglino ebber<h 




Preterperfect. 


I have bad, 


io ho avuto 


Thou hast had, 


tu km avuto 


He has had. 


egli ha avute. 


We have had, 


noi abbiamo avuto 


You have had, 


voi aveie avuto 


They have had, 


eglino hdnno avuto* 




Preterpluperfect. 


I had had, 


io avevo avuto 


Thou hadst had, 


tu avevi avuto 


He had had, 


egli aveva avuto. 


We had had, 


noi avevamo avuto 


You had had, 


voi avemte avuto 


They had had, 


eglino avevano avuto. 




Future. 


I shall or will have, * io avrb 


Thou shall have, 


tu avrdi 



B4 He 



76 Of the VERBS, - 

He shall have, egli avrd. 

We' shall have, noi avrttno 

You shall have, voi avrete 

They shall have, tglino avr/mno. 

N. B. Avero, awrai, averd, averemo, arercte, averdnno, 
are become obsolete, according to the modern taste. 



IMPERATIVE. 

The imperative has no lirst person singular, because it 
is impossible to command one's self. 

Have thou, dbbi tu 

Let him have, abbia egli. 

Let us have, abbidmo noi 

Have you, abbiate voi. 

Let them have, dbbiano eglino. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
I join them together, because their tenses are similar. 
Present. 
That I may have, c he or ch f io abbia 

That thou mayst have, cite tu dbbi or abbia 

That lie may have, c h' egli abbia. 

That we may have, che noi abbidmo 

That you may have, che voi abbiate 

That they may have, cti eglino abbiano. 

First Preterimperfect. 

That I had, * che or ck' io asessi 
That thou hadst, c he tu avessi 

That he had, cK egli avesse. 

That we had, che noi avessimo 

That you had, che voi aveste 

That they had, cK eglino accuser q. 

Second Preterimperfect. 
I should have, *io avrei 

Thou shouldst have, tu avresti 

He should have, egli avrebbe. 

We should have, noi avremmo 

You 



Of the VERBS. 77 

You should have, voi avreste 

'They should have, eglino avrebbero. 

N. B. Averei, averesli, averebbe or averw, averSmmo, 
averiste, averibbero, or averiano, are grown out of use ; 
especially as this tense is always like the future of the in- 
dicative, changing ro iiito rei. 

PRETERPERFECT. 

That I have had, ch' io dbbia avido 

Thou hast had, che tu dbbia avuto 

He has had, ch' egli dbbia avuto. 

We have had, che noi abbidmo avido 

You have had, che voi abbidte avuto 

They have had, ch' eglino dbbiano avido. 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the first preterimperfect subjunctive 
and the participle. 

If I had had, se io avessi avido 

Thou hadst had, se tu avessi avuto 

He had had, s' egli avesse avido. 

We had had, se noi avessimo avido 

You had had, se voi aveste avido 

They had had, s' eglino avessero avido. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

It is compounded of the second preterimperfectsubjunc- 
tive and the participle. 

I should have had, io avrci avuto 

Thou shouldst have had, tu avresti avuto 

He should have had, egli avrebbe avido. 

We should have had, noi airemmo avido 

You should have had, voi avreste avido 

They should have had, eglino avrebbero avido. 

Future. 
It is compounded of the future of the indicative and the 
participle. 

When I shall have had, -quand' io avrb avido 

Thou shalt have had, iu arrai aiido 

t* 6 YVh«3j 



78 Of the VERBS. 

When he shall have had, quand'egJi avra aiid6. 
We shall have had, not airJmo arutt> 

You shall have had, vpi air etc aviUo 

They shall have had, e^Ihwavrhmo avuto.. 




INFINITIVE. 
Present. 
To have, avere. 

Preterperfect. 
To have had, aver avuto. 

Participles. 
it j S avulo, avuta ; plural, avuti, 

9 I avirfe. 

Gerunds. 



Having, or in having, 



Having had, avendo avuto. 

* Jj * We often use the verb avtre, with the particle da 
or a, instead of the verb dovcre ; example, I ought to do, 
ho da fare ; being to speak, avdndo a dire : instead of 
dtvof&re; dovfndo dire. 

By the generality of tenses of the verb avere, you 
plainly see how necessary it is to be perfect master of 
them in order to attain a speedy knowledge of all the rest, 
since there is such an entire conformity between them, 
except in the present, preter-imperfect definite, and the 
subjunctive. 

*** Upon our first learning the Italian, the interro- 
gation creates some difficulty ; and we are at a loss how 
to express shall I have! have we? hast thou? has he? 
yet there is nothing more easy; for it is hut, putting 
the pronouns personal after the verbs, as in English, 
and we shall never mistake in saying avrb io ? abblarno 
noj? haitu? ha egli? And if we would express our- 
selves 



Of the VERBS. 79 

selves with greater elegance and ease, we ought not to 
mention the pronouns at all; example, shall I have this? 
avro questol does he do well? fa bene? shall we sing? 
canteremo? 

When we speak by negation, we must use the word 
non ; example, I have not, non ho ; you must not know, 
non dovete conoseere ; thou hast not, non hai; he has not, 
non ha. 

In the like manner, to express, I have some, thou hast 
some, he has some, say, ne ho, ne hai, ne ha, ne abbi- 
amo, &c. We may also make an abbreviation, and say, 
nho, n'hai, nha, &c. 

And to express, we have none, thou hast noue, he has 
none, &c. you may say, non ne ho, non tie hai, non ne ha, 
or non nho, non n'hai, non riha. 

But to express, have I none] hast thou- none? we 
say, non ne ho io ? non ne hai tu ? or non nho to ? non 
nhai tu? 



Conjugation of the auxiliary Verb essere a to be, 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

I -am, io sono, or sono 

Thou art, tu set, set 

He is, egli e, e. 

We are, noi si amo, siamo 

You are, voi siete, or sete, siete 

They are, eglino sono, sono. 

Preterimperfect, 

I was, io ero or tro 

Thou wert, tu eri,- tri 

He was, egli era, ■ era. 

We were, noi eramo, or eravamo, eramo, or cravdmo 

You were, voi, traie, or eravate, erdte, or cravtit* 

They were, eglino erano, . erano. 

d 6 ' Preter- 



tO filly 


fii 


tufusti, or fbsii, 


fusti 


eglifu, 


/«• 


noifvj/imo, 


fummo 


voifuste, or fbste. 


Jbste 


eglino furono, 


furono 



80 Of the VERBS. 

PrETERPERFECT DEFINITE. 

I was, 
Thou wert, 
He was, 
We were , 
You were, 
They were, 

Preterperfect. 

It is compounded of the present indicative, io sono, and 
its own participle stdto or stata. 

I have been, io sbno stdto 

Thou hast been, tu sei stato 

He has been, tgli e stdto. 

We have been, noi siiimo stdti 

You have been, voi siete stdti 

They have been, eglino sono stdti. 

If we speak in the feminine, we must say, sono stata, 
sei stata, t stdta ; shhno state, siete state, sono state; and 
so in all the compound tenses. 

Preterpluperfect. 



I had been, 


io ero stdto 


Thou hadst been, 


tu eri stdto 


He had been, 


tgli era stdto. 


We had been, 


not trdmo stati, or eravdmo stdti 


You had been, 


loierdte stati, or eravdtt stati 


They had been, 


tglino erano stdti. 




Future. 


I shall or will be, 


to sard 


Thou shalt be, 


tu sardi 


He shall be, 


tgli sard. 


'We shall or will be, 


noi sartmo 


Yoa shall be, 


voi sarete 


They shall be, 


eglino sardnno. 




IMPERA- 



O* the VERBS. 81 



IMPERATIVE. 
Be thou, sii tu, or sia tu 

Let him be, sia egli. 

Let us be, siamo noi 

Be you, slate toi 

Let them be, sidno, siino, or skno eglinc. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
That I may be, che or cliio sia 

Thou mayst be, che tu sia 

He may be, ch'egli sia. 

We may be, che noi siamo 

You may be, che vol sidte 

They may be, th'tglinosiano, siino, orsieiw, 

First Preterimperfect. 
That I were or might be, che or cliio fbssi, or fussi 

Thou weit, che tufossi, or fussi 

He were, ch' egli fosse, orfussc. 

We were, che noijossimo or fussittw 

You were, che voi foste, or Juste 

They were> ch' eglinofc$$ero,orfussero, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should cr would be, w sarei 

Thou shouldst be, tu saresti 

lie should be, egli sartbbe. 

We should be, noi sarhnmo 

You'sliould be, voi sartsie 

They should be,. egihio sarebhero t ox sarchbeno, 

Preterperfect, 

It is compounded of the present conjunctive, io sia, and 
the participle stdto or sidta, of the same verb. 
That I have been, che or cfiHo sia stato t orstdla 

Thou hast been, che fu sia stdto 

He has> been, c he cgli sia stdto, 

Th,\ 



S2 Of the VERBS. 

That we have been, che noi sidmd stdti, or state 

You have been, che voi sidte stdti 

They have been, ch'eglmo siano stdti, 

PRETERPLUPERFECT. 

It is compounded of the first preterimperfect subjunc- 
tive, and the participle. 

If I had been, se io fbssi stdto 

Thou hadst been, « se tu fbssi stdto 

He had been, s egli fosse stdto. 

We had been, se noifbssimo stdti 

You had been, se voifbste stdti 

They had been, s'eglinofbssero stdti. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the second preterimperfect subjunc- 
tive and the participle. 
I should or would have been, io sarti stdto 
Thou shouldst have been, tu saresti stdto 
He should have been, egli sarebbe stdto. 

We should have been, noi saremmo stdti 

You should have been, voi sareste stdti 

They should have been, tglino sarcbbero stati. 

Future. 

When I shall have been, quand' io sard stdto 

Thou shalt have been, tu sardi sidlo 

He shall have been, egli sard stdto 

We shall have been, noi saremo stdti 

You shall have been, voi sareie stdti 

They shall have been, eglinosar anno stdti. 



INFINITIVE. 
To be, essere. 

Preterperfect. 
To have been, essere stdto. 

Participle. 

Been, stdto, for the masculine; stdta, for the feminine. 

Gerunds, 



Or the VERBS, S3 



Gerunds. 

Cessendo, or sen do ; or colV essere ^ 
Being, or in being, < nelV essere. 

{in essere. 
Having been, essendo stdto. 



The verb essere has no need of any other auxiliary verb j 
and we must never put any of the tenses of the verb avere 
before the participle stdto ; as, I have been, you must say 
sbno stdto, and not ho stdto ; 1 had been, ero stdto, and 
not avevo stdto. And this rule must be particularly at- 
tended to, because here it is that foreigners are apt to make 
blunders. 




Of Conjugations. 

T^HE Italian verbs have three different terminations in 
the infinitive : to wit, 

f amdre, cantdfe, saltdre. 
\ temere, credere, godere. 
( sentire, dor mire, mentire. 
For which reason, I shall use but three conjugations. 
Amdre shall serve as a rule for the verbs in are. 
Credere for the verbs in ere, 
Sentire for the verbs in ire. 

It is proper to observe here, that the infinitives of verbs, 
derived from the Latin, retain the same quantity as they 
have in Latin. I explain myself: the verb cant are, in La- 
tin, has the second syllable long: and. so it has the same 
syllable long in Italian. On the contrary, credere, cres- 
cere, having the second syllable short in Latin have it also 
short iii Italian. If you observe this rule ill pronouncing 
infinitives, you will avoid the mistakes which most learners 
of the Italian language are apt to commit. Yet this rule 
lias some exceptions, 

Easy 



S4 Of the VERBS. 



Eafy method of learning to conjugate, the Verbs, 

J HAVE reduced all the tenses of the verbs to seven, 
four of which are general, and have the same termi' 
nations in all the verbs; and the other three, by changing 
the one leiter in the third person, may be likewise made 
general, and all the conjugations reduced to one. 

The general tenses are the preterimperfect, the future, 
the first and second preterimperfect subjunctive. 

The preterimperfect is terminated, in all the verbs, in 
vo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano. 

The future indicative is terminated in 
re, rai, ra ; rcmo, rtte, ranno. 

The imperfect subjunctive in 
ssi, ssi, sse ; ssimo, ste, ssero* 

The second imperfect in 
rei, resti, rtbbe ; rhnmo, reste, rtblero. 

Change re of the verbs amcire, credere, seniire (and 
generally of all the other verbs ) into vo, and rb into ssi 
and rei, &c. and you will find the imperfect, the future 
indicative, the first and second imperfect subjunctive of all 
the other verbs, without any exception ; which will be of 
great ease to the learner. 

* # * Note, the future, and the second imperfect, of the 
verbs in are are terminated in erb and erti, and not in arb 
and arei. Therefore, in these tenses, after having made 
thechangeof re into rb for the future, and into rei for the 
second imperfect, you must also change the vowel that pre- 
cedes rb and rei, and say amerb, amerti; and so of the 
other verbs terminated in are. 

The present indicative, the present definite, and the 
present subjunctive, are the oniy tenses you have to 
learn; for the other four, that I have given above, are ge- 
neral, 

IB 






Of the VERBS. 85 

In order to form those three tenses, you must cut oft" 
the last syllables of the indefinite, and then change the 
last vowel which remains. For the present indicative, 
you change it into o through all the conjugations, so that of 
amdre, credere, sentire, you make amb, credo, scnto. For' 
the preterperfect definite of the indicative, you change it 
into ai in the first conjugation ; thus of amdre you form 
amdi ; but when you come to words of the second conjuga- 
tion, you change it into ei\ thus of credere you make cre- 
dei; verbs of the third conjugation have it changed into 
j; thus, sentire makes sentj. As for the present subjunc- 
tive, the vowel that remains is changed into i in the first 
conjugation, and into a in the others; thus, ami, creda, 
senta. 

Present. 

are, o, i, a, idmo, ate, ano. 
ere, o, 1, e, idmo, ete, ono. 
ire, o, i, e, idmo, ite, ono. 
*,* Take notice, that in the singular you are to change 
the letter in the third person only. 

Preterperfect definite indicative, 

are, ai, tisti, b, ammo, dste, drono. 

ere, ei, teti, e, emmo, este, erono. 

ire, j, isti, 1, immo, iste, irono. 

Present subjunctive. 

are, i, i, i, idmo, idte, ino. 
ere, a, a, a, idmo, idte, ano. 
ire, a, a, a, idmo, idle, ano. 
*** Observe, that, through all the conjugations, there 
is no change made in the singular. 

The participles are, 
are, dt.o, dta, dli, ate. 
ere, ido, ■ ta, uti, ute. 
ire, ito, it a, Hi, He* 

Change 



So Of the VERBS. 

Change the termination, are, ere, ire, with the letters 
and syllables opposite to thera, and you will find the present, 
the preterperfect deiinite, and the present subjunctive, oi" 
all the regular verbs. 



First conjugation, of the Verbs In are. 



INDICATIVE. 



V I shall put 


the 


pronouns personal to, tit, egli, &c, 


no more. 




Present. 


I love, 




dm-o 


Thou lovest, 




am-i 


He loves, 




am-tb. 


We love, 




am-idmo 


You love, 




am-ate 


They love, 




dm-ano. 




PRETERIMPERFECT. 


I did love, 




am-dvo, or am-dva, 


Thou didst love, 




am-dvi 


He did love, 




am-dva. 


We did love, 




am-avdmo 


You did love, 




am-avute 


They did love, 




am-dvano. 



Preterperfect Definite. 

I loved, am-di 

Thou Iovedst, am-dsti 

He loved, am-o. 

We loved, am-dmmo 

You loved, am-dste 

They loved, am-drcno. 

The poets often use amdr and amdro, for amdrono ; and 
so in all the verbs in are. 

Prefer- 



TPIi,** f an 



Of the VERBS, $7 

Preterperfect. 



This tense is composed of the participle a-mdto t and the 
present indicative of the auxiliary verb averc, 

1 have loved, ho am-dto 

Tliou hast loved, hdi am-ato 

He has loved, ha am-dto. 

We have loved, ubbidmo am-dto 

You have loved, avete am-dto 

They have loved, hdnno am-dto, 

Preterpluperf ect. 

This tense is composed of the participle amdtc, and the 
imperfect of the auxiliary verb avere. 
I had loved, avevo am-dto 

Thou hadst loved, avevi am-dto 

He had loved, aveva am : dto. 

We had loved, avevdmo am-dto 

You had loved, avevdte am-dto 

They had loved, avevano am-dto. 

Future. 



I shall or will love, 


am-ero 


Thou shalt love, 


um-erdi 


He shall love, 


am-erd. 


We shall love, 


am- ere mo 


You shall love, 


am-erete 


They shall love, 


am-erdnno 



Formerly they used amarb, but now they write amero, 
and so of all the verbs in are. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Love thou, dm-a iu 

Let him love, ami egli 

Let us love, am-idmo noi 

Love you, om-dte. voi 

Let them love, amino eglino. 

OPTA- 



88 Of the VERBS. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

That I may love, che or cliio tm-i 

Thou mayest love, c he tu ani-i 

He may love, che or ch'egli dm-i. 

We may love, che am-idmo 

You may love, che am-idte 

They may love, che or cliam-ino. 

N. B. You may put the pronouns personal iu the present 
of this tense, i>, tu, egli, to distinguish the persons, which 
are all terminated in the same manner : but it is superfluous 
to put them in the plural, the persons being sufficiently dis- 
tinguished by their terminations. The same rule is appli- 
cable to the following preterimperfect, and to the present 
optative and subjunctive of the second and third conjuga- 
tion. 

First Preterimperfect. 

That I might or could love, che or ch'io am-dssi 

Thou mightest love, che tu am-dssi 

He might love, che or ch'egli am-dsse. 

We might love, che am-dssimo 

You might love, che am-dste 

They rmght love, che or tliam-dssero, 

*** When we find the conjunction si before the indi- 
cative imperfect, we must use the imperfect of the subjunc- 
tive or optative ; as, if I did love, se amdssi, and not se 
amdvo; if I had, se avessi, and not se avevo: and so in 
all the verbs, because, when we speak by way of wish or 
desire, we should make use of the subjunctive or opta- 
tive. Young beginners are apt to transgress against this 
rule. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should love. am-erei _ 

Thou shouldest love, am-cresii 

He should love, am-erzblc. 

We 



Of the VERBS. 89 

We should love, am-eremmo 

You should love, am-ertste 

They should love, am-erebbero. 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the present 
subjunctive of the auxiliary verb az'ere. 
That I have loved, c he or ch'io abbia am-dto 

Thou hast loved, che tu dbbia am-dto 

He has loved, che or ch'egli abbia am-ato. 

We have loved, che noi abbidmo am-ato 

You have loved, che vol abbidte am-dto 

- They have loved, cheoxclieglinodbbianoam-dto. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the first pre- 
terimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb avert. 

If I had loved, se io avessi am-dto 

Thou badst loved, se tu avessi am-dto 

He had loved, se or s'egli avesse am-dto. 

We had loved, se azessimo am-dto 

You had loved, se aveste am-dto 

They had loved, se avesscro am-dto. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the second 
pre terimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb were, 
I should have loved, avrri dm-dto 

Thou shouldst have loved, avresti am-dto 
He should have loved, avrtbbt am-dto. 

We should have loved, imrimmo am-dto 

You should have loved, avreste am-dto 

They should have loved, avrebbero am-dto. 

Future. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the future 
indicative of the auxiliary verb avere. 

When I shall have loved, qua?id' arrb am-dto 
Thou shalt have loved, avrdi am-dto 

When 



90 Of the VERBS. 

When he shall have loved, quand' avra am-dto 

We shall have loved, avremo am-ato 

You shall have loved, avrete am-ato 

They shall have loved, avrdnno am-ato 



INFINITIVE. 
To love, am-dre. 
To have loved, avere am-ato. 

Participles. 
Loved, am-dto, masculine, Loved, am-dta, feminine. 

Gerunds. 

r • • i • C am-dndo, coil' am-dre, con am-dre, 

Loving, or m loving, «; „, ' , . % 

° c I netl am-are, in am-are. 

Having loved. aoendo am-dto. 



Remarks on the Verbs in 



are. 



A LL the verbs ending in are, are conjugated in the 
same manner as amdre ; except four, which only devi- 
ate from this rule in some of their tenses; they are an- 
ddre, dare, fare, stare. 

You will find their conjugations after the regular verbs. 

%* Note, the verbs terminating, in the infinitive, in 
care, and gdre, lake an h in those tenses where the c and g* 
would otherwise meet with the vowels e or? ; that is to say, 
in the present indicative, imperative, optative, future indi- 
cative, and the second prei erimperfect subjunctive; which 
are the tenses I shall give you by way of example in the 
verbs pec i are , and pogdre-. 

Peccdre, to sin ; present, pecc-o, pecc hi, (and mipceci), 
pecc-a, pecc-hidmo, pecc-dtc, pecc-ano, I sin, &c. 

FvAiwe, pecc -herd, I shall sin; pecc-herdi. pecc-herd, pecc- 
hertmo, pecc-hertte, pecc-herdnno, and not pecc-erb, pecc- 
erdi, &cc. 

Imperative, pecc-a, pecc-hi ; pecc-hidmo, pecc-die, pecc- 
hhio, sin thou, let him sin, &c. 

Optative, che pecc-hi, pecc-hi ,ptcc-hi ; pecc-hidmo, pecc- 
hidie, pecc-hino, that I may sin, &c. 

Pecc- 



Of the VERBS. 91 

Peec-herli, I should sin ; pecc-heresti, pecc-herebbe, 
peccheremmo, pecc-hereste, ptcc-herebbero. 

Pagan:, to pay, present, pdg-o, pdg-hi, pdg-a ; pag- 
hidmo, pag-dte, pdg-ano, I pay, &c. 

Future, pag-herb, pag-herdi, pag-herd ; pag-heremo, pa- 
gherete, pag-herdnno, I shall or will pay, &c. 

Imperative, pdg-a, pdg-hi ; pag-hidmo, pag-dte, J m Q~ 
kino, pay thou, let him pay, &c. 

Optative, che pdg-hi, pdg-hi, pdghi ; pag-hidmo, pagin- 
ate, pdghino, that I may pay, &c. 

The second preterimperfect, pag-herci, pag-lieresti, pa- 
gkerebbe ; pag-keremmo, pag-hereste,pag-herebbero, &c. 
that I should pay, &c. 

The other tenses are conjugated like amdre. 

Conjugation of the verbs passive. 

Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it is ne- 
cessary to know, that the verbs passive are nothing more 
than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with the 
verb essere: example, 

Conjugation oj the verb passive, essere amato, to be loved. 



INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

I am loved, sbno am-dto 
Thou art loved, set am-dto 

II e is loved, e am-dto 
We are loved, sidmo am-dti 
You are loved, siete am-dti 
They are loved, sono am-dti. 

Preterimperfect. 

I was loved, ero am-dto 

Thou wert loved, eri am-dto 

He was loved, era am-dto 

We were loved, eracdmo am-dti 

You were loved, eravdte am-dti 

They were loved, erano am-dti. 



Pre- 



92 Of the VERBS. 

PRETERPERFECT DEFINITE. 

I was loved, fid am-dto 

Thou wert loved, fbsti am-ato 

He was loved, fit am-ato. 

We were loved, fiimmo am-dti 

You were loved, fbste am-dti 

They were loved, furono am-dti, 

PRETERPERFECT. 

I have been loved, sono stdto am-ato 

Thou hast been loved, sei stdto am-dto 

He has been loved, e stdto am-dto. 

We have been loved, sidmo stdti am-dti 

You have been loved, siete stdti am-dti 

They have been loved, sono stdti am-dti. 

Preterpluperfect. 

I had been loved, tro stdto am-dto 

Thou hadst been loved, tri stdto am-dto 

He had been loved, era stdto am-dto. 

We had been loved, ercvdmo stdti am-dti < 

You had been loved, ercvdte stdti am-dti 

They had been loved, erano stdti am-dti. 

Future. 

I shall or will be loved, sard am-dto 

Thou shalt be loved, sardi am-dto 

He shall be loved, sard am-dto. 

We shall be loved, saremo am-dti 

You shall be loved, sareie am-dti 

They shall be loved, scrdnno am-dti. 

I shall go no farther with the conjugation, because it is 
only a repetition of the verb sono, joined to the participle 
am-dto. 

%,* Observe, that the participles and adjectives change 

their gender and number after the tenses of the verb tssere ; 

example, 

T v , C sono am-dto, for the masculine 7 . , 

I am loved, < ,. f tt r • • } singular. 

' £ sono am-ata, lor the feminine J b 

We 



O* the VERBS. 93 

%X r i j f siaiM am-dti, for the niasc. 1 . . 

We are loved, j ^ y^JJ for ^ fem { plural. 

VlSS 1 for ^singular. 
You are learned, V *'. , * /,.,. ' I 

(SS } for the plural. 
Observe, that in the construction of the passive, the 
Italians make use of da or dal, and per, by, which answer 
to the French dti and par ; with this difference, that the 
latter more frequently use par than du, whereas the for- 
mer generally put da or dot : thus they say, Pietro £ ama- 
to dal principe, and not per il principe ; which learners 
are apt to confound. 



Second conjugation, 


of the Verbs in ere. 




INDICATIVE. 


1 


Present. 


I believe, 
Thou believest, 




cred-o. 




cred-i. 


He believes, 




cred-e. 


We believe, 




cred-iamo. 


You believe, 
They believe, 




cred-ete. 




cred-ono. • 




Preterimperfect. 


I did believe, 




cred-evo. 


Thou didst believe, 


cred-evi. 


He did believe, 




cred-eva. 


We did believe, 




cred-evamo* 


You did believe, 




cred evate. 


They did believe, 




cred-evano. 


Preterperfect Definite. 


I believed, 




cred-ei or cred-etti. 


Thou believcdst, 




cred-esti. 


He believed, 




crede, or cred-ette. 


We believed, 




cred-emmo. 


You believed, 




cred-este. 


SThey believed, 




cred-erono, or cred-htero. 




£ 


Preter 



94. Of the. VERBS. 

PRETERPERFECT^ 

I have believed, ho cred-uto. 

Thou hast believed, hdi cred-uto. 

He has believed, \ha cred-uto. 

We have believed, abbidtno cred-uto. 

You have believed, avete cred-uto. 

They have believed, hdnno cred-uto. 

PRETERPLUPERFECT. 

I had believed, avevo cred-uto. 

Thou hadst believed, avivi cred-uto. 

He had believed, aveva cred-uto. 

We had believed, avevdmo cred-uto* 

You had believed, avevate cred-uto. 

They had believed, avevano cred-uto. 

Future. 

I shall or will believe, cred-ero. 

Thou shalt believe, cred-erdi. 

He shall believe, cred-erct. 

We shall believe, cred-eremo. 

You shall believe, ered-erete. 

They shall believe, cred-erdnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 
Believe thou, cred-i. 

Let him believe, cred-a. 

Let us believe, ered-idmo. 

Believe you, cred-ete. 

Let them believe, cred-ano. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 
That I may believe, che or ch'fo cred-a.. 

Thou mayst believe, che tu cred-a. 
He may believe, che or ch'egti cred-a. 

We may believe, che cred-idmo. 

Youroay believe, che ered-idte. 

They may believe, che cred-ano, 

PRETER- 



Of the VERBS. 



Preterimperfect. 



That I might or could believe, 
Thou mightest believe, 
He might believe, 
We might believe, 
You might believe, 
Thoy might believe, 



the cred-essi. 
che cred-essi, 
che cred-esse. 
che cred-essimo. 
che cred-este. 
che cred-essero. 



Second Preterimperfect. 



I should believe, 
Thou shouldst believe, 
He should believe, 
We sh^e'd believe, 
You should believe, 
They should believed, 



cred-erei. 

cred-eresti. 

cred-erebbe. 

cred-ertmmo. 

cred-ereste. 

cred-erebbero t orcred-erebbon$, 



Preterperfect. 



That I have believed, 
Thou hast believed, 
He has believed, 
We have believed, 
You have believed, 



che or cKio dbbia cred-uto. 
che tu dbbia cred-uto. 
che or ch'egli dbbia cred-uto, 
ch'abbidmo cred-uto, 
ch'abbidte cred-uto. 



They have believed, ch'ebbiano cred-uto. 
Preterpluperfect. 



If I had believed, 
Thou -hadst believed, 
He had believed, 
We had believed, 
You had believed, 
They had believed, 



se io avessi cred-uto. 
se tu avessi cred-uto, 
se aveste cred-uto. 
se av'essimo cred-uto. 
se aveste cred-uto. 
se avessero cred-uto. 



Second Preterpluperfect. 



I should have belie* ed, 
Thou shouldst have believed, 
He should have believed, 
We should have believed, 
You should have believed, 
They should have believed, 



avrei cred-uto. 
avresti cred-uto. 
avrebbe cred-uto. 
avremmo cred-uto. 
avreste cred-uto. 
avrebbero cred-uto. 



I 2 



FUTURI. 



9<5 Of the VERBS. 

Future. 

When I shall have believed, quand' avro cred-uto. 

Thou shalt have believed, avrai cred-uto* 

,He shall have believed, avra cred-ido. 

We shall have believed, avremo cred-uto. 

You shall have believed, avrete-cred-uto. 

They shall have believed, avrdnno cred-uto. 



INFINITIVE. 
To believe, credere. 

Gerund. 
Believing, or in believing, cred-endo, col cred-ere, &c. 

Participle. 
Believed, cred-uto, masc. Believed, cred-ida, fern. 

Conjugate in like manner the following verbs, which are 
the only verbs in ere that follow the rule of cred-ere, 

*,* Note, that all the regular verbs in ere have two 
terminations in the preterperfect definite, as they make 

ei, est i, e ; vmmo, este, erono, 

or, 

etti, esti,ette; emmo, este, ettero. 

Infinitive. Preterp. Def. Participle. 

'beat, Uttere, ei or etti uto, 

drink, bevere or here ei etti uto, 

yield, cedere & etti uto, 

cleave,/ewrfere ** etti uto, 

fret, fremere ei etti uto, 

groan, g'emere ei etti uto. 



To 



enjoy, godere ei etti uto, 

reap, mietere ei etti uto. 

feed, pdscere ei etti uto. 



^haug, pendere 



ei etti uto. 





Of the 


VERBS 




\ 


Infinitive. 


Preterp 


. def. 




Participle. 


~ vomit, 


recere 




ei or 


etti 


iito. 


receive, 


ruevere 




ei 


etti 


iito. 


shine again, 


riliicere 




ei without 


a participle. 


sit down, 


sedere 




ei 


etti 


uto. 


shine, 


splendere 




ei 


etti 


uto. 


j slide, 


serpere 




ei 


etti 


uto. 


murmur, 
1 fear, 


st rider e 




ei 


etti 


uto. 


temere 




ei 


etti 


uto. 


Lsell, 


vendere 




ei 


etti 


uto. 



# 



To 



All the other verbs in ere are irregular. 

The regular verbs end with two vowels in the pre- 
terperfect definite ; as, am-ai, cred-ei, sent-ii or sent-j. 

All the regular verbs, in the same tense, end with the 
vowel i : and this vowel i is preceded by a consonant ; as, 
ebbi, credetti, scrissi. Thus credere, which makes credei 
and credetti, is both regular and irregular. 

You will find, in the chapter of the irregular verbs in 
ere short, a very easy manner of learning the irregularity of 
the verbs, which I have reduced to one general rule. 



Third Conjugation oj the verbs in ire. 



INDICATIVE. 





Present. 


I hear, 


sent-o. 


Thou nearest, 


sent-i. 


He hears, 


shit-e. 


We hear, 


sent-iamo, 


You hear, 


sent-ite. 


They hear, 


senUono, 




PRETERPERFECT. 


I did hear, 


sent-ivo. 


Thou didst hear, 


sent-ivi. 


He did hear, 


sent-iva* 


We did hear, 


sent-ivamo, 


You did hear, 


sent-ivdte. 


They did hear, 


sent-ivano. 



PRI< 



$S Of the VERBS. 

PRETERPERFECT DEFINITE, 
I heard, sent-J. 

Thou heardst, sent-istL 

He heard, sent-i. 



We heard, 


sent-immo. 


You heard, 


sent-iste. 


They heard, 


sent-irono. 




Preterperfect. 


I have heard, 


ho sent-ito. 


Thou hast heard, 


Mi sent-ito. 


He has heard, 


ha sent-ito. 


We have heard, 


abbidmo sent-ito. 


You have heard, 


avtte sent-ito. 


They have heard, 


hdnno sent-ito. 




Preterpluperfect. 


I had heard, 


avevo sent-ito. 


Thou hadst heard, 


avivi sent-ito. 


He had heard, 


avivd sent-ito. 


We had heard, 


avevamo sent-ito. 


You had heard, 


aievate sent-Uo. 


They had heard, 


avevano sent-itoo 




Future. 


I shall or will hear 


, sent-irb. 


Thou shalt hear, 


sent-irdL 


He shall hear, 


sefit-ird. 


We shall hear, 


sent-iremo. 


You shall hear, 


sent-irete. 


They shall hear, 


sent-iranno* 




IMPERATIVE, 


Hear thou, 


sent-i. 


Let him hear, 


sent-a. 


Let us hear, 


sent-idmo. 


Hear you, 


sent-ite. 


Let them hear, 


sent-ano. 



OPTA- 



Of the VERBS. 99 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

That I may hear, che, or ch'io sent-a. 

Thou may'st hear, che tustnt-a. 

He may hear, ch'egli sent-a. 

We may hear, che sent-iamo. 

You may hear, che sent-idte. 

They may hear, che stnt-ano, 

Preterimperfect. 

That I could or might hear, che sent-issi. 

Thou mightest hear, che sent-issn 

He might hear, che sent-isse. 

We might hear, che sent-issimo. 

You might hear, c he sent-isie. 

They might hear, che sent-issero. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should hear, sent-ivei. 

Thou shouldst hear, seni-iresti. 

He should hear, sent irebbe. 

We should hear, sent-iremmo. 

You should hear, sent-ireste. 

They should hear, sent-irebbero, 

Preterimperfect. 

That I have heard, che, or ch' to oibbia sent-ito. 

Thou hast heard, che tu tibbia sent-ito. 

He has heard, ch'egli ctbbia sent-ito. 

We have heard, ch' abbidtno sent-ito. 

You have heard, ch' abbiate sent-ito. 

They have heard, ch' abbiano sent-ito, 

Preterpluperfect. 

If I had heard, se io ave'ssi-scnt-ito. 

Thou hadst heard, se tu avessi sent-ito. 

He had heard, se egli avem sent-ito, 

G4 If 



i©o 



Of the VERBS. 



If we had heard, se avessimo sent-it&, 

You had heard, se aveste smt-ito. 

They had heard, se. avessero sent-ito* 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
I should have heard avrei sent-ito. 

Thou shouidst have heard, avresti sent-ito. 

He should have heard, 

We should have heard, 

You should have heard, 

They should have heard, 



avrebbe sent-ito. 
avremmo sent-ito, 
avreste sent-ito. 
azrebbero sent-ito. 



Future. 

When I shall have heard, quand' «r>ro sent-ito. 

Thou shall have heard, avrai sent-ito* 

He shall have heard, avrd sent-ito. 

We shall have heard, avrimo sent-ito* 

You shall have heard, avrete sent-ito* 

They shall have heard, air anno sent-ito. 



INFINITIVE. 

To hear, sent-ire. Participle, heard, sent-ito. Gerund, 
in hearing, sent-endo. 

Conjugate after the same manner the following verbs, 
which are the only verbs in ire, that conform to the rule of 
sent-ire. 

Pres. Pret. def. Particip. 

apro aprj aperto. 

bollo bollj bollito. 

consento consent) consentito. 

convlrto 

copra 

cucio 

dormo 

fuggfl 

mento 

mbro 

pkrto 

mi pinto mipentj pentitost 

§dtgo 



To-! 



Infinitive. 


'open, 


aprire 


boil, 


bollire 


consent. 


c&nsentire 


convert; 


convertire 


cover, 


coprire 


sow, 


cucire 


sleep, 


dormire 


%, 


fuggtre 


lie, 


mentire 


die, 


morirc 


depart, 


partire 


repent, 


pentirsi 


ascend, 


salire 



convert) convertito* 



coprj 

cucj 

dormj 

fuggj 
mentj 

morj 

partj 



coperto. 

cucito. 

dormito. 

fuggito. 

mentito. 

morto. 

partito. 



$a:j 



salito. 



T* 



Ow the VERBS. 



1<V1 



Infin 


• 


Pres. * 


Pr. def. 


"follow, 


seguire 


seguo 


seguj 


serve, 


servire 


servo 


servj 


suffer, 


soffrire 


sbffro 


soffrj 


«{ go out, 


sortire 


sbrto 


sortj 


| dress, 


vcstire 


vesto 


vestj 


1 go out, 


uscire 


esco 


uscj 


Lhear, - 


udire. 


6 do 


udj 



Part. 

segutto* 

servito* 

sofferto. 

sortito. 

ve&tito* 

uscito, 

udito. 

All the other verbs in ire are irregular in the present 
tense, which they make in isco ; as you will see in the 
chapter of irregulars in ire: example. 

diger-ire diger-isco diger-j diger-ito, &c. 
langu-ire langu-isco langu-j langu-ito, &c. 

N* B. When once you know how to conjugate these 
five verbs, avere t essere, amare, credere, senttre, you may 
be said to be master of almost all the rest, the termina- 
tion of the tenses and persons being the same, especially 
in the regular verbs : but in order to be perfect in your 
conjugations, it is not sufficient to know those verbs in the 
order of the tenses; that is, beginning with the present 
indicative, and proceeding to the preterimperfect, in the 
manner as children do ; but it is necessary to know each 
tense of the indicative, and optative, &c. by heart. Your 
teachers will instruct you upon this head ; but if they should 
neglect to do it, or if you learn Italian without a master, 
your way must be to conjugate two or three of those verbs, 
or all five, at the same time. This will enable you to 
learn them with greater ease, to retain them better in your 
memory, and to express yourself more readily. In order 
to conjugate the two auxiliary verbs together, you may say, 
for instance, 

Ho un cavallo, e ne sono contmto. 

I have a horse, and am satisfied with it. 

And thus you may exercise yourself through every tense 
and person of the whole conjugation. 

With regard to the other three, you will receive a 
great benefit, if you conjugate them by other similar 
verbs. For instance, I buy my goods, sell them cheap, 
and serve my friends faithfully ; compro le mie mercan- 
zie t le vmdo a oubn mercdto, or prezzo, e servo con- 
Z5 fedeltd 



.102 Of the VERBS. 

fedeltd i mieiamici. The verb comprdre is conjugated like- 
amdre, vendere like credere, servire like sentire. If you 
enter upon this practice, you will find that in a very little 
time you will be able to speak and write with great ease ; 
for in the Italian language they write as they speak, and 
speak as they write. 



Of the IRREGULAR VERBS in are. 

'J'HERE are in each conjugation some verbs which do 
not conform to the common rule, and on that account 
are called irregulars. 

There are but four verbs of the first conjugation, 
which in some of their tenses depart from the rule of the 
verb amdre, viz. 

Anddre, dare, fare, stare. 

The verb fare is, properly speaking, an irregular of 
the second conjugation, since it is only the Latin verb 
facere syncopated or abridged. Yet I place it here in com- 
pliance with, the method of other grammarians. 

Observe that these verbs are irregular ; some in the 
present, some in the preterdefmite, and others in the fu- 
ture tense. 

{** Remember also that when a verbis irregular in the 
present of the indicative, it retains its irregularity in the 
imperative and present of the subjunctive. 

fit Observe farther that, the first and second person 
plural of the present tense are always regular. 



Of the Verb andare. 

TTHE Verb anddre is irregular no where but in the pre- 
sent tense. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present, 
* I go, v/ido or w. 

Thou goest, vdi. 

He goes, va, 

* In the. ''subsequent pages, the tenses that have a slat are the only ir- 
regular ones : the others art regular. 



Of the VERBS. m 

We go, andidmo. 

You go, anddte. 

They go, vdnno. 

PRETERIMPERFECT. 

I did go, thou didst go, he did go^ we did go, you did 
go, they did go 

Anddvo, anddvi, anddva; andavdmo, andavdte, andd* 
wano» 

Preterperfect Definite. 

I went, thou wentest, he went; we went, you went, they 
went. 

Anddi, anddsti, andb ; anddmmo, anddste, anddrono. 

Preterperfect. 
I have gone, so no anddto. 

Thou hast gone, sei anddto* 

He has gone, e anddto. 

We have gone, sidmo anddti. 

You have gone, siete anddti. 

They have gone, sbno anddti. 

If we are to spe^k in the feminine, we should say, 
sbno anddta, sei anddta, e anddta } sidmo anddte, siete an~ 
date, sbno anddte. 

I was gone, thou wast gone, he was gone ; we were 
gone, you were gone, they were gone. 

Preter pluperfect. 

I had gone, thoa hadst gone, he had gone ; we had 
gone, you had gone, they had gone. 

Ero anddta, eri anddto, era anddto ; erdmo anddti, 
erdte anddti, erano anddti. 

Future. 

I shall or will go, thou shalt go, he shall go; we shall 
go, you shall go, they shall go. 

* Andrb, andrdi, andrd; andremo, andrete, andrdnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 
Go thou, let him go; let us go, go ye, let them go. 
* Vd,vdda, andidmo, anddte, vddano or vddino. 

£6 • OPTA- 



^04 Of the VERBS, 



OPTATIVE an© SUBJUNCTIVE* 
Present. 
f That I may go, ch' to vdda, or vddL 

Thou may'st go, che tu vdda or vadi. 

He may go, ch' egli vada t or v adi, 

We may go, che andiamo. 

You may go, che andidte. 

They may go, che vddino, or v&dano. 

Preturperfect. 
That T might or could go, thou mightest go, he 
might go; we might go, you might go, they might 

Che anddssi, anddssi, anddsse; anddssimo, enddste, 

mdassero. 

Second Preterimperfectv 

I shall go, thou shouldst go, he should go; we should 
go, you should go, they should go. 

, * Andrei, andresti, andrebbe, andremmo, andreste, art-* 
drebbero. 

Preterp. That I have gone, che sia anddto. 

Preterpl. If I had gone, sefbssi anddto. 

Future. When I shall be gone, qudndo sard anddto. 



INFINITIVE. 

To go, anddre. Participle, gone, anddto. Gerund, m 
going, anddndo. 

* # * Note, that the preposition a, or ad, must be put 
after the verb anddre, and all the other verbs of motion, 
when they precede an infinitive ; example, 

Let us go see, andiamo a vedere. 

Go to supper, anddte a cendre. 

You shall go, and expect me, andrete ad aspettdfmL 

Let us send to tell, mandidmo a dire. 

The French are frequently mistaken in this respeet, be- 
cause they are accustomed to put the infinitive, without a 
preposition after verbs of motion. 

Of 



Of the VERBS, 1<& 

Of the Verb, dare. 
T\A'RE is irregular only in the present and preterper- 
feet definite. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. 

* I give, thou givest, he gives ; we give, you give, they 
give : do, ddi, da ; didmo, date, ddnno. 

Preterimper. I did give, thou didst give, he did give ; 
we did give, you did give, they did give ; ddvo, ddvi* 
ddva ; davdmo, davdte, davdno. 

Preterperfect Definite. 

* I gave, diedi, or detti. 

Thou gavest, desti, 

He gave, diede, or dette, did. 

We gave, demmo. 

You gave, deste, 

They gave, diedero, or dettero. 

The poets use dier, dieron, and dierono, instead of die* 

dero* 

Perfect comp. I have given, ho ddto, 
Preterplup. I had given, avevo ddto, 

* Future I shall give, dai'd. 



IMPERATIVE. • 

* Give thou, let him give ; let us give, give you, let 
them give: da, dia: didmo, date, diano. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Present. That I may give, &c. che dm, che dia, che 
dia ; che didmo, che didte, che diano or dieno. 

* Preterimp.' That I might give, that thou mfghtest 
give, that he might give, &c. che dessi, dessi, desse; dessimo, 
deste^ dessero. 

* Second Imperf. I should give, &c. darei, darestt 9 
darebbe, darimmo, dareste, darebbero, 

INFI- 



106 Gf the VERBS* 

INFINITIVE. 

To give, dare. 

Gerund, in giving, ddndo. 

Participle, given, ddto. 



Of the Verb fare. 
PARE, formerly facere, has its irregularity in the 
f\ present, and the -preterperfect definite ; and requires 
the t to be doubled in the participle. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

* I do, thou dost, he does; we do, you do, they do; 
fb,fdi,fd ; facciamo, fate, f anno. 

Preterimp. I did, &c, facevo, facevi, faceva, &c. 

Preter-def. I did, thou didst, he did ; we did, 
* you did, they did : feci, facesti, fSce ; facemmOifackste, 
j'ecero. 

Preterp. I have done, ho fdtto. 

Preterplup. Thad done, avevo fdtto. 

* Future. I shall do, &c. faro, fardi, far a ; faremo, 
far tie, far anno. 

IMPERATIVE. 

* Do thou, fet him do ; let us do, do you, let them do: 
fa, fdccia ; facciamo, fdte, fdcciano. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present. 

* That I may do, thou may'st do, he may do ; we 
may do, you may do, they may do : che fdccia, die 
fdccia, che fdccia ; che facciamo, che f accidie, che fdc- 
ciano. 

Preterimp. That T might do, thou mighlest do, he 
might do; we might do, you might do, they might 
* do ; c he facessi, facessi, facesse ; facessimo, faceste, 
factssero. 

* Second 



Of the VERBS, 



lof 



# Second imp. I should do, thou shouldst do, he should 
do ; we should do, you should do, they should do : farei, 
faresti,farebbe ; faremmo t fareste,farebbero. 



INFINITIVE. 
* To do, fare. Gerund, in doing, facendo. Participle,, 



done, fdtto* 



Of the Verb stare. 
KTA 'RE signifies to be, to dwell : it is irregular in th$ 
present and preterperfect definite, 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

* I stand, or I am, sto ; thou standest, stdi: he stands, 
$ta l stidmo, state, stdnno. 

Imperf. I did stand, &c. stdvo. 

* Preter-defo I stood, thou stoodest, he stood, &c. 
stttti, siisti, sttite ; stemmo, steste, stettero, 

Preterpr. I have stood, &c. sbno stdto, 
Preterpl. I had stood, &c. ero stdto. 

* Future, I shall or will stand, &c. staro, stardi, stard, 
staremo, starete, stardnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 

* Stand thou, sta ; let him stand, stia ; let us stand, 
stidmo; stand you, state; let them stand, stidno, or 
stdno. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

* That I may stand, thou may'st stand, he may stand, 
&c. ch'io stia, che tu stia, ch'egli stia ; che nbi stidmo, die 
vbi stidte, ck'eglino stiano, or stiino, 

* Imperfect. That I might or could stand, che stessi; 
thou mightest stand, che stessi ; he might stand, chestesse; 
we might stand, che stessimo ; you might stand, che steste; 
they might stand, che sUssero* 

* Second 



10S Of the VERBS, 

* Second preterimp. I should stand, thou shoufdest 
stand, he should stand, &c. starei, staresti; starebbe ; sta- 
remmo, starhte, starebbero. 

INFINITIVE. 

To stand, stare. Gerund, standing, stdndo. Partici- 
ple, stood or been, stdto. 



Obfervations on the four Irregular Verbs. 

ANDARE, DA' RE, FARE, STARE. 

HTHESE four verbs form the second person of the pre- 
sent tense in ai ; as, vdi, dai, fdi, st/ti ; and the third 
person plural in anno, and not in am, like the regulars : 
example, vdnno, danno, fdnno, stdiino ; the regular verbs 
make it in dno ; nsdmano, ednfano, pdrlano, &c. 

The future indicative doe? not terminate in erb, but 
in arc; therefore we must say, faro, darb, starb; except 
the verb anddre, which makes andrb. Observe, neverthe- 
less, that the verbs stare, and dare , become regular, when 
they are compounded ; as, accostdre, §ovrastdre, secon- 
dare, oommanddre. We say, in the second person of the 
present tense, accbsti, sovrdsti, seebndi, comdndi, and not 
accosldi, sovrastdi, seconddi, commanddi, this being the 
first person singular of the preterperfect definite of those 
verbs. In a word, they follow the rule of the regular 
verbs through all the tenses. The same cannot be said of 
the \erb fare, which continues its irregularity, though com- 
pounded ; therefore we must say, disfo, dlsfaccidmo, dis- 
ftci, disfacetti, &c. 

The regular verbs in are make their subjunctive in i; 
as, ami, parli, cdnti, sdlti. The four irregulars form 
theirs in a; as, vddo, dia,fdccia, stia. 

Dare and stare make the preterimperfect subjunctive 
dcssi and sttssi, and not ddssi, and stdssi. 

In the second preterimperfect they make andrei, darti, 
farti, starei. 

Here you see, that none but the verb anddre conform* 
to the regular verbs with regard to the e; thus we say, 

andere% 



Of the VERBS. 



109 



miderei, and not andarei, m the same manner as we say 
ttmer&i'ktiA not amarei. 

Note, the verb dare is conjugated like the verb stare, 
only by changing the st into d; do, sto, dava, stiiva, &c. 

Of the Irregular Verbs in ere. 
TPHERE are two sorts of verbs in ere, one of which 
has the penultima, or the last syllable but one, long ; 
as, 

Cadere, dovere, sapere, volere. 

The other the penultima short; as, 

Credere, Uggere, scrivere, perdere. 

There are no more than two-and-twenty verbs that 
have the infinitive in ere long, viz. 
Infinitive. Pres. Fret. def. Part. 

1 1 4 'cadere To fall, cddo cdddl cadkto. 



110 \ eaUr , e 
I caper e 


- concern 


, a verb 


impersonal. 


- contain. 


a verb little used. 


114 dovere - 


owe, 


dtvo 


dovei dovido. 


115 dolere - 


grieve, 


dbglio 


dblsi doluto. 


1 1 6 giacere - 
* godere - 


lie down, 

en .j°y> 


gidccio 

go do 


giacqai giacciuto. 
godei goduto. 


avere - 


have, 


ho 


ebbi avuto. 


118 par ere - 


appear, 


pujo # 


pdrvi par so. 


ll6" piacere - 


please, 


pi actio 


pidcqui piacciuto. 


1 1 9 persuadei 


•« persuade, 


persuddo persuasi persuaso. 


112 potere - 


be able, 


pbsso 


potci potuto. 


119 rimantre 


remain, 


rimango rimdsi rimdso. 


11.0 sapere - 


know, 


so 


stppi saputo* 


* sedere - 


sit, 


sedo 


stdei seduto. 


120 so/ere - 


be accustomec 


, sbglio 


solei solito. 
very little used. 


119 tacere - 


be silent, 


tdccio 


tdcqui tacciuto. 


120 tewere - 


hold, 


tmgo 


tenni teniito. 


* temere - 


fear, 


tfmo 


ttmei temuto. 


| vedere - 


be worth, 


vdglio 


vdlsi valutOo 


see, 


vedo 


vldi veduto. 


112 volere - 
* Thf thrp< 


be willing, 

>. vprhis mnrlrpr 


vbglio 

with a « 


vblli volido. 



figures in the margin refer to the pages where the other 
verbs are found conjugated at full length* 

Th% 



110 Of the VERBS. 

The compounds of these verbs make ere also long; as 
ricadere, riavere, &c. 

Of those two-and -twenty verbs there are but three re- 
gular, viz. temtre, godere, and seder e ; and they are con- 
jugated like credere. 

Of the other verbs that make their infinitive in ere long, 
some are irregular in the present, others in the preter-deri- 
nite and future, and some in the participle. 

The conjugation of the verb avere has been given al- 
ready ; calere and capvre are not in use. 



Conjugation of the irregular verbs in ere, long* 

[Begin with saptre, potere, and vaUre t because they 
often occur in discourse. 

SAPERE, to know, 

* Present. Sd, Mi, s£; sappidmo, sapete, sdnno: I 
know, thou knowest, he knows; we know, you know, 
they know. 

Imper. Sapfoo, sapevi, sapeva ; sapevdmo, wpetdte, 
sapdvano ; I did know, thou didst know, he did know ; 
we did know, you did know, they did know. 

* Preter-def. Seppi, sapesti, seppe ; sapemmo, sapeste, 
seppero : I knew, he knew ; we knew, they knew. 

Preterperfect. Ho saputo, hdi saputo, ha saputo, &c. 

* Future. Sapro, saprdi, saprct ; sapremo, saprete, sa~ 
pranno : I shall know, thou shalt now, he shall know ; 
we shall know, you shall know, they shall know. 



IMPERATIVE. 

* Sdppi, sdppia ; sappidmo, sappidte, sappiano : know 
thou, let him know; let us know, know you, let them 
know. 

OPTA- 



Of the VERBS. Ill 

OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che sdppia, sappia, sappia ; sappidmo, sappidte, sap- 
piano: that I may know, thou may'st know, he may know, 
we may know, you may know, they may know. 

* Imperfect. Che sapessi, sapfasi, sapesse ; sapessimo, 
sapeste, sapessero: that I might know, thou Brightest 
know, they might know. 

* Second Imp. Saprei, sapresti, saprebbe; sappremmo, 
sapreste, sapprebbero: I should know, thou shouldst know, 
he should know ; we should know, you should know, they 
should know. 



INFINITIVE. 

Sapere, to know. Gerund, $aphulo> knowing. Partk 
ciple, sap&to, known. 



POTE'RE, to be able. 
INDICATIVE. 

* Present. Posso, puoi,pub; possidmo, poteHe, phssono: 
I can or am able, thou canst, he can ; we can, you can, 
they can. 

Imperf. Potevo, potevi, Sec. I could, &c. 

Pret-def. Potei, potesti, pott ; potemmo, poteste, pote- 
rono ; or potttti, potesti, potette ; p@t£mmo, poteste, pottt- 
tero: I could, thou couldst, he could; we could, you 
could, they could. 

Preterp. Ho potuto, I have been able. 

* Future. Potrb, I shall be able. 
There is no imperative. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che pbssa, pbssa, pbssa ; possicimo, possidte, pbssano ; 
that I may be able, thou mayest be able, he maybe able ; 
we may be able, you may be able, they may be able. 

Imp. Che potfesi, potessi, potesse ; potessimo, poteste f 
fothsero x that I might be able, thou mightest be able» 

he 



112 Of the VERBS. 

he might be able ; we might be able, you might be able* 
they might be able. 

* Second Imp. Potrbi, potrbsti, potrtbbe, &c. 

N. B. In conjugating the verb potere, to be able, we 
do not say in the future potero and in the second preter- 
imperfect poterei ; because pot era and pottrei are the fu- 
ture and secojid preterimperfeet of the verb potdre, to 
prune. 

INFINITIVE. 

Potere, Gerund, potendo. Participle, potuto. 



V O L E ' R E, t o be willing, 

* Present. Vbglio, vubi, vuble ; voglidmo, volute, vb- 
gliono: I will or am willing, thou art willing, he is wil- 
ling; we are willing, you are willing, they are willing. 

Imperf. Volevo, volevi, voleva ; volevdmo, valerate, 
volevano : I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. 

*fif Preter-def. Villi, volesti, voile; volemno, vo- 
ttste, vbllero : I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. 

Pre terperf. Ho voluto, I have been willing, &c. 

* Future. Vorrb, vorrdi, vorrd ; r.orremo, vorrete, 
vorrdnno : I shall be willing, thou shalt be willing, he 
shall be willing, we shall be willing, &c. 

It has no imperative. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che vbglia, vbglia, vbglia ; vbglidmo, vbglwte, vogli~ 
ano ; that I may be willing, thou may'st be willing, he 
may be willing ; we may be willing, you may be willing, 
they may be willing. 

Imperf. Volessi, volessi, volesse ; volessmo, vtileste, vo» 
Usseroi that I were willing, thou were willing, he were 
willing; we were willing, you were willing, they were 
willing. 

* Second Imp. Vorrei, vorresti, vorrebbi ; vorremme, 
vorriste, vorrebbero : I should or would be willing, thou 
shouldest or wouldest be willing, &c. 

INFI- 



Of the VERBS. 
INFINITIVE. 



VoUrt. Gerund, volendo. Participle, volute. 



* 

* 



Remarks on the Verbs terminated in ere long, 

VOLE'RE. 

1. Remember that voter -e makes in the preterde- 
definite vblli, volesti, voile ; volemmo, voleste, vbllero ; and 
not volsi, volesti, vblse ; volemmo, voleste, volsero ; because 
volsi, vblse, volsero, comes from the verb vblgere, to turn. 
Yet we find vblsi, vblse, and volsero, in a great many au- 
thors, which js only to be attributed to a poetical li- 
cence. 

%* Take notice, that it is sometimes an elegance to 
put the verb voter e instead of dovere. For instance, ma 
eio non si vubl con dltri ragiondre, for non si dove, ought 
not. 

2. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in lere ; as 
volere, dolere, solere, valere, and their compounds, have a 
g before the letter I in the first person singular, in the first 
and third plural, and in all the persons of the present sub- 
junctive : in the present ; as, 

Vbglio, vubi, vuble ; voglidmo, volete, vbgliono. 
Dbglio, dubli, duble ; doglidmo, dolete, dbgliono. 
SbgliOy subli, suble ; soglidmo, solete, sbgliono. 
Vdglio, vdli, vale ; vaglidmo, valete, vagliono. 

3. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in nere 9 and 
n'ire ; as, rimanere, tenere, venire, have also a g in the 
irrst person singular, and in the third plural ; but not in 
the first person plural ; as, 

tengo, tieni, tiene ; tenidmo, tenete, tengono. 

Rimdngo, rimdni, rimdne ; rimanidmo, rimanete, n- 
mungono. 

Vengo, vieni, tiene ; venidmo, venite, vengono. 

They have also a g in the first, second, and third per- 
son of the present subjunctive in the singular, and in the 
third of the plural. 

4. All the verbs ending in lere, nere,nire, require two 
r's in the future, and in the second imperfect tense. 

Example, 



Of the VERBS. 




Volere, vbglio, 


zorrb, 


vorrei. 


Tenere, tengo, 


terrb, 


terrei. 


Venire, vengo, 


Terrb, 


verrei. 


Volerb, tenerb, 


venirb, 


&c. 



in 

Example, 



And not 

%* Except^mre, punire, svellere, to root up, that fol- 
low the common rule, and make^wiro, punirb, svellerb ; 
and in the present, Jinisco, punisco, svello. 

CADE'RE,tofall. 

Cddo, ciidi, cade; cadidmo, cadete, cddono: I fall, thou 
fallest, he falls ; we fall, you fall, they fall. 

Imperf. Cadevo, cadevi, cadeva ; cadevamo, cadevate, 
cadevano ; I did fall, &c. 

* Preter-def. Cdddi, cadesti, cddde, cademmo, cadeste, 
edddero : I fell, thou didst fall, he fell ; we fell, you fell, 
they fell. 

Preterf. Sono caduto, set caduto, e caduto; sidmo 
caduti ; siete caduti, sono caduti ; I have or am fallen, 
thou hast or art fallen, &c. 

Preterpl. Ero caduto, eri caduto, era caduto: eravdmo, 
caduti, eravdte caduti, erano caduti : I had or I was fallen, 
thou hadst or was fallen, &c. 

Future. Caderb, caderdi, caderh ; caderemo, caderete, 
taderdnno : I shall fall, thou shalt fall, he shall fall, &c. 

Imperative. Cadi, fall thou ; cdda, let him fall, cadi- 
amo, let us fall: cadete, fall you ; cddano, let them fall. 

Optative. Che cdda, cdda, cdda ; cadiamo, cadidie, 
cddano : that I may fall, that thou mayest fall, &c. 

Imperf. Cadessi, cadessi, cades&e ; cadessimo, cadeste, 
cadessero i that I might fall, that thou mightest fall, &c. 

Second Imperf. Caderei, caderesti, I should fall. 

Infinitive, cadere. Gerund, cadendo. Participle, ca- 
duto, 

DOVE'RE, to owe. 

Dover e is conjugated through all its tenses like credere. 
It is irregular only in the present, by putting an e for an 
o : * devo, devi, deve ; dobbidmo, dovete, dtvono, and deb- 
bono: I owe, thou owest, he owes; we owe, y<?u owe, 
they owe. 

4 Imperf. 



O* the VERBS. 115 

Imperf. Dovevo, dovevi, &c. I did owe, &c. 

Preter-def. JDovei or dovetti, dovesti, dove, or dovette; 
dovemmo, doveste, doverono or dovettero ; I owed, &c. 

Preterpluperf. Ho dovuto, hdi dovuto, ha dovuto ; I 
have owed, &c. ;■ 

* Future. Dovrb, dovrdi, dovrd, I shall or will owe,, 
&c. 

* Imperative. Devi, debba, dobbidmo, dobbidte, deb- 
bano ; owe thou, let him owe ; let us owe, owe you, let 
them owe. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che debba, debba, debba ; 
dobbidmo, dobbidte, debbano: that I may owe, thou 
mayest owe, he may owe, &c. 

Imperf. Dovessi, that I might owe, &c. 

* Second Imp. Dovrei, dovresti, dovrebbe ; dovremmo* 
dovreste, dovrebbero: I should owe, &c. 

* Infinitive, dovere. Gerund, dovendo. Part, dovuto. 

DOLERE or DOLE'RSI, to grieve, or complain. 

Dolere is a reciprocal verb, conjugated with the pro- 
nouns conjunctive, mi, ti, si, in the singular number, and 
with ci, vi, si, in the plural. 

All verbs that have the particle si after the infinitive, 
must be conjugated like doUre; as, pentirsi, to repent ; 
ricorddrsi, to remember, &c. 

INDICATIVE. 

* I grieve, io mi dolgo, or ddglio. 
Thou grievest, tu ti duoli. 

He grieves, egli si duble. 

We grieve, noi ci doglidmo. 

You grieve, vox m dolkte. 

They grieve, eglino si dblgono, or dbgliono. 

Imper. Mi dolivo, ti dolevi, si doieva ; ci dolevdmo, 
vi dolevate, si dolevano ; I did grieve. 

Preter Definite. 

* I grieved, mi dolsi. 
Thou grievedst, ti dolestu 
He grieved, ci dblse. 
We grieved, ti dolemmo, 

You 



Ii6 Op the VERBS, 

You grieved, vi doleste. 

They grieved, si dblsero. 

Preterperf. Mi sbno doluto, I have grieved, &c. 

Preterpluperf. Mi ero doluto, I have grieved, &c. 

* Future. Mi dorro, ti dorrai, si dorrd ; ci dorremo P 
vi dorrkte, si dorr anno: I shall grieve, &c. 



IMPERATIVE. 
* DubUtiy grieve thou, dblgasi, let him grieve, or dog- 
iidmoci, dolktevi, dblgansi, let us grieve, &c. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Present. Che <mi dblga y ti dblga, si dblga, or dbglia t 
€% doglidmo, vi doglidte, si dblgano : that I may grieve, 
thou raay'st grieve, &c. 

Imperf. Che mi dolessi, that I might grieve, &e, 

* Second Imperf. Mi dorrei, I should grieve, &c. 

INFINITIVE. 

Dottrsi, to grieve. Gerund, dolendosi, grieving. Par- 
ticiple, dolutosi, grieved. 

* m * Remember that dolere signifies also to be sick; and 
then it is a verb impersonal, that has but the third person 
singular: as, 

I have the headach, mi duble la testa. 

Thou hast the headach, ti duble la testa. 

He has the headach, gli duble la testa. 

We have the headach, ci duble la testa. 

You have the headach, vi duble la testa. 

They have the headach, duble loro la testa. 

GI ACERE, PI ACERE, TACERE, to lie down, to please, 
to hold one's tongue. 

These three verbs are conjugated alike. 

%* In the tenses of these three verbs, where there are 
two vowels after the c, the c must be doubled ; but if there 
is only one, then there must be but a single c. 

* Indicative. — Present tense. Gidccio, gidci, gidce ; 
giaccidmo, giacete, gideciono : I lie down, &c. 

Imper. 



Of the VERBS. 117 

Imperf. Gidcevo, I did lie down, &c. 

* Preter-def. Gidcqui, giac&sti, gidcque ; giacemmo, 
giaceste, gidcquero : I lay down, &c. 

Preterperf. We do not say, sbno stdto giaciuto, I have 
laid down ; but sono stdto a giacere, &c. 
Future. Giacero, I shall lie down, &c. 

* Imperative. Gidci, gidccia ; giaccidmo, giacete, gi- 
dcciano : lie thou down, let him lie down, &c. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che gidccia, gidccia, gidc~ 
cia; giaccidmo, gidcciate,gidcciano: that Iihay lie down,&c« 

Imperf. Che giacessi, that I might lie down. 
Second Imperf. Giacerei, I should lie down. 
Infinitive, giacere. Gerund, giacendo. Participle^ 
* giaciuto, or rather, stdto a giacere. 

* PI ACE' RE, Pidccio, pidci, pidce ; piaccidmo, piacHe, 
pidcciono: I please, thou pleaseth, he pleases; we please, 
you please, they please. 

Imp. Piacevo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano : I did 
please, &c. 

* Preter-def. Pidcqui, piacesti, pidcque ; piacemmo, 
piaceste, pidcquero : I pleased, thou pleasedst, he pleased; 
we pleased, you pleased, they pleased. 

Preterperf. Ho piacciuto, &c. I have pleased. 
Future. Piacei'b, &c. I shall please. 
Imp. Pi&ci, pidccia, piaccidmo, piacete, pidccianot 
please thou, &c. 

* Subjunctive. Che pidccia, a, a ; idmo, idte, iano ; 
that I might please. 

Imp. Che piachsi, that I may please, &c. 
Second Imperf. Piacerei, I should please. 
Infinitive, piacere. Gerund, piajendo. Participle, 
piacciuto. 

* TACERE. Tdccio, tdci, tdce ; taccidmo, tacete, tdc- 
ciono. I hold my tongue, thou boldest thy tongue, he 
holds his tongue ; we hold our tongues, &c. 

Imp. Tacevo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano : I did hold 
my tongue, thou didst, &c. 

* Preter-def. Tdcqui,tacesti, tdeque; tacemmo, &c. I 
held my tongue, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho tacciuto, I have held my tongue. 

F Future. 



US Or the VERBS. 

Future. Taeerb y tacerdi, tacerd ; taceremo, tacer£te K ta- 
cerdnno: I shall hold my tongue, &c. 

Imperative. Tdci, tdccia; taccidmo, tactte , tdcciano : 
hold thy tongue, let him hold his tongue, &c. 

* Subjunctive. Che tdccia, a, a; taccidmo, taccidU, 
tdcciano. 

Imperf. Che tdcessi, tactssi, tacesse ; that I might hold 
my tongue, &c. 

Second imp. Tacerei, tacertsti, tacerebbe : I should 
hold my tongue, &c. 

Infinitive, tacere, to hold one's tongue. Gerund, ta- 
cendo, holding one's tongue, &c. Participle, * tacciuto. 

PARE'RE, *o smw. 

* Indicative, present. Paio, pari, pare; paidmo, pa- 
rete, pdiono : 1 seem, of appear, thou seemest, he seems ; 
we seem, &c. 

Imp. Partvo, I did seem, &c. 

* Preter-def. Pdrvi, parfaii, pdrve ; paremmo, partste, 
pdrvero ; I seemed, &c. 

* Future. Parrb, parrdi, parr a ; I shall seem, &c. 

* Imperfect. Pdri,pdia; paidmo, par ete, pdiano : seem 
thou, let him seem ; let us seem, seem you, let them seem. 

%* Remember what has been already remarked, that when 
a verb has any irregularity in the present of the indicative, it 
has the same in the present of the imperative and subjunctive. 

* Optative and subjuntive. Chepdia, pdia, pdia ; pai- 
dmo, or paridmo, paidte, pdiano : that I may seem, thou 
may'st seem, he may seem. 

Imp. Che paressi,paressi, sse ; ssimo, ste, ssero : that 
I might seem, &c. 

Second Imp. Parrti, I should seem, &c. 
Infinitive, parere, to seem. Gerund, partndo, seem- 
ing. * Participle, par so, seemed. 

Parere, is also an impersonal reciprocal verb, that has 
only the third person singular, when it signifies it seems ; 
as, it seems to me, mi pare or mi par. 
to thee, ti par. 

to him, or her, gli par, or le par, 
-< to us, ci par. 

to you, vi par. ^ 

to them, pare loro. In 






is t 

I 



Of The VERBS. l\$ 

In like manner through all the tenses, it did seem to me, 
mipareva; it seemed to me, mi parte. 

f-1-f Remember that no more than four verbs in ere long 
are irregular in the participle ; namely, parere, pdrso ; 
persvadere, persudso: rimantre y rimaso ; soUre, solito : 
nil the other verbs make it in uto. 



PERSUADE' RE, to persuade. 
. Indicative, present. Persuddo, persuddi, persuade 
persuadidmo, persuadete,persnddono : I persuade, &c. 

Iraperf. Persuadevo, vi, va ; vdmo, &c. I did per- 
suade, &c. 

* Preter-def. Persvdsi, persuadtsti, persudse ; persua- 
demmo, persuadeste, persudsero : I persuaded, &c. 

Future. Persuadevo, rai, ra ; renw, rete, rdnrio. 

Imperative. Persnddi, a; idmo, tie, ano: persuade 
thou, &c. 

Optative. Che persndda, a f a ; idmo, late, ano : that I 
may persuade, &c. 

Imperf. Che persuadttsi, that I might persuade. 

Second imp. Persuaderei, I should persuade, 

Infinitive. Persuadhe, to persuade. Gerund, persua- 
Gndo, persuading. * Participle, persudso, persuaded. 

RIMANE'RE, to remain. 
*V* Remember the rules of the verbs in Ure, ntre, ?iire. 

* Indicative, present. Rimdngo, rimdni, rimdne: rimani- 
dmo, rimantte,rimdngono : I remain, thou remainest, &c. 

Imperf. Rimanfvo, I did remain. 

* Preter-def. Rimdsi, rimancsti, rimdse ; rimantmmo, 
rimaneste, rimdsero : 1 remained, &c. 

Preterperf. Uo rimdso, or sono rimaso, I have remained. 

* Future. Rimarj^o, rimarrdi,rimarrd, I shall remain, &c 

* Imperative. Rimdni, rimdnga; rimanidmo, rimanete, 
rimungano : remain thou, let him remain. 

* Optative. Che rimdnga, rimdnga, rimdnga ; rimani" 
amo, rimanidte, rimungano : that I may remain. 

Imperf. Che rimavessi, that I might remain. 
« * Second imp. Rimarrci, rimarrtsii, I should remain. 

Infinitive, rimantre, to remain, Gerund, rimanendo, 
remaining. Participle, * rimdso, remained. 

F2 OS- 



120 Of the VERBS. 

SOLERE, to be wont. 

♦Indicative, present. Sbglio, subli, suble; sogliamo, 
solete, sbgliono, I am wont, &c. 

Or sono solito, I am wont ; sti solito, thou art wont ; e 
solito, he is wont ; sidmo sbliti, we are wont ; sitte soliti, 
you are wont; sono soliti, they are wont. 

And in like manner through all the tenses ; as, ero, soli- 
to, I was wont ; non tro solito, I was not wont, &c. 

Imp. Soltvo, &c. I was accustomed, &c. 

Preterperf. def. Fid solito, &c. 

* Imperative. Subli, soglia ; sogliamo, solete, sogliano, 
be thou wont, let him be wont, &c. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che soglia, soglia, soglia ; 
sogliamo, soglidte, sogliano : that I may be wont, &c. 

Che soltssi, that I might be wont, &c. 

Second preterimperf. Sarti solito, &c. 

Infinitive, solere, to be wont. Gerund, soltndo, wonted. 
Participle, solito, wont. Another Gerund, essendo solito,. 
being wont. 

TENE'RE, to hold. 

* Indicative, present. Ttngo,titni,titne; tenidmo, tent^ 
te, ttngono : I hold, thou holdest, he holds ;, we hold, you 
hold, they hold. 

Imp. Tentvo. I did hold. 

* Preter-def. Ttnni, tentsti, tenne ; tenemmo, tentste, 
tennero : I held, thou heldst, he held ; we held, you held, 
they held. 

Preterperf. Ho tenuto, &c. 

"* Future. Terrb, terrdi, terra; terrtmo, terrtte, ter- 
rdnno: I shall hold, thou shalt hold, he shall hold, &c. 

* Imperative. Titni, ttnga ; tenidmo, tentte, ttngano : 
hold thou, &c. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che ttnga, ttnga, ttnga * 
tenidmo, tenidte, ttngano : that I may hold, &c. 

Imper. Che tentssi, tentssi, tentsse ; ssimo, ste, ssero : 
I might hold, thou might'st hold, &c. 

* Second imp. Terrei,terrcsti,terrtbbe; I should hold. 
Infinitive, tenere, to hold. Gerund, tentndo, holding. 
Participle, tenuto, held. 

VA- 



Of the VERBS. 121 




VALE'RE, to be worth. 

* Indicative, present. Vdglio, vdli, vale; valiamo* 
valete, vdglwno: I am worth, thou art worth, he is worth ; 
we are worth, you are worth, they are worth. 

Imperf. Valevo, valevi, valeva, &e. I was worth, thou 
wast worth, he was worth, &c. 

* Preter-def. Falsi, valesti, vdlse ; valemmo, valeste, 
vdlsero ; I was worth, thou wast worth, he was worth, &c. 

Preterpluperf. Ho valido. 

* Future. Varrb, varrdi, &c. I shall be worth, &c. 
Imperative. Vdli vdglia, vaglidmo: be thou worth, 

let him be worth ; let us be worth, &c. 

* Optative. Che vdglia, vdglia, vdglia ; vaglidmo, vag- 
Hate, vdgliano : that I may be worth, &c. 

Imperf. Che valessi, &c. 
Second Imp. VarrH, &c. 

Infinitive, vaUre. Gerund, valtndo. Participle, va- 
lido. 



VEDE'RE, to see. 

Indicative, present, vedo, vedi, vede ; vedidmo, ve- 
dete, vedono : I see, thou seest, he sees ; we see, you see, 
they see. 

Imper. Vedevo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vdno : I did 

see, Szc. 

* Preter def. V\di, vedesti, vide : vedemmo, vedeste, 
videro : I saw, thou sawest, he saw ; we saw, you saw, 
they saw. 

Preterperf. Ho veduto, or visto, &c. I have seen, &c. 

* Future. Vedrb, rdi, rd ; remo, rete, rdnno: I shall 
see, thou shalt see, he shall see, &c. 

Imperative. Vedi, veda, vedidmo, vedtte, v&dano : 

see you, let him see; let us see, see you, let them see. 

_ Optative. Che veda, veda, veda; vedidmo, vediute, ve- 

dano : that I may see, that thou mayest see, that he may 

see, &c. J 

Imperfect. Che vedessi,ih-at I might see, &c. 

* Second imperf. Vedrei, I should see, &c. 

T 3 Infinitive, 



m Of the VERBS. 

Infinitive, vtdtre. Gerund, vedcado. Participle, u~ 
did a, or * vesto, seen. 



Of the Verbs in, ere short. 

C\Y all the verbs in ere short, there are none regular, 
except those that I have put just after the verb cre- 
dere. 

All the rest, of which there is a great number, are ir- 
regular; some -in the present tense, most of them in the 
preterperfect-d-dinitc, some in the future, and almost all in 
the participle. 

A new mid general mile to learn, hi a short time, all the 
Irregular Verbs i?t ere short. 
We are taught by an axiom in philosophy, that fria>fr a 
fit per plum, quod potest fieri per pauciora. And it is in 
pursuance of this maxim, that I have reduced all the irre- 
gular verbs in ere short to one single rule; in order both to 
avoid the intricacy, and embarrassment of other grammars, 
and to smooth the way to the Italian language, which has 
hitherto been rendered difficult of access by unqualified 
teachers. 

These five verbs, conbscere, crescere, ndsctre, nvocere, 
romper e ; to know, to grow, to be bom, to hart, to break, 
form the preterperfect definite, and the participle, as fok 
lows. 

Preter-de'f. Participle. 

conobbi conosciuto. 

crebbi cre&ciulo. 

ndequi nuto. 

n&cqui nocewto. 

ruppl rot to. 

Generally speaking, all the other verbs ending in the in- 
finitive in ere short, form the preterperfect-deriuile in si, 
and the participle in so, to, or sto. 

t|-t Thougli this rule might suffice for all the preter- 
perfect definite of verbs terminated in ere short ; yet v.e 
mav also observe, that the same verbs may be terminated 
after thirteen different manners, which will make however 
but one and the same rule. 

* You will see in the terminations, which, are 
- placed 



Of the VERBS. m 

placed in direct lines, that there is a star at the end of 
some of them, and there are others without that mark. 
The star at the end is to show that those verbs make the 
participle in to ; the verbs that have no star make the par- 
ticiple in so, or in esso. 



X 125 


1. 


12$ 


2. 


129 


3. 


130 


4. 


131 


5. 




r6. 



I 



Terminations of the f^erbs in crejliorf. 

THE verbs in ere, short, are terminated in the infinitive. 
In cere : as, mnccre, tbreere, cubeere. 
In dere : as, drdere, chiudere, ridere. 
Ingere: as, pidngere, spmgere, Itggeie. * 
In gliere: as, cog-Here, scibgliere, togliere. * 
In here : as, tr/diere, or Irarre, kc. 
In I ere: as, svtlkre. * 

In mere: as, imfrhnere, oppriniere. Preter- 
132 «4 def. impressi, opprcssi. Participle, im 

presso; oppresso. 
8. In nere: as, pbnere, riponerc. 
129 9- 1° ndere: as, prCndere, rtndere, rlspbn dere, 
nascbndere. Participle, preso, r£so, ox rcn~ 
dido, rispbsto, nascbso, or nascbsto. 
f 10. In pere: as, rompere, makes in the perfect- 

134 < derln. ri/ppi, rbtto in the participle. 
ill. In rare .- as, clrrere, concarrere. 

135 12. latere: as, meitere, misi, messo, 
13<> 13. In were: as, scrivere, vivere. 

% # Change all these terminations into si, and you will 
find the preterperfcct-definite of them all, in which consists 
the greatest irregularity : example, to find the preter-defi- 
nite of mncere, tor cere, drdrre, prendere, pidngere, rispbn- 
dere, do but change their terminations, cere, dere, gere, 
ndere, into si, and you will find, vinsi, torsi, drsi, prtsi 9 
pidnsi, rispbsi. 

%* Observe, that the verbs written with tv*o gg's 
before the penultima, drop them, and double the s in 
the preterdefinite, and the t in the participle; ex- 
ample, Uggere, reggere, &c. To form the preterper- 

$ The ciphers in the margin refer to the pages where the verbs 
of a similar termination are conjugated, 

F -1» fe<* 



124 / Of the VERBS. 

feet definite, we must change the termination ggere into 
ssi, and for the participle into tto, and we shall rind lessi, 
ressi, Utto, retto,&c. 

Take notice likewise, that the verbs terminating in 
gKere, always retain the /, and only lose giere in the 
preter-defmite : the same rule serves for the participle : 
example, cbgliere, scibgliere, sciegliere, tbgliere, &c. take 
from those words giere, there remains col, sciol, sciel, tbl ; 
and by adding si to them in the preter-definite, and in 
the participle to, we shall find, cblsi, sciblsi, scielsi, tblsi, 
folio, sciolto, scielto, tblto, &c. 

%* To conjugate these words with ease, remember that 
there are always three irregular persons, and three regular 
ones in the preter- definite. 

The three irregular persons are the first and third 
singular and the third plural, which are very easy to be 
formed, if we do but observe, that the first person is always 
terminated in i; vinsi, drsi, pidnsi; change i into e, 
and it is the third singular, v'mse, arse, pidnse; and by 
adding ro to the latter, it becomes the third plural, vin- 
sero, drscro, pidnsero ; and so of the rest. Example. 



presi, scrissi, f prese, scrisse, 
resi, lessi. J rese, Itsse, 



presero, scrissero, 
resero, lessero. 



The three regular persons are, the second singular, 
and the first and second plural. There is frequently 
more difficulty in finding out these than the irregular 
persons, because we confound one with the other. •■ Now 
the true way to avoid being mistaken in this point, is to 
remember that the second person singular of the preter- 
definite in all verbs, as well regular as irregular, is 
formed from the infinitive, by changing re into sti; as 
Vincere, vincesti, ardere, ardesti ; pidngere, piangesti ; 
except the verb esseret 

The first person plural is also formed from the infinitive, 
by changing re into mmo ; as, amdre, amdmmo ; vedere, 
vedemmo; teggere, leggemmo. 

The second person ^plural of the preterperfect defi- 
nite, is formed in all the verbs from the second of the 
singular, by changing its final i into e ; as, vincesti, vin- 
ccste ; ardesti, ardeste ; piangesti, piangeste. Thus we 

shall 



Of the VERBS. 125 

shall find, vinti, vincesti, vinse ; vincemmo, vinceste, vin- 
sero ; drsi, ardesti, arse ; ardemmo, ardtste, arsero. 

Remember to peruse these observations carefully, as 
being very necessary for conjugating the irregular verbs. 

*«* We must also remember, that the verbs terminated 
in here and vere, as, trdhere,scrivere, double the letter * 
in the preterperfect definite, and the letter t in the parti- 
ciple : example, trdssi, scrissi, tr&tto, scritto. 

The above rule would be sufficient for learning the it- 
regularity of the verbs in ere, short; yet, for the greater 
conveniency of scholars, I have thought proper to explain 
these thirteen terminations more at large, in order to ob- 
viate all the difficulties that may occur. 



Of the Verbs terminated in cere. 
'"PHE verbs in cere form the preter-definite, by changing 

■ cere into si, and the participle into to: as, 

Cuocere, to bake. Present, cubco, cubci, cubce; cno- 
cidmo, cuocete, cubcono : I bake, thou bakest, he bakes ; 
we bake, you bake, they bake. 

Imp. Cuocvvo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte,vano: I did bake, 
thou didst bake, he did bake, &c. 

* Preter def. Cbssi, cuoctsti, cbsse ; cuoce'mmo, cuoceste, 
cbssero: I baked, thou didst bake, he baked, &c. 

Preterp. Ho cbtto, I have baked. 

Preterp. Avevo cbtto, I had baked, 
v Future. Cuocerb, rod, rd ; remo, rete, rdnno ; I shall 
bake, thou shalt bake, he shall bake, &c. 

Imper. Cubci, cubca: cuocidmo, cuoctte, cubcano\ x bake 
thou, let him bake, &c. 

Opt. che cubca. Imperf. che cuocessi. Second Imp. 
cuocerti. Infinitive, cuocere. Participle, *cotto. Gerund, 
cubcendo* . 



Condtj'cere, or condurre, to conduct. Present condu- 
co, conduci ; conduce, conducidmo, conducete, cenducono: 
I conduct, thou conductest, he conducts; we conduct, &c. 

Imperf. Conductvo, vi, va, &c. I did conduct. 

* Preter-definite, Condussi, conducesti, condusse; condti- 
E 5 cemmo, 



12(5 Of the VERBS. 

eemnuf, conduceste, condussero: I conducted, th<m didaf 
conduct, he conducted, &c. 

♦Future. Condurrd, rat, rd ; rl-mo, I shall or will 
conduct, &c. 

Imperative, Conduci, conduce, &c. conduct thou, &c. 

Optative, eke conduca. Imperf. eke conducessi. Se- 
cond imperfect, * condurrei. Participle, * condctto. Ge- 
rund, conduemdo. 



Uilu'cere, to shine. Present, rilueo, riluci, riluce ; 
riluciamo, rilucete, rilucono : I shine, thou shinest, he 
shines, &c. Imperfect, riluctvo, Sac. I did shine, &c. 

Preter-definite, Rilussi, rilucesti, rilusse ; riluct-mmo, 
riluceste, rilussero : I shined, thou didst shine, he shiued, 
&c. Future, rilucerb, I shall shine, &c. 

Imperative, Riluci, riluca ; riluciamo, rilucete, rilucano:. 
shine thou* let him shine, &e. 

It has no optative. Cke riluca, riluca, riluca; rilucia- 
mo, riluciafe, rilucano: that I may shine, &c. Imperfect,. 
riluctssi, &c. that I might shine, &c. Second imperfect, 
rilucerfi, &c. I should shine, &c. It has no participle. 
Gerund, riluetndo, shining. 

Vi'nceke, to gain. Present* vinca* viiici, mace; virt- 

ciumo, vinccte, vhicono : I gain, thou gaihest, he gains; 
&c, Imperfect, vincCvo, I did gain. * Preter-deiinite, 
mnsi, vinctsti, muse ; vincimmo, vincfote, vinsero : I 
gained, &c. Preter-imperfect, ko vinto, I have gained,, 
Future, vincero. I shall gain. Imperative, vinci, vmca, 
iic. g-imthou, let him gain, &c. 

Optative and subjunctive. Cke vinca. Imperfect, cke 
vincessi, Second imperfect, vinceva. Participle, * vinto. 



ToEC'ERE, to twist. Present, tbrco, tbrci, force ; tor- 
ciamo, torctte, torcono ; I twist, thou tvvistest, he twists ; 
we twist, &c. Imperfect, torctvo, I did twist. * Preter- 
definite, torsi, torctsti, torse; torctmmo, tcrccsle,torsero. 
Future, torcerb. 

Imperative, Tcrci, tcrca, &c, twist thou, let him twist, 
&c. 

Optative, 



Of the verbs. 127 

Optative, Che torca. Imperfect, che torcessi. Second 
imperfect, torcerei. Participle, * tbrto. 

Conosckre and crescere, change scere into bbi, to form 
the preter-definite, and make the participle in sciut ; as, 

Conbsco, conbsci, conbsce; conoscidmo, conoscete, conbs* 
cono. I know, &c. Imperfect, conoscevo. Preter-deti-> 
nite, conbbbiy conoscesti, cdnbbbe ; conoscemmo, conoceste, 
eonbbbero : I knew, &c. Imperative, conbsci, conbsca, &c. 
know thou, let him know, &c. 

Optative, che conbsca. Imperfect, che conoscessi. Se- 
cond imperfect, conoscerti. Participle, *cono'sciuto. 



Cre'sco, cresci, cresce; crescidmo, crescete, crescono : 1 
grow, thou growest, he grows : we grow, you grow, they 
grow. Imperfect, crescevo, I did grow. Preter-definite, 
crebbi, crecesti, crebbe. Future, crescerb, I shall grow. 

Imperative, Cresci, cresca, &c. grow thou, let hint 
grow, &c. 

Optative, c he crhca. Imperf. che crescessi. Second im- 
perf. cresce\ti, I should grow, &c. Participle, *cresciido. 



Na'scehe and nuoccre make the preterperfect definite 
in qui. 

Na'scere, to be born. Present, nasco, nasri, nasce ; 
nascidnw, nascete, ndscono: I am born, thou art born, he 
is bora ; we are bom, you are born, they are born. Im- 
perfect, nascvvo, I was born. Preter-deiinice, nacqui, 
nascestiy ndcque ; nascemmo, nasctste, ndcqutro : I was 
born. Future, nascerb, I shall be born. 

Optative, che ndsca. Imperfect, che nascessi. Second 
imperfect, nascerei. Participle, *nato. 

Nuocere, to hurt. Present, nubco, nnbci, nubce ; 
nuocidmo, nuocete, nubcono: I hurt, &c. Imperfect, 
nuocevo, I did hurt. Preter- definite, * nbcqui, nuoctsti, 
nubcque ; nuocemmo, nuoceste, nbcqutro : I did hurt, or 1 
hurt, &c. 

Imperative, Nubci, nubca, &c. hurt thou, let him 
hurt, &c. 

Optative, che nubca. Imperfect, che nuocessi. Second 

imperf. nuocerzi, Participle, *nuociu to. G er mid, nuoccn do. 

F £ Of 



12S Of the VERBS. 



Of the Verbs in dere. 
HPHE verbs in dere form the preterperfect definite in si, 
and the participle in so : as, 

A'rdere, to burn. Present, drdo, drdi, drde ; ardid- 
mo, ardete, drdono: I burn, thou burnest, &c. 

Imperfect, ardevo, I did burn. * Preter-definite, drsi, 
ardesti, arse; ardemmo, ardeste, drsero: I burnt, he burnt, 
&c. Future, arderb, I shall burn, &c. 

Imperative, drdi, drda; ardidmo, ardete, drdano: burn 
ibou, let him burn, &c. 

Optative, che drda, drda, drda; ardidmo, ardidte, dr- 
dano: that I may burn, &c. Imperfect, che ardessi. 
Second imperfect, arderei. Participle, *drso, burnt. Ge- 
rund ardendo : burning, or in burning. 

I shall put no more tenses of the verbs than the present, 
the preterperfect definite, and the participles, none but 
these being irregular, 

* ' ■ 

Chiu'dere, to shut ; chiudo, *chiuso, chiusi. 
And so of the rest ; except, 

Chie'dere; to ask: which makes in the preter-def. 
* chiesi, and in the participle, * chiesto, and not chieso. 

Pe'rdere, makes in the preter-definite, perdei, or per- 
dtiti and *persi; in the participle, perduto, and *perso, 

Ri'dere, to laugh; rido y *risi, *riso. 

Rodere, to gnaw; rbdo, *rosi, *rbso. 



Observe, that all these verbs have the preter-definite in 
ei, and in etti. Nay, it is more elegant to say, cMudei, 
perdei, &c. than chiusi, persi, &c. This is to avoid the 
ambiguity that might arise between chiusi, persi, &c. the 
first person of the preter-definite, and chiusi, persi, &c, 
nouns adjective. 

The participle of the verbs in dere, short, is always ter- 
minated in so. Except the verbs chiedere and pet dere, which 
make chiesi, and persi, chieduto, or chiesto, and perduto. 

%* You perceived, after the conjugation of the verb. 
credere, that cedere is a regular verb ; its compounds are 
not ; for they form the preter-definite in essi, and the par- 
ticiple in esso. Example : 

Succe- 



Of the VERBS. 129 

SucCe DeRe, to succeed, succedo, * successi, * successo. 

Conce'deRe, to agree, or yield to ; concedo, * concessi, 
* conctsso. 

I apprehend that those two verbs, as well as perdere, to 
lose, are regular and irreguiar, since we may likewise say, 
succedti, succedetti, succeduto ; concede!, concedttti, con- 
cediito ; perdei, perdetti, perduto : and in like manner all 
the compounds of the verbs cedere and perdere. 



Of the Verbs in endere. 

nPHE verbs in endere form the preter-definite in ei and 
51, and the participle in eso : example, 

Atten'dere, to attend ; attendei, * attest, * etteso* 

Pre'ndere, to take ; prendei, * presi, % preso. 
, Re'nde re, to render ; >rendei, resi, * mo, 

This verb also forms the participle in uto, as renduto, 
The latter is better than reso. 

Fendere, to cleave, and pendere, to bang, are regular, 
In the preter-definite they wake fendti, or fendetti, pendei 9 
or pendetti, in the participle fenduto and penduto* 

Take notice nevertheless, that the compounds of those 

two verbs are irregular, and they make the preter-definite 

in est, the participle in eso, like dij endere, to defend, 

* difesi, * difeso : apphidere, to hand ; or fix up, * ap~ 

pesi, * appeso, &e. 



Of the Verbs in gere. 

HTHE verbs in gere make the preter-definite in si, and 
the participle in to ; as, 
Ci'ngere, to gird ; cingo, preter-definite, * cinsi, 
cingesti, chisel Participle, * cinto. 

Spi'ngere, to shove ; * spingo, spinsi, * spinto* 
Po'rgere, to offer; porgo, * porsi,* porto 
U'ngere, to anoint; ungo, * imsi, * imto, 
Spar'gere, to sprinkle. Present, spdrgo* Preter- 
definite, spar si. Participle, * spdrso. 

To which we. may also add estinguere, estinguo, * es* 
tinsi, * e&tinlo. 

E'rgere, to erect ; ergo, * ersi, * irto* 

All 



130 Of the VERBS. 

All these verbs have the preter-definite in ei and etti \ 
but regularly their participle is in to. Immtrgerc, dispb'- 
gere, ttrgtre, an obsolete verb, and some others of the 
like sort, have it in so. Both those participles are formed 
of the first syllable of the present indicative joined to the 
syllable to or so. For instance, of c'mgere we make c t nto, 
©f sydrgere, sparso. If the infinitive of those verbs are 
accented on the second syllable, the participle is then 
formed of the two first syllables, added to to or so. 

Thus of immergere you form immerso, of disgiungere, 
disgiunto, &c 

* # * Remember that the participle of the verb spargere, 
is sparto, and sparso, not spargiido, except in poetry for 
the sake of rhyme, or to serve the measure of the verse. 
And even there we ought to use it as little as possible. 

Observe, that the verbs that have a vowel before gen 
must be written with two gg\ and that they double tht 
letter s in the preter-definite : as, 

Friggere, to fry ; friggo,frksi,friggtsti, Scc.fritto. 

Leggere, to read; Itggo, Ussi, leggcsti, Sec. Parlk'- 
ple, let to 

Take'care you do not say frigiuto, or leggiuto* 



*** Of ^ ie Vtrhs in gliere. 

"VOU are to observe that besides the irregularity in 
the preter-definite, and the participles of verbs end- 
ing in gliere, they are also contracted or abridged in the 
infinitive, and in the future and second imperfect tenses ; 
as, 

Cog li ERE, or corre, and cor, to gather. Future corrb. 
Second imperfect, correi. 

The verbs in gliere, change their terminations into /si, 
to form the preter-definite; and in Ho, to make the par- 
ticiple. The conjugating of cogliere, cotsi, colto, will 
serve as a rule for those verbs that are of the same termi- 
nation. 

%* Indicative, present, colgo, and coglio, I gather; cogli, 
coglie; cogliamo, cogliete, colgono, and cogliono. "Imper- 
fect, coglievo, I did gather. * Preter-perfect-definite, coh/, 

ceglUsii, 



Of the VERBS. 131 

cogtihie, cblse, cogliemmo, &c* I gathered. Future, corro, 
&e. I will or shall gather. 

* Imperative, Cbgli, cblga, or cbglia ; cogtiamo, cog- 
liete, cSgliano, or cblgano : let him gather. 

* Optative, che cbglia, or cblga, &c. Imperfect, * che 
cogliessi, Second imperfect, correi. Participle * col to. 



Tog'l i e r e, or tbrre. Present, *tblgo or tbglio, Pre- 
ter-definite, * tblsi, togliesti, &c. Future, * torro. 

Optative, * Volga. Imperfect, togliessi, * Second im- 
perfect, torrei. Participle, tblto. 



Scio'gliere, or sciorre, to loosen. Present, * $ciolg& % 
or scioglio. Preterperfect definite, * sciolsi, scioglitstu 
Participle, sclolto. 

Sci/gliere, to chuse, is not abridged in the infinitive;, 
like the above verbs: it forms in the present, *scelgo, scegli^ 
srtglie ; sceglidmo, seeglitte, scelgono. ' * Preterperfect- 
de finite, set hi, * Participle, sctlto. 



*** Qf tf te Verbs in here. 
TF there were any such tiling in the Italian tongue as* 

a verb terminated in here it would be trahere, to draw, 
with its several compounds. But the present orthography 
is to write them without an h* 

This verb is also contracted in the infinitive. 

Of trdere, we form trdrre or trdr. Trdssi is the pre- 
ter-deflnite, and trdito, the participle. 

* Indicative, present, trdggo, or trdo, trai, trde ; t rag- 
gliamo or trqjdmo, tract e, trdggono,-and trdono, I draw, &c. 
Imperfect, tratvo. * Preterperfect-definite, trdssi, traedi^ 
Sec, * Future, trarrb. 

* Imperative, trdi, trdgga, and ink; tragghidmo, or 
trajfimo, tratte, trdggono. 

% Optative, che trdgga, or trda. Imperfect, che traesiu 

* Sec. imp. trarrCi. Pi-.rticiple, trdito. Gerund, tratndo* 

Observe the same rule in its compounds. Contrdere, 

attrdere, distrdere, &c. make contrdrre, ailrdrre, distrdrre, 

ice. They form the preter-definile in ssi, as contrdssi, 

*ttrdssi> 



132 Of- the VERBS. 

attrdssi, dUtr&m, and the participle in to, as, contrdtto, 
attrdtto, dutrdtto, &c. 



O 



Of the Verbs in lere. 

F all the verbs in le e, there is only the verb svellere, 
"to pluck, that change e into st, to form the pre- 
terperfect -definite, and into to, for the participle. Pre- 
sent, * svehi, svelltdi Future, svellerd. Participle, 
svelio. 



Of the Verbs in mere. 
pRE'MERE, siimere, and their compounds, are the only 
regular verbs for this rule. 

Premere, to press. Present, premo. Preterperfect-defi- 
nite, *pressi and premei, or premetti. Participle, pre- 
miito* 

Its compounds in imere make the preterperfect-definite 
in ssi, and the participle in sso; as, 

Opprimere, * oppresn, oppresso. 

Jmp- <mere, * impressi, impresso. 

Sumere is obsolete: its compounds make * sunsi, simto, 
as, Assumere, * assimsi, a^iinto ; consumere, consumi, 
consunto. 



Of the Verbs in nere. 
po'NERE, is also irregular, with its compounds. It 
changes the infinitive into orre, so that we say, porre, 
topui ; dispone, to dispose, &c. instead of, ponere ard 
disponere. Though we make use of both those infinitives, 
that in orre is preferable, or, at least, the most received. 
We may change nere, or erre, into si for the pseter- 
definite, and into sto for the participle ; saying, * post, 
disposi, posto, disposto, &c. 

The preter-definite may also terminate in ei, as ponti, 
disponci. &c. But the participle always makes sto. 
Nay it would be very wrong to say esposdto, disposdto. 
And this should be carefully minded : because foreigners 
are apt to commit this error. The French are led 

into 



Of the VERBS, 133 

into it by the turn of their language ; and other nations, 
by frequently meeting with the word posdtom printed books* 
But you are to take notice, that this word is derived from 
the verb posdre, and not from ponfre or pdrre. For the 
same reason we do not say, posdi, for post, or pon&i, this 
word being used only for the first person of the preter-defi- 
nite of the same verb pbsare. Consequently, we must ne- 
ver say disposal, esposdi, &c. for the verbs are the com- 
pounds of ponere and not posdre. 

*«* Remember the two remarks I made on the verbs 
ending in lere, nere, nire, which take the latter g in the pre- 
sent, and change le, ne, ni, into r in the future, &c. 

* Present, pbngo,pbni, pone ; ponidmo, ponete,pbngQno s 
I put, &c. Imperfect, ponevo. 

* Preterperfect-definite, post, or ponei, ponisti, pose ; 
ponemmo, poneste, pbsero. Future pwro. 

* Imperative, pbni,pbnga; ponidmo, ponete, pbngano* 

* Optative, chepbnga, a, a ; ponidmo, ponidte, pbngano, 
Imperfect, che ponessi. Second imperfect, porrei. * Par- 
ticiple, pbsto. Gerund, ponendo. 

Conjugate its compounds after the same manner. 



Of the Verbs in ondere. 
T> Y changing ondere into si, or re into i, as in the case of 
•^ regular verbs, you form the preterperfect definite. The 
participle is in osto, uso, or oso. 

Rispo'nd ere, to answer. Present, rispbndo, rispbndi, 
rispbnde; rispondidmo, rispondUe, rispbndono. Imperfect, 
nspondevo. * Preterperfect-definite, rispbsi, rispondesti, 
yispbse ; rispondemmo, rispondeste, risposero. Future, 
rispondero. 

Imperative. Rispbndi,rispbnda; rispondidmo, rispon- 
dele, rispbndano. 

Optative, cherisponda t da,da; rispondidmo t rispondid'e, 
rispbndano. Imperfect, che rispondessi. Second imper- 
fect, rispondertu * Participle, rispbsto. 



Nasc'ondere, to hide. Present, nascendo. * Preter- 
perfect definite, nascbsu Particiciple^wiscosJo, or nascbso. 

The 



134 Op the VERBS. 

The verb f'ondere, to melt, does not make the preter- 
definite in osi, but in usi or ei, You must therefore say 
fondti, or fusty fondest r,fondc, or fuse ■ ; fondtmmo, fon- 
dtste, fonder ono, or / user o. 

* # * Note, that Jusi, fuse, &c. is nol used at present, 
except in compounds ; as in the verb covfbndere, diffbndere, 
&c. which in the preter-defimte makes confusi, and confon- 
dti\ diffiisi, diffondei, &c. and in the participle, confuse, 
diffusa, &c. 

Though in the preter-deflnile we meet with confusi, and 
diffiisi, yet it is more adviseable to. make use of confondei, 
and diffondeL This is because of the ambiguity in those 
words, when they form the first person of the preter-defi- 
nite, and when they are nouns adjective, as we have ob- 
served of chiesi and persu 

The participle of the verb fbndere makefiisoondfondiito* 
The last is the best ; the other is used only for compound 
verbs. 

To'ndere, to shear, does not make tcsi, but tondei, ton- 
dhti, tonde. Participle, tonduto, and not tbso, the latter 
being abridged from tesdio, which comes from tke verb to- 
sare. 



Of the Verbs in pere. 
"D oMPERE, to break, is, with its compounds, the only 
irregular verb of thi3 termination ; in the present it 
forms rbmpo, rbmpi, rbmpe ; rompiamo, rompete, rbmpono. 
Imperfect, rompevo. * Preterperfect-definite, ruppi, or 
rompt:i , rempesti, ruppe, or rompv ; rompemmo, rompeste, 
ruppero, or romptTono, Future, rowperb. * Participle, 
rotto. 



Of the Verbs in rere. 
£*6RRERE, with its compounds, to run, is also the only 
verb that ends in rere short ; it makes the preter-defi- 
nile in si, and the participle in so ; as, 

Corre re, to run. Present, cbrro, cbrri, cbrre ; corriamo, 
corrtte, cbrrono. Imperfect, correvo. Preteq^erfect-de» 
finite, Pret. cbrsi, corresti, cbrse; eorrCmmo, eorreste, cbr~ 
sera. Future, correrb. Imperative, cbrri, corre, &c. 

Optative* 



Of the VERBS. 135 

Optative, the corra, cbrra, corra ; corriamo, corridte, 
$brrano. Imperfect, corrzssi. Second imperfect, corrt'?, 
corrtsti, &c. * Participle, cbrso. Gerund, corrtndo. 

Asgorrere, to ruu to. Preter-defm. accbrsi. Parti- 
ciple, accbrso ; and all the other compounds in the same 
manner. 



Of the Verbs in tere. 
\/Te'ttere, to put, does not make in the preter-deflnife 
m&ssi, but mist, mettesti, mise; meftcmmo, metttstc, 
m'tsero. I put, thou puttest, &c. Participle, mtsso ; we 
sometimes meet with mtssero, promtssero ; but it is more 
in verse than in prose. 

Prome'ttere, to promise, makes promtssi, and pro- 
mhi. Participle, promtsso. 

Riplet'tere, to reflect, is irregular only in the 
participle. We do not say in the preter-definite rejless?, 
but refletlei. The participle makes refiettuto ; but this 
word is grown obsolete. It is customary now to use the 
participle of the verb fare, joined to the word rijiessibne. 
As, having reflected, avendo fdtto rijiessibne, I have re- 
flected upon that, io ho fdtto rejlessibne sbpra do, SfC. 

Riscuotere, risebssi, riscosso, to receive. 

Scuotere, to shake, makes *scbssi, sebsso. 

Percuotere, to strike, makes, perebssi, percotei, 
perebsso. 

Of the Verbs in ucere. 
'"FHE verbs producer e, adducere, riducere, inducere, sedtU 
cere, conducere, deducere, trcducere, which in English 
•ignify, to produce, to allege, io reduce, to persuade, to se- 
duce, to conduct, to deduct, to translate, are also contracted 
m the infinitive. We say produrre, addurre, &c. Their 
preter-definite kprodussi, addussi; and their participle is 
terminated in otto, as, prodbtto, addbtto, &c. 

%* Note, That we likewise say, addiir, produr, Sec. 
which makes a third infinitive. But in prose, we; must 
make use of that in itrre. The other two are proper only" 
for verse, though there are some authors of reputatiou 
that have only used them in prose. 

Th& 



136 Of the VERBS. 

The other verbs, terminating in ucere, do not change 
the infinitive. Therefore we must take care to say 
rilucere, but never rilurre, and so of the rest. 



^0 



Of the Verbs in vere. 
form the preterperfect definite of verbs in vere, 
you must change vere into ssi, or si. The participles 
are different. 

Movere, to move. Preter-definite, mbssu Participle, 
mbssa. It is more usual to write mubvere than movere. But 
we do not put the u in the preter-definite, nor in the 
participle : therefore we must say mbssi and mbsso. And 
the same holds good in regard to it's compounds ; for 
instance, *prombssi,prombssQ; ccmmbssi,commbsso, &c. All 
those verbs likewise form the preter-definite in ei, as, 
promovei, commovei. In that case, you make use of the 
u and write, promuovei, commuovei, &c. 

Scrivere, to write ; scrissi, scrivei, scritto. 

VIvere, to live; *vtssi, vivesti, visse. Participle, 
vissiito, or vivuto. It makes also vivetti in the preter- 
perfect-definite. 

Assolvere, to absolve, having a consonant before 
vere, makes in the preterpeifect-detinite assolsi, assolvtsti, 
assblse, &c. or assolvetti. 

Ris6lvere, to resolve. Present, risblvo, Preterper- 
fect definite, *risblsi, risolvesti ; or risolvei, or risolvetti. 
Participle, risoluto. 

*„* Rcmon»i>or tUtti tht optative of verbs, ending in 
ere and in ire, is forced of the first person indicative, by 
changing o into a ; as, vedere, vedo, veda ; scrivere, scrivo, 
scriva ; cogliere, ctlgo, cblga; credere, credo, creda; dor- 
mire, dbrmo, dbrma ; sentire, stnto, senta ; Jinire,Jinisco, 
fin'isca ; dire, dco, dka. And so of all the other verbs, 
except tssere, saptre, avere, and dovere. 



Irregulars of the Third Conjugation. 
IN the third conjugation there are six verbs more ir- 
regular than the rest, viz. dire, to say ; morire, to die ; 
satire, to ascend ; udire, to hear ; ventre, to come : uscire, 
to go out. 

DIRE, 



Of the VERBS. 137 



DI'RE, to say. 
I apprehend the verb dire is only an abridgment of di- 
cere, which was used by the ancients. I give it however a 
place among the irregulars of the third conjugation, in or- 
der to comply with fe custom of other grammarians. 

* Present. Dico, did, dice; dicidmo, dite, dkono, I say, 
thou sayest, he says ; we say, you say, they say. 

Imperfect, Dkvw, vi, va ; vamo, vdte, vano. 

* Preterperfect-defmite. Dissi,dktsti,disse,', dktmmo, 
diceste,dissero : I said, thou didst say, he said ; we said, 
you suid, they said, 

Preterperfect. Ho dttto, I have said. 

Future. Dirb, I shall say. 

* Imperative. Di, dka ; dicidmo, dite, dkano ; say 
thou, let him say; let us say, say you, let them say. 

* Optative. Che dka, dka ; dicidmo, dicidte, dkano : 
that I may say, thou may'st say, he may say, &c. 

Imperfect. Che dicessi. Second imperfect, direi. 

* Participle, detto. Gerund, dicendo. 



MORl'RE, to die. 
Morlrehzs no irregularity, but by making the present 
tense in two different manners. 

* Indicative ; present. Mbro, mori, more ; morilimo, mo- 
rite, mbrono: or mubjo, mori, more ; muojdmo, morite, mub- 
jono : I die, thou diest, he dies: we die, you die, they die. 

Imperfect. Morivo, vu va ; vamo, vdte, vano. 

Preierperfcct-definite. Morj, moristi, mori ; morimmo, 
moriste, morirono, and not 7tibrsi, which comes from 
mbrdtre. 

Preterperfect. Sono mvrto, I am dead. 

Future. Morirb, I shall or will die. 

* Imperative. Mori, mora, or imibja; moriamo, or muoja- 
mo, morite, mprano, or mubjano : die thou, let him die, &c. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che mora, or muoja, mora ; 
moriamo, moridte, morano, or muojano. 

Im- 



1SS OF THE VERBS. 

Imperfect, die mortssi. Second imperfect, morirei. 
* Participle, motto. Gerund, morendo. 



SALI'RE,*o go up, 
Salire, is irregular, like morirei because its present tense 
is formed two ways. 

* Indicative present. Sdlgo, or sdglio, sail, sale ; sagli- 
&mo, or salghidmo, sal'ite, sdlgono, or sdgliono : I go up, 
&c. Imperfect, salivo, &c. 

Preter-definite. Salj, satisfy salt ; or salimmo, saliste, 
salirono : I went up. Future, saliro, I shall go up. 

* Imperative. Sdlghi, saiga, or sdglia ; saglidmo, 
•salite, sdlgano : go up thou, let him go up ; &c. 

* Optative, Che saiga, or saglia, saiga, saiga, &c. 
Imperative. Che salissi, salissi, salisse. 

Second Imperfect. Saliret, salirtsti. 

Participle, sal'do. Gerund, saltndo. 

Take care you do not say sdli and saliamo, instead of 
salghi and saglidmo, or salghidmo ; because the former 
words come from the verb saldre, and not from salire, to 
mount. 



V VI' RE, to hear. 

The irregularity of udire is only in trie present tense, by 
changing u into o, in the first, second, and third person 
singular, and in the third person plural. 

* Indicative, present. O'do, bdi, ode ; udidmo, udite, 
odono ; I hear, thou nearest, he hears ; we hear, you hear, 
they hear. 

Imperfect. Udivo, vi, va ; vdmo, ndte, vano. 

Preterperfect-def. Udj, udisti, udl ; udimmo, udtste i 
udirono ; I heard, &c. 

Future, Udirb, rdi, rd ; remo, rete, rdnnc : I shall or 
will hear, thou shalt hear, he shall hear. 

* Imperative. Odi, bda ; udidmo, vdite, bdano. 

* Optative. Che bda, that I may hear. 

* Imperfect. Che ud'issi, that I might hear. 

Second imperfect, udirei. Participle, uddo. Gerund, 
Aidhido. 

V Take 



Of the VERBS. 139 

* # * Take notice that you are never to say odidmo for 
itdidmo; odidmo being the first person plural of the present 
indicative of the verb odidre, to hate. 



VENIRE, to com*. 

* Indicative, present. Vengo, vieni, viene; veniamo, or 
venghidmv, venite, vengono: I coine, thou comest, he 
comes ; we come, you come, they come. 

Imperfect. Vemvo y I did come. 

* Preterperfect-def. Venni, venisti, vtnne ; venimmo, 
vcniste, vennero : I came, thou earnest, he came ; we came, 
you came, they came. 

Preterperfect, sbno venuto. Future, verro, I shall 
come. 

* Imperative. Vieni, vtnga^ veniamo, venite, vtngano : 
come thou, let him come ; let us come, &c. 

* Optative, present, che venga. Imperfect, che venissu 
Second imperfect, verrei. Participle, venuto. Gerund^ 

ventndo. 

All the compounds of venire, as pervenire, rivenire, are 
conjugated in the same manner ; and so are all the other 
compounded verbs, 

USCrRE, to go out. 
Uscire is irregular, only by changing u into t m the pre- 
sent, viz. in the first, second, and third person singular, 
and the third plural. 

* Indicative present. JE'sco, esci, tsce ; uscidmo, uscite 9 
escono : I go out, thou goest out, he goes out ; we go out, 
you go out, they go out. 

Imperfect. Uscivo, 

Preterperfect-def. Uscj, uscisti, uscl ; uscimmo, usciste, 
uscirono : I went out, thou wentest out, he went out ; we 
went out, &c. 

Preterperfect. Sonb uscito, I am gone out. 

Future. Usciro, uscirdi, uscira, &c. 

* Imperative. Esci, hca ; uscidmo, uscite, tscano* 

* Optative. Che hca, esca, hca ; uscidmo, uscidte, 
tscano. Imperfect, che usdssi. 

Second imperfect, uscirti. Participle, uscito* Gerund, 
usctndo. 

Aprire $ 



140 



Of the VERBS. 



Aprire, to open, makes in the preterperfect-defiuite 
aprj, or apersi. Participle, aperto. 

Ceprire, to cover, makes in the preterperfect-definite 
coprj, or coper si. Participle, coperto. 

The third conjugation of the verbs terminated in the in- 
finitive in ire has another sort of verbs irregular only in the 
present, which are formed from the infinitive, by changing 
ire, into isco ; as, ardire, to dare, of which I have given the 
following conjugation, to serve as a rule for the rest. 



Of the Verbs in isco. 

TN order to lay down a general rule for the verbs that 
have the termination /see in the present tense, observe, 
that some of them do not follow the verb ard'isco ; and 
they differ only from the verb sentire, in the preterperfect- 
demrite, and in the participle. They are as follow: 



Present, 



Aprire, 

Apparhe, 

Coprire, 

Comparire, 

Ojferire, 

Prqferire, 

Soffrire, 

SeppelUre, 



apro 

apparisco, 

copra, 

compamco, 

offerisco, 

proferiscc, 

f sqffro, $? 7 
\sojfrisco, J 



Preterperf. Partcip. 

aprj, & apersi, aperto. 
fj apparj, fy ctp-1 



i 



parsi, 



apparso. 



coprj fy copersi, copetro. 
C comparj Sf conn- 1 , 

1 parsi, l^parso 

offer), $ ffrsi, offerto. 
'-Iproferto. 



\ firsi, 
s °ffrj> soffersi 



seppellisco, seppelj, 



sofferio, 

C sepolto$sep- 
\ pellito. 



I have made a collection of the regular verbs in ire, 
which are conjugated like seniire, as you have already 
seen in this chapter, page 100, where we treated of 
the third conjugation of verbs. Ail the other verbs 
not contained in that and the preceding collection, form 
the present in isco, and ought to be conjugated like 
ardisco* In this collection there are even some verbs, 

that 



Of the VERBS. 141 

that are also irregular ; as, consentire, mentire, partire, 
when the latter signifies, to divide. We meet with 
consentisco, mentisco, and partisco. When the latter sig- 
nifies to share, I should prefer partisco to pdrto. On 
the contrary, when it denotes to go away, you must 
say pdrto, and not partisco. Bollire, convertire, soffrire, 
also make the first person of the present indicative in 
isco. 

*«* Before you read over radisco, remember the two 
remarks concerning the irregularity of the present tense. 

The first teaches you, that the irregularity of the pre- 
sent indicative is continued in the present imperative and 
subjunctive. 

By the secon4 you find, that the first and second per- 
sons plural of the present tense are never irregular. 



ARDI' RE, to dare. 



Indicative, present. Ar disco, ar disci, ardisce ; ardidmo 9 
ardite, ardiscono : I dare. N. B. I am of opinion that we 
ought to say, abbidmo ardire, and not ardidmo. The lat- 
ter seems proper only for the verb ardere, to burn ; for ar- 
didmo implies we burn. Neither can we say, ardischidmo, 
as this is not an Italian word : the same is applicable to any 
of the persons, which may be confounded with those of 
the verb drdere, to burn. 

Imperfect. Ardivo, I did dare ; ardivi, va ; &c, 

Preterperfect-def. Ardj, ardisti, ardl ; ardimmo, ar* 
diste, ardirono ; I durst, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho ardito. Future, Ardiro. 

Imperative. Ardisci, ardisca ; abbidmo ardire, ardis^ 
cano ; dare thou, let him dare, let us dare, &c. 

Optative. Che ardisca, ardisca, ardisca ; che abbidmo 
ardire, che abbiate ardire, ardiscano : that I may dare, 
thou may'st dare, he may dare, &c. 

Imperfect, ardissi. Second imperf. ardirei. 

Participle, ardito. > Gerund, avtndo ardire. 

Conjugate the following verbs after the same manner. 
G Abbolire 9 



142 



Of the VERBS. 



Abboltre, 

Abborrire, 

Arrichire, 

Arrossire, 

Bandire, 

JEtianchire, 

Capire, 

Colpire, 

Compatire, 

Concepirey 

Digerire, 

Eseguire, 

Finire, 

Fiorire, 

Gradire, 

Impazzire, 

Incredulity 

JLanguire, 

Patirey 

Spedire, 

Traitire, 

Ubbidire, 

Unirey 



iSCO j ito m 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
isco ) ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito^ 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj ito 
iscoj Ito 
iscoj ito 



abolish. 

abhor. 

enrich. 

blush. 

banish. 

whiten. 

comprehend. 

strike. 

agree, or bear with. 

conceive. 

digest, 
to *{ execute, 
j finish. 
| blossom, or bloom. 

approve of. 

grow mad. 

grow cruel. 

languish. 

suffer. 

make haste. 

obey. 

betray. 

unite. 



** Note, that the poets do not always observe this 
irregularity, for they indifferently say offro and offerisco, 
miigge, and mugisie; Idngue, and languisce ; fere and/e- 
risce; as may be seen in Pastor Fido, and in Tasso's 
Aminta. 

Mugge in mdndro V armento. Pastor Fido. 

Qvalarme ftroy qual dia vita, quale, 
Sdniin ritorni in vita. 
There are also some verbs that end inure, and in ire: 
as, 

Cclordre y colorire, to colour. 
Jnanimdre, inanimire, to animate. 
Inacerb&re, inactrbirc, to sharpen. 
Indurdre, indvrire, to harden. 
The poets also frequently use the verbs ire, and girt, 
instead of anddre ; which is all I had to say in regard to 
irregular verbs. 

b Of 



Of the VERBS. U3 



Of the Verb ire. 

•"THE following tenses are all that occur in good 
writers. 

Indicative, imperfect. Tva, he did go ; ivano, or ivan, 
they did go. Future, irb, irdi, ira\ iremo, irite y iranno, 
or irdn. 

Imperative, Ite, go you. 

Infinitive, Pre, or ir, to go. 

Participle, I'to, gone. 

The other tenses are not used. 



Of the Verb gire. 

There are no more than the following tenses in use • 

Present, Glte, you go. 

Imperfect, Givo, givi, giva, or gia; givdmo, givdte, 
givano: I did go, &c. 

Preter-def. Gist ?, gi, or gib ; g'mmo, giste, girono. 

Imperative, Gite, go you. 

Optative, imperfect. Che gissi, gissi, gisse ; gi$$imo 9 
giste, gissero: that I might go. 

Infinitive. Gire, or gir. Participle, gito. 

We have still something to say in regard to verbs 
neuter, reciprocal, and impersonal. 



Of the Verbs Neuter. 
HPHE Verbs Neuter are those which in their compound 
tenses are seldom or never conjugated with the verb 
tssere, to be ; as, / speak, I sleep, f tremble, &c. we may 
indeed say, / have spoken, I have slept, I have trembled ;. 
but not, / am spoken, &c. But to express myself more 
properly, verbs neuter are those that make a complete 
sense of themselves, and do not govern any case after them, 
like the verbs active ; for instance, I enter, I tremble ; io 
6ntro, io trtmo. Take notice, however, that we meet 
with some verbs neuter, which may govern an accusative ; 
as, io vivo una lunga vita, io dbrmo un lungo sonno, io 
corro un lungo cor so, &c. 

G2 It 



H4 Of the VERBS. 

It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature of a 
verb neuter, in order to prevent mistakes or errors in the 
participles, as may be seen in the Second Part, where we 
treat of the Syntax of Participles. 



Of Reciprocal Verbs, 

'"jpHE name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to such as 
are conjugated through all their tenses with the pro- 
nouns conjunctive, mi, ti, si, ci, vi, after the same manner 
as dolere is conjugated in the irregulars of the second con- 
jugation : example, 

Indicative present. Mipento, tipehti, si pente; cipen- 
tidmo, vi pentite, si pent ono : I repent, &c. 

Imperf. Mipentivo, tipentivi, sipentiva; cipentivdmo, 
vipentivate, si pentivano : I did repent, &c. . 

Preterperfect-def. Mi pentj, ti pentisti, si penti; ci 
pentimmo, vi pentiste, si pentirono : I repented, &c. 

Preterperfect-def. Mi sbno pentito, I have repented. 

Future. Mi peniiro, I shall repent. 

Imperative. Phititi tu, pentasi egli ; pentidmoci not, 
pentitevi voi, pentansi eg lino. 

Subjunctive. Che mi p&nta, that I may repent. 

Indicative, present. Miricbrdo, ti ricbrdiysi ricbrda ; 
and so of the rest. 

* # * Note, all the verbs active may become reciprocals : 
example, 

I love myself, io m'dmo. 

Thou lovest thyself, tu t'dmi. 

He loves himself, egli s'dma. 

We love ourselves, not ci amidmo. 

You love yourselves, voi v'amate. 

They love themselves, eglino s'amano. 

And so of all the other tenses, and all the other verbs. 

Yet we are to take notice, that the pronouns mi, 
ti si, vi, which gave the reciprocality to the verbs, 
may be placed either before or after it ; but in the 

impe- 



Of the VERBS. 145 

imperative, infinitive, gerund, and participle, they ought 
to be placed after the verb : example, dmami, love me ; 
amdndomi, loving me ; amdrsi, to love oneself: amdtosi 9 
loved by oneseLf; and so in all the other verbs. 



Of Impersonal Verhs. 

r r , HERE are three sorts of verbs impersonal, which 
have only the third person singular. 

The first are properly impersonals of themselves ; as, 

Accade, it happens. 

Bdsta, it is enough, or it suffices. 

Bisbgna, it must, or it behoves. 

Piove, it rains. 

Tubna, it thunders. 

The second are derived from verbs active, preceded by 
the participle si, which renders them impersonals ; as s'dma? 
they love ; si dice, they say. 

The third, which have a great affinity with reciprocal 
verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns-conjunctive, rrii, 
ii, gli, or le, ci, vi ; as, mi duble, ti duble, gli duble, &c» 

The impersonal verbs of themselves are, 

Accade, it happens. 

Avviene, it falls out. 

Bast a, it is enough. 

Bisbgna, it must. 

Grdndina, it hails, 

JVevica, it snows. 

Ndn occbrre, it is not necessary. 

Pare, it seems. 

Piove, it rains. 

Lampeggia, it lightens. 

Tubna, it thunders; and the like, which are conjugated 
with the third person singular of each tense ; as, 

Indicative, present. Bisbgna, it must, or it behoves. 

Imperfect. Bisogndva, it did behove. 

Preterperfect-def. Bisogno, it behoved. 

Future. Bisognerd, it shall or will behove. 

G 3 Optative, 



146 Of the VERBS. 

Optative. Che bisbgni, that it may behove. 
Imperfect. Che bisogndsse, that it might behove, 
Second imperfect. Bisognerebbe, it should behove. 
Infinitive. Bisogndre, to behove. 

The participle si, which composes the second sort of 
impersonal verbs, is placed indifferently before or after 
the verbs; as si dice, or dicesi, they say ; sdma, or amdsi, 
they love. -In the like manner all the verbs active may 
become impersonal. They are conjugated with the third 
person singular and plural ; as, 

Present. Amasi, or s'dma: s'dmano, or dmansi, they 
love. 

Imperfect. S'amdva, or amdvasi : s'amdvano, or 
amdvansi, they did love. 

f4-f In regard to these verbs, take notice, that when 
the noun that follows them is in the singular number, you 
must put the verb in the singular ; if the noun be in the 
plural, you put the verb in the plural; example, 

They praise the captain, si loda U capitano. 

They praise the captains, si lodano i capitdni. 

They see a man, si vede uriubmo. 

They see men, si vedono itomini. 

%* We must also take notice, when the participle si is 
put after a verb that is accented, the letter 5 is doubled, 
and the accent dropped : example, 

Fdssi, for si fa, they do. 

Dirdssi, for si dird, they will say. 

The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as are 
conjugated with the pronouns personal, nil, ti, gli, or ?e, 
ci, vi, lorOy with the third person singular: example, 

Indicative present. Mi dispidce, I am displeased, or 
it displeases me. 

Ti dispidce t thou art displeased. 

Gli or le displace, he is displeased, or she is displeased. 

Ci displace, we are displeased. 

Vi dispiuce, you are displeased. 

Displace loro, they are displeased. 

Tmperfect. Mi dkpiacpva, 1 was displeased. 

Preter-def. Mi dispideque, I was displeased. 

Future. Mi dispiacerd, I shall be displeased. 

Optative, 



Of the VERBS. 147 

Optative. Che mi dispiaccia, that I may be displeased. 

Imperfect. Che mi dispiacesse, That I were displeased. 

Second Imperfect. Mi dispiacerebbe, I should be dis- 
pleased. 

Conjugate after the same manner, 

M'accdde, it happens to me. 

M'aggrada, it agrees with me. 

M'aviene, it happens to me. 

Mi bisbgna, it behoves me. 

Miduble, I am ill or it grieves me. 

M'occbrre, it happens to me. 

Mi pare, it seems to me. 

Mi pidce, it pleases me. 

Mi rmcresce, it displeases me. 

Mi sovviene, I rememher. 

Many of those impersonal verbs have the third person 
singular and plural ; as, 

My leg pains me, la gdmba mi duble. 

I have sore eyes, mi dbgliono gli bcchi. 

Your coat appears new to me, il vbstro vestito mi pare 
nno vo. 

Your shoes seem to me too long, le vbstre scdrpe mi 
pdjono troppo lunghe. 



How to express, there is, there was. 

CT'HERE is, there was, are expressed by the help of the 
Italian particle ci, which answers to the French par- 
ticle y, and is sometimes an adverb that denotes the place 
where we are ; as, 

Since I am in this place, I will dine in it, or at it ; 
giacche sbno qui, ci pranzero. 

But mentioning a place where we are not, we must use 
vi ; as, I have been in England, but I will never go thither 
again, sbno-stato in Jnghilterra^na non vi tornerbpiu. 

But there is this difference between the Italian ci, and 
the French y : that whereas the latter is used in speaking 
of time, as, il y a un an, it is a year since ; the former 
is not ; as e un anno, or un' dnno fa: sbno due mesi, or 
due mesi ft. And so of all the. tenses, putting the verb, 
G 4 csstre, 



148 • Of the VERBS. 

issere, to be, in the third person singular or plural, accord- 
ing to the number in which we express ourselves. 

Yei for the conveniency of beginners, I will conjugate 
this impersonal verb c % c'ere> &c. there is, there was, 
there has been, &c. through all its tenses, and point out 
its use in mentioning a place. 



Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb essere. 

Ci is changed into vi when you speak of different places? 
but mentioning time, you must drop the ci and w. 

Singular. Plural. 

Ind. pres. There is, c% There are, ci sono, or vi 
or v'e. sono. 

Imperfect. There was, There were, c'erano. 
c*era. 

Preter-def. There was, There were, cifurono* 
eifit. 

Preterp. There has been/ There have been, ci sons 
c'e stdto. stdti. 

Preterplup. There had The same, c'erano stdti. 
been, c'era stdto. 

Future. There shall be, The same, ci sardnno. 
ci sard. 

Imper. Let there be, The same, sianci. 
siaci. 

Opt That there may be, The same, che ci skno. 
che ci sia. 

Imperf. That there were, The same, che ci fSssero. 
che ci fosse. 

Sec. Imp. There would The same, ci sartbbero. 
be, ci sarebbe. 

Preter-perf. That there bad been, che ci or vi si& stdto, 
or che ci sidno stdti, or vi sidno stdti. 

Preterpluperf. If there had been, se ci, or vif6sse stdto, 
or ct or vijossero stdti. That there had been, che 

vi 



Of the VERBS. US 

vi fosse stdto, or che vifbssero stdti. There would have 
been, ci sartbhe stato, or vi sarebbero stati. 

Future. When there has or shall have been, quando vi 
sard stdto, or quando vi sardnno stati* 

Infin. There to have been, esservi stato. Gerund, in 
there having beeu,.essendovi stdto. 

%* Note, in speaking of the feminine gender, we are 
to use stdta, state, instead of stdto, stati. 

\* Remember, that if after the adverb ci or vi, you 
find the verb to have, and the tenses of the verb to have 
are followed by a participle, as, he has dined there ; then 
the tenses of the verb to have must be expressed by those 
of avtre, and not by those of essere: example, 

I have dined there, ci or vho pranzdto. 

Thou hast dined there, ci or v'hai pranzdto. 

He has lain there, ci or vha dormito. 

We have read in it, ci or v'abbidmo lelto. 

You have said to it, ci or v'avtte dttto. 

They have drunk there, ci or vhamio bevido. 

Observe the same rule through all the tenses, except 
the participle stdto, which is never joined with the tenses 
of the verb avtre ; example, 

I have been there, ci or vi sbno stdto or stdta. 

Thou hast been there, ci or vi sei stdto or stdta. 

And in like manner through all the tenses and persons. 

\* Observe, the particles ci and vi are often omitted 
in the present tense ; thus we say, e u?i' uomo, instead of 
ci t uri uomo ; sbno ubmini, instead of ci sbno ubmini. 

* # * Those who learn Italian are greatly at a loss how 
to render the following expressions; there is of it, oxthtm; 
there is not of it ; is there of it? is there not of it ? there 
was of it ; there was not of it, &c. As the ladies, espe- 
cially, find those ways of speaking extremely difficult, 
I have explained them at large, for their greater ease, in 
the following conjugation. - 



O 5 Con- 



150 Of the VERBS. 



There is of it or them, { cen , ( i 1 or f 
' I vene J \ 



Conjugation of the verb impersonal there is of it, when 
marks the place, through, all its tenses. 

eene sono. 
vene sono* 

There is not of it, non eerie; non cene scno. 

Is there of it ? eerie? cene sono ! 

Is there not of it? non eerie ? non cene sono 1 . 

There was of it, veriera ; ven'erano. 

There was not of it, non veriera ; non verier ano. 

Was there of it? veri era ? verierano? 

Was there not of it? non veriera T non verier ano T 

There was of it, venefii ; vene fur ono. 

There was not of it, non venefii; non vene fur ono; 

Was there of it? venefii ? vene fur ono? 

Was there not of it? non vene fit? non vene fur ono? 

There shall be of it, vene sard ; vene sardnno. 

There shall not be of it, non vene sara; non vene sardnno* 

Shall there be of it? vene sara? vene sardnno? 

Shall there not be of it ? non vene sard ? non vene sardnno ?' 

«<• 

That there may be of it, che vene sia; che vene siano. 
That there may not be of it, che non vene sia: che non 

vene stano. 
That there were of it, che vene fosse ; che vene fbssero. 
That there were not of it, che non vene fosse ; che non 

vene fbssero, 

There would be of it, vene sarebbe; vene sarebbero. 
There would not be of it, non vene sarebbe ? non vene sa- 

rebbero. 
Would there not be of it? non vene sarebbe? non vene 

sarebbero 1 

If there had been of it, se vene fosse st at o ; se vene fbssero 
ttdti or state. 

If 



Of the VEJiBS. _ i5i 

If there had not been of it, se non vene fosse stdto ; se non 
vene fbssero stutt or state, 

Had there been of it ? vene sarebbe stdto ? vene sarebbero 

stdti? 
Had there not been of it ? non vene sarebbe stdio 1 or non 

vene sarebbero stdti. 

If there had been of it, se vene fosse stdto ; or se vene 

fbssero stdti. 
If there had not been of it, se non vene fosse stdto; senon 

vene fbssero stdti. 

There would have been of it, vene sarebbe stdto ; vene 

sarebbero stdti. 
There would not have been of it, non vene sarebbe stdto ; 

non vene sarebbero stdti. 

Would there have been of it? vene sarebbe stdto \ vene 

sarebbero stdti? 
Would there not have been of it ? non vene sarebbe stdto ? 

non vene sarebbero stdti ? 

There will have been of it, vene sai*d stdto ; vene sardnno 

stdti. 
There will not have been of it, non vene sard stdto ; non 

vene sardnno stdti. 

Shall there have been of it? vene sard stdto ; vene sardnn* 

stdti? 
Shall there not have been of it? non vene sard stdto ? non 

vene sardnno stdti ? 

For there having been too much of it, per esservene stdto 

trbppo. 
In there having been too little of i\ t essendo vene stdto trdpp& 

pbco. 

%* But if you express yourself in the feminine gender* 
you must use stdta, state, instead of stdto, stdti. 

We must also render, there is of it or them, by cene % 

in speaking of a place where we are; and by vene, 

m mentioning a place where we are not; but it often 

G 6 kappens, 



152 Of the VERBS. 

happens, and especially in speaking of the time, that they 
leave out the ce entirely .- example, 

How many months is it I it is ten at least : qudnti mesi 
sono ? sono died almeno. 

Sometimes they express, there is of it or them, by ne 
only ; as, how many months is it ? ten of them are past ; 
qudnti mesi sono ? ne sono passdti died. 

Sometimes the whole is expressed/ as, how many 
months is it from this to new-year's day 1 there are ten 
of them : qudnti mesi sono di qui all' anno nuovo ? cene 
sono died. 

* # * When, after the pronouns conjunctive, mi, ti, ci, vi, 
me, thee, us, you ; you- rind the particle d followed by a 
verb, there is no occasion to express it ; example, 

He will see me there, mi vedrti : he will give thee there, 
ti darci. 

We shall see you there, vi vedremoy you will write to 
ms there, ci scriverete. 



CHAF. V. 
O/ - PARTICIPLES. 

'"FHE Participle (which ought to be called a supine) ir 
a tense of the infinitive, which serves to form the 
preterperfects and preterpluperfects of all the verbs ; as 
ho amdto, avevo amdto. 

Amdto is a participle, and all the verbs in are form the 
participle in ato; as amdto, cantdto, yarldto, cinddtoyduto, 
confessdto, adordto, studidfo, &c. 

Of all the verbs in are, the verb/are alone has two tt's 
in the participle, where it makes fdtto, to distinguish it from 
fdto, signifying destiny. 

Amdto, is likewise a noun adjective: example, uomo 
amdto, donna amdta, libri amdti, lettere amdte. 

Some participles of the first conjugation are frequently 
abridged; as, 

Accondo 



Of the PARTICIPLES. 



3 53 



Acc6neio r " 




" acconcidto, 


fitted. 


Adbrno 




adorndto, 


adorned. 


Asciutto 




asciugdto, 


or aschdtdto, dried. 


Avvezzo 




avvezzdto, 


accustomed. 


Cdrico 




caricdto, 


laden. 


Desto 




destdtOy 


awaked. 


Fermo 




fermdto, 


stopt. 


Gbnfio 




gonfidto, 


swelled. 


Gudsto 




guastdto, 


spoiled. 


Lcicero 




lacerdto, 


torn. 


Mdcero 


, 


macerdto, 


bruised. 


Manifesto 




manifest at c 


>, manifested. 


Mbzzo 


^for 4 


mozzdto, 


cut. 


Mtto 




nettdto, 


cleansed. 


Pago 




pagdto, 


paid. 


Phto 




pestdto, 


pounded. 


Privo 




privdto, 


deprived. 


Scemo 




scemdto, 


lessened. 


Scbncio 




sconcidtOj 


disordered. 


Secco 




seccdto, 


dried. 


Stdnco 




stancdto, 


wearied. 


Tbcco 




toccdto, 


touched. 


Trbnco 




troncdto, 


cut off, 


Trbvo 




trovdto, 


found. 


Vblto 




volt at O) 


turned. 


Vbio 




^voidtOj 


emptied. 


And several others which the 


use of authors will point out 


to you. 




The regular verbs ending 


in ere, form the participle in 


uto ; as creduto, ricevfdo, temido, godido* 


The irregulars in ere have 


the participle in so, or to : 


as prendere, preso; render e, 


reso ; pidngere, plant o ; pim- 


gtre, punto ; leggere, Utto ; 


scrivere, scritto. 


The verbs terminated in ire, in the infinitive, make their 


participles in ito ; as, sentire, 


sentito ; finire,finito. 


Except apparire, which makes appdrso ; applaudire, ap- 


plduso; aprire, aperto ; comparire, compdrso; dire, dttto, 


morire, mbrto: offrire, offeri 


f o ; venire, venuio. 


*** There are three sorts 


of participles, namely, active, 


passive, and absolute. 










The 



154 _ Of the PARTICIPLES. 

The active participles are composed of the verb avere : 
as, ho amdto, avevo amdto ; ho detto, hdi detto; ho creduto, 
ho sentito. 

The passive participles are preceded by the verb tssere ; 
as sono amdto, essendo creduto, &c. 

The absolute participles are of the same nature as 
those called absolute in Latin, and are composed of the 
gerunds of the two auxiliary verbs, having and being ; 
as, having loved, avendo amdto ; being loved, essendo 
amdto ; essendo creduto. 

Having and being are often left out in Italian : ex* 
ample, 

Having done that, fdtto questo* 

Having said so, detto questo. 

That being done, fdtto questo. 

The sermon being done, ^/wita Id predica. 

%* Observe that the Italians have a particular manner 
of rendering the adverb after, by turning the expression ; 
example, 

After he had done, fdtto eh'ebhe. 

After he had spoken, parldto ch'ebbe. 

After he shall have written his letter, scritto ch'av?*d la 
sua letter a. 

After they had supped, cendto ch'ebbero. 

See, in the Second Part, the Concord of Participles, 
where you will find a full solution of the several difficulties 
relating to that part of speech. 



CHAP. VI. 

O/ADVERBS. 

T^HE Adverb is that which gives more or less force to* 
the verb. The adverb has the same effect with the 
verb, as the adjective with the substantive, it explains the 
accidents and circumstances of the action of the verb. 

There are a great many sorts ; as adverbs of time, place, 
and quantity, &c. 

Adverbs of time; as, at present, now, yesterday, to-day, 
never, always, in the mean time. 

Adverbs 



Or the ADVEUB& 155 

Adverbs of place; as, where, here, from whence , there, 
from hence, above, below, far, near. 

Adverbs of quantity; as, how much, how many, sa 
much, much, little, too much. 

*** A g reat many adverbs are formed from adjectives, 
changing o into amente ; as, sdnto, santamente, holily : 
ricco, riccamfaite, richly ; dotto, dottamente, learnedly; 
eitto, altamente, highly. 

From adjectives in e, we likewise form adverbs, by 
adding mente to them ; as, 

Costdnte, costantemente, constantly. 
Diligente, diligentemente, diligently, 
Prudente, prudeniemente, prudently. 
\* But if the adjectives happened to end in le, we must 
remove the e, and put mente in its stead. 
Fedele, fedelmhite, faithfully. 
tf mile, mnilmente, humbly. 
Tale, talmente, so. 
In order to assist the memory of those who are learning 
the Italian language, I have here collected a great number 
of adverbs, which, by frequent repetition, may be easily 
retained, especially those terminated in mente. 

A Collection of Adverbs. 

I. 

Abbondantemente, abundantly. 

Con ragibne, merit amente, justly. 

A capo, at the end, or at the head. 

A briglia sciolfa, full speed. 

Assolutamtnte, absolutely. 

A cavalcioni, a-straddle. 

A dirbtte Idgrime, with downright crying. 

Adesso, or a, or, at this time, 

Adtsso adesso, or' ora > now immediately. 

A pie zbppo, lamely. 

A pdtti, upon condition. 

Con pdtto che, upon condition that. 

Ma2 volentihi, against one's will. 

Da 



156 



Of the ADVERBS. 



Da parte, da banda. 


aside* 


Attualmente, 


actually, 


Appbsta, 


purposely. 


Con pensier di, 


in order to. 


Addio, 


farewell. 


Mirabilmente, a maraviglia, 


admirably, 


Accortamhtle, sagacemente, 


cunningly. 


In ginocchibni, 


kneeling. 


Alia smascelMta, 


with open mouth. 


Leggiadraintnte, 


agreeably. 


Altrbve, 


elsewhere. 


Cosl, 


so. 


Cosl sia, 


so be it. 


Agevolmente, 


easily. 


At exphto, al ripdre, * 


under shelter. 


AW oscuro, 


in the dark. 


In sbinma, alia fine, , 


in the end. 


In fret fa, 


in haste. 


A lungo andure, 


at long run. 


Amichevolmtnte, 


amicably. 


A discrezibne, 


at discretion. 


Supino, 


backwards. 


Tacitamente, 


silently. 


In dispdrte, 


apart. 


Peril drttto, 


the right way. 


Per il rovescio, 


the wrong side outward. 


A gara, 


in emulation. 


A prbva, 


proof against. 


AW improviso, 


at unawares. 


Stnza la sapid a, 


unknowingly. 


Su, su, or via, via, 


come, away, away. 


Con tempo, con agio, 


at leisure. 


Allbra, 


then. 


Anticamtnte, 


anciently. 


Quasi, 


pretty near. 


Appiinto, giusio, 


just so. 


Posdimani, dimati I'dltrO, 


after to-morrow. 


Adesso, bra, 


now. 


Alia rovescia, 


against the hair or grain. 


In ditiro, 


backward. 


MahoUntUri, con rincrcscinivnto, with regret. 



Go?, 






©F the ADVERBS. 



157 



l 



Cioe, 


to wit. 


Abbastdnza, 


enough. 


Brancolbne, tentbne, 


groping along* 


L'dltro jeri, jeri I altro 9 


the day before yesterday. 


Prima di, 


before that, 


Al belzo, 


at the rebound. 


In capo, 


at the beginning. 


In maniera alcuna, 


by no means. 


Alia sprovista, 


at unawares. 


Di sbpra, 


above. 


°gg}> 


to day. 


In vece, 


instead of. 


Prima, 


before. 


Qudnto prima, 


as soon as possible. 


A'ncke, * 


also. 


Si, cost, 


as, so. 


Tdnto, cost, 


as, as much as. 


Grande qudnto, 


as great as. 


Subito, 


as soon as. 


Nel resto, 


moreover. 


Tdnto, 


as much as. 


Qudnto, 


as much as* 


Altre volte, 


formerly. 


Altramente, se non, 


otherwise. 


Altrbve, 


somewhere else. 


Laggru, 


2. 

below there. 


Mblto, 


much* 


Via piu, mblto piu, 


much more. 


Bene, 


well. 


Presto, mblto presto, 


quickly. 



Via piu presto, very soon, much sooner, or quicker. 

Rigidamente, aspramente, rudely. 

Bestialmente, brutishly. 



Or sii, via, 
Via dunque P 



come away. 

come along* 

St* 



15$ 



Of the ADVERBS. 



Sta mattma, 

Sta notte, 

Sta stra y questa sera, 

Fin a tdnto, in Unto, 

Certo, sicuro, 

Bdsta, 

Cioe, 

Per cib, 

Caldamente, 

Cdro, moltocdro, 

Chiaramente, 

Qudnto, 

Qudnto, quanta, qudnti, quunte, 

Come, siccbme, 

Come, 

Di continuo, continuamente, 

Correttamente, 

Questa volta, adesso, 

Di prima Idncio, 

Animosamente, coraggiosamente, 

Sordidamente, 

Crudelmente, 

Di pbi, di qua inndnzi, 

Per Vaddittro, qui avdnti, 

Di sbtto, qui sol to, 

Di sbpra, qui sbpra, 



this morning. 

this night. 

this evening. 

in the mean time. 

certainly. 

it is enough. 

that is to say. 

it is therefore. 

warmly. 

dear, very dear. 

clearly. 

how much. 

how many. 

as. 

how? 

continually. 

correctly. 

now. 

all of a sudden. 

continually. 

sordidly. 

cruelly. 

hereafter. 

heretofore. 

hereunder. 

hereupon. 



Subito, di Mlla prima y 

D J dIlra parte, 

Pericolosamente, 

Davvantdggio, di piu, 

A cdso, 

Tdnto meno, 

Tdnto piu che, 

Imperoche, 

Sinceramente, 

Per tempo, a bubriora, 

Di qud a died dnni, 

Di gran lunga, 

Sii, in piedi, 



at first. 

from another place. 

dangerously. 

over and above. 

by chance. 

so much the less. 

so much the more. 

whereas. 

sincerely. 

early. 

in ten years. 

by far. 

up, up. 

Per 



Of the ADVERBS. 



159 



Per tenia che, 

Sin ddi fondamenti, affdtto, 

Fuori, 

Gid, digia, 

Quindi, 

Domdni, dimdni, 

Domattina, 

Delia medesima maniera, 

DalV una, e dalV ultra parte, 

Di sdito, 

In bltre, di piu, oltracib, 

Dopo, doppo, 

Dajeri in qua, 

Da die tempo ? dopo auando ? 

Da quel tempo in qua, 

Dacche, dopo che, 

Di che sbrte ? in che maniera ? 

Ultimamente, 

Dietro, 

In dietro, 

Fin' adesso, 

Subito che, 

Ormdi, 

Sot to, di sot to, 

Sbpra, di sbpra, 

Di seguito, 

Di qudndo in qudndo^ 

Avdnti, inndnzi, 

Per Vavtnire, 

Aschiena d'dsino, 

DYinde, 

Doppiamente, falsamente, 

Da parte a parte, 

Almino, 



for fear that, 

from top to bottom. 

abroad. 

already. 

from hence. 

to-morrow. 

to-morrow morning. 

just so. 

on both sides. 

at one jump. 

moreover. 

since. 

since yesterday. 

since when ? 

since that time. 

since. 

after what manner ? 

lastly or lately. 

behind. 

backward. 

till now. 

as soon as. 

hereafter, 

under. 

upon. 

in continuance. 

from time to time. 

before. 

henceforwards. 

sharply pointed. 

from whence. 

doubly. 

through and through. 

at least. 



Sfacciatamente, 
Ugualmtnte, 
Ancora, dnche, 
Rotolbne, 



5. 



impudently. 

equally. 

again, yet, already. 

smoothly. 

hisieme. 



160 



Of the ADVERBS. 



Insieme, 




together. 


Dipoi, dbpo, 




afterwards. 


All' improviso, 




unawares. 


In sospeso, in dubbio, 




in suspence. 


Intieramente, affdtto, 




entirely. 


Intbrno, 




about. 


Inddrno, 




in vain. 


Intbrno, circa, 




about. 


Capricciosamenle, perdutamhite, alV eccesso, desperately. 


Spaventevolmente, 




dreadfully. 


Giustamente, 




•justly. 


Stranamente, 




strangely. 


A post a t a bella post a, a 


hello studio, 
6. 


on purpose. 


Facilmente, agevolmente, 


easily. 


Per mancdnza di, 




for want of. 


Fissamente, 




stedfastly. 


Pazzamente, 




madly. 


Mblto, 




very. 


Ldberamente, 




freely. 


Via, via, a voi, a voi, 


7. 

make way, 


out of the way. 


Gratis, 




gratis. 


Pbco, 




little. 


Di cdso pensdto, 




wilfully. 


Arditamente, 


8. 


boldly. 


Altamente, 




highly. 


Oime ! aime ! aid lasso ! 




alas ! 


Felicemente, 




happily, 


leri, 




yesterday. 


Ier sera, 




last night. 


Vergognosamente, 




shamefully. 


Fubri, 


9, 


out. 


Mai, 




never. 


Qui, qua, 




here, there. 
Subito, 



Of the ADVERBS. 



161 



Subito, 




immediately,, 


Appimto, 




exactly* 


Sin, fin, insin, in/in, 




until. 


Per fin dove? 


10. 


how far? 


Li, lei ; Non lungi di Id, 


there ; 


not far from hence. 


Vilmente, 




basely. 


Lontdno, lungi, 




far. 


E un pfazo, 


11. 


it is a great while. 


Adtsso, bra, 




now. 


Male, 




ill. 


Malgrddo mio, 




hi spite of me. 


Gudi a, 




woe be to. 


A'nehe, dneora, eziandio, 




also. 


Nelmedesimo tempo, 




at the same time. 


Meglio, 


- ■ 


better. 


Medidnte, 




provided that. 


Minor e 9 ' 


12. 


least. 


1 Non, 




not. 


Nondimeno, nulladimeno, 




nevertheless. 


Liberamente, 




freely. 


Ne, neither; ne dnche, 




nor also. 


No, s ignore, no, 




no, sir. 


Nonostdnte, 


13. 


notwithstanding. 


si 




yes. 


Si, 




it is. 


Non si, 




it is not. 


Dove, ove, 




where. 


Oltre, 




besides. 


Scopertdmente, apertamente, 


openly. 




14. 




Zittof ZittO, 




hush! not a word, 


A cdso, 




by chance. 


1 \ - 

■ 
1 




A mente 



162 



Of the ADVERBS. 



A mente, 




by heart. 


Di gud, 




on this side. 


Di la, 




on that side. 


Verbi grdzia, per estmpio 


t 


for example. 


Pero, 




therefore. 


Poco, a little ; bgni pbco y 


un tantino, 


never so little. 


Fbrse, 




perhaps. 


Piu, 




more. 


In qudnt'a, 




as for. 


Pero, 




however. 


Quasi, 


15. 


almost. 


Qudndo, : 




when. 


In quant* a me, 




as for me. 


Alle volte. 




sometimes. 


Alqudnto, 




somewhat. 


Pace, pari, 




quits. 


Comimque sia, 




however. 




16. 


" 


Di rddo, 




seldom. 


Scambievolmente, 




reciprocally. 


In somma, 




in short. 


Mente, 


J 7. 


nothing. 


Saviamente, 




wisely. 


Senza diibbio, 




without doubt. 


Secbndo, 




according. 


Sossbpra, alia rinfusa, confusamente, 


topsy-turvy. 


Verso la sera, 


towards the evening. 


Sta sera, questa sera, 




this evening. 


Abbastdnza, 


18. 


sufficiently. 


Tdnto, 




so much. 


Ogni poco, un tantino, 




never so little. 


Adesso,p6cofd t or' bra, 




presently. 


Or qutsto, or quello, 


sometimes 


one, and some- 




times the other. 


Tdrdi, 




late. 
Trbppo, 



Of the ADVERBS. 163 



Tropptf, 








too much. 


Presto, quick : 
Stmpre, 


cost presto, 






so soon. 








always. 


Aff&tta. 








altogether. 


Ad un trdtlo, 








all of a sudden. 


Adagio ! 




19. 




softly! softly! 


Presto, 








quick. 


E'cco, 








behold. 


Volentieri, 








willingly. 


Veramente, 




20. 




truly. 


Ci or vi, 








there, to it, &c. 




CHAP. 


VII. 





0/-PREPOSITIONS. 

HTHE Preposition is a part of speech prefixed to the ar- 
ticles, nouns, pronouns and verbs, as has been men- 
tioned in the Introduction. 

Every preposition requires some case after it, as you will 
see in the following collection. 

Gen. Per rispetto di, because of. 

Per rispetto vbstro, or di voi, on your account. 
Per rispetto mio, or di me, on my account. 
Dat. Ir qiiant'a all', or alio, with respect to. 

jyintbrno a. Gen. alVintbrno di, round the. 
Gen. Ace. dbpo and doppo, after. 
Gen. Dietro, behind. 
Gen. and Dat. in dietro, behind. 
Gen. Aldto, mcivo di, by the side of; or a Dative. 
Gen. and Abl. Di Id del or dal, on that side of. 
Gen. and Abl. Di qua del or dal, on that side of. 
Ace. Avdnti. Gen. prima, before, 
Gen. Prima di me, before me. 

Avdnti vbi, prima, di voi, before me. 

Ace. 



1(34. Of the PREPOSITIONS. 

Ace. Con, with. 

Gen. Dat. In mezzo del, in mezzo al, in the middle 

of. 
Gen. Appie della, at the feet of the. 

Appresso di, near to. 
Gen. and Dat. AH' inter no del, intbrno al, round the. 

Da, in edsa, at. 
Gen. and Abl. Dal, ddllo, in edsa del, at the. 

Ddlla, in edsa della, at the. 
Gen. and Ace. Contra del, cbntra'l, against the. 

Contra me, contra di me, against mc. 

Ace. In, in. 

Nel, nello, nella, in the. 

Fra due giorni, in two days. 
Abl. Di qua dal, on this side of the, 

Di Id dal, on that side of the. 
Dat. and Ace. Dentro al or nel, within the. 
Gen. Fubri del, within the. 
Dat. and Ace. Dietro al, dietro'l, behind the. 
Gen. and Dat. Sbtto del, sbtto al, under the. 
Gen. and Ace. Sbpra del, sbpra'l, upon the. 

In, before a noun, is expressed in Italian by in. 

Dat. Di nasebsto al suo pddre, unknown to his father. 
Ace. Fra, trd, between. 

Gen. and Ace. Vers\> di me, or me, towards me. 
Ace. Incirca, round about, thereabout. 

Ace. Eccetto'l, except the. 

Gen. Fubri del, without the. 

Gen. A Into della mta edsa, close to my house ; or a lata 

a edsa mia, Dat. 
Gen. Dat. Ace. Rasente del, al, il miiro, close to the 

wall. 
Dat. Sin, fin, insin, infin, until, 

Gen. Ace. Abl. Lungi or lontdno della cbsa, or la edsa, 
or ddlla edsa, far from the house. 
Lontdno, lungi, far. 
Gen. Dat. Ace. Li'ingo del) al, iljiume, along the river. 

Ace. 



Of the PREPOSITIONS. 



16> 



Ace. Per, by or for. 

Gen. dat. ace. Pre&so;vichio, near. 

Gen. dat. ace. Senza, senza di, del,ox delta, without. 

Secondol, according to. 
Gen. dat. ace. Sbtta la tavola, or della, under the table. 

Sopra, upon. 
Bat. ace. Circa alVaffare, Vaffdre, concerning the busi- 
ness. 
Ablative. In quant'al, concerning. 
Gen. and ace. Versol, verso del, al, il, towards the. 
Gen. dat. ace. Dirimpetto del, al, il, over against the. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of CONJUNCTIONS. 

"HnHE Conjunctions serve to connect the phrases to- 
gether ; most of the words terminated in che and que 
are conjunctions; as, benchd, dnche, adunque. There are 
others of a different sort, as you will find in the following 
collection : 



Con\natt& che, 
A'nzl, dl covtrdrio, 
Accib eke, acciocht^ 
Con tut to cid, 
A'nche, 


upon condition that. 

on the contrary. 

to the end that. 

notwithstanding all that. 

also. 


Benche, 

Perehe, imperoehe, 

ContiosiacoMckz, 


although* 

for. 

whereas. 


Adunque, 
Percioche, 


then, 
forasmuch as. 


Ancora, 
Qwantunque, x 
In somma, 


still, yet. 

although. 

in fine. 

H JH 



166 



Of the CONJUNCTIONS. 



In vltre, 


besides, over and above. 


Di maniera eke, 


so that. 


In quant o, 


as. 


E Sf ed, 


and. 


Ma, 


but 


Nientedimeno, f 




Nondimeno, £ 


nevertheless. 


flulladimeno, J 




Ne, 


nor. 


Ne anch'io, ne mtn'io, nemmeriio, 


nor I neither. 


Ne meno, 


nor this. 


Nonostdnte che, 


notwithstanding that. 


O, overo, oppure, 


or. 


Overo, 


or else. 


Percte, 


because. 


In edso eke, 


in case that. 


Perb, 


therefore. 


Datochl, 


suppose that. 


Per che? 


why 1 


Perb, 


notwithstanding. 


Purcke, 


provided that. 


Piu tosto che, 


rather than. 


Qudndo dnche, 


though. 


Benche, sebbene, con tutto eke, 


although that. 


Se, 


if. 


Cbsi, 


*s. 


St mite che, 


seeing Mat 



CHAP. 



Of the INTERJECTIONS. 167 



CHAP. IX. 

Of INTERJECTIONS. 

The last part of Speech, 

AN interjection is an expression of affection or passion, 

introduced among the other parts of speech ; as, 

Ajuto! ajuto! help! help! 

Bravo! bravo! O brave! 

Alfuoco, ' fire ! fire ! 

AlVdrmi! to arms! 

Bubno ! bubno ! good ! good ! 

Animo, cordggio! come, cheer up! 

Oh! uh! puh! fie! fie! 

A vdi ! a vox ! stand away ! 

Alto! halt! 

O hime I dhi Usso ! woe is me ! O lack ! 

Zitto! zitto! hush! peace! 

SiUnzio! , silence ! 



THE END OF THE FIRST PART, 



H 2 THE 



[ 165 3 
THE 

ITALIAN MASTER. 



PART II. 



f T t HE Second Part contains Eight Treatises, extracted 
from the best authors ; and particularly from those 
who have written on the purity of the Italian language. 

I. Of the Italian Orthography* 

II. Of the Italian Accent, 

III. Of the Italian Syntax. 

IV. Remarks on some verbs and prepositions. 

V. Of composition, and the rules to write and speak 
Italian well. 

VI. Of poetical licences, and of the different synony- 

mous names of the Gods. 

VII. Of improper and obsolete words. 

VIII. Of expletives , compound words, capitals, and 
stops. 



FIRST 



( 169 ) 

FIRST TREATISE, 
CHAP. I. 

Of ORTHOGRAPHY. 

^HE Italian orthography has this convenience, that 
all the words are written in the same manner as they 
are pronounced. 

%* Observe as a general rule, that you 'must double 
the consonants in the beginning of compound words ; as, 
abbdlfere, affanndre, appoggidre, oppresso, difficile, diffe- 
rire, offendere, raccogliere, rastrellure, raddoppidre. 

%* They write djfftndere and difendere, but difesa ought 
to be written with a single/. See Lod. Dolce, cdpitoli 
del raddoppiamtnto delle consonant!. 

You must also double the g, when the vowels io and ia 9 
which come after it, make but one syllable; as, appoggio, 
loggia, piSggia, Mdggio, rdggio; a support, a lodge, rain, 
May, a ray. When the vowels io and ia constitute two 
syllables, or when the letter i is pronounced harder than 
in the preceding examples, you must not double the g ; 
as, dgio, easy ; privilegio, privilege ; malvdgio, bad. 
See Dolce, Buon Mattel, and Bdrtoli. 

The letter g is also doubled in the infinitive of verbs, 
and in all their tenses, when they have a vowel before 
gere ; as, leggere, reggere, friggsre : but if there be 'a 
consonant before g, then g remains single ; as, finger e r 
pingere, pergere. 

Those words which the English begin with a j conso- 
nant, that is, with an i followed by a vowel, as Jesus, 
just, judge, are written with a g hy the Italians, in ord r 
to render their pronunciation more delicate ; as, Gtesu, 
giuato, giudice. 

Capfllo, with a single p, signifies hair. 

Cappillo, with a double pp, signifies a bat 

a 3 There 



370 Of the ITALIAN 

There is also another difference between those two 
words ; that, in the former, the letter e has a close sound, 
and in the latter, open. 

Dopo we often find with one p in verse, and in prose 
with two, as dbppo. But now we write indifferently, 
dopo or dbppo in prose. 

Sol has two significations : when preceded by an article, 
it is a substantive, and signifies the sun; il sol, del sol, 
al sol, for il sole, del sole, al sole. 

Sol, when it is an adjective, or without an article, 
signifies alone, or sometimes only. 

Subl has likewise two significations : when preceded by 
an article, it is a noun, and signifies the earth ; as, il subl, 
or sublo, &e. 

Sucl, a verb, signifies he is wont ; as, subl venire, he is 
wont to come. 

Modern authors write, grkzia, azibne, divozibne, instead 
of gratia, attibne, divbtione. 

Z is put single, when preceded by a consonant ; as, 
spednza, lictnza : but it must be doubled between two 
vowels ; as, Bellezza, ptzzo, nbzze, except Ldzaro and a 
few other words. 

N. B. I shall now give my opinion in regard to the 
modern orthography, and repeat what I have said in the 
beginning of this grammar, that the Italians never make 
use of the grave accent, but where it is necessary to dis- 
tinguish words, and to fix the pronunciation: therefore 
we have placed it only on words marked in the introduction, 
and on some others which you will find in the second 
treatise, on the Italian accent. 

We do not double the letter z, when it is in the midst 
of three vowels, the first of which immediately following 
the z, is an i : therefore it would be wrong to write 
az?ibne., action; benedizzione, benediction ; dizziondrio, 
dictionary; pigrlzzia, sloth; not izzia, notice ; but azibne, 
benedizibne, diziondrio,pigr'izia } notizia, cVc. except pazzia, 
folly, and a few more. 

Piazza, a square, being a word that deviates from the 
above rule, is spelled, like a great many more of the like 
qualitv, with a double z. 

The 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 171 

The letter x before a c is changed into c : example, to ex- 
cite, eccitdre, excellency, eccellenza; and when it does 
not happen to be before the c, it is sometimes changed into 
a double s, and sometimes into single s : as, to exalt, esal- 
tare ; graciously to hear, csaudire, &c. ; but it is doubled 
in all the other syllables ; as, the maxim, la massima, 
Alexander, Alessdndro, &c. 

A great many of the Academicians of the Crusca, 
chuse to put the letter z before the vowel t where the com- 
mon orthography uses the letter c ; for instance, instead 
of pronouncing and writing Franstce, French ; Francia, 
France ; pronuncidre, to pronounce, &c. they write and 
pronounce Franzcse, Frdnzia, pronunziare> &c. ; and I 
approve of this orthography sometimes myself. 

We write the masculine relative plural U with a g when 
followed by a vowel ; example, I have some books, and I 
purchased them at Frankfort fair ; Ho libri, e gli ho com- 
prdti all&fi&ra di Frdncoforto. 

It is better to write chtrico than chttrico, cirusico, 
than ceriisico or chiHirgo, a surgeon. Many of the mo- 
derns have such an aversion to the letter A, not only~ 
in the beginning, but iu the middle of words, that 
they leave it out wherever they can, so as to pro- 
nounce and write, for instance, occio t an eye, and occi, 
eves, instead of bcchio, and bcchi ; but this orthography 
and pronunciation seem to me to be somewhat too eon- 
fined. 

The syllables de and re> in the beginning of English 
words, generally become di and ri in the beginning of 
Italian; as, to destroy, distruggerej; to renew, rinovdre? 
&c. 

It was formerly the custom to write several adverbs 
and prepositions separate ; which now make but one 
word ; but they double the first consonant of the latter 
word, which is joined to the' farmer ; for instance, gia 
chc since, giaccht ; in tdnto, fra tdnto, in the mean 
while: intdnto, frattdnto ; a cio ehe y a fin che, to the 
end that ; acchiocht, affinecht*, or offinchc ; si come, as, 
riccome ; a dbsso ilmo nimico, upon his enemy; addosso al 

H 4 SU9 



172 Of the ITALIAN 

sua nimico ; blira a cio, besides, oltraccib ; di nanzi at 
giudice, before the judge, dinndnzi al giudice', ubmo da 
bene, an honest man, ubmo dabhene. 

After is expressed by dippbi with the verbs, and by do- 
po, with a single p, before the nouns. 

It is true nevertheless, is elegantly rendered in Italian 
by egti e certamtnie vtro, and this egli is a kind of ad- 
verb. 

Non v'e scuse, signifies there is no room for excuse ; and 
this is altogether an Italian idiom.- 

We express several by parecchi for the masculine, and by 
parecchie for the feminine : example, several teachers of a 
language, parecchi maestri di lingua ; several women, pa- 
rtcekie donne. For which, or wherefore, is expressed in 
Italian by per to cte, or per la qual cbsa, or percib. 

Ne', with the apostrophe, signifies in the in the plural, 
when we are speaking of the masculine gender : example, 
in the gardens, ne' or nei giardini. 

To forget, is rendered by the verb dimenticdrsi, and 
not by scorddrsi, which is applicable only to instruments 
of music, when we wact to signify their being out of 
tune. 

As triere is no future tense, no second preterimper- 
fcct in the Italian language, that terminates in aro and arei, 
except sard, I shall be, and sarei, I* should be ; staro, I 
shall remain, starei, I should remain; faro, 1 will do,f&- 
rei, I should do ; darb, I shall give ; darei, I should 
give; saprb,\ shall know, saprei, I should know ; hence 
we neither say nor write amard and amarei, &c. but amero, 
and amerti. 

The Italians are fond of placing the particles si, vi, or 
the relative ne, and such like, after the persons of verbs 
marked with a grave accent; but then they drop that grave 
accent, and repeat the consonant of those particles : for 
example, my brother will repent, mio frattllo pentcMssi ; 
I will give you an inkstand, darbvviun calamdjo', the king 
has given an hundred thousand livres to the cilv of Paris, 
and he will give fifty to the town of Lyons, il Re ha ddto 
cvnto mila lire alia cittd di Parigi, e daretnne chiqudnta a 
qutlla di Libne.. 

CHAP. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. m 

CHAP. 11,/ 
Of the APOSTROPHE. 



THE apostrophe is a. mark made like a comma, inserted 
between two letters, to denote the retrenchment of a 
vowel ; as, I'amore, Vmiimo, Vonore, Vubmo. 

The Italians still observe the rule of old authors, never 
to make use of the apostrophe, but when it renders the 
pronunciation more delicate ; and noi so frequently as 
those, who have but a superficial knowledge of the 
language. 

The apostrophe is generally placed after the articles, 
if they precede a word, commencing with a vowel ; as, 
Vdnime, delY&nimo ; V amine, dell'anima ; Vonore, delV- 
onbre, &c. . 

See what we have said concerning the apostrophe, 
treating of the articles, p. 8. and 39. 

We sometimes meet with lo'mpero, for Vimpero ', le'nsidie 
for Virisidie; but this ought rather to be avoided than imi- 
tated. 

*1* Sometimes there is an elision of the article il, by 
cutting off its first letter, which is quite the reverse of 
other elisions, by which we drop the vowel at the end of 
words; and when the article il happens to follow a word 
terminating in a vowel, the i of the article il is cut off, and 
the preceding word continues entire, without any abbrevia- 
tion : as, sopra'l tcito, for sopra il tttto. 

.E'l piit garbato, el piu corttsc, for il. 

Tut to' I mbndo sa, for tuito il mhndom* 

Fra'l si el no, for fra it, &c. 

Stil mezzo di, for su il, &c. 

Se'lcapitano comanda, e ragionevole chel soldutoubbi- 
disca, for se il and che il. 

N. B. Observe, in regard to this elision of the article 

«7, the best modern authors constantly make use of it ; 

H 5 and 



174 Of the ITALIAN 

and the reason they allege is, that the i has a harsher sound 
than any of the other vowels. 

Sometimes we make an elision of the article le, even 

before w r ords beginning with a consonant, and the two 

words coalesce into one; as, 

nol so, 

set crede, 

velpromeito, ) ( ve lo promttto. 

The apostrophe is also pnt after mi, ti, ci, vi, di, si, da, 
ne, when they precede a vowel, or the letter h ; as, 
m'amdte, Vascblto, Vinitndo, s'importa, m'avete, s'inttnde, 
vingdnna, Vdnima, (F Antonio, n'drde, n'avrb, rihai, 
n'hdnno. 

Words abbreviated are written with an apostrophe ; as, 
de signori, for dii signbri ; pit for pitte ; me' for meglio, 
in poetry ; co' for cbi or chili. 



imo one; as, 

1 C non lo so, 

% > for < se lo crede, 

leito, ) ( ve lo promt 



7W 



CHAP. III. 

Of the words that must be retrenched. 

\?OV must retrench the last syllable of the subsequent 
five words, uno, bvllo, grdnde, sdnto, qutllo, buono, 
when they precede a word beginning with a conso- 
nant ; example, un giorno, bel giardino, son Pittro quel, 
pkne, bubn libro ; and not uno giorno, bello giardino, 
&c. 

If the subsequent word commences with a vowel, ©r 
an h, then you only cut off the final vowel, and put an 
apostrophe; example,wrcV/«22c«, bell'aspttto,grand'ingtgno, 
sanV Antonio, qutlVubmo, bubnaspttto. 

Before the feminine nouns, grdnde is the only one of 
those words that we abridge, both in the singular and the 
plural; as, una cdsa,bella camera, gran famiglia, santa 
Maria, qutlla signcra, belle case, gran ricchtzze, sdnte 
chitse, qutlla virtu. 

The masculine plurals of the six preceding words are, 
urti, belli, grdndi, sdnti, qutlli, bubni. 

The 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 175 

The feminine plurals are, ime, belle, gran, sdnte, quelle? 
bubne, without any other abbreviation than of grant 
and even this sometimes makes grandi before nouns 
commencing with a vowel ; as, grdndi 6nime, or anime 
grandi. 

You may also retrench the final vowel of the word* 
that have one of these four letters, /, m, n, r, for their pe~ 
nultima. 

N. B. But with this rule, that, in making the retrenchment, 
you do not put an apostrophe, except when the subsequent 
words begin wkh a rowel, or they happen to be some 
persons of the verbs; as, il cieV oscuro ; il signbr' onordto / 
amidm', dman! ; credidni, ertdori ; and this in order to 
conform to the general rule, which is, to put an apostro- 
phe whenever there is an elision of one vowel before ano- 
ther; as, 

// carnovdl passdto, qudl signbre, instead of il carno~ 
vale and quale. 

Andiairi presto, for andidmo presto, 

Aman* per I'onde, i velbci delfmi, instead of dmano. 

Fior grdto, cubr generbso, instead oijlore and eUbre. 

Those words, that have m or n for their penultima, are 
not so frequently retrenched as those that have I or r. If 
we would be directed by the opinion of the best authors, 
the following chapter would be sufficient for our purpose. 

N.B. When a masculine or feminine article comes after 
the preposition per, we frequently retrench the r of the per, 
and put an apostrophe before the article : as, pel, pe'lo, or 
pello, without an apostrophe, for the masculine, and pela 
or p6lla for the feminine ; example, we do every thing for 
the world and for our reputation ; but scarce anything to 
extirpate vice out of our souis ; si fa tirtto pel mbndo, c> 
pela or pella riputazione ; ma quasi nulla pclo, or ptlfo p 
scadkameniQ del vizio dall'dnima. 



H 6 CHAP. 



176 Of the ITALIAN 



C H A P. IV. 



Of the words that must not be retrenched. 



T\7"E must never retrench the word which terminates a 
sentence, or which precedes a comma; or any 
other point; therefore, we must not write v. s. ha una 
bellaman, ehi t quel signbr? quellubmo e gr/in; but v. sv 
ha {ma be lid memo, ehi e quel sign ore ? quell' ucmo e grdnde ; 
il libra t buono ; and so of the rest. 

Neither must we retrench the words terminated in a t 
when they are before a consonant, except era an adverb, 
and ancbra ; for we may write, or su signori, aveer non 
viene ; but it would be wrong to write, una picciol casa, 
una bel mrino, instead of una bet la rhdno 7 ima pkciolu 
edsa. 

Accented words must never be abbreviated; as, faro, 
diro. 

In not retrenching, in the plural, the words that have 
an / before the last letter, you are warranted by the 
authority of the best authors ; therefore you must write 
amdbiU persons, fckole, ben trovctte, parole sc&lte, nbbili 
cstalihi. The singular number is more apt to admit of 
this abbreviation. 

If you mean to write correctly, you must never abridge 
Apcllo, off anno, tbllo, ditro, ingimno, pegno, owuro, so$- 
U.gno, sirdni, vela; therefore you must not write Apol, 
affdn, col, dur, &c. 

* # * The words beginning with an s, followed by a con- 
sonant, oblige the preceding word to terminate in a vowel ; 
as, bello studio, grdnde stdto, qiiello spirito, tssere stdto ; 
and not bel studio, grdn stdto, quel spirito, esser stdto. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. Vff 

*,* Observe, that if the preceding word cannot ter- 
minate in a vowel, that which commences with an j, 
followed by a consonant, takes an i before it ; as, per i$~ 
degno, in iscubla, instead of per sdzgno, in scuola. Sec 
Ferrdnte, Longobdrdi, Lod. Dolce, and Bentivbglio. 

N. B. in the beginning of a period, or when the sense 
is interrupted by a: colon, or semicolon, we may omit the 
insertion of the vowel L 

We never retrench the e of se, signifying if, except 
it be followed by another e ; for instance, we do not 
say, s'amo lo studio, if I love study, but se dmo lo studio* 
On the contrary, we do not say, se esercitdsse Vdrte, 
if he exercised the art, but s'esercitdsse Mart's, by reason 
that esercitdsse begins with m e: example, I have 
seen my mother, and given her a gold snuff-box; ho 
visto mia mddre, e Vho ddto una sea" tola d'ero r or, he 
luveth Antony, dm' Antonio. If we were to cut off 
thee from le, in the former sentence, we should not 
know whether this /' was in the accusative or dative, 
in the singular or plural; and if we were to retrench 
the final a from the word dma, we should not be able 
to tell whether it was the -first or third person of the 
present indicative, or the subjunctive, or the third per- 
son of the preter-definite. You must therefore write, 
without any elision of t lie vowel, ho visto mla mddre, e 
le ho ddto, &c. dma Antonio, and the rest in the same 
manner. 

You must not retrench the e in che, when the follow- 
ing word begins with an ?, for it is the i that ought 
rather to be retrenched: but when this i is the plu- 
ral of the definite article, which does not admit of this 
elision, then you are to pronounce the che and i both 
together, as if it were only one word: example, food 
grant the times may be good, and the winds be not 
- very high next winter : then, if my brother Antony 
is well, and my cousin Harry is in town, I will go to 
Paris : Dto vbglia che I tempo sia bubno, e che i venti non 
sieno gaglidrdi 'I verno prbssimo ; allbra, se Antonio mio 
. fratello stard bene, e s' Enrico^ mio cngtno sard in cittd, 
mdrb a Parigi, 

We 



178 Of the ITALIAN 

We never retrench tbe i from ci, us, before the 
vowels a and o ; because it would render the pronun- 
ciation too harsh : hence we do not say, for example, it 
principt c' aveva promtsso cento snidi, the prince had pro- 
mised us a hundred crowns, but ci avtva ; V. S. c'o- 
nira, you do us honour, but ci onora. 

It would be extremely proper, if, before words be- 
ginning with the letter z, we were not to retrench the 
vowel, so as not to say, luCn zurchero, good sugar; gran 
zazztra t a large head of hah ; but btiono zucchero, 
grande zdzzera. 

In Dante, Petrarch, Aricsto, Guarim, Tasso, Marini, 
and all the poets, we find several tenses of the verbs 
abridged. See farther on this head, in the treatise of 
poetic licenses, where. I have ranged them in their al- 
phabetical order. 



SECOND TREATISE. 

Of the Italian Accent, 



^HE accent, which is the very soul of pronnncia- 
tion, is the stronger or weaker elevation of the 
voice on particular syllables, and the manner of pro- 
nouncing them shorter or longer. 

I ktend to speak here only of the accent which the 
Italians make use of in writing, and which we find in 
their printed books. 

The Italians, indeed, are acquainted with two accents, 
but they make use of one only, namely, the grave, which 
is figured by an oblique stroke from the left to the right, 
after this manner ( ' ). It is put only on the last syllable 
of some words ; as, amb o, when it happens to be a 
verb, as, parlerb. 

N. B. The 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. \7$ 

N. B. The other accent, "called acute, is a contrary 
mark to that of the grave, as may be seen in the fol- 
lowing words dmano f amdvano, &c. The Italians ne- 
ver note .it down ; so that if we sometimes meet with it 
in books that teach the principles of their language, as 
is now the case in this grammar, it is with a view of 
conveying thereby a just idea of the Italian pronun- 
ciation. 



CHAP. I. 

Of the grave Accent. 

r pHE Italian nouns in td, which in English terminate 
in ty, and in Latin in tas, are marked with a grave 
accent ; as, puritd, castitd, sarititd, maestd, gravitd, &c* 
These words form the plural in td, without any al- 
teration. 

But they do not place an accent on the a in visit a, 
because it does not come from a Latin word in tas i 
neither are we to lean upon the last syllable ; and, 
moreover, it makes the plural visit e, and not visita. 

The Italians also place a grave accent on nouns ter^ 
minating in u ; as, virtu, servitu, &c. 

Monosyllables ending in o, or a, according to some 
grammarians, are accented ; as, do, da ; jb,jd : ho, hd ; 
pud, sd ; stb, std. But I should prefer the opinion of 
those who do not accent them, because a monosyllable 
ever preserves the same quantity, "whether it be ac- 
cented or not ; so that the accent, in that case, only 
serves to distinguish one word from another ; as, dd, he 
gives, from the indefinite articled. 

They likewise put the grave accent on the first and 
third person singular of the future tense ; as, cantero, 
goderd, daro, canttrd, goderd, dard. 

%* Observe, 



ISO Of the ITALIAN ACCENT, 

\* Observe, that we may transpose the mo lifts} Ha- 
stes which we happen to find before verbs accented or* 
the last: and then we must double the first letter of the 
monosyllable, and drop the accent of the verb ; as, I 
have them, hoik, for le ho ; I will do it, farcllo, for h 
faro ; he shewed me, mostromrai, for mi mostro ; he heard 
me, gcniimmi, for mi smtt. 

This manner of transposition, after the tenses of ac- 
cented verbs, is very common in poetry. 

The verbs are marked with a grave accent in the third 
person singular of the preter-defmite, whenever the first 
person terminal es in two vowels ; as, amui, amb ; credei, 
ereds ; dormj, dormi. 

If the first person of the preter-defiuite does not ter- 
minate in two vowels, there is no accent on the third. 

For which reason we put no accent on the last syl- 
lable of v'mse, arse, prtse, ditde, ftce, stttte, which, in 
the first person, make vtnsi, ami, prcsi, ditdi, feci, 
steiti. 

N. B. The Italians also put a grave accent on di, a 
day ; and on di, the imperative of the verb dire, to 
say ; on e, it is ; on It and Id, there ; to shew that 
these words are to be pronounced with greater em- 
phasis, and with a somewhat longer pause ; as also to dis- 
tinguish the abovesaid two di's from di the -genitive in- 
definite, which is sounded without a pause at all : they 
likewise mark a grave accent on U, there, to distinguish 
it from 11, the relative masculine plural ; as, I promise 
three crowns* and I give them, prompt to ire scidi, e li do ; 
m\d on Id, to distinguish it from la, the relative femi- 
nine singular; as the princess writes a letter, and causes 
it to be put into the post: la principCssa scriae una Ut- 
ter a, e la fa metier' alia pbsta. 

The ,urave accent is also put on qui and qua, here ; 
on costi and costd, there ; on, no no ; giu, below ; sii, 
up; piu, more; cost, so, or thus; s.' t yes; because 
those words are to be sounded somewhat stronger, and, 
in some measure, with a greater pause ; but, on the 
other monosyllables, they do not mark a grave accent, 
for it would be entirely superfluous, as they are always 
pronounced in the same manner, 

We 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. r&l 

We therefore do not accent da, from the ablative 
indefinite : a, to ; ma, but ; ne, neither, in ; re, king.; 
o, or ; and others of the like nature ; because no con- 
fusion or obscurity can arise from thence, as you will 
perceive by the following example ; particularly with 
respect to da and a, the two monosyllables which seem 
to be somewhat equivocal, but are so by no means. 

Alexander gives his word as an honest man, and lie 
has no difficulty to give it to Peter and Paul, or to any 
other person. 

Alessdndro da la sua parola da galani' uomo,e non hu 
veruna difficoltd di parlar a Plttro ed a Paolo, o a cki 
che sia. 

You see therefore, very clearly, that in this example 
the first da is the verb, the second is the ablative indefi- 
nite ; and that the first ha is in like manner a verb, being 
particularly written with an k, and that the other as are 
datives indefinite. 



CHAP. II. 



Of the Pronunciation of Nouns, 

"VfrJ E have mentioned, in the preceding chapter, 
that the Italians sometimes make use of the grave 
accent, and particularly in the examples above given ; 
but as to what concerns the acute accent, we may ver*- 
ture to affirm, that it is used by no modern Italian, at 
least that understands his own language ; because with- 
out insisting that it would be impossible for the printer, 
though ever so exact, to mark it wherever it was wanting, 
it would occasion such a strange embarrassment and 
confusion in the letters, that it would be scarce possi- 
ble to read them. In order therefore to avoid the fre- 
quent repetition of the grave and acute accents, I have 
discovered a method which to me appears very easy 

- and* 



2 82 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

and clear ; and which will be of great use to such as are 
desirous of learning this language, and even to the Italians 
themselves. But, before I enter upon an explanation of 
the particular rules which are ranged here in alphabetical 
order, you must pay the greatest attention to the general 
rules contained in the five following numbers. 

No. I. 

All nouns must be pronounced either short or long % 
and their short or long sonnd depends intirely on their 
penultimate syllable, that is, the last but one ; for all the 
other syllables are to be pronounced steadily and uni- 
formly, that is, without making use of any brevity, ex- 
cept these two nouns, augure, an augor; clausola, a clause ; 
which have the antepenultiina (that is, the last but two) 
short ; and some others mentioned in the exception of 
the letter c. 

In order to know in what manner you are to sound 
this penultimate syllable, observe the penultimate letter 
of the noun you want to pronounce, and look for that 
letter as ranged here below in its alphabetical order, 
where you will see the rule with its exceptions ; as,. 
for example, if you want to know whether the noun 
rammdrico, regret, ought to be pronounced short or long, 
you must look for the letter c, which is the penulti- 
mate letter of the noun, rammdrico, marked here below 
in the alphabetical order ; you must also examine the 
exception; and if you do not find it there, then you 
are to conform to the rule which says, all nouns, that 
have the letter c for their penultima, are pronounced 
short. 

No. n. 

Nouns of two syllables have no rule at all, because 
they are subject to neither brevity, nor length ; except 
a very small number, which will be found in their 
proner places of exception. I shall give you here, as 
a general rule, all such nouii3 as have two consonants 
before the final vowel, as macilente, cangidmtnto, make 
the penultimate syllable long, of w hatsoevcr number of 

syllables 






Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 183 

syllables they consist ; except a few, which you will find 
under the letters r and t . 

No. III. 

Neither is there any need of a rule for nouns that 
have a grave accent marked on the last vowel ; it is suffi- 
cient to know how to pronounce one of them properly ; 
for example, carith ; and you will be capable of pro- 
nouncing calamita, veritd, virtu, bonta, and all others 
of the same kind, because you are to sound them all with 
the same degree of quickness. 

No. IV. 

All feminine nouns follow the rule of the masculines 
from which they are derived. All the plurals follow the 
rule of their singulars, and compound nouns those of 
their simples. 

No. V. 

There are some nouns which the Italians pronounce 
as they please, that is, either long or short ; and of 
these I have mentioned some in the exceptions to the 
rules. With regard to poetic nouns, we must be di- 
rected by the measure of the verse ; for poets have a 
licence to abbreviate and lengthen a great many words. 
You pronounce according to the custom of the country, 
when they happen to be all barbarous and foreign 
names, and all of Hebrew and Greek derivation. Like- 
wise the proper names of persons, families, towns, pro- 
vinces, &c. Remember the proverb, In pacse, ove vii* 
iisa che trovi. 

Let us now proceed to the particular rules. 



Nouns that have the letter a for their penu-Itima, are 
in a very small number among the Tuscans, and yoa 
must pronounce them long ; as, Arcfcldo, JMcoldo, 8ta~ 
nislcio. 

B. Noun* 



!S4 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



Nouns that have the letter b for their penultima, are 
also in a very small number, and must be pronounced short; 
as A'rabo, Bdrnaba, Ctlibe, 1'ncabo, succubo ; but pro- 
aounce Crabba, a Carob bean, long. 

C. 

All nouns, whose penultimate is the letter c, are short ; 
as Rammarico: 

Except 



Alice, 


Ferbce, 


Panic o, panic, a 


Am ico, 


Festuca, 


sort of grain. 


Antino, 


Filuca, or Feliica, 


Pappafko. 


Appendice, 


Imbridco, 


Penaice. 


Aprko, 


Intrico, 


Pernke. 


Arciduca, 


Lattuca, 


Pndico. 


Alrbce, 


Lettica, 


Pa dice. , 


Beatrice, 


Lombrka, 


Rubi'iia, a rubric 


Beccafico, 


Lories 


of a missal, of 


Bernice, 


Lud&vko, 


other book. 


BiblioUca, 


Lumaca, 


SamMcOr 


Caduto, 


Mammal iic o, 


Sommdco. 


Capifnbco, 


Manteca, 


Tamerke. 


Cervice, 


Matrice, 


Tarlice. 


Ciridca, 


Mendico, 


Tartaruca. 


Clodca, 


Molica, 


Tiridca, or tridca, 


Colic a, 


Morice, 


Velbce. 


Cornice, 


]\ r arice f 


Vernice. 


Cot ur nice, 


Is emit o, 


Verriica, 


Dappbco, 


Opdco, 


Vesska. 


Enrico, 


Oricho, gum 


Ubbridca. 


Funfuluco, 


Arabic, 


Ulderko. 


Falica, 


Orlica, 


Umbilko, or fal- 


Federico, 


Pagliuca, 


lico, the navel, 


Felic e , 


Pompaliica, a kind 




Fcnke, 


of sea-fish, 





And all nouns terminated in ace ; as, auddce, fomdce T 
spindce. Likewise such as express feiuale qualities, and 
end in ice ; as, meretrke, possediirke, vendicairke^ &t\ 

D. Noun* 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



1S5 



D. 

Nouns that have the letter d 
short ; 

Except 



for their penultima are 



Alcide, 
Arreddy, 

Belgrddo, 

Canicida, 

Congcdo, 

Contddo, 

Contrddo, 

Corrddo, 

Corrtde^ equipage, 

Cupido, Cupid, 

tusfcde, 



Biomvde,, Gmkida, 

Disfida, Palude, 

Erede, Parentddo, 

Erode, Parenticide 

Fratrkida, Parrkida, 

Ganimede, Rugidda, 

Gqffredo, Squassacbda, 

Ignudo, Tancrede, 

Lampreda, Toledo, 

MercMe, Tripiede, 

Niccmede, Zendado, 

Nouns ending is the syllable de, and formed from 
other nouns which have a grave accent on their final 
vowel, are also pronounced long; as, cittdde, povertdde, 
virtide, formed of <itia, povertd, virtu. N. B This 
manner of writing is used only by poets, and very seldom 
occurs in prose. 

E. 

All Nouns that have the letter e for their penultima, are 
long ; 

Except 
Aculeo, Bbrea, Cesdrea (title of majesty ; hut when it 
signifies a city, it is pronounced long), Cerideo, Coetdneo, 
Cvllatdneo, Empireo, Etcreo, Lined, Mcditerrdneo,pnrpii- 
reo,Tartdrea,tempordneo. Some pronounce the two names, 
Teseo, and Timoteo, long ; and they seem to be in the 
right. All nouns adjective, derived from substantives, 
are also short ; us,ferreo, iromferro, iron ; marmbreo, from 
mar mo, marble ; vtnereo, from Ventre, Venus. In all 
nouns of this termination, where the letter u alone forms 
their antepenultimate syllable, this letter is pronounced 
short, as well as the syllable that follows ; as, dureo, 
nauea, &c. 

F. You 



1$6 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



You are to pronounce all nouns short, whose penulti- 
mate is the letter/; except the three following, Mqrtufo, 
Parafo, Tartufo, which are long. 

G. 

You must pronounce all nouns short, that have the letter 
g for their peuultima ; 

Except 

Areopdgo, Bottega, Castiga, ColUga, (Congrega, though 
long, is sometimes pronounced short) Dionigi, Gonzdgo, 
Impicgo, Intrigo, Lattuga t Lettiga, Luigi, Lup&go, 
Origo, Parigi, Pedagogo, Presago, (several pronounce 
prbroga short) Ripiego, sanguisuga, selvdgo, sinagbgo, 
sossiogo, or sussiego. 

L 

In some nouns, where the letter t happens to be the pe- 
ri ultima, it forms one syllable with the following letter, 
and they are pronounced jointly. 

In others, it is pronounced separately, forming a distinct 
syllable by itself. 

The letter i therefore forms but one syllable with the 
subsequent vowel, in all nouns not contained in the fol- 
lowing catalogue. It forms two syllables in the nouns 
marked underneath, and you are to pronounce them 
long; as, 

Agonia, Antilog'ta, Astronomic, 

Albagia, Antinomia, Badia,ov abbadia* 

Amnestia, Antipotia, Balia, power or 

Anagogia, Apologia, authority, 

Analogic, Apoplessia, Balia *, 

Anania, Apostasia, Baronia, 

Anarchia, Aristocrazia, Bastia, 

Anatomia, Armonia, Befania, or epifd- 

Anfania, Arpia, nia, 

Anfibologia, Astrologia, Bigamia. 

* This name is given in some parts of Tuscany to the 
person who, at Rome, is called cursore, & serjeant or bailiff'. 

Brio, 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



187 



Brio, 


Golia, 


liugia, 


Idrofobia, 


€alptst\a. 


Idrografta, 


| Carestia, 


Jdrommizia, 


Castellania, 


Idropisia, 


Codardia, 


liifingardia, 


Chiromanzla, 


Jpocrisia, 


{ Chironia, 


Ironia, 


Chirurgia, 


Lebbrosia, 


Cojnpagnia, 


Leggio, 


Cortesia, 


Liscia, or Lescia, 


Cronologia, 


lye to wash 


Did or iddio, 


with, l 


Democrazia, 


Lit ante, 


Diafonia, 


Litargia, or let ar- 


Desio, 


gia, 


i Economia, 


Liturgia, 


Elegia, 


Lombardia, 


Elia, 


Lucia, 


Energia, 


JMagia,, 


Eresia, 
Etimologia, 


Malacchia, 


Malattia, 


Eucaristia, 


Malia, 


Fantasia, 


Mahasia, or Mal- 


Fellonia, 


vagia, Malmsey 


Filologia, 


wine, 


Filosofia, 


Malinconia, or 


Fisonomia, or fislo- Maninconia, 


nomia, 


Mattia, 


Fio, 


Melanconiat 


Follia, 


Melod'ta, 


Frenesia, 


Mercanzia, 


i Gagliardia, 


Messia, 


Gelosia, 


Mio, 


1 1 Genealogia, 


Monorchia, 


■ Gengia, 


Mormoria, (some 


i 1 Genia, 


pronounce it 


\Geografia, 


short,) 


\Geomanzia, 


Natio, 


IGerarchia, 


Negromanzia, 


IGeremia, 


Normandia, 



Notomia, 

Oblio, or ublto, 

Omlja or umiliit, 

Ortograjia, 

Parilis'ta, 

Pavia, 

Pazzia, 

Pestio, 

Peripezia, 

Picardia, 

Pio, (but empio is 

pronounced 

short,) 
Piromanzia, 
Poesia, 
Polizta, 
Prigionia, 
Prosodia, 
Puttania, 
Quulsisia, 
Rcstia, 
Ricadia, 
Rio, 

Ritros'm, 
Romania, 
Resolia, 
Saettia, 
Sagrestia, or s*- 

giistia, 
Schiranzia, or 

scheranzw, 
Schiavonia, 
Scoppiettio, 
Simoma, 
Simpatia, 
Sinfonia, 
Sodomia, 
Sofia, 
Spia, 
StaWo, 
Stantio, 

Tentennio, 



IBS Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

Tentcnnio, Tcbia, Via, 

Teologia, Tracer sia, VillanU, 

Trpogrcfia y Turchia, Zacchia, 

Tirajima, Vallonia, Zio. 

We likewise give a long pronunciation to all those 
nouns which terminate iii via', as, allegria, idolatria, 
otitria. 

Except feminine nouns derived from short masculines, 
only by changing the last vowel into a ; as, vittbrio, vitto- 
ria\ fiitminatorio, fujminatbria ; because these are redu- 
cible to the rule of No. IV. 

The following are also pronounced short : 



A'drid, 


Ffrta^ 


Mandria, 


Auguria, 


Fimbria , 


Mattria, 


Aria, 


Furia, 


' Memoria, 


Arteria, 


Gloria, 


Mistria, 


J&ulabria, 


I'drla, ; 


Mitria, 


JBoria, 


Indii stria. 


Penuria, 


€alAbria, 


Ingiiiriq, 


Piria, 


Curia, 


Tatria, ' 


Stiria, 


Dbria, 


.Lussuria, 


Stbria. 



Frddicio, mudkio, stMicio, which several Tuscans use 
instead of frarido, 7nucido, and sutido, are nouns out of 
all rules; because, besides the conjunction of the two last 
vowels, they have the syllable di short. 

In fine, all nouns that have, for their penultima, the 
letter i forming one syllable with the final, as desid&rio, 
proptzio, make the penultima long. 

L. 

Nouns that have the letter I for their penultima, are 
short; 

Except 

Acquamele, Camtlo, Canttla,^ 

Araceli, Candfla, Carrotttla, 

Asifo, Cffprart.la, Crudele, 

Buiticvlo, Carmelo, Ciicido, 

Etsiivla, Carbla, Ftdtle, 

Idromtfe, 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



lftS 



Mromtle, 


Pirbto, 


JLoqutla, 


Pistblo, a pistol, 


JVJichtle, 


Querela, 


Osimvle, 


Rassaele, 


JPalii.de, 


St gala (some pro- 


ParalUlo, 


nounce it short), 


Parent el a, 


Sequela, 


Parbla, 


Soggblo, 



Sosamtle, 
Strozzule or strc- 

nezblo, 
Tar del a, 
Vangcio, 

Varbla, or verbla, 
Viola, 
Vwriblo, 



And all nouns terminating hi ale ; as, candle, funerale, 
guancidle, without reckoning Anibale, Asdrubale, and 
fbn/ale. 

You are likewise to pronounce all nouns long that, 
before the final syllable, have the letter o preceded by a 
vowel, here called accidental, which in verse is seldom 
used, but frequently in prose, though it is scarcely ever 
sounded; as,jflgHublo,Romagnublo,vignarublo. In like 
manner nouns terminating in (le ; as, Aprile, gentile, vedo- 
vile : but of the latter there are twelve short, viz. 



Acquatile, 


Fdrile, 


Portdtile, 


Agile, 


Fertile, 


Volatile, 


JD6cjle, 


Fragile, 


Umile, . 


Difficile, 


Grdcile, 


Utile. 



N. B. Atrabile is pronounced long ; but all the other 
nouns in He, as amdbile, nbbile, stabile, &c. follow the rule 
of the letter /. 

M . 

You are to pronounce all nouns short, that have the 
letter m for their pen ultima : 

Except, 
Abudrno, Guaime, 

Addmo, Idibma, 

Cinambmo, Lattime, 

Cognbme, Maddma, 

Concime, Opbmo, 

Diadema, Poem a, 

Estremo, Problema, 

I la 



Richidmo, 

Sopranbme, 

Strattagema, 

Sublime, 

Supremo. 



11)0 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



In like manner, all nouns terminated in ame and mne ; 
as, bestidme, legndme, costume, legume. 

N. 
Pronounce all nouns long, whose peiiultin«a is the 
letter n : 

Except 



Abrbtano, 


Fulmine, 


Pdstino, adigging 


Abrustino, or cr- 


Grdnfano, 


up of the vine- 


bustino, 


Garbfano, 


yard. 


A'cino, 


Gtmino, 


Petti ne, 


Amazona, 


Germine, 


Pldtano, 


Anti/ona, 


Gibvane t or gib- 


Pldtina, 


Argine, 


vine^ 


Polesine, 


A'sino, 


Gbmmena, or gb- 


Poligono, 


Bruscblino, 


mena, 


Prist mo, 


Cdnone, 


InUgina, 


Prbdano, 


Carmine, 


Lacedemone, 


Rdfano, 


Cdrpine, 


Ldmpuna, 


Rdgano, 


Cofano, 


Lcsiha, 


Rimini, 


Cristbfano, 


Lihano, 


Rbdano, 


Ddino, 


Limcsina, or eh- 


Sdtana, 


Didcono, 


mbsina, 


Stdggma, 


Didfono, 


Machinu, 


Stdgina, 


Dibgene, 


Mdcina, 


Stefano, 


E'bbeno. 


Mdngano, 


Strdggina, 


F'glino, 


Modem, 


Termini, 


Elcino, 


Oceano, 


Timpano, 


jEsdmine, 


Wrfano, 


Trdina, 


Femina, 


Q'rgano, 


Trdpano, 


Ferrdina, 


Origano, 


Turbine^ 


Fiorina, 


Pdgina, 


Vimine, 


Fibcine, 


P timpano, 


Ubmini, 


Frano, 


Pdtiru; 


Zdino, 
Zingano. 



You are likewise to pronounce all nouns short that 
terminate in gine ; as, balarddgine, origine, piantdgine ; 
and all those which end in dine in the singular ; as, 
amarititdine, i-6ndine t 

I never 



Gf the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



191 



O. 

I never could find more than four nouns that have 
the letter o for their penultima, in regard to which there 
could beany doubt of their pronunciation: these are A'loe, 
Silos, N6e; Erbe: the three first are pronounced with 
some rapidity, as if they had a grave accent on the 
letter e, which indeed is used by some ; but the fourth is 
long. 



You are to pronounce all nouns short, that have the 
letter p for their penultima. 
Except, 
Antip'ipa, orchetipo, Cantalupo, Ciclbpa-, dirupa, Eurbpa, 
Esbpo, Isbpo, Oroscbpo: the following three are better short 
than long ; Piropo, Pelipo, Priapo, 



Pronounce 


all 


nouns long wlu 


letter r : 




Except, 


A'lbero t ordrbore, 


Cdntaro, 


A'nitra^oxdnatra, 


Cdpparo, 


A'ncora, an 


au- 


Cdtedra, 


chor, 




Celebre, 


A'nfora, 




Cilebro, 


A'rbitw, 




Cesare, 


A'saro, 




Chidvari, the 


Augurc, 




name of a 


A'ura, 




country, 


AustrOy 




CldustrOt 


Bdratro, 




Cblera, 


Bdrbaro, 




E'prio, 


Bdvaro, 




Esdmetro, 


Biscaro, 




Feretro, 


Bulgaro, 




Fdvfaro, 


Cantor 0, 




Folgore, 


Cdnfora, 




Gdmbaro, 



Gdsparo,andGds- 

pare, 
Geometra, and 

geometra, 

Tcaro, 

Intaprete, 

Lduro, 

Ldzzaro, 

Ebgoro, 

Mdrtire, 

JMdrtora, 

Mas care , & mas- 

chera, 
Mduro, 
Meteora, 
Net tare, 
Aeutro, 



* In this word the penultima is also pronounced short, as we have 
observed in ikejirst number of this chapter, page 182. 



1 y 



NiceforOt 



19«- 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



Riccforo, 


Pbrpora, 


O'ngaro, 


Reword, 


Pdparo, 


Statiro, 


Pecora, 


Sauro, 


Pcntdmetro, 


Sdieletro, 


Pesaro, 


Spdlatro, 


Piffaro, 


Siigaro, 


Pitd^ora, 
Porfiro, 


Superi, 


Tdtaro, 



Tduro, 
Tt'mebre, 
Tortora, 
U'ngaro, 
Zaccara, 
Zdzzara, 
Zingaro, 
Zu.cce.ro, and 
zucchero. 



You are likewise to pronounce all nouns short, that 
terminate in era, ere, and ero, and have not the letter i 
before the antepenultima e ; asf Itttere, Cdrere, niimero : 
but we must except austero, chimera, emisftro, galtra, 
ingegnere or ingegnere, lusinghitro, mensogntra, messere, 
Omero, pantera, primavera, sever o, sincero, siatSr a, which 
conform to the rule : as do likewise almost all nouns 
verbal; as, il piacere, il par ere, and some other, which 
are derived from the infinitives contained in the exception 
to the rule of the second number in the next chapter. 
And the abbreviated nouns preserve the same sound as 
they had before their abbreviation : for example, we pro- 
nounce altero, long, because it is abridged from altitro : 
inter o, from intiero ; magistero, from magesti fro ; monas- 
ter o, from monaster io, &c. 

The word chidcchiera is pronounced short, though it 
has the s before the e. 



AH nouns are pronounced long, that have the letter s for 
their penultima : * 





Except 




A'niso, 


E'feso, 


Parufrasi 


JBrindisi, 


E'nfasi, 


Pdusa, 


Causa, 


E'stasi, 


Plduso, 


Citiso, 


Genesis 


Sinderesi, 


Creusa, 


Metambrfosi, 


Tunisi. 


Diocesi. 







T. Pro- 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



193 



Pronounce those nouns long> lliat have the letter i for 
their penultima : 








Except, 




Ahlto, 


Epiteto, 


pdlmite, 


'Acvvlito, 


Esausto, 


Perdita, 


Aconite, 


Escrcito, 


PldutCy 


A'dito, 


Eslto, 


PldcitOy 


A'gcta. a christian 


Esplicito, 


PremitOy 


name. 


Edusto, 


PrSstito, 


A'lito, 


Etgato, 


Preirito, 


A'mbito, 


Elduto, 


Propositi), 


Audita, 


^Eomite, 


PulpitOy 


Anelito, 


Eortuito, 


RicdpitOy 


Antidoto, 


Erfmito, 


Recdndito, 


Antistite, 


Gdlata, 


Renditdy 


Apostate, 


Gemito, 


SdhatOy 


Arkte, 


Genito, 


SeguitOy 


Atomato, 


Gombito, or Go- 


Soccitffy 


Attcnito, 


mito. 


JSoi rate, 


Canto, 


Implicit o, 


So/ito, 


Cognito, 


Inctito. 


Solitcito, 


Cumito, 




Spirito, 


Cbmpito, the work 


Interpret e, 


Stimmate, or Sti- 


of a day, or of 


Intiiito, 


matey marks of 


a certain time, 


Ipbcrate, 


wounds. 


Ccmputo, 


Ipocrito, 


Sclpite, 


Crtdito, 


Ippblito, 


Strepito, 


Cibito, 


JLdutOy 


Sdbito, 


DtbitOy 


Lbcito, 


Suddito, 


Decrepito, 


Libito, 


Tdcito, 


Dedito, 


Lifvito, 


Trdnsito, 


IhposiiOy 


Umile, 


Tremito, 


Disputa (some pro- 


Merito, 


Vendita, 


nounce it long, 


Ndscitdy 


Vtneto, 


Domito, 


Olocdusto, 


Visita, 


jE'mpitofor Tmpeto O' spite, 


Vimito. 



* When it is a noun adjective y it is pronounced almost 
always short; but when a supine, it is long* 

1 3 U. Pro- 



154 Op the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

U. 
Pronounce all nouns short ; that have the vowel w for 
their penultima : example, drduo, pervetuo, residua. 
Except, 
Altrui> Me, due, and its compounds, as, ambidue, vin~ 
tidue, &e. colid, costui, cui, lui, suo, iuo. 
V. 
You are to pronounce those nouns short, that have v 
consonant for their penultinm: example, concavo, Gtnova P 
tritavo, vfacovQ. 

Except, 
Bisavo, discianove, and the other numbers of the same 
termination; Geneva, or Genevra, inedvo, saave, ottdvo, 
and all the nouns terminating in ho and iva t as sostantivo, 
motivo, gentiva, invettcva. 

Z 

Pronounce all nouns long that have the letter z for 
their penultima, except the noun polkza. 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Pronunciation of Verbs and Adverbs, 

No I. 

T*\ISSYLLABLES, whether verbs or adverbs, observe 
no rule, because they are pronounced indifferently. 
See the preceding chapter, No. I!, and with regard io 
words of two or more syllables, that have a grave accent 
on the last vowel, I refer you to what l»s been said in the 
same chapter, No. III. p. 1 83. 
No. II. 
The infinitive of the verbs is terminated in are, ere, and 
ire. Those which terminate in are and in .are pronounced 
long, without any exception ; and such as end in ere 
short, the following excepted : avere, cadire, dissuadtrc. 
dolire, dovtre t gktctre, godare,partre,pe?^su^dt;re, piuetrt, 
potere, rimanere, sapere, sed(re y soUrz, tacere, iemere, 
tentre, valere, vedere, volere, and all their compounds, as 
accadere, QtUnvre, jtravedire. &c. it being a general 

maxim, 



* , - Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. Ijtf 

»- 

fn&*im, that the compounds follow the rule of their 

simples. 

No, TIL 

All third persons plural are pronounced short, except in 
the future tense, Leuiuse of the two consonants which 
precede the final Vowel 7 ; IB like manner, the first 
person plural of all the preterimperfect subjunctive, 
which In the first person singular terminate in ed must 
be pronouueed short ; as, amassi, amussimo, legg.cssi, leg- 
gessimo, &e. 

No. IV. 

All other persons, of whatever tense or number, are 
made long; except those of some verbs of the first con- 
jugation, which, in the first person of the indicative, 
have the penuitima short, and preserve this shortness in 
the other persons, not only of the indicative, but of the 
imperative and subjunctive moods: for instance, riedpito, 
the first person indicative of the verb rivfipitare, has the 
syllable pi short j and the same quantity is preserved in 
ricapiti, and riedpfta. Farther ; this and other like verbs 
receive, by way of augment, in the third perse us plural 
of the said moods, another syllable, which is sounded as 
short as the penuitima : for instance, rkapito, ricapitano, 
rlcapiiino ; dissmmlp, di.wmulano, dissimulime ; and since 
there are several who mispronounce those third persons 
plural, 1 have thought lit to adjoin a particular description 
of them in the two following numbers. 

No. V. 

In the first place, all verbs, whose infinitive terminates 
in care, without any other consonant before c, as autenti- 
cdre, ghrificare, masticdre, make the first person of the 
present indicative short, and of course the other persons 
just now mentioned in the exception to the preceding 
number: except afficc&re, orroctire, and such as you will 
find excepted in the following number. 

2. All verbs, whose infinitive terminates in oldre, as 
immpl&re, stimoldre, brancvlare. 

.3, As likewise all verbs formed of nouns that have 
i 4 the 



196 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



the penultimate syllable short; for example, regoldre, 
formed of regola ; generdre, of genero ; sol lee it are of solle- 
citc. To the three foregoing numbers, you must add the 
following verbs, which are contained therein, viz. 



Affocdte, 

Agitdre, 

Alter are, 

Anfandre, 

Annihilate, 

Assiderdre, 

Sucker dre, 

Cahitrdre, 

Capiidre, 

Commemorate, 

Comperdre, 

Confederdre, 

Considerate, 

Contaminate, 

JQffictrure, 

Defindrc, 

TJissipdre, 

l)omindre, 

Dubitftre, 

JSccettudre, 

Felicitare, 

Gratuldre. 

Imitdre, 

hicorpordre, 



Insolferdre, 

Interrogdre, 

Investigdre, 

Irritate, 

Istigdre, 

Iterate, 

Litigdre, 

Lumindte, 

Meditdre, 

Merit ware, 

Moderate, 

Mormordre, 

Munerdre, 

Navigdre, . 

Kecessiidre, 

Nominate, 

JSoverdre, 

Occvpdre, 

Palpitdre, 

Penetrdre, 

Precipitate, 

Procrastinate, 

Pulluldrt, 

Rammemordre, 



Recitdre, to repre- 
sent on a stage. 

Refrigerdre, 

Rtcuperdre, 

Rubor are, 

Ruminate, or 
Rumigdre, 

Scalp irate, 

Schiccherdre^ 

Seguitdre. 

Seminar e. 

Sgombrdre, 

Simuldre, 

Smtmordre, 

Spettordre, 

Super are, 

Suppcditdre, 

Suscitdre, 

Toller dre, 

Tumultudre, 

Vent Hare, 

Vigildre, 

Vituperdre. 



To the above we may also add the verb offrire, belong- 
ing to the conjugation of verbs in isco. There are some 
who pronounce the foregoing third persons indifferently, 
short or long, in the verbs migliordre, peggiordre, and 
riputdre, but they are pronouueed short in the verbs con- 
citdre, eccitdre, incUdre. 

No. VI. 

From the whole we may conclude, that infinitives 
of two or three syllables, as, fare, cecdre, with their 
compounds, as, disfdre, accecdre, do not shorten the 
first person indicative, nor the other perions, n«r even 

the 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 197 

*he infinitives derived from nouns whose penultima is 
Jong, example, avventuare, derived from ventura: in- 
tricate, from intrico ; minchiondre, from minchiono ; con- 
trastdre, from contrast o ; architettare, from architttio, 
&c. But I am very sure, that pcrsevtro, I persevere, is 
oftener pronounced short, though it comes from severo, 
which is long ; this, perhaps, to distinguisli it from the 
Latin verb per sever o, which is sounded long. 

No. VII.. 

With regard to the conjunctive pronouns, mi, ti, si, 
&c. the four relatives, to, la, It, le, and ijje particle ne 
if they happen to be at the end of infinitives terminated 
in ere short, scrivermi, rispondfvti, vtnderne ; and at 
the end of the thin 1 parsons singular of the preterperfect 
simple, marked with the grave accent, as also at the end 
of the first and third persons singular of the future ; as, 
rimproveroffi, lracconter6vvi,racconterassi, &c. tbere arises 
from thence no change at all in the pronunciation, though 
this union is productive of two consonants before the 
final vowel ; since the foregoing words, being placed 
after the said persons, are always reduplicated, according 
to what has been observed, p. 173. and as you may see by 
the above examples. If the said particles happen to be 
united to other persons, as, paria-tegli, tem6vami t invian- 
dolo, they cause the last verbal syllable, which is the .pe- 
nultimate of the word, to be pronounced short. 

No. VIII. 

When two of the said particles happen to be united 
together, at the end of the person Which, without this 
union, is not pronounced short, as parldteglicne, invidndo- 
mme, porttivamcli, then you shorten only the penultimate 
syllable of the word, which is the first of the two par- 
ticles : but when they are joined together, at the end 
of infinitives, and of the persons marked at the be- 
ginning of No VII. you make no change, as I have 
already observed, in the pronunciation ; and the first 
of the two particles, being the penultimate of the word, 
I 5 i«- 



198 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

is made short : example, scrivermelo, vender gliene, rimpro^ 
vervmmela, raccQnterdssene, &c. 

No. IX. 

With regard to adverbs, you must follow the rules and 
exceptions of the preceding chapters, especially as they 
are derived for the most part from nouns.* for instance, 
all'improviso, un tantmo, see under the letter 5 for the 
former, and under n for the latter, and you will find that 
both of them have the penultimate syllable long. As for 
such as have two consonants before their final vowel, as 
ellegramente incontamvnte, you must recollect the rule 
mentioned in the preceding chapter, No II. and with res- 
pect to compounds, remember the rule, which says, that 
compounds follow the nature of their simples. 

No. X. 

Here I shall observe, that when the adverb ecco is 
joined to the conjunctive or relative particles, as Zccoci, 
eccoli, tccoky the penultimate syllable, thus united, is to be 
pronounced short ; and it retains the same quantity, when 
joined to the two^ aforesaid particles : for instance, eccctene, 
tccovene, tccotdo : you are moreover to observe, that the 
penultima, which is the first of the particles, is also pro- 
Bounced short. 

These two adverbs, altresi and cuppita, have the penul- 
tima short; but in shrove, ancbr e, assdi, dappbi, giammai, 
insieme, and overo, it is long. 

In these two adverbs, adagio, and p6$tia, the vowel i 
forms a syllable with the final vowel a and a. 



( m ) 
THIRD TREATISE. 

OF THE ITALIAN SYNTAX. 



CHAP. I. 

Of the Division of Syntax. 

CYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
construct™ ; and signifies the right placing and con- 
necting of words in a sentence. It is divided into three 
sorts ; the first of order or arrangement, the second of con- 
cordance, the third of government. The syntax of order 
or arrangement is the right disposition of words in a sen- 
tence. The syntax of concordance is when the parts of 
speech agree with one another, as the substantive with the 
adjective or the nominative wiih the verb. The syntax of 
government is when one part of speecli governs another ; 
or, as some grammarians express it, when one part of 
speech is dependent on another. 

The rules of syntax are much the same in Italian as 
in English ; however, for the sake of those who have 
not a grammatical knowledge of their own language, 
I shall lay down some general rules of Italian con- 
struction. 

I. Of the Order of Words. 

I. The nominative is that to which we attribute the 

action of the verb, and is always ranged in the first 

place: it is generally a noun, a pronoun, or an infinitive 

put for a noun ; as, Thomaso scrive, Thomas writes ; to 

I 6 parlo, 



SCO Of the ITALIAN SYNTAX. 

ptirlo, I speak ; il dor mire giova, sleeping does one 
good. 

2. When the action of the verb is attributed to many 
persons, or things, these all belong to the nominative, 
and are ranged in the first place, together with their 
conjunction ; as, Pittro e Paolo leggono, Peter and Paul 
read. 

3. The adjectives, belonging to the nominative sub- 
stantive, to which the action of the verb is attributed, 
are put after the substantive, and before the verb ; as, gli 
&'coteri morigertti e dihgenti studiano, the mannerly and 
diligent scholars do study. % 

4. If the nominative has an article, this article always 
takes the first place, that being its natural situation. 

5. Sometimes a verb with its case stands for a 
nominative ; as, umdna cbsa t avere compassibne degli 
qfflitti, to have compassion on the afflicted is an act of 
humanity. 

6. The Rominative is sometimes understood, as amo, 
where you understand io ; and so of the other persons of 
the verb. 

7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if 
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately after 
the verbs, whose accidents and circumstances it explains ; 
as, Pietro ama ardenttmtnte la gloria, Peter is extremely 
fond of glory. 

8. The cases governed by the verb are put after it ; 
they may be one or many, according to the nature of 
the action ; as, io amo Pietro, I love Peter ; io dbno un 
iibro a Paolo, I make a present of a book to Paul. 

i). The preposition is always. put before the case it 
governs; as, vicino a cdsa, near the house. 

IO. The. relative is always placed after the antecedent ; 
as, Pittro, il quale studia, Pete*, who studies. 



II. Of Concordance. 



1. Adjectives agree with their substantives, in gen- 
der, number, and case : as, tin' ubmo virtubso, a virtuous 

man; 



Op the ITALIAN SYNf AX. 201 

man ; so?i(uosi palazzj, sumptuous palaces ; donna bella, a 
handsome woman. 

2. When two or more substantives singular come to- 
gether, the adjective, or participle, belonging to them, 
must be put in the plural ; as, Perdiccone, e'l padre, e la 
mddre dtlla Lisa, ed tlla, altresl conttnti, grandissima 
fesia fecero ; Perdiconne, and the father and mother of 
Lisa, and she likewise, contented, made great rejoicings. 

3. If the substantives happen to be one in the singular 
and the other in the plural, the adjective or participle may 
then agree with either ; as, esstndosi Dioneo, con gli dltri 
gibvani messo a giuocdred tdvole ; Dioneo with the other 
young men having set down to play at tables: ilrd co' subi 
compdgni, rimontati a cavdllo, alia redle osteria senelornd- 
rono ; the king and his companions, having mounted their 
horses again, returned to the royal inn. 

4. Every verb personal agrees with its nominative, ex- 
pressed or understood, both in number and person. 

b. If the nominative be a collective noun, the verb 
may be in the plural, though the nominative is in the 
singular ; as, il comune pbpolo erano ignordnii del vero 
T)io ; the common people were ignorant of the true 
God. 

6. When there happen to be two nominatives, one 
masculine and the other feminine, the preterite an(f par- 
ticiple of the verb agree with the masculine, if speaking 
of persons ; but if any thing else is meant, it may agree 
with the feminine; as, convitdti le donnt e gli ubmini, 
alh tdvole, the men and women being invited to table ; 
tlla avrvbbt cost Vnltra cbscia e Vdltro pit fuor manduta, 
she would have put out the other thigh, and the other 
foot. 

7. The relative quale, with the article, agrees en- 
tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article, 
and denoting an absolute quality or likeness, it agrees 
with what follows ; as, quel ciiore il qudle, that heart 
which ; seco pensdndo qudli infra piccol tannine dovtan 
divenire, thinking within himself what was shortly to 
become of them. Except persona, which, though of 
the feminine gender, yet, when applied to a male, re- 
quires 



202 



Of the ITALIAN SYNTAX. 



quires a masculine relative ; as, alcuna persona il qudh 
some person who. 

8. The question and answer always agree in every 
thing ; as, cavalier e, a qual donna se' tu ? ed egli rispose, 
sono alia regina, what lady do you belong to, sir knight 1 
and he answered, I belong to the queen. 

III. Of the dependence of the parts of speech on each 
other. 

1. The nominative being the basis of the sentence, 
the verb depends on it, as the other cases depend on the 
verb. The adjective depends on the substantive that 
supports it ; and the adverb on the verb whose accidents 
it explains. 

2. The genitive depends on a substantive expressed or 
understood ; by which it is governed. 

3. The accusative depends either on a verb active, as 
io dmo'Ja virtu, I love virtue ; or on an infinitive, as diss'e 
se in tib avtre errdto, he owned himself to have been mis- 
taken in that ; or on a proposition, as, vddo verso la 
cltiesa,! go towards the church. 

4. The ablative depends on a preposition, by which it 
is governed ; as,pdrto da Roma, I go from Rome. 

5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speaking, no 
dependence on the other parts. The dative is common 
as it were, to all nouns and verbs. The vocative only 
points out the persons to whom jou speak. 

And so much for syntax in general. I come now to 
the construction of the several parts of speech. 



33S 



CHAP. II. 

Of the Syntax of Articles. 

T> EFOUD we come to the syntax of the Articles, re- 
-*-* member that lo, la, li, le, gli, before the verb, and 
the word icco } are no longer articles, but pronouns -re- 
lative. 

Those 



I 



Of the SYNTAX of ARTICLES. g$$ 

Those who understand Latin will quickly perceive the 
difference, if they take notiee, that every time they 
lender to, la, li, le, gli, by ilium, Mam, illud; or by turn, 
earn, id ; illos, illas, ilia ; eos, eas, ea ; they are relative 
profcouns. 

The particles in and to, before the names of cities, are 
expressed by in and a ; as, in or at Rome, in Rama, to 
Rome, a Roma. 

\* The best authors often use the infinitives with 
the article it instead of substantives; example, singing 
relieves me, it cdntare mi rallegra, instead of it canto me 
rallegra. 

Note, the article it is put before the word signor, 
sir, or my lord, speaking of all qualities, dignities, and 
relations, for the masculine; example, my lord the 
president, it signbre president e ; my lord duke, it signor 
duca; the gentlemen, i signori; of the gentlemen, dei 
signori. 

You must observe the same rule for the feminine article 
la, which is to be prefixed to signbra, speaking of or to the 
ladies ; as, la signbra principtssa. 

If the Italians express madam by madama, they put the 
article la after it ; as, madam the princess, mad&ma la 
princessa t of madam the, di madama la, &c. 

%*■ Sometimes the English particle to, before infini- 
tives, is rendered in Italian by the article il or lo ; 
example, it is easy to say, to see, to study ; e facile il 
dire, il vedere, lo studidre: with the latter we use the ar- 
ticle lo, because studidre begins with an s followed by a 
consonant. 

We generally use the article, when the Latins express 
the infinitive by the supine in u : as, facile dictu, facile 
visu. 

We may also make use of the indefinite article a ; as, 
t facile a dire, a vedtre, a studidre: it is easy to say, to 
see, to study. 

See farther, in the syntax of verbs, when it is proper to 
express the articles del, dcllo, delta, delle, degli, &c. after 
the verbs, when and not. 

It is also to be observed, that the Italians frequently 
make use of the masculine articles plural dei, di, ddi, 

with 






204 ' * Of the SYNTAX of NOU$S. 

with the apostrophe, before possessive pronouns, and 
before all indeterminate nouns: for example, de miti 
libri, of my books ; a tubi partnti, to thy relations ; 
da subiamici, from his friends; la libertd de' pbpoli, the 
liberty of the people ; epermesso a' viaggiato?i,irave\ltts 
are permitted ; si scrive da paesi lontani, they write from 
distant countries. 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Syntax of Nouns. 

HTHE adjectives, as we have before observed, agree with 
their substantives in gender, number, and case: ex- 
ample, uomo virtuoso, derma beUissima, casa nvova. 

The Italians sometimes use a noun adjective instead of 
a substantive ; as, il caldo del fubco, for it calbre; Vdlto 
dclle miir a for Vdliezza, &c. 

*_* The comparatives govern a genitive ; and the parti- 
cle than, which is after them, is expressed by di, or del, or 
ddlo, &c. as you may see in the first part. 

We have taken notice, in the chapter of compa- 
ratives, p. 55, that the particle than is rendered by 
eke, v, hen it is before a noun adjective, a verb, or an 
adverb. 

%* If the comparison is made between two substantives, 
than must also be rendered by the: example, 

Virgil pleases me more than Ovid, Virg'dio mi place plii 
die Ooidio. 

He is a better soldier than captain, e migllbr solddto che 
eapitfoio* 

Rome would please me more than Paris, ml piacertbbe 
piu Roma che Par'ig-i. 

* # * When t'ae comparison is made by so as, as much 
as, so as, they must all be rendered by quanto: ex- 
ample. 

The prince is not so powerful as the king, it principe 
non v poUnte qutinto 'I re. 

My 



Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 



205 



My book is as handsome as yours, il mio lihro e hello 
quant o' I vostro. 

You shall have as much of it as you please, n avrete 
qttdnto vorrete. 

The poor are as much despised as the rich esteemed, 
sono vilipcsi i pbveri qutinto sono siimdti i rkchi. 



CHAP. IV. 



Of the Syntax of Pronouns. 



T DO not intend to treat here of the pronouns personal ; 
they have been sufficiently explained already in the 
first part, from p. 6l to p. 64: to avoid any farther 
repetition, I shall only give the following rule. 

The English make use of the verb to be, put imper- 
sonally through "all its tenses in the third person, before 
the pronouns personal, thou, he, $ke> we, you, they ; it is 
I, it is he, &e. In Italian the verb to he, on this occasion, 
is not impersonal ; and they express, it is I, by sono io ; 
it is thou, sei tu : it is he, e iui ; it is we, sidmo noi ; it 
is you, siete voi ; it is she, e lei ; it is they, mas. sono iglinq, 
or sono tssi; it- is they, fem. sbuo tileito, or sono esse ; and 
in like manner through all the tenses ; as, it was f, ero io ; 
it was we, erdmo noi ; &c. 

%* To express in Italian, it is mine, it is"thine > it is 
kis, it is oui*s, it is yours, we must say, in the singular 
number, 

Masculine- Feminine. 

It is mine, i mio, or e mia. 

It is thine, i tuo f or £ tua. 

It is his. t suo, or e siia. 

It is ours r t nbstro. or e nostra. 

It is yours, e vostro, or e vbstra. 

In the plural we must say, scno mUi, or mie ; son tuci, 
or tue ; son subi, or sue ; son nbstri, or nbslre, son wstri, 
or vostrs. 



206 Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 

Me, thee, him, to him, &c. are expressed always by the 
conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, gti, &c. when* thev are 
before or after a verb. See p. 64. 

?4? The conjunctive pronoun gli requires a particular 
remark ; to wit, that, whenever it is found before the arti- 
cles lo, la le, or the adverb ne, it takes an e at the end 
to join the following particle: example, 

To give it to him, per ddrglielo, and not dargTilo ; 
the vowels i and e ought to be pronounced as one syl- 
lable. 

To give it to her, per darglida. 

You shall return them to him, glieli rendertle. 

You shall ask him 'for some gliene domanderete. 

You shall speak to him of it, gliene parkrete. 

%* When the pronouns conjunctive happen to meet 
with the particle si, they must be transposed, and si is 
placed next to the verb : example, 

Tiiey tell ine, mi si dice, and not si mi dice* 

They tell thee, ti si dice, and not si ti. 

They tell him, or her, gli, or le si dice. 

%* The l pronouns conjunctive mi,ti,si>ci x vi, change 
i into e when they are before lo, la, le, gli, or the adverb 
ne ; example, 

He gives it me again, mefo rt?ide. 

The following words, me some or of it, thee some or 
of it, him some or of it, us some, you some, &c. are ren- 
dered in Italian by mene, true, sene, gliene, cene, vene, as 
we have already observed in the chapter of conjunctive pro- 
nouns, p. 64. 

JJyro, their, before s noun, is a pronoun possessive in- 
declinable; as, their book, it loro libro; theii chamber, la 
loro camera ; their goods, i loro btrti ; their swords, le 
loro spade : when loro is a pronoun possessive, you put 
an article before it. 

Loro after a verb is a pronoun conjunctive ; as, the 
master teaches them, il maestro insegna loro. L6ro is 
always made to follow the verb, to whatsoever tense it be. 

%* To render the Italian more agreeable and com- 
plaisant, you are to use the third person instead of the 
second : thus, you are in the right of it, is expressed by 
V* S. ha ragibne, instead of avete ragibne, pronouncing 



Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 207 

mssignorla, which is always marked by V. S. And to 
prevent the frequent repetition of V. S. they use the pro- 
noun el fa, or essa, in the nominative, in conversation, 

Example, 
Nom. EVa, or hsa V. S. 
Gen. di lei di V. Sr 

Dat. a lei a V. S. 

Ace, lei V. S. 

Ah}, da lei da V. S. 

In the plural we say, h signorie lore, delle signorie 
loro : idle signorie loro, dalle Signorie loro. 

*^*That is always expressed by che ; example, the book 
that I read, il Hbro cheleggo ; what do you want 1 eke va- 
lefe, or che vuble, V. 8. 1 

Che oftentimes denotes because: especially wben it 
follows the negative particle non : example, do not drink 
it, because k will hurt you, non to bevC4e, che vi far& 
mdle. 

* # * CIri is frequently made use of to express he that, 
and is more elegant than quel che : example, chi dice 
quest o ha ragibne, for quel che dtce, &c. 

* # * The -particle it h never expressed in Italian before 
the third person of the verb to be : example, 
It is well sard, e ben detto. 
It shall be well done, saraben fatto. 
The poets often make use of altri for dltro : example,. 
Altri fu vdgfl di spiar tra h stelle, altri di seguir Vbrme 
di fugHivnjha, altri d'atterrdr' 'or so, Gmuimjicl Pastor 
Fido. 



53=2: 



CHAP. V. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs. 

> T i HE verbs, through every tense and mood (except 
the infinitive) ought, as we have already observed, 
to be preceded by a nominative case, either expressed or 
understood, with which they should agree in number 
and person. The nominative is expressed, when we 

say-, 



20$ Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

saVj to dmo, tu canti, Pittro scrive : understood when 
they sav, canto, andidmo, dtco, ridono. 

The Italians as well as the English use the second person 
plural, though they address themselves but to a single 
person : example, 

My brother, vou are in the wrons:, frat&llo mio, avite 
tirto. 

Sir, you are in the right, signcre, avete ragibne. 

And if we would speak in the thud person, we must say 
V. S. ha ragiine. 

The verb active governs the accusative ; as, studio la 
leziune, ama la virtu. 

The verb passive requires an ablative after it; as, the 
learned are envied by the ignorant, i dbtti sono invididti 
dag I' ignordntL 

The verbs, to take away, to separate, to be distant from, 
to receive, and obtain, govern also an ablative and accu- 
sative; as, 

To take something from the hands, levdre qudhhe cosa, 
' dalle mdni. 

To separate one from the other, separdre Vun d'aW 
altro. 

Get you away from me*, scostdtevi da me. 

\ have received a letter from my father, ho ricevuto da 
mio padre una Uttera. 

I have obtained leave from the king, ho ottenuto licenza 
dul rk 

fif|The verbs, to go out, to depart, to come, to return, 
govern a genitive and an ablative. The genitive, when 
the nouns have the indefinite article before them ; as, 
I go, I depart, I come, I return, from Paris, from 
France ; tsco, par to, vtngo, tbrno, di Pangi, di Frdncia, 

The ablative, when the nouns are preceded by the 
definite article ; as, I go, I depart, I come, I return, 
from the garden, from the meadow, from the church ; 
esco, pdrto, vtngo, torno, dal giardino, prdto, ddlla 
chitsa. 

You must always put the particle a or ad after the verbs 
of motion ; as, anddre, manddre, invidre, venire, when 
they precede an infinitive ; example. 

Let 



OF the SYNTAX OF VERBS. QOQ 

Let us go see, andidnw a vedere. 

Send to look for, mandate a cercdre. 

Come ask f or, venite a domanddre. 

They do not say, andidmo vcdcre, mandate cercdre, 
venite domanddre. They make use of ad, when the 
following verb begins with a vowel ; as, let us go and 
give notice, andiamo ad avisdre, &c. 

After verbs, we must express yes and no by di si and 
di no; and not by che si and cite no: example, 

I believe yes, credo di si. 

I believe not, credo di no. 

I say not, dko di no. 

I think not, penso di no. 

I say yes, scommetto di si. 

Have you a mind to lay not 1 volete scommtttere di no! 

I have observed, in the first part, p. 83, that when we 
find the particle if, which in Italian is expressed by 
se, before the impel feet indicative, we must use the 
imperfect subjunctive in Italian: example, if I had, se 
avessi: if we could, se potessimo: and not se aveva, se 
potevdmo. 

This rule is not general, because we frequently are oblig- 
ed to put the imperfect indicative after se, and not the im- 
perfect subjunctive. 

* # * When 'we find in English if before a prelei im- 
perfect, it is to be observed, that we speak either of a 
time past, or a time to come; as if I had riches, I tvas 
not master of them ; if I studied, it was to become learned: 
in those two examples we speak of a time past ; for which 
reason we must use the imperfect indicative, and say, se 
avevo beni, non nero padrone : se studidvo, era per diven- 
tdr dbtto. But if we happened to speak of a future time ; 
if I studied, I should become learned; if I had riches, I 
would give something to the poor; then we must make use 
of the imperfect subjunctive, and say, se studidssi, diven- 
terti dotto; se avessi beni, ne darii ai poveri; because in 
the latter examples, we speak by wish, and therefore we 
place the verbs in the optative ; and in the former we do 
not express ourselves either by wish or desire, but concern- 
ing a thing or time past. 

VThe 



210 Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

\* The English are apt to put the first imperfect of 
the subjunctive, where the Italians make use of the second: 
example. 

He had dene me a kindness ; the Italians will not say, 
rnavtsse fit to pidcere, but m'avrebbe fdtto piaccre ; be- 
cause one may say, he would have done me a kindness. 

I have been in the wrong, avrti uvuto torto, and not 
avessi aviito tbrto ; because one may say, Ts/tculd have 
been in the wrong. 

You had been blamed, sareste stato bkisimdto, and not 
foste stato biasimdto: because youliad bcen-msy be turned 
by w oid d have. 

XT Note, that to express in Italian, though that should 
be, we must say, qudndo cib fosse, and not surtbbe. 

N. B. Because the phrase, though that should be, may 
be turned by, if that was ; and as often as you can turn 
the second preterimperfect by the imperfect subjunctive, 
or the second preterpluperfect by the pluperfect subjunc- 
tive, you ought to do it ; and then those second preterim- 
perfects are put in the subjunctive mood in Italian ; for 
example, if I had been at Rome, or if I were at Rome, I 
should endeavour to live with the Romans. S^Iiere you 
may turn the phrase, and say, if I was at Rome ; in Italian 
you must say, sefbssi stato a Roma, o se vi fbssi, procu- 
rer ti di viver co'Romani. 

* # * The Italians use the future tense after the conjunc- 
tion if when they speak of a future action; but the Eng- 
lish, the present : example, to-morrow, if I have time, do- 
?ndni 9 se airo tempo, and not se ho ; if he- comes we &hall 
see him, se verra, lo> vedrtmo, and not se viene. 

$T When they speak of visiting a person at his house, 
they use the verb venire instead of a?iddre: example, I 
will go to-morrow to your house, verrbjda voidomdni. 

* # * When we forbid a person, to whom we say thee 
and thou, to do a thing, we ought to use the infinitive, 
and not the imperative: example, don't thou do that, non 
far questo-, «ay thou nothing, non dir niente ; don't thou 
stay, non tijermdte, 

A con- 



Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 211 

A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last to be 
of the same number, person, and tense, as the first: 
example, the king wills and commands, il rt vuble e com* 
mdnda ; I see and I know, io vedo e conbsco. 



To know when to make use of the Subjunctive, read the 
following remarks, 

* # * 1. The conjunction che generally requires the 
subjunctive after it; example, bisbgna che Pittro cdnti, 
crida, s&nta, esca, &c. 

{Kr" 2. Take notice, that che makes all the words, to 
, which it is joined, become conjunctions ; as, accioche, to 
the end that : prima che, avanti die, before that ; benche 9 
although ; ddto che, supposto che, suppose that ; which 
govern the subjunctive: example, accioche, prima che 9 
btnthe, suppbsto che, io pdrli, io esc a, &c. 

* fr * 3. In order, therefore, to know when to put the 
verb which comes after che, that, in the indicative, and 
when in the subjunctive, take particular notice of the 
following examples : That I may speak, that I may love, 
that I may sing.' 

Now these verbs, speak, love, sing, which are after cht^ 
i that, are in one sense in the indicative, and in another in 
J the subjunctive mood. 

The way then of not mistaking the one for the other is, 
to suppose that the vetbfdre, to do, stands in the place of 
the verb that follows die. 

The verb fare makes, in the present of the indicative, 
fo, fax, fa ; faccidmo,fdte, fdnno. 

The same verb fare makes, in the subjunctive, fdecia^ 
fdccia,fdccia; faccidmo, f accidie, fdeciano. 

To know - whether the above examples, speaks love, sing, 
are in the indicative or subjunctive, put the verb fare 
in their stead : example, il mio frattllo vubl ch'io pdrli : if, 
instead of the verb parli, you put the verb fare, you will 
say, il mio frattllo vuol chio fdecia: the verb fdecia is in 
the subjunctive, consequently, pdrli will be in the same 
mood. 

I shall 



21JI Of the SYNTAX op VERBS. 

I shall give another example, in which the verb that 
follows the will he in the indicative, and not in the 
subjunctive : U mio fratello crede ch'io parlo. Instead of 
par to, put the verb fare, you will say, il mio fratello crede 
ch'io fo: the verb to jo is in the indicative, therefore 
pdrlo must be in the indicative also: and so of. the rest of 
the verbs. 

Hence, according to the first example, you will say, 
mio fratello vu6l ch'io parli ; and, according to the second 
mio fratello crede ch'io pdrlo: pdrlo is the indicative, and 
parli in the subjunctive. 

Observe that, to speak Italian correctly, you should 
make use of the subjunctive in both cases ; as, vuol ch'io 
parli, and crede ch'io parli The difference between 
those two examples is, that in the latter you may some- 
times make use of the indicative, though not so properly ; 
in the former you must always employ the subjunctive ; 
you therefore may say, mio fratello, crede che parli or pdrlo; 
and vubl che parte, and not parlo. In order rightly to 
know whether you are to make use of the indicative, or 
of the subjunctive, read tha following remarks. 

* # * 4. The verbs that signify will, desire, command, 
permission, and fear, followed by the conjunction che, 
require the subjunctive after them: example, I will, I 
desire, I command, I permit, my brother to love, speak, 
see, go out, &c. voglio, desidero, comando, permUto, che 
mio fratello dmi, pdrli, veda, esca, &c. I fear he»,may not 
sing, he may not say, &c. temo che non cdnti, che non 
dica, &c. 

%* 5. After the conjunction although, the English some- 
times uSe the subjunctive ; as, although he bean ho7iest man, 
although he may do that. 

In Italian you must take care how you express though 
or although ; if it is by bench*-, you must put the subjunc- 
tive after it : example, though he is an honest man, benche 
sia galdnt' uomo ; though he does that, benche fdccia 
questo, 

t+t But if you Tender although or though, by sebben, 
then you must not use the subjunctive, but the indi- 
cative; example, though he is an honest man, sebben 

ega- 



Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 213 

v gaUnt* ubmo, and not sia; though he does this, sebben 
fa questo, and not faccia. 

%*■ 6. When you inert with two verbs, the former 
of which is preceded by the particle non, and the second 
by che, you must put the latter in the subjunctive: 
example, I did not know you loved, non sapho, che 
amdste; I do not believe he studies, non credo che studj ; 
I do not think he walks, nonp'enso che cammini. 

%* 7- When the pronoun qual precedes a verb, and 
you do not speak by an interrogation, you must put the 
following verb in the subjunctive : example, not knowing 
which was the season proper for sowing, non sapendo qual 
fosse la stagibne propria da seminar e ; I do not see which 
is his intention, non vedo qual sia I'intenzibne sua ; I 
do not know which are your books, non so qu&li siano i 
vbstri libri. 

But if we speak by interrogation, you must put the 
verb in the indicative : example, which is yours ? qual 
e V vbstro. 

%* The articles, del, dello, delta, degli, &c. coming 
after a verb, are apt to puzzle those who learn Italian : 
and no one has hitherto thought of removing this difficulty. 
To explain the matter ; 

*** Observe, that the Italians often put the genitive 
after a verb active : example, give me some, or of the 
bread, datemi del pane ; eat some, or of the pye, man- 
gidte del pasticcio. You see, by those examples, "the geni- 
tive is put after a verb active : but observe, at the same 
time, we are not speaking of a whole, but only of a 
part ; for, give me some pye, some bread, some wine, some 
meat, denotes only a bit, or a Utile part of the pye, bread, 
wine, or meat. 

If we would speak of ?, whole, we must not express 
the articles del, dello, dcu'la, &c. : example ; I have eaten 
petty patties, ho mangiato pasticcietti ; I have seen men, 
ho veduto iiomini ; you owe me a huudred crowns; give 
me bread, wine, and meat, in payment : mi doitte cento 
sciidi; datemi ' p&ve,vino, e came in pagamento. 

In the last examples, the articles, del, dello, delta, &c. 

are not expressed, because we speak of a sum, a quantity, 

K a whole, 



2U Op the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

a whole, that, is not separated, and which has no regard or 
relation but to the person who speaks. 

%* Note also, that after the particles?, it is, or they, we 
must not express the articles, del, dtllo, delta, &c. : example; 
they see men, si vedono uomini ; they tell bad news, si di- 
cono cattive nubve. 

You must not express the articles, del, dtllo, delta s dcgli, 
&c. after the prepositions, as the French express du, de la, 
de V, des : example, avec des soldats, Fr. con soldati, with 
soldiers ; your des pay sans, Fr. per contadini, for peasants; 
dans des paniers, Fr. in canestri, in baskets ; sur des che- 
vaux, Fr. sbpra cavdlli, upon horses. 

%* But if the articles, del, delli, delta, signify, concern- 
ing; as, they speak of your affairs, that is to say, concerning 
your affairs, the article must then he expressed : Gxample, 
they speak of you, si pdrla di vbi ; they treat of war, si 
tratta della gucrra; they talked of affairs of state, si par- 
lava ddgli affdri di state. 

It is therefore true, as you have observed, that there 
are particular cases, in which the articles are not expressed ; 
nay, it is elegant then to omit them. 

N. B. We may add to the above rule, that in general 
when the article is omitted in English, it is also omitted in 
Italian. 

The verb impersonal, there is, there was, there will be, 
has been explained at length, among the impersonal verbs, 
iu the first part, p. 147. 



CHAP. VI. 

Of the Syntax of Participles, 



"pVERY participle in the Italian language ends in to, 
or so i as, amdto, crediito, jimta, drso, prtso, sceso, 
rimdso, sblito. 

The active participles that follow the verb avere, must 
«?nd in o ; as, 

I have 



Of the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. 21* 

I have seen the king, ho veduto il re, 

I have seen the queen, ho veduto la regine. 

I had loved books, avevo amdto i libri. 

I Irad carried the letters, avevo portdto le lettere. 

We meet with authors who sometimes make the partf- 
eiples agree with the tiling of which they are speaking ; 
as, the moon had lost her rays, la luna aveva perduti i 
siioi rdggi. 

If the substantive is before the participle, they ought 
to agree together : example, the books that I have com- 
posed, i libri ch'ho compbsti ; the letter that I have written, 
la lettera ch'ho scritta. One may also say, la luna aveva 
perduto i suoi rdggi, &c. ; i libri ch'/to compbsto ; la let- 
tera ch'ho scritto. But it is more adviseable to follow the 
above rule. 

* # * If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
to terminate in o: example, the king has dined, il re ha 
pransdto ; the queen has supped, la regina ha cendto ; the 
soldiers have trembled, i solddti hdnno tremdto ; my sisters 
have slept, le mie sorelle hdnno dormito ; your friends have 
laughed, i vbstri amki hdnno riso. 

When the active participle happens to precede an in- 
finitive, it must be terminated in o : example ; il giudice 
gli ha fdtto taglidre la testa, the judge has caused his 
head to be cut off; mia sorella ha creduto partir, my 
sister had like to have gone. , 

The passive participles, which are joined to the tenses 
of the verb essere, agree with their antecedent ; that is to 
say, those participles must be put in the same gender and 
number as the preceding substantive : example; th« cap- 
tain is praised, il capitdno e loddto ; virtue is esteemed, 
la virtu e stimdta ; the lazy will be blamed, i pigri sa- 
rdnno biashndti ; your jewels are sold, le vbstre giqje sono 
vendute. 

* # * Take notice, it is more elegant in Italian to use 
the tenses of the verb venire, instead of those of the 
verb essere, before a participle : example ; he is esteemed, 
viene stimdto, for e sthndto ; he shall be praised, verrh 
hddto, for sard loddto ; they shall be blamed, verrdnno 
k 2 biasi~ 



216 Of the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. 

biasimati, iox saranno biasimati ; and so of all the tenses, 
and all the persons. 

We generally suppress the gerunds, having and being, 
before the participles: example ; having said so, quest o 
detto ; the sermon being ended, finita la predica. 

*£* In attempting to explain or translate an Italian 
book into English, we must remember that the participles 
frequently occur without any tenses of the verbs avere or 
tssere before them ; as, il quale, inteso'l disegno, maravi* 
gliatisi i cbnsoli. 

Then it is a sure sign that the gerunds avhido or essendo 
are suppressed : and, to explain it properly, we must ren- 
der it as if it were, il quale, avendo inteso'l disegno ; e$- 
sendosi maraviglidti i cbnsoli. 

We must also observe, that although avendo and essendo 
are suppressed before the particles, we must not suppress 
the conjunctive pronouns, nor the monosyllables that o light 
to follow the gerunds avendo and essendo, but we should 
put them after the participles: example, having seen 
it, avendolo veduto : in suppressing avendo we must say, 
vedutolo ; being aware of it, essendosene accorto : in sup- 
pressing essendo, we transpose sent after the participle, and 
say accortosene. 

It is better to place the nominative after the gerund than 
before; as, the king being a hunting, essendo' I re alia 
caccia ; the soldiers fighting valiantly, combattendo vato- 
rosamente i solddti. 

If after the verb there is an accusative, or any other 
case, we must put the nominative before the verb ; for 
instance, the soldiers being afraid of the enemy, in Italian 
we must say, i soldati ttmendo gV inimki, and not te- 
mendo i soldati gV inimki. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of the Syntax of Adverbs and Prepositions. 

A.T is expressed in Italian by da, or in casa. 

When at is expressed by da, we put the pro- 
nouns personal after it: example; at our house, da 

not ; 



Of the SYNTAX of ADVERBS, &c. 217 

noil at your house, da voi; at my house, da me; at 
thy house, da te ; at his house, da liii ; at her house, da 
Ui\ at their house, mas. dalbro; at their house, fern, 
da esse. 

*4* When at is expressed by in edsa, instead of the 
pronoun personal, we must use the pronouns possessive : 
as ; at our house, in casa nostra ; at your house, in casa 
vvstra ; at his and her house, in casa sua ; at thy house, 
in casa tua ; in their house, in casa loro. 

*'J*- If after at there be an article or a pronoun 
possessive, you must render at by dal, ddllo, ddlla, da\ did, 
ddgli, dulle, or else by in casa, with the articles of the 
genitive: example ; at the prince's, dal prmcipe, or in 
casa del prmcipe, \ at the scholar's, ddllo scoldre, or in casa 
dtUo scoldre ; at the sister's, ddlla sorclla, or in casa delta 
sorella ; aL the men's house, ddgli uomini, or in cdsadtgli 
uomini ; at my friend's, dal mio amico, or in casa del mio 
amk'O ; at his relation's, da suoi parenti, or in casa de snot 
parenti ; at the abbot's, dal signor ubbdie, or in casa dtl 
signer ahbute. 

The indefinite article di is- not expressed after the 
adverbs of quantity, how much , how mam/, much, Hi lie. as 
much as, more, &e. ; but these adverbs are made to agree 
with the following nouu, as if they were adjectives : 
example ; how much time, quanta tempo ; how much 
meat, quanta came ; how many soldiers, qudnti solddti ; 
a great deal of pleasure, motto piacere ; a great deal 
of pain, mblta pena ; a great many men, molti uomini ; 
a little time, poco tfmpo ; a little fever, poca febbre ; so 
much patience, tint a pazitnza; as much courage, tdnto 
dnimo ; a great many persons, mblte persone ; how many 
coaches] qudnte carrozze ? I have no more hope, non ho 
piii sperdnza. 

**'* A great deal of, is frequently expressed in Italian 
by gran: example, 1 have had a great deal of pain, ho 
aiido gran ptna ; a great deal of rain, gran pioggia ; a 
great deal of time, gran thnpo ; a great deal of pleasure, 
gran piacere. 

%* A little of, is rendered in Italian by poco di ; as, a 
little bread, wi poco di pane ; a little of compassion, un 
poco di pietd. 

K 3 Qui 



218 Of the SYNTAX of the 

Qui and qua signify here* Qud is joined with verbs of 
motion .* example, venile qua, passdte quel, come here, pass 
here. 

The Italians often use costi and costd, to point out the 
place where the person is, to whom we speak or write ; 
as V. S. mi scriva di costz, or di costd. See Lodovko 
Dolce, nel capitolo degli averbj locdli; yet I should prefer 
costi to costd. The best writers have often followed this 
rule. 

%* The Italians frequently use the adverb oggi to ex- 
press after-noon, or after dinner : example, come and see 
me after dinner, veniie oggi a vedtrmi, veniie oggi da me. 



Important Remarks on the Participle si, it is, ox 
they, &c. 

SI, used with a verb impersonal, signifies, it is or they t 
example ; si dice, it is said, or they say ; they speak, si 
purla. 

They not, is expressed by non si ; as, nan si dice, they 
do not say ; non si pdrla, they do not speak. 

They of it, is expressed by sene ; as, sene saprd qu&lche 
tSsa, they will know something of it. 

They not of it, is expressed by non sene ; as, non sene 
p fir hi, they do not talk of it. 

%* Note, learners are greatly at a loss how to express 
in Italian, they us of it, they you of it, they him of it, they 
me of it, they thee of it, &c. ; yet there is nothing more 
easy, if you do but turn the phrase by the tenses of the 
verb essere, to be ; example, to render, they will speak to 
us of it, we must turn it andj say, it will be spoken of 
to us, ctne sard parlaio. 

( will write to you of it, vene sard scritto, 

They < speak to you of it, gliene vien parlato, 
( write to us of it, cene viene scritto. 

They promise me some, mene sono promessi, or msne 
■vu;n promtsso, or mene viingono promessi. 

By these last examples you find that it is more eiegant 
to use the verb venire than the verb esstre* 

Remember^ 






ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. ®i$ 

Remember that the pronouus Iq, la, /t, h, are no* 
expressed after the particle si: example, they say so, si dice, 
and not, si lo dke ; they all know her, si conoseera ; they 
see them frequently together, sbno veduti spcsso lifetime. 
See, p. 214, what has been said concerning the articles 
del, dtlla, dtgli, delle, &e. 

Observe, nevertheless, that the best writers have often, 
and even with elegance, expressed these pronouns; but at 
present they are laid aside except by poets, who use them 
sometimes to serve the measure of their verse. Hence we 
no longer say t si dice, but simply si dice ; e si conoscera t 
or la si conoseera, but si CGnoscerd. Behold the letters, 
they will be read, tcco le lettere, si leggerdnno. 

The conjunctive pronouns must be transposed whenever 
the particle si comes before them, as I have already ob- 
served, p. 206*. 

*#* Yet this rule for transposing the conjunctive pro- 
nouns, when the particle si comes before them, is not ge- 
neral; for there are. some phrases in which the conjunctive 
pronouns must by no means be expressed, but the phrase 
is changed. 

When the conjunctive pronouns are put after the par- 
ticle si, and there is neither a noun nor case after the verb 
that follows, you must change the phrase without ever 
expressing the particle si ; as, they ask for me, sono demdn- 
dalo, I. am asked for ; they seek you, sitte cerclito, you 
are sought for; they will praise us, saremo lodati, we 
shall be praised. 

But if there happens a case after the verb, as, they ask 
me for a crown, you should express the conjunctive pro- 
noun, and say, mi si domanda uno scudo, or mi vime doman- 
daio uno scudo ; .they ask some bread of you, vi si doman- 
da par- c ; they will commend virtue to us, ci sara loddta 
la virtu. 

%.* If the conjunctive pronouns, that come after the 
particle si, be followed by a verb in the preterperfect 
definite, the phrase must be turned by the verb essere, 
and you must put the preter-derinite fii, or furono, 
according as you are speaking, in the singular or the 
plural ; as, they gave me a book, mi fu dato un libre ; 
they sent me letters, mi furono mandate Uttere; they 
K 4 wrote 



220 



Of the SYNTAX of the 



wrote us a letter, cifu scritta una leitera. Sometimes the 
phrase is turned thus; they sent for us to Rome, fummo 
manddtia Roma; they blamed y w, fbste biasimdto, or 
V. S.fu biasimdto. 

When the third persons of the verb avere, to have, 
are preceded by the particle si, and after those third 
persons there follows a particle, you are to render the 
third persons of the verb to have, by those of the verb 
essere, io be; putting -them in the same number with 
the thing mentioned : as; if we had said so, se sie detto 
questo; if they have read the letters, se si fbssero lette 
ie tettere. 

When they shall have taken the town, qndndo la cittd 
sard preset* 

See, p. 1 46", the remarks on impersonal verbs, with the 
particle si* 

But when the tenses of the verb to have, are preceded 
by the particle si, and there is no particle after the 
verb to have, we must use the tenses of the verb 
avere, instead of those of the verb tssere: example; they 
have some bread to eat, si ha del pane, or pune da man- • 
giare ; they have servants to wait, si hdnno servitbri per 
senire. 

For the better explanation of the foregoing important 
remarks on the particle si, it will be proper, I apprehend, 
to add the following observations. 

The first is, that this particle $i must not be used with 
reciprocal verbs, but the phrase should be turned; other- 
wise you would have two si's joined together, which 
would be disagreeable. Thus you do not say, si serve 
dille creature per offender Dio, they make use of the 
creatures to offend God ; but uno si serve, or I'ubmo si 
serve, &c. 

The second is, that constant experience shews it to be 
extremely difficult for those who are beginning to learn 
Italian, to express, they me of it, they thee of it, they him 
of it, they us of it, they you of it, they him of it, joined 
to a verb in the compound preterite. I shall therefore 
give here the indicative intire, which may serve as a gene- 
ral rule for all the other moods and verbs ; therefore I 
shall say, 

Indicative 



ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 221 

Indicative present. 

They write to me of it, mene viene, or men' e scritto. 

They write to thee of it, tene viene, or ten' e scritto, 

They write to him of it, gliene viene, oxglieri e scritto, 

They write to us of it, cene viene, or cen' e scritto. 

They write to you of it, vene viene or ven' e scritto. 

They write to them of it, ne viene, or rie scritto loro. 

In the other teuses I shall only put the first person singular, 
as it is easy to know the rest by means of the present indi- 
cative, which is conjugated entire. 

Imperfect. 
They did write to me of it, mene veniva, or men' era 
scritto, &c. 

Preter-definite. 
They wrote to me of it, mene venne, or mene fu scritto, 

&«. 

N. B. in the compound tenses we do not make use of 
the verb ventre, but of essere. Thus, 

Preter perfect. 
They have written to me of it, men 1 e stdto scritto, &c. 

Pluperfect. 
They had written to me of it, men' era stdto scritto, &c. 

Future. 
They will write to me of it, mene sard scritto, Sec. 

1 shall iusert here another indicative, to clear up the 
difficulty of mi si, ti si, gli, si, &*c. they me, they thee, 
they him; and I will say thus, 

Indicative present. 

They ask me, or I am asked, an Italian and French 
grammar printed at Basil. 

Mi si domdnda, or dU 
mdnda, or mi viene doman- 
ddta una grammdtica Itali- 
dna e Franzese, stampdta a, 
or in Basilea, 
K 5 They 



222 Of the SYNTAX of the 

C Ti si domdnda, jkc. or ti 
They ask thee, Sfe. < viene domanddto, or doman- 

( d&ta. 

C Gli si domdnda, &c. or 
They ask him, fyc. < gli viene domanddto, or 

I domanddta, &c. 

C Ci si domdnda, &c or 
They ask us, fyc» < ci vitne domanddto, or do- 

I manddta, &e. 

e Vi si domdnda, &c, or 
They ask you, %c. < vi viene domanddto, or da- 

, f C manddta, &c. 

r Si domdnda loro, &c. or 
They ask them, fyc. 3 viene domanddto, or domam- 

( data loro, Sec. 

Imperfect, 

C Mi si domanddva, or mi 
They did ask me, fyc~ Ivmiva domanddto, or do~ 

[manddta, 

Preter -definite. 

e Mi si domandb, or mi 
They asked me, $c. \venne domanddto, or do- 

I manddta. 

PreUr-perfect. 

xj, , [stdto domanddto* 

._, , , v ^ e \stdta domanddta. 

They havered me, > t domanddto, or 

lMtse ^ domanddt ^ 
Pluperfect* 

M } ' $ s tdto domanddto ?. 

gl. ' V •*,.,, ,' , S er l stata domanddta. 

They had asked we, j \ donmndato, ov 

Future. 

( Mi si domanderd, or mi 
They will ask me r 5 verrd domanddto, or do- 

l -manddta. 

\* Observe, that in using the verb venire, instead of 
tssere, you do not express the particle si* 

THE 



ADVERBS &sv PREPOSITIONS. 223 

THE prepositions govern some cases, as maybe seen 
in the seventh chapter of the first part, where we treated 
of prepositions. 

The Italians frequently use the particle pur only as art 
ornament of speech; as, dite pur quel die vipiacerd, say 
what you please. 

It is customary for them to use pur when the English 
repeat the verb in the imperative mood ; as, go, go, 
anddte pur ; give, give, date jn'ire. 

Not is always rendered by non : example, non dite m'* 
cnte, do not say aviy thing. 

In, before a noun, is expressed by in ; example, if* 
Francia, in France. 

Some or any, before a verb, is expressed by ne ; as, will 
you have some or any] ne volet e? 

In, with the article the, singular and plural, as also 
before pronouns possessive, is expressed by nel f nello, ntlld, 
nei, &c. as I have already remarked, p. 42: example, in 
his book, nel suo libra. 

However, in is generally expressed by in ; as, in Paris, 
m Parigi ; in me, in me. 

*,* Observe, that as often as in comes before numeral 
nouns, to mark the time, it must be expressed by trh or 
fret ; example; in two hours, fra due ore; in three months, 
fra tre mesi. 

* # * But if in precedes numeral nouns, without 
marking the time, it must be expressed by in : example, 
in three bottles, in tre ji&schi ; in a garden, in un gi~ 
ardino. 

Very is expressed by mblto, &c. : example; he is 
very merry, 6 mblto allegro ; it is very hot, fd mblto 
caldo. 

#* A great deal of, or muck, is rendered by gran* 
or grande : example ; there is a great deal of folly, v* e 
grhri pazzia; he has a great deal of vivacity, ha grande 
spn-ito. 

Kf* More, ox more of, is expressed by maggibte, whenever 

you can turn, more, by greater or more great : example; 

we must have more courage, bisbgna avert muggibr 

corrdggio ; it may be turned thus, vk must have greater 

K 6 towage: 



224 REMARKS Otf SOME 

courage : with more boldness, con maggibr' ardire; it may 
be turned, with greater boldness. 

* # * When more denotes a greater number or quantity, 
it is expressed in Italian by maggibr numero di, or maggibr 
quantitd di; as, we must have more soldiers, more men, 
more wine ; bisogna avere maggibr numero, or maggibr 
quantitd di solddti, d'uomini, di vino. 

* # * When more than happens to precede a word of 
time, you may put piu at the end or at the beginning 
©f the phrase : example, it is more than ten yeais, sono 
died dnni e piu ; it is more than an hour, e un' bra e piii ; 
you may likewise say, sbno piu di died dnni, e piu d! un* 
ora. 

*** The conjunctive so, before adjectives and adverbs, 
is rendered in Italian by cos), or si, with a grave accent : 
example, so great, cosl grdnde ; cosi tdrdi : or si grdnde, 
si tdrdi; sifdtto, masc. stfdtta, fern, signifies s nch ; they 
likewise use cost ; as. come, siccome. 



FOURTH TREATISE. 

Remarks on some Verbs mid Prepositions that have 
d iff ere n t Sig n ifica t io n s . 

T^HE following phrases contain great part of the Italian 
idioms, which constitute the chief elegance and beauty 
of that language. 

Different significations of and are. 

We may use the verb anddrt, through all its tenses, 
to express all the actions of the verbs of motion, by putting 
the same verbs of motion in the gerund, and the verb anddre 
in the tense and person that the verb of motion ought to 
be in ; as, 

He runs ; instead of corre, va correndo. 
. TUey take a walk, spasseggiano, or vdnno spasseggidndo. 

He 



VERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 225 

He will tell every where, andrd dicendo da per tut to* 
They must run, bisogna che vddano correndo. 

Make use of the verb and&re through all the tenses 
for the following phrases. 

[person 
Andar dietro, signifies to follow, to press, or to solicit a 
Andar' in amove, to fall in love 

Andar' male, to perish 

Andar ma, to go away 

Andar' in estasi, to be in an ecstasy 

Andar' a donne, to visit the ladies 

Andar' in collera, to put one's self in a passion 

Andar cercdndo rbgna, to seek misfortune or trouble 
Andar cercdndo ilpclonelVnovo^ to censure without reason 
Andar' a gdlla, to float, to swim on the water 

Andar in buon'ora, to go in peace 

Andar in mal'ora, to perish, to be ruined 

Andar par le teste, to be beaten 

Andar avhiti, to go before 

Andar alia lunga, to be tedious 

Andar' allt carte, to make haste 

Andar' inndnzi, to advance, improve, or go farther 

Andar' attorno, to go about 

Andar alttro, to be proud or stately 

Andar di tro, ad una cosa, to stand trifling with anything 
Andar col ptggio, to be worse 

Andar' in semenzia, to run to seed 

Andar per la mente, to come into one's mind 

Andar dimal in peggio, to fall out of the frying pan into 
Andar per viole, to speak impertinently, [the lire 

A lungo an dare, at long run 

Ci vd della vita, our life is at stake 

Andar mal in drnese, to be ill dressed, [estate 

Andar' a gdmbe levdte, to lose, to squander away one's 
Andar' a cavdllo, to ride on horseback 

Andar a dileito, to go to be merry 

Andar d dipbrto, to go a sporting 

Andar a soUzzo, to go a solacing one's self 

Andar a spdsso, to go a walking 

Andar* 



226 



REMARKS on some 



Andar' a girone, 

Andar' a file, 

Andar' a Voste, 

Andar* aldto, 

Andar' a V area, 

Andar 1 al bdsco, 

Andar* alia bttsca, 

Andar*' alia mdzza, 

Andar* all* oscuro, 

Andar* alia straglidta, 

Andar' a monte, 

Andar* a montagna, 

Andar' a onde, 

Andar' a pSlo, 

Andar' a riiba, 

Andar* a ruoto, 

Andar' a sdeco, 

Andar' a scidno, 

Andar* a seconda, 

Andar' a sccsse, 

Andar' a sinistra, 

Andar* a soldo, 

Andar" a sparvirre, 

Andar' a vdgna, 

Andar' a vela, 

Andar' a verso, 

Andar a vol lo lone, 

Andar a zonzo, 

Andar' a bdndo, 

Andar barcolcne, 

Andar carpone, 

Andar col cahdre di piombo, 

Andar con le Mile, 



to ramble about 

to march in order 

to be a soldier 

to loiter up and down 

to put in pawn 

to drink diet-drink 

to go a plundering 

to go to the slaughter 

to walk in ignorance 

to go reeling 

to prove vain 

to go out of the world 

to go waving 

to succeed in one's wishes 

to go a stealing 

to go a wheeling, or to hover 

to be plundered 

to go a sideling 

to go down the tide 

to go a reeling 

to miscarry by the way 

to go for a soldier 

to go a fowling 

to thrive well 

to sail 

to succeed well 

to go rowling 

to lie hulling, as a ship does 

to be published by proclamation 

to go staggering 

to go crawling 

to go needfully 

to go handsomely to work 



Andar come la bisciaall incdntc t \o go as a bear to the stake 



Andar con la piena, 
Andar di pdla infdsca, 
Andar di potdnte, 
Andar di bubne gdmbe, 
Andar dieCndo, 
Andar fallito ilpcndero, 
Andar gattaldne, 



to be on the strongest side 

to leap from bough to bough 

to go an ambling pace 

to set willingly about a thing 

to publish or report 

to fail in one's purpose 

to go groping 

Andar 



VERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 



22f 



He, > 



Andar grosso, 
Andar' in barberia, 
Andar' in bestia, 
Andar in biisca, 
Andar 1 in cerca, 
Andar* in cimbtlis, 
Andar' in cornavdglia, 
Andar in corso, 
Andar' infdscio, 
Andar in cosa materidle, 
Andar in negozio, 
Andar in polpegbne, 
Andar' in piccardia, 
Andar 7 in rolta, 
Andar in smcopi, 
Andar* stidzzo, 
Andar' in succhio, 
Andar' in traccia, 
Andar' in volt a, 
Andar la ronda, 
Andar' per il mondo, 
Andar per la pesta, 
Andar per la piuna, 
Andar perfilo, 
Andar piaggia a piaggia 



to look big 

to be in the powdering-tub 

to fall into a passion 

to go a sharking 

to search up and down 

to be transported with joy 

to be a cuckold 

to go a pirating 

to go to work 



to go groping up and down 

to go and be hanged 

to be routed 

to fall into a swoon 

to go sharking up and down 

to have one's mouth water 

to go a tracing 

to go ranging about 

to walk the rounds 

to travel up and down the world 

to follow the vulgar fashion 

to go the plain Dunstable way 

to be forced to do a thing 

to sail close to the shore 



Andar ramingo, 

Andar ratio, 

Andar rattemdOy 

Andar spdnto, 

Andar sopra le parole, 

Andar strttto, 

Andar capindndo, 

Andar tentone t 

Andar vuote, 

Anddrsene preso alle grida, 



to be poorly, begging up and down 

to sneak up and 'down 

to go warily to work 

to be extravagantly dressed 

to believe fair words 

to go about a thing sparingly 

to go a begging 

to grope about 

to miss one's aim 

to believe every idle report 



Different significations of dare. 
DARE signifies, to give, to fight, to strike 

Dar d'occhio, to cast one's eyes or* 

Dap' 



228 



REMARKS on some 



Dar* adbsso ad lino, 
Dar' a gdmle, 
Dar nel la rete, 
Dar le carte, 
Dar dnimo, 



Dar si 7 cuore, or I dnimo, 

Darfede, 

Dar' ad intend 'ere, 

Dar del tu, 

Dar* in nulla, 

Darsi V dcqua a pitdi, 

Dar' in luce, 

Ddrsi a fare, 

Dar nel rosso, 

Ddrsi pensitro, 

Dar del signore, 

Dar del surf ante, 

Dar parbla, 

Dar iu Iddri, 

Dar la uurla ad uno, 

Dar leva, 

Dar' in prestito, 

Dur fubci, 

Dar sicurta, 



to throw one's self upon a person 

to run away 

to fall into the snare 

to deal or give the cards 

to give courage, or encourage 



to have courage 
to believe 
to make one believe 
to thee and thou one 
not to succeed 
to praise one's self 
to publish 
to set about a thing 
to be a little on the red 
to take care for 
to call one a gentleman 
to call one a rogue 
to promise 
to fall into the hands of thieves * 
to laugh at a person - 
to provoke 
to lend • 
to bum, to set on fire 
to hail - 

Dar' in stravagdnze, to say things contrary to common sense 
Dar' nel mdtto, to play the mad-man 

Dar la quadra, to criticise 

Dar la cdccia, to put to flight 

Dar principio, or fine, to begin or eud 

Dar conto, to give an account 

Darsi alio studio, to apply one's self to study, [shadow 
Dar cdlci al v&nto, e pugni all aria, to fight with one's 
Dar di bbcca da per tidto, to concern one's self with every 

[man's business 
Dar da ridere, da parldre, to make one laugh, to make one 

[speak 
Ddrsi la zdppa siil piede e la mdzza in cdpo, to wrong 

[one's self 
Ddrsi bel Umpo, to divert one's self 

Dar' a beccdre, to cram poultry 

Dar 1 a credtnza, to sell upon credit, 

Dar 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



229 



Dar addietro, 

Dar ddito, 

Dar' dlla mano, 

Dar all* drrne, 

Dar a pigibne, 

Dar a rwbu, 

Dar assunto, 

Dar a tdglio, 

Dar a t raver so, 

Dar a vedtre, 

Dar baggidne, or gonfidre 

Dar balddnza, 

Dar bdndo, 

Dar beccdre alia putta, 

Dar briga, 

Dar cagione, 

Dar cdmpo, 

Dar cdpo, to 

Dar capo mano, to 

Dar carbte, 

Dar che pensdre, 

Dar caphnento, 

Dar credenza, 

Dar crollo, 

Dar cucche, 

Dar da btre, 

Dar da dormlre, 

Dar da mangidre, 

Dar da ride.re, 

Dar de edict, 

Dar de edict al rovdio, 

Dar degV ingoffi, 

Dar delle bastondte, 

Dar delle bbtte, 

Dar delle calcdgna, 

Dar delle coltella, 

Dar delle mdni, 

Dar delle muccie, 

Dar delle pugrta, 

Dar dentro, 

Dar di brbeca, 



to give back 

to give access to 

to bribe 

to cry out for help 

to let out for rent 

to give to be plundered 

to give charge of 

to strike with the edge 

to hit across 

to give one to understand 

alciino,to \>i\ff one up with vain 

to embolden, [hopes 

to banish by proclamation 

to sink money at play 

to trouble one 

to give cause 

to give liberty 

come to the end of the matter 

go beyond reason in a business 

to make one believe any thing 

to give cause of suspicion 

to finish 

to give credit to 

to shake 

to give one toys 

to give drink 

to give one a night's lodging 

to give one some food 

to give cause of laughter 

to kick 

to be hanged 

to give a good box on the ear 

to beat with a cudgel 

to beat with stripes 

to kick 

to wound with any weapon 

to strike with one's hands 

to slap one with a fox's tail 

to cuff' 

to fall to 

to hit the nail on the head 

Dar 






130 



REMARKS on some 






Dar di cbzzo, 

Dar di grappo, 

Dar di mfino, 

Dar di mira, 

Dar di nam, 

Dar daparlar di se, 

Dar di ptnna, 

Dar di petto, 

Dar di pidtto, 

Dar di pit" Ho, 

Dar di punt a, 

Dar di stoceala, 

Dar fast idio, 

Dar Jinocchio, 

Darfbndo, 

Dar fondo alia robba, 

Dar jmma, 

Dar grbtta caper, 

D#r il battesimo, 

Dar il bubn anno, 

Dar* un bubn gibrno, 

Dar' il bubn vidggio, 

Dar' il bubn arrivo, 

Dar' il c/me, 

Dar' il cbmpito, 

Dar 1 ileudre ad una cbsa, 

Dar' il dbsso, 

Dar' il gumbo, 

Dar il grdnde addiO, 

Dar' il motto, 

Dar' Up sso, 

Dar' il suo maggivre, 

Dar' il viso, 

Dar' imprestdnza, 

Dar indiigio, 

Dar' in sbrbo, 

Dar- in sbmma, 

Dar' in sit la voce, 

Dar' in terra, 

Dar' in vno, 

Dar' la bate, dar la bbrta r 



to butt as sheep do 
to snatch at 
to lay hold on 
take aim at 
to smell out a matter 
to give occasion to be talked of 
to cancel a writing 
to hit breast to breast 
to strike flat in 
to catch hold suddenly of 
to hit with a thrust 
to give a thrust 
to molest 
to give fair words 
to sink. 
to waste one's estate 
to shapen 
to put one into a quandary 
to baptise 
to wish a merry new-year 
to bid one good-morrow 
to wish one a good journey 
to bid one welcome 
to watch one;: 
to give an end to 
to apply one's self to a thing 
to turn one's back 
to give court holy water 
to bid the world adieu 
to pass one's word 
to give free passage 
to do one's utmost endeavours 
to turn one's eyes on any thing 
to lead to 
to put off time 
to give in keeping 
to put out by the great 
to bid one speak lower 
to run aground 
to meetwitji one by chance 
to mock at. 
Dar 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



231 



Dar la ben venuta, 


to bid one welcome 


Dar buona mdno, 


to wish one good luck 


Dar la cassia, 


to discard one 


Dar la corda, 


to give the strapado, to importune 


Dar la Java, 


to give one's consent 


Dar lafreccia, 


to wound with an arrow 


Dar la mala pdsqua, 


to vex one sadly 


Dar V allbdola, " 


1 


Dar cacabdldole, \ 


to coax, to flatter, to give fair 


Dar la quadra, | 


words. 


Dar la soia, 


) 


Dar la mala ventura, 


to wish a man ill luck 


Dar la ma no, 


to give a helping hand 


Dai^ la mddre d'orldndo, to put a jeer on one 


Dar I'anello, 


to marry 


Dar la pdlma, 


to yield the victory 


Dar la parlglia, 


to give as good as he brings 


Dar la pinta, 


to shove one 


Dar la pSsta, 


to appoint the time or place 


Dar la sdlda, 


to stiffen, or starch 


Dar la stretta a qualcu.no, to overreach one 


Dar la trdtta^ 


to give leave to export goods 


Dar la vdce, 


to raise a report 


Dar la vblta, 


to turn as milk does, to overturn 


Dar la volta al cdnto, 


to lose one's wits 


I^ar le calcdgna, 


to run away 


Dar le masse, 


to give a racer the start 


Dar h spdlle, 


to take to one's heels 


Dar leprCse, 


to let one take his choice 


Dar lingua, 


to let one understand afar off 


Dar lo stormo, 


to give the spoil 


Dar ultimo crblle, 


to fall down dead 


Dar martiUo, 


to make one jealous or suspicious 


Dar menda, 


to find fault 


Dar modo, 


to help or support one 


Dar nel berz6gli&, 
Dar nelT idrbpico, 


to hit the mark 


to fall into a dropsy 


Dar nelle mdni y 


to fall into one's hands 


Dar nelle scattdte, 


to fall into bad company 


Dar nel vino, 


to find out the design of a thing 


Dar noia, 


to molest one 




D&r 



232 



REMARKS on some 



Dar nome, 

Dar norma, 

Dar' oglia, 

Dar ombra, 

Dar opera, 

Dar panzdna, 

Dar pur te, 

Dar passdto, 

Dar pdsto, 

Dar per Dio, 

Dar riedpito, 

Dar sesto, 

Dar spdlle, 

Dar sicnto, 

Dar' una bottisdfiola, 

Dar una bornibla, to 

Dar nel cappelldccio, 

Dar un carpino, 

Dar vkta, 

Dar vita, . 

Dar' unafinta, 

Dar' unagira volia, 

Dar' uri occkidta, 

Dar' un grijbne, 

Dar' un pax tecum, 

Dar la pe chiassi, 

Dar la v'mta, 

Darn, 

Ddrsi a che si sia, 

Ddrsi a credere, 

Dar si a dileiti, to 

Darsi ad iniendere, 

Dar si ad una, 

Ddrsi attorno, 

Dor si byiga, ?wia,fastidio, 

Ddrsi in pre da, 

Ddrsi in imo, 

Dd'ni maraviglia, 

Ddrsi mariello, 

Ddrsi pace, 

Ddrsi vdnto, 



to spread a report 

to prescribe a rule 

to sooth one 

to give suspicion 

to endeavour at a thing 

to feed one with vain hopes 

to impart or share 

to omit 

to feed one 

to give for God's sake 

to deliver safely 

to give order 

to abet 

to give cause of sorrow 

to put one into a quandary 

give false judgment at gaming 

to reprimand one severely 

to bear one soundly . 

to seem to do a thing 

to give time or life 

to make a feint 

to walk a turn.. 

to cast an eve on 

to strike one in the mouth 

to stun one with a blow 

to get out of the road 

to yield the victory 

to apply one's self to 

to be for any thing 

for man to persuade himself 

give one's self over to pleasure 

to flatter one's self 

to give one's self up to one 

to go the round 

to trouble one's self 

to }ield one's self as a prey 

to refer one's self to one 

to wonder at 

to vex one's self 

to live quietly 

to brag of one's self . 

Different 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



23: 



Different significations of fare. 



FAR unimo, 

Far si animo, 

Far' a proposito, 

Far motto, 

Far del bravo, 

Far scelta, 

Far pbmpa, 

Far il grvgno, 

Far dandri, 

Far gtnte, or solddti, 

II far delta lima, 

Al Far del giorno, 

Su'l Far delta n6tte 9 

Far di mestieri, 

Far guaddgni, 

Far due volte I'dnno, 

Farsi inndnzi, 

Farsi in quit, 

Fdrsi in lit, 

Farsi in dietro, 

Far brindisi, 

Far capolino, 
Far la spia, 
Far pace, 
Fate pace, 
Far a bottino, 
Far a capegli, 
Far accoglitnza, 
Far' a cempasso, 
Fur' a concorrenza, 
Far acquisto, 
Far' a creder, 
Far' a gar a, 
Far aguafi, 
Far' a gutckia, 
Far' a pugni, 
Far' aiiito, 
Far' al bdcchio, 
Far all' amore, 



to give courage 
to take courage 
to be proper, or fit 
to make a sign 
to set up for a bully 
to chuse 
to boast 
• to pour at one 
to heap up money 
to raise soldiers 
the new moon 
at the break of day 
towards the evening 
to be necessary 
to win 
to bear fruit twice a year 
to come forward 
to approach, or advance 
to go back 
to retire 
to toast a health 
to deceive or ensnare 
to be a spy 
to agree 
agree among yourselves 
to share alike 
to pull one another by the hair 
to shew kindness to one 
to work by the compass 
to strive, to vie 
to gain 
to make one believe 
to strive for the victory 
to lay ambushes 
to knit 
to play at fisty cuffs 
to help one 
to do, go, or speak Jo no purpose 
to make love 
Far' 



23* 



REMARKS on some 






to toss one about 
to fight with weapons 
to play at hanOy cuff* 
to halt 
to play least in sight 
to come to blows 
to do against one's will 
to do by halves 
to mince 
to do a thing exactly 
to make preparation 
to struggle or scramble 
to roast meat 
to make one know 
to throw or fight with stones 
to make one be silent 
to thrive 
to play at bo-peep 
to proclaim 
to flout at 
to sooth or fawn upon 
to be needful 
to make a hurly-burly 
to come to a good effect 
to keep fair with one's neighbour 
to be merry and jovial 
to make a good offer 
to make one yield 
to beat a man with his own weapons 
to grow to a head, as a sore does 
to have recourse to one for help 
to meet in some appointed place 
to pump a man of his secrets 
to make account of, or esteem 
to make mouths at 
to seek after 
to make a ring 
to call his wits together 
Far che. che si sia alia mdechia, to do things in hugger- 
Far cipiglio, to look frowingly. [mugger 

Far colazione, to breakfast 

Far 



Far\ alia pdlla (lit no, 

Far' alle coltellate, 

Far' alle pugna, 

Far' alto, 

Far' a chtti, 

Far' a mano> 

Far' a malcuore, 

Far' a m&ta, 

Far" a miccino, 

Far' a pennillo, 

Far' appresto, 

Far' a regatta, 

Far' a rosto, 

Far' a sapere, 

Far* a sedssi, 

Far' a tacit. 

Far' avdnzo, 

Far' bdeo bdeo, 

Far bdndo, 

Far beffe, 

Far bell'mo bellino, 

Far bisbgno. 

Jtar broglio, 

Far bubna riuscita, 

Far bubna vicindnza, 

Far bubnfidnco, 

Far bubn partito, 

Far cant are, 

Far capelldccio, 

Far capo, 

Far capo ad uno, 

Far ctipo in un luogo, 

Far caselle, ' 

Far edso, 

Far ctsso, 

Far circa, 

Far cCrchio, 

Far ceruello, 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



235 



Far cblta, 
Far camparita, 
Far cbmpra, 
Far come lo sparvivre, 
Far congiura, 
Far conserva, 
Far cbnto, 
Far cbpia, 
Far cordbglio, 
Far corttggio, 
Far cose difubco, 
Far cubre, 
Far da etna, 
Far del grdnde, 
Far del vezzoso, 
Far de cappello, 
Non Far di mCno, 
Far di vieto, 
Far d'bcchio, 



to make a collection 

to make appearance 

to buy a bargain 

to live from hand to mouth 

to conspire 

to lay up in store 

to reckon 

to make a copy 

to lament 

to fawn upon one 

to do wonderful things 

to encourage 

to get supper ready 

to take state upon one 

to play the wanton 

to pull off one's hat 

not to chnse but 

to prohibit 

to wink upon one. [world says 



Far dbsso di buffone, to do a thing, and not care what the 
Far d' una lancia unfdso, to bring a noble to nine-pence 
Far dubi chibdi inuna cdlda, to kill two birds with one stone 
Far entrdre uno in vatigia, to provoke one to anger 



Far fdccia, 

Far fagotto, 

Farfigliubli, 

Far filar e uno, 

Far forte, 

Far fret t a, 

Far front e, 

Far fubco nelV bricio. 

Far gdbbo, 

Far gala, 

Far galloria, 

Far gtnte, 

Far gorndia, 

Far grdzia, 

Far greppo, 

Far grida, 

Far gruzzblo, 

Far osUrta, 



to set a good face on things 
to pack up one's awls, and to begone 
to beget and bear children 
to make one do any thing 
to strengthen 
to make haste 
to face 
to do one's business secretly 
to flout at 
to be gay and j^erry 
to show signs of joy- 
to raise men 
to fight a battle 
to do a favour 
to make up a mouth 
to cry out 
to hoard up money 
to keep an inn 
Far 



23b 



REMARKS on some 



Far' i fatti sued, 

Far'- il balbrdo, 

Far' il btllo in piazza, to 

Far UJbubn pro, 

Far' il compito, 

Far 7 il didvolo, 

Far'ilforno, 

Far' iifigadttto, 

Far il gattbne, to 

Far' il giorgio, 

Far' il Latmo a cavdllo, 

Far' il rbmbo, 

Far' il rosso, 

Far* il sdnto, 

Far f il verno, 

Far il seme, 

Far instanza, 

Far in piedi, 

Far la biisca, 

Far lajtsta ad iim, 

Far lajischidta, 

Far la gdtta morta, 

Far la rimfa, 

Far la mbtte, 

Far la rbnda, 

Far la rubta del pavbne, 

Far la scdrpa, 

Far la scoperta, 

Far la scbrta, 

F^tr-rtt-bhza, 

Far le carte, 

Fa?' le parole, 

Far la Itprcv&vhia, 

Far le spdlle gobbe, 

Far la sica, 

Far le spese, 

Far le siimate, 

Far levdta, 

Far le volte del libne, 

Far lo spasimato, 

Far lo spaventaahio, 



to follow one's own afiairs 
to play the ninny [streets 
shew one's fine cloaths in the 
to do one good when one eats 
to end one's task 
to play the devil 
to play the baker 
to speak in the canting language 
make as if one saw or knew not 
to strut in fine clothes 
to be put hard to it 
to make a rumbling noise 
to play the minion 
to play the hypocrite 
to pass away the winter 
to come to perfection 
to be urgent with one 
to jumble standing 
to scramble for 
to endeavour to kill one 
to make a whistling noise 
to play at bo-peep 
to mince it 
to pass the night 
to walk the round 
to play the peacock 
to cut a purse 
to keep a watch 
to be a guide 
to cuckold one 
to deal at cards 
to speak at large 
to avoid a danger that's seen 
to shrug up one's shoulders 
to flirt at one 
to bear one's charges 
to esteem one greatly 
to raise nlen 
to be still walking in one place 
to over-play the lover 
to brag much 
Far 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



237 



Far luogo, or piazza, 
Far mala riuscitd, 
Far mala vicindnza, 
Far maV d* occhio, 
Far mat pro, 
Far mdsckera, 
Far mercdto, 
Far mtrct, 
Far merenda, 
Far mind, 
Far motto, 
Far motto ad uno, 
Far natdle, 
Far' occhio, 
Far ogni possibile, 
Far' opera 



' to give place 
to have ill luck 
to deal unhandsomely with one's 
to have sore eyes, [neighbours 
to do one no good 
to go a mumming 
to cheapen 
to do and shew mercy 
to eat one's nuncheon 
to seem to do a thing 
to give notice of 
to salute or send word 
to keep Christmas 
to wink at 
to do one's utmost 
to do the same 



Far orechio di mercdnte, to hear, and not to seem to hear 



Far paragone, 
Far partita, 
For passdggio, 
Far passdta, 
Far pdsto, 
Far pdtto, 
Far pecudio, 
Far peduccio, 
Far pensiere, 
Far ponta, 
Far ponta falsa, 
Far popolo, 
Far prezzo, 
Far prtstito, 
Far pro, 
Far questione, 
Far rahuffo, 
Far ragione, 
Far r&ffa, 
Far ricredente, 
Far richidmo. 
Far robba, 
Far ruota, 
,Far Jaccdia, 



to compare together 

to make a match or bargain 

to pass over slightly 

to get easily through a business 

to eat a meal's meat 

to make a bargain 

to live by one's wits 

to sooth one 

to intend 

to make an end 

to make a false thrust 

to make one among the rest 

to make esteem of 

to4end 

to do good 

to question 

to chide 

to do right or pledge one 

to make resistance 

to make one change his opinion 

to appeal unto 

to heap up riches 

to wheel or hover about 

to fret inwardly 

L Far 



238 



REMARKS on so Ms. 



Far sdcco, 

Far saccomdno, 

Far salvo, 

Far sdngue, 

Far sapire, 

Far scdla, 

Far scommtssa, 

Far sconto, 

Far sembidnte,ov vista, 

Far s/oggi, 

Far sicurta, 

Far spdl/a, 

Far stare, 

Far stare forte, 

Far stare a segno, 

Far stare afiecchetta, 

Far tantdra, 

Far tavoldcch, 

For tempbne, 

Far testa, 

For trebbio, 

Far' il tribolo, 



to hoard up 

to sack or lavage 

to give a volley of shot 

to let blood 

to let one know 

to come to a landing-place 

to lay a wager 

to make an abatement 

to make a show of 

to brave it or be lavish 

to be bound 

to back one 

to over-reach one 

to over-reach one cunningly 

to keep one under 

to force one to his obedience 

to be gay and merry together 

to prepare for good cheer 

to live a merry life 



to make head 
to live merrily in good company 
to weep for money 
Far tidte V uova in tin paniere, to venture all in one bottom 
Far vedere laciuola ad uno, to make the fire fly out of one's 
Far vaUre, to cause to prevail, [eyes 

Far veduta, vista, finta, to make a show 

Far veduta, to make one believe what is not 



Far vtle, 

Far veto, 

Far vezzi, 

Far una brav&ta, 

Far' un cav&letto ad uno, 

Far' una drincdta, 

Far una giostra ad una, 

Far' una prtdica ad iino, 

Far' una taglidta. 



to saii 

to make resistance 

to play Ihe wanton 

to make a bravado 

to cheat one roguishly 

to make a merry drinking 

to put a jest upon one 

to admonish one fairly 

to keep a swaggering 



Far una farfallona, to commit some notorious fault 
Far 7 unfr&gio ad uno, to mark one in the face 

Far un manichetto, to point at one in scorn 

Far' un marone, to commit a great error 

Far un pamrbtto 9 to do a thing hand over head 

Far* 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS, 4 3* 

■'Far un penzolo, to be hanged by the neck 

Far imo smdcco ad una, to affront one 

Far uno sidglio, to fix 

Far' un tiro, to shoot or play a prank 

Far' vuoidre Is sella, to supplant a man 

Far' ntva, to lay egg* 



Different significations of stare. 

WE use this verb stare to mark an action of repose, hy 
putting the verb that follows in the gerund, or infinitive, 
with a, or ad. 

Sto) studidndo, or sta a studidre, he studies 

Stdnno scrivendo, or stdnno a scrivere, they write 

Stare ie leggendo,ox a leggere insieme,yo\x shall read together 

St are has several other significations ; as 
Star' in piedi, to stand upright 

Star ben o male, to be well or ill 



btar su y to rise ; state su y 


rise 


Star giu, t 


to sit down 


State giu, 


sit down 


Star a sentire, to listen ; sto 


a sentire, I listen 


Star a sedere, 


to be sitting 


State a sedcre, 


sit down 


Std bene, 


it is well, it is very well 


Star per uscire, 


to be just going out 


Star ben a cav&lh, 


to sit well on horseback 


Star in earn, 


to stay at home 


Star lesto, 


to be upon one's guard 


Star sit le burle, 


to jest, or banter 


Star soldo, 


to hold out stoutly, or fast 


Star per cadere, 


to be ready to fall 


Star per morire^ 


to be like to die 


Star' in dubhio, 


to be in doubt 


Star' a vedere, 


to expect the issue 



Star con le rnfati alia ciriiura, to stand idle, or with one's 

hands in one's pockots 
Star su la sua, to look grave 

L 2 - Q&fet* 



240 



REMARKS on some 



Questo vi sta bene, 
Questo non mi sta bene, 
Star 1 a bdda, 
Star' a becco, 
Star' a bottega, 
Star' a crepa cuore, 
Star ad alcuno, 
Star' in disdgio, s - 
Star a dormire* 
Star' a fare. 
Star' afronte, 
Star' a gala. 
Star' a giacere, 
Star' al detto, 
Star' alia posta, 
Star' all'erta, 
Itar' alle vedette, 
Btar' allegro, 
Siar' al mondo, 
£tar' a locdnda, 
Jltar' al paragone, 
Star' a martello, 
Star' a panciolle, 7 
Star' in badidle, 3 
Star' in pericolo, 
Star' a petto, 
Star a pigione, 
Star' a polio pesto, 
Star' appoggidto, 
Star' a schimbeci, 
Star' appresso, 
Stay' a stgno, 
Star' in sperdnza, 
Star' aspettando, 
Star a stento, 
Star attorno, 
Star tu per tu, 
Star' a uno, 
Star bene a cdsa, 
Star buona pezza, 
Star cdldo, 



that becomes you well 

that does not become me well 

to linger Or expect 

to out-face 

to mind one's shop 

to live at heart's ease 

to be at any man's turn 

to live in sorrow 

to lie sleeping 

to be doing 

to out -face 

to float 

to be lying along 

to rely on a man's word 

to watch for an opportunity 

to look heedfully about 

to stand centinel on a tower 

to live or be merry 

to live in the world 

to live in a hired room 

to bear the touchstone 

to live in anxiety 

to live in clover 

to be in danger 

to be opposite 

to live in a rented house 

to be at the point of death 

to lean upon 

to haunt bad places 

to stand or dwell near 

to stand near the mark 

to live in hopes 

to expect 

to live in sorrow 

to stand about 

to be hail fellow well met 

to depend upon one 

to be well to pass 

to stand a good while 

to lie warm 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



24i 



Star chdto, 
Star con dltri, 
Star delta detta, 
Star di bubna vbglia, 
Star di mala voglia, 
Star di sopra, 
Star di sot to, 
Star f Ms co, 
Star in aggudto, 
Star' in bildncia, 
Star innamordto, 
Star' inndnzi, 
Star' in drmi, 
Star' in bilico, 1 

Star' in bistdnte, J 
Star' in cervello, 
Star' in dozzina, 
Star in letto, 
Star' in mblto, 
Star' in orecchio, 
Star in pendente, 
Star' in pbsta, 
Star in rischio, 
Star' in se, 
Star' in sentbre, 
Star' in sospetto, 
Star' in su I pontiglio, 
Star' in villa, 
Star' in zucca, 
Star' in ziirlo, 
Star maggese, 
Star lontdno, 
Star per, 
Star sopra di se, 
Star punta per punta, 
Star sdno, 
Star su'l aviso, 
Star su'l diiro, 
Star su'l ritrbso, 
Star su'l tirdto, 
Star tra'l si e'l no, 



to be hushed 

to dwell with others 

to answer for a debtor 

to be merry 

to be sad 

to lie over 

to lie under 

to be in an ill taking 

to lie in wait 

to stand in doubt 

to be in love 

to stand before 

to be in arms 

to be in doubt 

to have a care, or be wary 

to board 

to be abed 

to lie asleep 

to hearken 

to be in suspence 

to wait narrowly 

to be in danger 

to be positive 

to listen with suspicion 

to be suspected 

to stand upon punctilios 

to live in the country 

to lie open to all weathers 

to stand in a maze 

to live idle 

to dwell afar off 

to stand for, to be about 

to presume too much on one's self 

to be always at variance 

to be in health 

to be prepared 

to be obstinate 

to be coy 

to stand upon strict points 

to be between yes and no 

l 3 Star 



242 



REMARKS on some 



Star vielno, 
Star vigilante, 
Star zitto x . 



to be neighbours 

to be watchful 

to be mum or hushed 



Different significations a/avcre. 
AVE R dell uo mo da bene, to have the qualities of aa 

honest man 



Aver del mirdcolo, 

Aver cdro, aver da cdro, 

Avtr a bene, 

Avtrper bene, 

Avfr per male, - 

Aver a male. 

Aver' a more, 

Aver' il capo altrove, 

Aver da fare, 

Aver' in pregio, in istima, 

Aver in 7 edio, 

Aver per cqsticme, 



to look on it as a miracle 

to be well pleased 

to approve of 

to like or consent to 

to disapprove of 

to dislike 

to have at heart 

to think of other things 

to be busy 

to esteem 

to hate 

to be wont 



A"cr signifies to believe; as, Vhc per igncrdnie, I believe 

him ignorant 



Aver ipvki'0 neUe 6t'sa, 

':•■' a c&pitukj 
Aver' a cur a, 
Aver a dare. 
Aver' a dispetto, 
Aver a dispiaccre. 
Aver-' a fasiidio, 
Aver agintt, 
Aver agio, . 
Ave?' 'A grddo, 
Aver' alle m&m> 
Aver a niahi^ 
A } :er a m'tnte, 
Avf.r dnhno, 
Ater' a niia, 
Aver* a petto, 
A.-er ardire, 
Aver schsrno, 
Aver a sch\fo f 



to be very vicious 

to esteem much 

to be careful of 

to give 

to have in despite 

to be displeased with 

to loath 

to be well in breath 

to be at ease 

to esteem 

to have in hand 

to have ready at hand 

to remember well 

to have courage or a mind to 

to loath 

to have at heart 

to dare 

to scorn 

to loath 

Aver' 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



243 



Avfr a tornare, to be about to return 

Aver' a mle, to hold very cheap 

Ater Id ttixpo, to live a merry hie 

Aver hwna voce, to be well spoken of 

Aver eke si siaper mi pezzo di pane, to have a thing dog- 
cheap 
Avtr chniere ad ogni rfnistto, 
Av£r del tond-j, 



Aver detiro, 

Avtr di the, 

Avtr dietro, 

Aver di gratia, 

Avh'faccia, 

Avtrjdccia di pallciola, 

Avtr fa tic a, 

Aver ~fi.de in, 

Aitrfreddo in pudi, 

Aver/rtga, 

Aver fr tit a, 

Averfimo, 

Avtr gola, 

Aver grand* opinwne, 

Aver Hfido rosso, 

Aver d' ubjjo, 

Aver il capo a grifli, 

Aver il cervello a oriuoli, 

Aver il cervello die toll, 

Aver' il cimurro, 

Aver Usuo piono, 

Aver' il toi^to, 

Aver' hi consegna, 

Aver' hi cbnto. 

Aver in guardia, 

Aver' in negligenza, 

Aver' in brdene, 

Aver' in su le d\ta, 



Aver la gambata, 
Avtr la scolaziene 



to be ready for any ;Y 

to have a Utile wit 

to have fit occasion 

to have wherewith 

to contemn 

to take it as a favour 

to blush for shame 

to have a brazen face 

to be in want 

to confide in 

to be in great want 

to lust after 

to be in baste 

to be proud 

to have a longing desire 

to presume much on cl;': 

to be wrapt in one's mother'?, 

to have need 

to have one's wits wool-gathering* 

to be fickle 

to have a roving Iwad 

to have a whimsy in one's ' ?<:i] 

to have one's full allowance 

to be in the wrong 

to have in trust 

to have esteem of 

to keep 

to be careless 

to have in readiness 

to have at one's fingers ends 



to wear ttie willow greeu 

to have the running of the reins 

Avtr la palla in mano, to have the law in one's own hand 

Aver Vasso nel ventriglio, to have an itch at gaming 

Aver lingua, to have notice of a thing 

l 4 Avtr 



244 REMARKS on some 

Aver V occhio al panello, to mind one's business 

Avtr Vbsso del poltrdne, to have a bone in one's leg 

Aver le campdne grosse, to be deaf 

Aver le budella in un paniere, to be in bodily fear 

Aver le raani ad uno, to hold one fast at his pleasure 

Aver le traveggole, to take one thing for another 

Aver luogo, to be expedient 

Aver r uovo mondo, to have any thing without pains 

Aver mala gdtta a peldre, to have an ill crow to pluck 
Aver mala voce, to be ill spoken of 

Aver male campdne, to be deaf 

Aver mangidte neci, to have spoken ill of the absent 

Aver martello, to be passionately jealous of 

Aver mfazo or mode, to be able, or have means 

Aver neW idea, to bear in mind 

Avtr obligo, to be obliged 

Aver' occhio, to have a fair outside 

Aver* occhio di ramdrro, to have a taking look 

Aver odor e, to have an inkling of a thing 

Aver bmbra, to be fearful of 

Aver paura, to be fearful 

AvSr pensiere, to be full of care, or thoughtful 

Avir per scusdto, to excuse one 

Aver pUde, to get footing 

Avtr poco sale in ziicca, to have but little wit 

Aver ragione da vendere, to have reason to spare 

Avir sde"gno, to disdain 

Aver sonno, to be sleepy, [crime 

Aver taccdto la coda di mal pelo, to be tainted with some 
Aver su la punt a della lingua, to have at one's tongue's 

[end 
Av6r titito I suo in su'l tavoliere, to have one's all at stake 



Different significations of essere. 
JEfSSER perfdre, to be just going to do 

E'sser da qudlche cbsa, , to be good for something 

E'sser da p6co f to have but little wit 

E'sser da niente, ; to be good for nothing 

E'sser a cavdllo, to be out of trouble or pain 

JVow esser da tdnto, not to be capable of, not to be able 

Esser 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



2U 



E'sser di giovdmento, 
Esser di bubna ndscita, 
Esser per la mala via, to 
Esser per Jafrdtte, to 
E'sser fuor di bologna, 
E'sser' a cavalliere, 
E'sser accivito, 
E'sser' a ferri, 
E'sser' a grddo, 
Esser' a coste, 
E'sser' o mal partito, 
E'sser anddzzo, 
E'sser' a parte, 
E'sser' a pbsta, 
E'sser in questibne, 
Esser ben vcdiito, 
E'sser d'aviso, 
E'sser bene in gdmbe, 
E'sser brillo, 
E'sser ddnno, 
E'sser di poca levdta, 
E'sser di testa, 
Esserforza, 
E'sser' in detta, 
E'sser' in asset to, 
E'sser in detto, 
E'sser' in disgrdzia, 
E'sser' in esser e, to be 

Esser' infaccenda, 
E'sser' injLori, 
Esser in for tuna, 
Esser' infrega, » 

Esser' in pagliuolo, 
Esser' in piega, 
Esser' in predicamento, 
Esser' in precento, 
Esser in succhio, 
Esser' in uggia, 
E'sser largo di bocca, 
E'sser' Inogo, 
Esser mala bretta, 



to help, to assist 
to come of a good family 
be ruined, to be in a bad con- 
be undone or ruined, [dition 
to be ignorant 
to have the upper hand 
to be well provided 
to lie close together 
to be acceptable 
to lie encamped 
to be in a bad taking 
to. have the plague reign 
to be partaker of 
to be prepared 
to squabble 
to be kindly entertained 
to deem 
to be strong and lusty 
to be foxed 
to be pitied 
to be of small worth 
to be hare brained 
to be constrained 
to have good luck at plav 
to be prepared 
to be' agreed 
to be in disgrace 
in state, quality, and condition 
to be busy 
to be in one's prime 
to be lucky 
to lust after 
to be in child -bed 
to be bending 
to be in consideration 
to be always ready 
to have one's mouth water 
to be troublesome to others 
to be a great talker 
to be convenient, 
to sow sedition among friends 
L <5 E'sser 



246 REMARKS on some 

Ksser mal veduto, to be unwelcome 

Efsser pdce, to be quits at play 

Esser tenuto, to be beholden to 

E'sser' una coppa d'orv, to be one of a thousand 



Different significations of sape>e. 
SAP 1 ERE, signifies to know or perceive 

Sayer a mente, to know by heart 

Saper' a mma dito, t© have at one's fingers' ends 

Super male, to displease, to smell ill 

Qufcto mi sa male, that displeases me 

Saper di buono, saper bu6?io, to smell well 

Saper di cattko, to smell ill 

Saper di muffb, or di mucido, to have a mouldy smell 
Saper di niente, to have no smell, to siilell of nothing 

Saper trovdr il pelo nelV novo, to be cunning, to be sharp 
Tiso dire, I can tell thee 

Saper di letter e, to have a smattering of learning 

Saper di muse kio, to taste or smeR musk 

Saper de secco, to smell of the cask 

Saper megllo, to take in belter pail 

Saper per lo stnno, to know by rots 



Different significations of tenere. 
TENERE da imo, to be of one's side 

Tener' a bdda, to amuse one 

Tener in contrario, to be of a contrary opinion 

Tenere per galdnf uomo, to believe one an honest man 
Lo terigd per mdtto, I ta'ke him to be mad 

Tenere le Idgrime, to forbear weeping 

Non ho potirto tener le risa, I could not forbear laughing 
Tenure le risa, to forbear laughing 

Tener alia irdecia, to pursue 

Tener cento a' ixno, to make an account of, to esteem a 
Tenerla per se, to keep a thing to one's self, [person 
Tenetelaper vci, , keep it for yourself 

Tener' a mente, to call to mind 

Tenere lafavella ad imo, to hinder one from speaking 
// tale si tiene una tale, such a one keeps such a one 

Tener 



1/EMS ani> PREPOSITIONS. 



Uf 



Tener* a battesiino, 
Tenth* mdno alfurto, 
Tentr carrbzza e servitbri, 
Tieni questo, 

Tenet e la candela, 

Tener' il sacco, 

Tenere la battdta, 

Tener e V invito, 

Tener' a dieta, 

Tener' a cimento, 

Tener a pivolo, 

Tener' a stent o, 

Tener a sua post a , 

Tenere curie bandit a y 

Tenere dozzina, 

Tener a bdda, 

Tenfrr* il bordone, 

Tenere fermo, 

lener m Dacca, 

Tenure la bestia in cavezza, 

Tenere le ocfie in pastura, 

Tenere le pesie, 

Teller e mdno, 

Tenere mente, 

Tenere meredto, 

Tenere ragione, 

Tenere parlamtnto, 

Tener' in sospeso, 

Tenere per fede, 

Tenere tratt (it o, 



to stand godfather 

to be accessary to a theft 

to keep a coach and servants 

take that (in the imperative) 

take the candle 

to hold the bag 

to beat time in music 

to accept of what is proposed 

to keep low in diet 

to hold to atrial 

to live at rack and manger 

to keep Jn pain 

to. keep one at his back 

to keep open house 

to keep a boarding house 

to hold in suspence 

to be still in one's mind 

to keep one's word 

to keep a secret 

to bridle one's appetites 

to keep wenches at rack and 

to hold stakes, [manger 

to lend a hand to 

to heed 

to bargain 

to judge according to law 

to hold a parley 

to hold in suspence 

to take upon trust 

to hold correspondence with 



Different 


sign 


ficat 


Ions of i 


volere. 


VOLE RE, 






signifies to believe ;. as r 


Voo-liono alefmi, 








some believe 


Volerla con iaio, 








to set upon one 


Vottr bene, 








, to love 


Voter male, 








to hate 


Voter pin tbsto. 








to have rather 


Qvalsivoglia, 




LG 




whatsoever 
Le 



249 



REMARKS on some 



Le cose vbgliono essere cost, 
Si vuble, 
VoUre dire, 
Voter emeglio, 
Voter eja bma 9 
Voter e la gdtta, 
Volere tndle di mdrtp, 
VoUssepur Dio, 



things must be so 

they will, or are willing 

to mean 

to have rather 

to affect mocking 

to pick a quarrel with one 

to hate deadly 

oh! would to God 



Different significations of venire. 



VENI'R meno, venir 
Venir' in succhio, 
Venir' in sbrte, 
Venire sbtto il nbme, 
Venire stimdto, 
Viene biasimdto, 
Venir' alle strette, 
Nbn mi men bene, 
Questo vi vien bene, 
Qudnti vene vengonol 
M.tne vengono due, 
Mi viene vbglia, 
Venir' adosso, 
Venir 7 al di sbpra, 
Venir al quia, 
Venir' alle prese, 
Venir' alle bruit e, 
Vtnir' a battdglia, 
Venir' a bene, 
Venir' a dire, 
Venir 7 alle 7udni, 
Venire detto, 
Venire posti gli bcchi, 
Ventre fallito, 
Venire scontrdto, 
Venir' in tdglio^ 
Venir' in cdldo, 
Vtnir trovdto, 



mdnco, to fall into weakness, or 

to have one's mouth water, [faint 

to fall to one's lot 

to go by the name of 

to be esteemed 

he is blamed 

to come to blows 

it does not please me 

that becomes you well 

how many must you have 1 

I must have two of them 

1 have a mind or desire 

to fall upon 

to have the upper hand 

to come to the reason of a thing 

to come to close fight 

to come to foul words 

to fight a battle 

to come to good 

to import or mean 

to come to blows 

to be said 

to fix one's eyes on 

to miss one's aim or purpose 

to meet withal 

to suit well 

to grow proud 

to happen to find 

Of 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 249 



Of the particles ci and vi. 

CI signifies us ; he speaks to us, d pdrla, &c. Vi sig- 
nifies you ; he speaks to you, vi pdrla ; he gives you, vi 
dd. 

Ci and vi are adverbs of place ; as, 

Ci sidmo, we are there, or at it. 

V andremo, we will go thither. 

Ci and vi are conjunctive pronouns, when they signify 
us and you; and when ci and vi signify there, at it, thi- 
ther, &c. they are adverbs of place. 



Different significations of che. 

CHE signifies that, who, whom, that he, that she, that 
they, which, what 1 

Che signifies what ? what man is that 1 che uomo e ? 

Che? what? fem. what house ? che cdsa? 

Che? what? plural mas. what books have they? che 
libri hdnno ? 

Che plural fem. what lessons ? che lezioni 1 

Che signifies because ; che la donna net desidr e ben di 
noi piii frdle, because a woman is much more weak in her 
desires than we are- Guarini nel Pastor fido. 

Che signifies so that, or in that manner. I will do it, 
so that, or in that manner, that you shall be contented, 
faro che sartte contento. 



Different significations of via. 

VI 'A signifies the way ; example, by the way of Paris, 
per la via di Parigi. 

Via is put after the verbs anddre,pas$foe, condurre,fug- 
gire, gittdre, or geltdre, and then these verbs have more 
force and elegance : as, anddr via, to go, to go away ; 
vd via, get thee away, pdssa via, furf ante, get thee gone, 
rascal ; condurre via ; to bring out : faggir via, to run 
away ; gittdte via qutsto, throw this away. 

Via 



250 REMARKS on sosri 

Via signifies much : as, much more learned, via mil 
dotto. r 

Via signifies away, away ; as, away, away, gentlemen, 
do not fear, via, via, signori, non temete. 
^ Via is sometimes taken for vblta ; example, tre via tre 
sbnonove, three times three are nine; qiiattro via qudttro 
sbno sedici, four times four make sixteen. 

Via signifies the means ; as, by the means of the pas- 
sages in the holy fathers, per via de' testi de' sanii pddri. 



Different significations of da. 

DA is oftentimes the ablative of the indefinite article,, 
and signifies in English from; example, ho rkevido da 
Pietro, I have received from Peter. 

Da* with an apostrophe is the ablative of the definitive 
article, and signifies from the, or by the : example, c di~ 
mdto da! Franctsi, he is esteemed by the French. 

Da signifies he gives ; example, mi da buona sperdnza, 
he gives me good hope, &c. 

Da signifies upon the faith „• example, da galdnf uomo, 
upon the faith of an honest man. 

Da signifies tike: example, hit irattdto da galdnf uomo, 
he has acted like an honest man. V. S. pdrla da amico, 
you speak like a friend. 

Da signifies of, or to put : example, una scdiola da ia- 
hdeco, a tobacco-box, or a box to put tobacco in. 

Dn signifies about : example, un! uomo attempdto da 
cinqudnta dnni, a man about fifty years old. 

Da signifies from ; example, from Rome to Paris, da* 
Roma fin' a Parigi. Da eke vi viddi, since I saw you. 

J)a before infinitives signifies io be: example, it u easy 
to be seen, e facile da vedtre* 



Different significations of pes. 
PER signifies for ; example, for me, per me. 
Per signifies through, or alt over ; example, through or 
all over the city, per tutta la cittd. 

Per signifies during ; as, during a year, per un dnno. 
Per signifies to fetch, and seek after : example, go 

fetch 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 251 

fetch some wine, middle per vino ; go seek for a physL 
cian, anddteper un medico. 

Per signifies what : example, what good soever it be y 
per bubno che sia. 

Per signifies each or every : example, one in each hand, 
una per mdno. 

Per signifies just or ready to: example, he is just go- 
ing away, he is ready to go, ■£ per part ire. 

Per signifies every one: example, every one, un peruno* 

Per signifies depending on: example, it does not de- 
pend on me, non resta per ine. It signifies, as far as : 
example, as far as I see, per quel che vedo. 

Per signifies asfor: example, as for me, toper me. 

Per dnche signifies not yet ; example, I have not seen 
him yet, non Vho per dnche veduta. 



Different significations of si, ne, and'yur or p&re, 

THOUGH the following particles s*V ne, pur or pure, 
are not prepositions, yet their vast extent and signification 
ill Italian has induced me to insert the different accepta- 
tions of them here, for the greater eas« and advantage of 
the learner. 

SI 

Signifies it is, they, men, the world, yet, so, so as r as- 
much, as well, until, nevertheless, himself &c. 

Example. 

Si dice, it is said, or reported. 

Si ama, or si dmano, they love. 

Si dira, the world or men will say. 

Si, signor, yes, sir. 

Cavalier e si aventurdto non fit mdi, never was there so 
fortunate a gentleman. 

St per il mio, qudnto per il vbstro inter esse, as well for 
my interest as yours. 

Si la mbglie come il marito, as well the wife as the hus- 
band. 

Non si ritenne di correre s?fu a edsa, he did not cease 



running till he got home. 



Si 



252 REMARKS on sq#e 

Si vi dmo, perche, nevertheless I love you, because. 
Egli si ricordb, he remembered himself or herself. 
%* Note, that when si is accented, it is always an 
adverb. 

NE . 
Signifies nor, neither, in the, with, hence, thence, away* 
at it, of it, us, from us, none, any, some, thereof, else, &c. 

Example, 

TVe questo, ne quello ti conctdo, I grant thee neither this, 
or that. 

Spasseggidndo ne cdmpi, walking in the fields. 

M' incontrdi ne miti amici, I met with my friends. 

Vdttene per fdtii tudi, get thee hence about thy busi- 
ness. 

Egli sene viene alia vblta nostra, he is coming towards 
us. 

Luine ha tolto il nostra ripcso,he lias taken our rest from 
us. 

lo mene vddo, lam going away. 

Sene ride, he laughs at it. 

Sene lament a, he complains of it. 

Egli ci diede il buvn di, he bade us good-morrow. 

Jo non ne ho, I have none. 

Se ne av.essi, if I had any. 

Venefarti parte, I would give you some. 

Voi ne poirtte disporre, you shall dispose thereof. 

* # * Note, that when ne is accented, it is always am 
adverb. 

Pur or pure 

Is a particle of great use and elegance in the Italian lan- 
guage, and signifies in English, yet, although, moreover, 
besides, notwithstanding all conditions, in the end, when 
all is said and done, so much as, not only, in case, surely, 
even, at least, needs, or of force : as it would be tedious to 
give examples of all the different significations of this 
extensive particle, I shall only mention the following 
phrases. 

Example, 

Pur adcsso, even now. 
Pur or a j now, now. 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 253 

Pur mo, at this instant. 

Pur'' allora, even then. 

Pur y assdi, too, too much. 

Pur parole ? what ! nought but words ? 

Pur pure, yet. for all that. 

*** Note, that the following particles, di, e, egli, ci, 
ben, ne, gid, pur, me, die, il, have often no signification 
at all, but are used as expletives by way of embellish- 
ing the discourse. See the eighth treatise, chapter 1. of 
expletives. 



FIFTH TREATISE. 

Of Composition, and Pules of Writing and Speaking Italian; 
contained inafew Themes. 

A FTER we have learned the auxiliary verbs, and the 
three conjugations, we may begin to translate English 
into Italian,; and observe the rules of concordance : and, 
if we think proper, we may compose the following themes, 
upon the principles of the Italian language, without looking 
at the Italian that is put after the English, except it be to 
compare it with the translation. 

The first is upon the articles. 

The second upon the verb wcere. 

The third upon the verb essere. 

The third upon the pronouns, mi, ti, ci, vi, gli. 

The fifth upon the particle si. 

The sixth upon there is, there was, there will be, there 
has been. 

The seventh upon the articles of the, of, &c. 

Be careful in composing these themes, as they contain 
a great many niceties in the Italian tongue., I have put 
them in Italian, word for word, to render them the more 
easy. The words marked with a number, shew that there 
are some rules to be observed, as appears by the page 
which follows the Italian theme. 

THEME 



2J* Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 



THEME 



On the Articles. 

MY brother's fancy and desire for the study of the Ita- 
lian language, are the cause that the passion he had for 
hunting, gaming, and musical instruments, is at present 
much abated ; if he had believed the advice you did give 
him in Mr. President's garden, when he spoke to us of the 
wit of that gentleman, who was much esteemed by the 
king, he would then have begun to have studied the prin- 
ciples of it, he would at present have known part of the 
difficulties, and would have made a great many voyages 
with the nephew of a great prince, who would have had 
him. 

I 2 3 

LA rbglia, c7 desiderio, dimiofrat'dlo, per lo studio delta 

4- 
lingua Italidna, sow ceigibne che gli ardori cJi attva per la 

5 6 1 

cdccia, i giuochi, e gli stromenti di miisica, son 1 adesso 
8 9 10 

mdlto inodtrdti : se avesse credLto gli avvisi che gli 

U 12 13 It 

davdte nel giardino dtlsignor Presid'ente, qudndo ci par! diet 

15 .16 1? 

ddlo spirito di quel gentilubmo cVera tdnto sthndlo dal re ^ 

18 19 20 

avrebbe allora comincidto di studidme i principj, so- 

21 
Vrebbe adesso una parte delle difficolta, ed avrebbe fd'.to 

22 23 24 25 

mblti vidggi col nipbtc d"un gran principe che lo voleva avere. 

This theme, and the following ones, are translated word 
for word. 

The number I shews that 7 is in the place of it, see 

The 



Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 253. 

The number 2 teaches that we must say di mity and not 
del mipn see qage 67. 
3. /a, and not«7, p, 36. 
4». g/i, and not gl\ p. 37. 

5. i is better than li, p. 37. 

6. giuochi, and not giuoci, p. 49. 

7. gti, and not //, p. 37. 

8. se avesse, and notse uvtva r p. 88. 

9. gli aVyisi, and not gT avvisi, p. 37. 

1 0. gli* and not rot; p. 64. 

1 1 . ncl and not in il, p. 42. 

12. ate/, and not dello, p. 37. 

13. signor Presidente, and not signore, p. 175* 
] 4. «, and not rco/, p. 65. 

15. delloy and not del, p. 3S.. 

16. quel, and not quello^p. 56* 

17. c/d/, in the ablative, p. 93. 

18. studidrne, and not ncstudi&re^ p. 66, 

19. i for ?/, p. 37. 

20. principj, and not principi, p. 50, 

21. difficoltd, and not dfjficoltJ, p. 45, 

22. vidggi, and not viaggii, p.£0, 

23. co/, and not co?* ?7, p. 43. 

24. grcrn 4 and not.grande, p. 5&» 
25* fo, and not il^p, 65. 



THEME 
In which all the Tenses of the Verb avere are inserted* 

I have the curiosity to know if you have done the busi- 
ness I had recommended to you ? 

If I had had time, I would have done it ; but not having 
had it, I have not been able to do it. 

You would have had it, if you had been willing, and if 
you had not played so much. 

I have quitted play altogether, to have my mind at rest. 

I shall therefore have some hopes that you will work 
for me. 

It 



256 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

It is reasonable that I have care of your affairs, since you 
have some of mine. 

Have some of mine, and I will have some of yours. 

1 * 2 

HO la curibsitd di sapere se avete fdtto Vaffdre che 
3 
v'avevo racontmanddto f 

4 5 6 

Se avessi avuto il tempo, Vavrei fdtto, ma non, avendolo 
7 
avuto, non Vho potutofdre, 
8 
V avreste avuto, se aveste voluto, e se non aveste giuo~ 
cdto tdnto. 

9 
Up lascidto ilgiuoco a fdtto, per avere lo spiritoinrip6so» 

10 
Avrb addnque qudlche spefdnza, che lavorerete per me. 

11 12 

E' ragionevole cliabbia cira de 1 vostri affdri, gidcht 
13 
n f avete de' miei. 

14 15 

Abbidtene de 7 miei, e riavrb de' vostri, 

1. curiositd, with an accent, p. 179. 

* se avete, we use the plural, though we speak but 
to one person ; p. 257. 

2. Vaffdre, and not to affdre, p. 36. 

3. tf avevo for vi avevo, p. 174, 

4. avessi, and not avevo, p. 88. 

5. Vavrei for lo avrei, p. 174. 

6. avendolo, and not lo avendo, p. 41. 

7. Vho, for lo ho, p. 1 7 4-. 

8. aveste, and not aveidte, p. 88, 89. 

9. avere, without an />, p. 29. 

10. avrb, with an accent, p. 179. 

1 1. ch'dbbia^ and not che dbbia, p. 174. 

12. de is belter than delli, p. 37, 174. 

13. rt avete, instead of ne avite, p. 174. 

U.de 1 



Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 257 

14. de'is better than delli, p.. 37, 174. 

15. rC curb, for ne'avrb, 174. 



THEME 
On the Tenses of the Verb essere. 

I am well satisfied to have been received for a governor 
of those gentlemen, who have been in the country where 
you have been. 

You are in the right to be satisfied, because they are very 
generous gentlemen. 

I should be yet more glad if they had not been in Italy, 
because I should have made that voyage with them. 

It seems that you were there for some months last 
year. 

I should have been there, it is true, if my brother 
had been here when those gentlemen were with you in 
the army ; but not being there, I was obliged to stay at 
Paris. 

• # * Before you compose this theme, remember that 
the verb essere is formed or conjugated of itself ; and that 
you must never put any tense of the verb avere before the 
participle stdto : for we say sono stdto, sidmo stdti, and not 
ho stdto, abbidmo stdn. 

You must use stdto in speaking of a single person only, 
by you : example, you have been my friend, siete stdto ?mo 
amico, and not siete statu 

1 2 

Sono molto contento d' essere stdto ricevuto per governatorc 
3 
di gue y signbri, che sono stdti nel paese dove si:te stdto. 

4 5 

Avke ragi'one d 'essere contento, perche sono gcntiluomini 
molto generosi, 

6 
Sarei ancora piu contento, se non fossero stdti in 1 alia, 
7 8 

perchkavre'i fdtto quel xidggio con loro. 

\ 



2*8 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

9 10 

Mi pare che vifosteper alcuni mcsi Vdnnopassdto, 

11 
Vi sar'ei anduto, c vero, se mi® fratello fosse stdto qui, 
VI 
■quando quel signori erano con v6i alC estrcito : mu ,jn 

13 
■essendoci, fid obligdto di resldr in Pcirigi. 

1. essere stdto, and not avere sldto,p. 83* 

2. essere stdto, and not esser stdto, p. 175. 

3. nel, and not in il, p. 42. 

4. We do not express they, p, 207, 208. 
5.U07H0, in the plural uomini, p. 48. 

6. se, before the imperfect, p, 88. 

7. quel, and not quello, p. 174. 

8. con loro, and not col Idroy because Uro is a pronoun 
conjunctive, p. 206. 

9. vi, and not ci, p. 147. 

10. alcuni, and not qualche, p. 73. 

1 1 . «e iwjo, and not se il mio, p. 67, 

12. quel or qu&lii, p. 68. 

•1 3. essendoci, and not ci essendo, p. 66. 



THEME 

Ott /^e "Pronouns conjunctive mi, ii, ci, vi, gli, le. 

You had promised me that you would send us the boo^ 
which we had asked of you. and you have not sent it 
1o us. 

I had promised it to you, it is true, I remember it ; but 
you should have sent to demand it of me, and I would have 
sent it to you. 

Do not put yourself to any more trouble about it. I 
inow that my sister has one of them : here is my servant. 
I will bid him go to her house to ask it of her. Go direct- 
ly to my sister's, do not stay any where ; thou shalt tell 
her, lhat I pray her to lend me her manuscript ; that 
I will send it her back in an hour; thou shalt give 
my service to my brother-in-law; and if thou seest 

any 



Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 259 

any roses in his garden, thou shalt ask him- for some of 
them. 

12 3 4 5 

h/V -wcvate proinisso cite c'im-iereste il libro die v* ave° 
6 7 
vdmo domanddto, e non eel avete mandato. 
8 9 10 

VeV avev-j promesso, c vero, mene ricordo ; ?na blsognd' 
11 12 13 

va tnandar' a domanadrmelo^ e veV avrei invidto. 

14 1/5 16 17 

Non vene piglidte piufastidio, so die mia sorella rtha uno ; 
18 19 - 20 

eccdl mio servo, gli dirb d'anddr da lei per domanddrglielo 

21 
Vd qu&nto prima da mia sorella, non tifermar in nissun 
22 23 24 

luogo, le dirdi cue la prego di prestdrmi 7 suo manuscritto^ 

2.5 26 

die le rimandero frd an* ora, fardi i miii baciamdni a mio 

27 2S 29 

-cogndto, e se vedrdi or vedi rose nel di lui giardino, glienc 

30 
domanderdi alcUne or qualchedune. 

1 . mavevdtc, in the plural p. 208. 

2. m[avevdte, for mi avevdte, p. 174. 

3. promesso, arid n6t promisso, or promettuto, p. 135, 

4. c\ and not ei, p, 65. 

5. vi avevdmo, or v'avevdmo, p. 65. 

6. eel avete, or ce/o aze/e, p. 174. 

7. ce/ avete, and not «7 a&eie, p. 61. 

8. p^' avevo, and vi' Vavevo, p. 65. 
. 9. me?ze, and not miwe, p» 65. 

10, of it, before a verb, is expressed by mene, p. $5, 

1 1 . manddre a, p. 208. 

] 2. domanddrmelo, p. 66. 
IS. »ef avrei, p. 65. 

14. fc>e»£, p. 66. 

15. mia sorella, and not /a ?«<«, p. 67. 

16. Tr'ta, 



260 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

1ft. riha, and not ne ha, with an apostrophe, p, 174. 
17. wrao, and not un, p. 176. 
] 8. gli, and not Zw«, p. 65. 

19. d'andar, with an abbreviation, p. 174, 175. 

20. domanddrglielo, and not /««, p. 6*5. 

21. wow tifermdr, and not kow tiferma,\). 2 10, 

22. ft <&><&, p. 65. 

23. prestdrmi, and not gnt prestar, p. G6\ 

24. i/ swo, and not *wo, p. 67. 

25. le, and not /mi, p. 64. 

26. t wwei, p. 6*7. 

27. h vsrdi, or se vedi, p. lrjo. 

28. nd, and not m, p. 42. , 
2p. glifoie, p. 65. 

30. alcwie, and not qudlche, p. 73. It is better to say 
£wa/cfo*&w.£. 



* # * In order to write and speak Italian fluently, it will 
be absolutely necessary to make this> and the three follow- 
ing themes, more than once. 



TH EME 



Containing all the Difficulties of the Particles si Jtis,they, 
we, Uc. 

It is said that you do not know if we have received 
the letters which we expected the last post; and that in 
case we have not received thein, or do notreceive them, 
to-day, they will send fifty men into the forest, where 
it is thought they have robbed the courier, because 
they knew we had given him letters of great conse- 
quence : and as it is not doubted but they are enemies 
that have detained him, because we have had certain 
advice that they have some of our letters in their hands, we 
have sent a spy to inform himself of what they say, and we 
promise him two hundred crowns if we can have any tidings 
of them. 

I 



Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. . 361 

I do not put the number here upon these two last themes 
to refer you to the rules, because to make this, it will be 
sufficient to read the pages 218, 219. 

SI dice che non sapets, se sono state ricevute le Uttere {orse 
si sono ricevute le lettere), die $ aspettdvano Vordindrio 
passdto, e chc in edso che non stand state ricevute, o eke -non 
si ricevano oggi, mandcrdnno cinaudrita uomini net la sclva, 
6:e si cro.de che sia stdto svaligidto } l corriere, perche si 
sa che gli erano state (or gli s' erano) consegndte lettere di 
gran consequenza ; e come non si ha dubbio che sidno i nemici, 
che Vhdnno ritenuto, giacche, si hdnno avvisi certi, che sono 
state viste alcune delle nostre lettere nelle loro mdni, -s'e in- 
vidta una spia per informdrsi segretamente di qudnto (or 
di quel che sipdssa, or rather, di qudnto si dice) e gli si pro- 
Tncttono ducento scudi, se sene potrd aver nuova, (or se po~ 
trdnno aver sene nuove.) 



THEME 

On the Phrases there is, there was, there will be. 

Before you compose this theme, look back on the pages 
125,127/ 

Remember also, that you must express there is of it 
or them y there was of it or them y by cene t or cene sono, cene 
Ju or "cene furono, and not by ci ne y vi ne. See pages 
150, 151. 

THERE is a man in the street, who says, that yester- 
day there was an uproar over-against the palace, where there 
were three men killed ; and he swears that if he had been 
present, there would have been a great many more, because 
he has heard there had been two of his friends wounded ; 
and that two women and three children have also been 
maimed. They talk likewise of several merchants whom 
the passengers report to have been cruelly beaten ; and 
that of the ten soldiers who are in prison, four of them will 
be hanged, and that the. six others are condemned to the 
gallevs. 

M V'B 



262 Of- the ITALIAN COMPOSITION*. 

V-E* (or ce) tin* uomo nella strdda, die dice die vi ,fu 
j'eri un gran rumore dirimpeito, al paldzzo, ov.e furono uccisi 
tre uomini; e giura die se vi fosse stdto, vene sareobero 
stdto molto pid : perciocche ha sapiito die v'erano stdti feriti 
due amid suoi, e die due donne e tre fanciulli vi sono stdti 
sfroppidti. Si pdrla dndie di mold mercdrtti, due i vianddnti 
dicono esservi stdti atrocemente battuti, e die di died solddti 
chs-sonoin prigione, vene sardnno qudttro impiccdti, e die vene 
sono sei condanndti in galera. 

Observe that, according to the rule in p. 12(5, one 
might leave out v' or c' of the iirst line, and only put e un' 
uomo nella strdda. 



THEME 

To learn idien to express, and when to omit, in Italian, the 
Articles, the, of the, of. 

See the pages 215, 214, b;c. where you will find all 
the difficulties explained. 

THERE are the men and the women that look on 
the pictures, who say that they are paintings much esteemed 
by all the connoisseurs; and the ignorant themselves. - 

Do not come here with persons of your country, to talk 
of the affairs of your brother. 

You will have time to write letters to all your friends. 

We must separate them from the rest, 'and give nothing 
to them but bread and water. 

I received yesterday news of (or from) the prince, and 
from madam the princess. 

I have received a hundred crowns from the prince, and 
fifty from the princess. 

Talk to me of philosophy, and of the affairs of the 
times. 

He labours for ungrateful people, that give pain and 
sorrow to all their relations. 

You will be praised by the soldiers, but you shall be 
blamed by the captains, and the chief of the army. 

You have had a great deal of pain, and little profit. 

We 



Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 253 

We have eaten for dinner partridges, quails, and young 
pigeons. 

1. Give us bread, wine, and flesh. 

2. Give us some bread, some wine, and some flesh. 
Your brothers are arrived from the Indies ; they have 

brought pearls, diamonds, and a great many other goods, 
in deal boxes, upon horses and camels. 

* # * I have put the phrase give us bread, usine, andflesk y 
twice, that you may consider when to express, and whea 
to omitj the article of the. 



A Translation according to tlie Rules, 

E'CCO uomini, e donne, che considerano i quddri, e cite 
tficono, che sono pitture molto stimdte da tutti i dotti, e dagV 
ignordnti medesimi. , 

Non venite qua con persone del vostro paese, per parlar 
degli affdri di vostro fratello. 

Avrete tempo per iscrivere Uttere a tutt' i vostri amki. 

Bisogna separdrli ddgli altrx, e non dar loro che pane ed 
dcqua. 

Ricerei jeri nuove del signor principe, e dtUa signoraprin- 
cipessa. 

Ho ricevuto cento scudi dal principe, e cinqudnta ddlh 
principessa. 

Parldtemi dellafilosofia, e degli qfdri del tempo. 

Lavora per ingrdti, che ddnno pena, efastidio a tuiCi !6r& 
parenti. 

Sarete loddto ddi solddti, ma sarete biasimdto ddi capitdni a 
e ddi principdli delV esercito. 

Avete avuto grand' incommodo, epoco profitio. 

Abbidmo mangidto a prdnso pernici, qudglie, e piccioncmi* 

1. Dated del pane, del vino, e della came. 

2. Ddteci'pdne, mno, e cdrne in pagamento. 

1 vostri fratelli sono arrivdii dalle Indie, hdnno portdte 
p'erle, diamdnti, e molte dltre mcrcmzie in coffi di pine scprm 
mvdlli, e canmielt. 

M 2 



[ m ] 



THE 



SIXTH TREATISE. 



Of Poetical Licences, and the divers Synonymous 
Names of the Gods. 

rpHE principal difficulty of the Italian poetry consists in 
the poetical licences, and in the different synonyma; 
which shall constitute the two chapters of this treatise. 



CHAP. I. 



Of Poetical Licences. 

pOETICAL licences are certain diminutions or aug- 
mentations at the end of words, which frequently 



occur in poetry ; to wit, 




alma, 




"dnimay 


the soul. 


dltri, 




dltroy 


one, and some 


anddroy 




anddrono, 


they went. 


anddr. 




anddronOy 


they went. 


andidnne, 




andidmoceney 


let us go away. 


simdroy 




amdronoy 


they loved. 


augeiy 




aitgelliy 


birds. 


appo, 




appressoy 


near to. 


baccidnne, ^-for^ baccidmoci, 


let us kiss. 


bea y 




bevcty 


let h'm drink. 


bedy 




bevettey 


he drank. 


he( y 




bevevciy 


he did drink. 


bee, 




bevey 


he drinks. 


bei, 




bclliy 


fair, beautiful. 


edggioy 




eddoy 


I fall. 


caggidmOy 




cadldmOy 


we fall. 


capeiy 


capeliy 


hairs. 


cavdiy 




jcavdllif 


horses. 



cadeo, 



Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



265 



cC'le, 

eel an, 

cel'han, 

there, 

china, 

chino, 

colieiy 

cor, 

correm, 

cofitdro, 

cosldr, 

credtria, 

dt' or de 9 

deggio, 

deggia, 

deggidmo, 

deggianOy 

deggidie, 

deggioy 

digg'io? 

deggicno, 

dennoj 

deoy 

deonoy 

dtc, 

diero, 

dicv and die 

dicronsL 



d/'cetfity 
disst r, 
do/no, 



[ron, 
h 



empio, 
face, 
fac eariy 

A 



"eddde, 
ceta, 
celano, 
ccr/uinnoy 
chiede, 
ch India , 
ciiindto, 
colt till, 
coglicre, 
coglieremoy 
costdrono, 
-eostdronoy 
credcrebbe y 
deve, 
devoy 
deviy 
debba, 
dobbidmOy 
dtbbanoy 
dohbidley 
ffar-i debhoy 

debb'io ? 

debbonoy 

debboriOy 

dtbboy 

devonOy 

diedey 

diederoy 

diedero % 

si diederoy 

dicesti tu\ 

disscroy 

domatOy 

egliy 

kmyiy 

fay f 

facevano, 

fedc, 

fece y 

^faceta, 

M 3 



he fell. 

he hides, or conceals. 

they hide. 

they have it to lis. 

he demands. 

a bending down. 

bent down. 

knives. 

to gather. 

we shall gather, 

they cost. 

they cost. 

he should believe. 

he owes. 

I owe. 

thou owe^t. 

he may owe. 

we may owe, 

they may owe. 

you may owe. 

I owe. 

do I owe ? 

they owe. 

they owe. 

I owe. 

they owe. 

he gave, 

they gave. 

they gave. 

they gave, or applied 

themselves to. 
saicist thou, 
they said, 
tamed. 
he. 

he filled. 

he does, or makes* 
they did so. 
faith. 

he did, or made, 
he did do. 



266 



©f the POETICAL LICENCES. 



/«, 1 




'feci. 


I did, or made. 


fittk 




lifece, 


he made them. 


femmo, 




facemmo, 


we made. [them* 


ferine, 




nefece, 


he made some, or of 


Jerno, 




fecero, 


they made. 


feo, 




fece, 


he made. 


few, 




fecero, 


they made. 


fira, 




fcrhca, 


he may strike. 


fere, 




ferisce, 


he strikes. 


feron, 




fecero, 


they did, or made* 


fironoy 




fecero, 


they did, or made. 


feste, 




faceste, 


you did, or made. 


Ah 




sard, 


he shall be. 


firm, 


sardfffio, 


they shall be. 


M 




sard, 


he shall be. 


fimo, 




sardnno, 


they shall be. 


fh 




sii, : 


be thou. 


for, 




sarebbe, 


he should be. 


foran. 




sarebbero, 


they should be. 


fozsino, 




fosserO) 


they were, or might be, 


fr«, 




frdte, 


a brother. 


M 


>foH 


n, 


he was. 


fitd) 




fiironO} 


they were* 


ftcro, 




furono* . 


they were. 


g"*i 




anddva, 


he did go. 


giro, 




anddrono, 


they went. 


g ir \ 




anddrono, 


they went. 


gfo> 




anddte, 


go you. 


giva, 




and/iva. 


he did go. 


hdggio, 




ho, 


I have. 


hdlle, 




k ha, 


he has them. 


hdhni, 




vie I ha, 


he has it to me. 


hdn, 




hdnno, 


they have. 


avei, 




avrci, 


I should have. 


nvia, 




avrcbbe, 


he should have. 


avian, 




avrebbero, 


they should have. 


havrdj 




avrb, 


I shall have. 


have, 




ha, 


he has. 


avia, 




aveva, 


he had. 


avrdi, 




avrebbe, 


he should have. 


haw l t 




Jm ha, 


there is. 



hoik 



Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



>67 



h6Ue i -] 




fie ho, 


I have to him, 


Roam, 




ne ho, 


I have some, <?r of it. 


h 




10, 


I. 


ir, 




anddre, 


to go. 


tie, 




and ate, 


go ye, 


i 'van, 




anddvano, 


they did go. 


lave, 




Id ove, 


there where. 


kn\ 




gliene, 


to him of it. 


loddro, 




loddrorio, 


they praised. 


loddr\ 




loddrtmo, 


they praised. 


me' ', 




imgtio, 


better. 


men', 




mene, 


me some, or of it. 


wen, 




menOf 


le-,s. 


morio, 




mor}, 


died. 


ne'l, 




ns il, 


neither the. 


TiOSCO, 




con noiy 


with as. 


pd ? a, 




pagdto, 


contented. 


pdgo, 




pagdto, 


contented. 


par, 




pare, 


it seems. 


por, 




por re, 


to put. 


gie, }^"i pu'de, 


a foot. 


ponno 9 




possono 9 


they can. 


pit die, 




pub, 


he can. 


potriU) 




potrebbe,. 


he should be able. 


que", ^ 




quelll, 


those. 


rapid, 




rapi, 


he ravished. 


rilor, 




ritogUere, 


to resume. 


sdllo, 




lo sa, 


he knows it. 


sdfsi, 




Stllj, 


I went up. 


sdlse, 




sail, 


he went up. 


salt I? 




ti sa ? 


dost thou find ? 


satti bvono, 




ti sa buono ? 


dost thou like? 


*£ 




sei, 


thou art. 


seggo, seggio, 




sedo, 


I sit down. 


seggono, seg- 




sedono, 


they sit down. 


sel, [giono, 




selo, 


to himself it. „ 


si. 




cost, 


so, as much. 


siede, 




sede^ 


he sits. 


siedon, 




sedono, 


they sit. 


sitn, 




siano, 


they be. 


solhvaro, 




^sollevdrono, 


they raised up. 






M 4 


soUevdr, 



268 



Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



solkvdr, 
spene, 
spirto, 
sta, 
ste, 
stet, 
mlla 9 
idi, 

terrdllo, 
. Hello, 
to mini y 
tor, 

tfonche, 
tronco, 
u, 

valso, 
vdnne, 
vt, 

i-eggio^eggo, 
veggoniopig- 
veglio,[gmo, 
veils, 
vellcy 
velliy 
re'///, 
Velio, 
vtn\ 
ver, 
vo\ 
volto, 
vosco, 
ttsciaroo, 
uscio, 

USCU'O, 



"sollevdrono, 
speme 

spirito, 
quest u, 
Steele, 
steto, 
sopm la, 
tali, 

lo terra, 
tienl lo, 
toglimi, 
togliere, 
troncdio, 
troncaio, 
Ore, 
valuto, 
vdttene, 
yfor<( vedi, 
vedo, 
vea'ono, 
vicchioy 
zolcre, 
ved/le, 
vedili, 
eccoli, 
ecoQlo, 
vene* 
verso, 
xoglio, 
voltdio, 
con ro/j 
u&cibanol 
uscl, 
use ivonOy 



they raised up. 

hope, 

a spirit. 

this. 

.he stood or dwelt-. 

the stalk or stem, 

upon (he, 

such. 

he will hold it. 

hold it thou. 

take me away. 

to take away. 

cut. 

cut. 

where. 

worth. 

go about thy business, 

see thou. 

1 see. 

they see. 

an old man. 

to be willing. 

see thou them. 

see thou them. 

there they are. 

there he is. 

you some, or of it, 

towards. 

I will. 

turned. 

with you. 

they did go out. 

he went out. 

thev went our. 



*^.*Observe, that the third persons plural of the pre- 
tcrperfect definite terminating in drono, as, legdrono, 
amdrono, scolor drono, negdrono, are to have their poetical 
termination s' in dro ; thus they say, legdro, amdro, scolo- 

rcvo*. 



Of the different SYNONYMA. 269* 

rdro, neguro. See Petrdrca, Tdsso, Guarini, and all the 
other poets. 

The poets always retrench an I from the articles 
dello, della, delli, delle ; dlli, dlle, &c. and from nella, 
nelli, nelle ; collet, colic : hence they put de lo, de la, de li v 
&c. ; ne la, ne li, ne le ; co la, co le, &c. ; example, de la 
futura edecia. 

They likewise use il before verbs instead of lo ; as, ii 
vedo, for lo vedo ; il dicea, for lo diceva. 

Remember also, that the poets more frequently use the 
verbs in gio, than those in do, when they have two termi- 
nations : thus they write veggio oftener than vedo, veggen* 
do more usually than vedendo. 



CHAP. II. 



Of the different Synonyma. 

^HE poets make use of different synonyma to express 
the names of the gods and goddesses of heaven, 
earth, and hell ; which I have inserted in this chapter in-' 
their alphabetical order. 

They use as synonyma for APOLLO . 

II akin muy'coi 

Ifebo. 

II biendo Dio, che in, Tessdtia s'adura.- 

Uordcolo di D'cifo. 

II rcttore del Parndaso. 

II Dio d'Eiicoiia. 

BA'CCO,. 
// giovinetto Dio che'l Gdnge adore.- 
It Dio nutrito dalle Ninfe di Nisa. 
II Dio due volte ndto. 
Libero. 

CICLO'PI. 
Itrefratelli con m sol occhio infronte. 

M 5 T gigdnii 



270 Of the different SYNONYM A. 

I gigdnti di Vulcdno. 
Ifabri di Vulcdno. 

The names of the Cyclops, 

Bronte, Ste'rope, Pirammo'kb. 

CIE'LO. 

Eterea mole. Regione stelldta. 
ha magidne degli Dei. 

CERFRK 

Jnventrice delle prane bidde. 
Mddre di Proserpina. 
JDea d'Eleusi. 

CIBE'LE, 
La Dea Dindhnena. 
La Dea Berecentia. 
La moglk di Saturno. 
Rea. 

CUPIDO, 

JJamore. 11 vincitdr degli Dei. 

Ualdto Dio, Uarciho voldnte. 

Ilfaretrdto Arciero. II nudo Arciero,. 

II cieco Dio. 

II vagabondo aldto. 

II nudo pargoletto. 

Oarzon soma I'etdde astuto. 

Ilfiglio di Ciprigna, di Citerea, di Venert. 

DIA'NA. 

Cintia. La Luna. La sorella di Febo> 
Delia. La Dea delle sebe, de' monti. 

E'OLO. 
Dio de' venti. 

FLO'RA. 
Dea de' Fiori. Dea arnica di Giunone. 

GIA'NO. 

Amico di Satumo. II dio bifrdnte. 
II Iko che porta due chiavi. 



GIOTE. 



Of THE DIFFERENT SYNONYMA. 271 

GIO'VE. 

Metlore delle stelle. 

Primo figlio di Saturno. 

II gran motore. Re de' motori. 

II gran Tondnte. 

GIUNO'NE. 

La moglie di Giove. La Dea Lucina. 
La Dea Gelvsa. La regina degli Dei. 
L'orgogliosa moglie del gran Tonndnte. 

INFE'RNO. 

Bolgia ardente. 

Bdratro puzzente, Aver no. 

Nero speco. 

LUCI'FERQ, STE'LLA. 

Foriera del giorno. 
Stella nunzia del gi6rno+ 

LU'NA. 
Diana, Cintia, E'cate. 

MA'RE. 

Pelago, Ocedno, Reggia Cristallina. 
Regno umido. II padre de' fiumi. 

MARTE. 

Dio guerriero. 

MERCURIC^ 
Messo, interpi^ete degli Dei. 
Inventor della lotta. II divin Citarista. 
II Dio de' ladroni. Cillinio. 

MINERVA. 
Pdllade. 

Dea ricamatrice. 
La Dea cti Atene adora. 
La Dea di Sdmo. 
Inventrke delle prime ulive. 

NETTUNO. 
II regnator canuto de 1 jlutii. 
II gran rettore delle deque. 
II Tirdnno del mare. 
Ilfreddo ed' umido Marilo di Ted. 

m 6- PAL* 



272 



Of the different SYNONYMA. 



PALLADE. 

Quella che senza padre dal gran Giove ndcqiw. 
JBellona, Minerva, Dea della guerra. 
Dea che trovd Vuso dell' olio e delta Idna. 
Inventriee delle prime ulive. 

PLUTO'NE. 

Dio delle tentbre. 

Dio dell' oscuro regno. 

JJautore della sepoltura. 

II primo ch' onoro con esequie i morti. 

PROSERPINA, 
Lafiglia di Cerere. 
La moglk di Plutone. 
I*a regina delle grotie Tartdree. 
Dea del cupofondo. 

SATU'RNO. 

Jl tempo, il Xho del tempo. 
Ualdto vecchio, il vecchio eddce. 

SO'LEo 
11 principe delle ore. 
11 gran ?nondrca de* tempi. 
II luminoso- auriga, Apollo.. 
Febo, il Fratcllo di Diana. 
II pianeta eterno. 

TE'RRA, 
La mddre commune de' mortdli. 
II suole. 

TETI 

Regina de y flutti. 
Dea del mare. 

VE'NERR 

Citereay Cipr'ma, Ciprigna. 

La Dea Ericina. 

Verticordia. 

Figlia del mare. 

Dea che per Aduno ardeva. 

Dea di Pqfo. 

Dea d' Amatunta. 

Dk', or donna del terzo giro. 



YUL- 



Of Improper, and Obsolete Words. 273 

VULCA'NO. 
Zoppo Bio, 
II JDio distorto. 
Fdbro adusto. 
II divin artista. 
II genitor d'amore in Lenno.. 



SEVENTH TREATISE. 

Of improper and Obsolete Words. 

npHE Italian, as well as other languages, has a great- 
many improper words, which are used only- by the 
vulgar and illiterate. 

It is a mistake to think that the Italian tongue is 
spoken and pronounced best at Florence, for this is one 
of the places where the pronunciation of it is the most 
harsh and uncouth. The court and the academies speak 
well there ; but ail the rest have a bad accent, and pro- 
nounce through the throat and nose. 

The writings of the Florentine authors, both ancient and* 
modern, are in a beautiful style ;. hence it is that the 
Italian proverb says,, in regard to their pronunciation, 

Lingua Toscdna in bocca Romdna. 

It is most certain the inhabitants of Rome and. Sienna; 
speak the best Italian ; therefore we say, 



Par ben parldr Itali/inOy 
Bisogna parldr Romano. 



Nevertheless, the vulgar at Rome generally- commit a 
mistake in the preterperfect-definite, by making it end 
in the first person plural, in ssimo, instead of mmo : ex- 
ample, 

We loved, "J r amass imo. 

We went, f . ... . . 1 anda&simo. 

We believed, \ ls lU e *P ressed b r < a -edessimo. 

We wrote, ) tscmessimo. 

We 



27* Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 

We should say, amdmmo, anddmmo, credvmmo, scrivemmo; 
and so all the rest of the verbs. 

Neither must we say, amaresshno, crederessimo, and the 
like, to express we should love, we should believe ; but 
ameremmo, crederemmo : and the same with regard to all 
verbs in the second imperfect. 

The first person plural of the present tense ought to ter- 
minate in iamo, in all verbs without exception, as well 
in the indicative as the imperative and subjunctive ; so 
that we must absolutely say, amidmo, and che amidmo, to 
express we love, and that we may love ; and in like 
manner abbidmo, sidmo, parlidmo, credidmo y vedidmo^ dor- 
midma, conccpidnio, &c. and not ave?no y se?no, parldmo, 
credemo, vcde,no^ dormimo, capimo, conccpi??to, which are 
Calabrian and Neapolitan words, derived from the Spanish; 
for by adding an s at the end of them, we should find, 
ave?nos f semos. psdarmos, dormimos, &c. words entirely 
Spanish. 

Avoid saying, as the Florentines do, voi dicevi, voi 
amdvi, voi credivi, voi anddvi, and the like, instead of 
voi dicevate, voi amavcde, voi credev&te, voi andavdte, 
because the termination in vi is never used but with tu in 
the singular ; as, tu amdvi, tu dicevi. 

"%* Read those authors who have written on the 
purity of the Italian language, whom I have quoted at 
the end of this treatise; and all those that -have written 
since the origin of that language to this present time, and 
you will see they disapprove of voi avcvi, voi amdvi, 
which is a great blunder in the Florentines, and in illi- 
terate persons. 

The reason of it is indisputable, for there must be a 
difference btetween the second person singular and the 
second person plural. 

To convince those that say voi amdvi, instead of voi 
amdvate ; voi dicevi, instead of voi dicevdle ; voi vedevi, 
instead of voi vedev&te, &c. ; I shall only refer them to 
the remarks of Grdcomo Pergamini, who in his book 
intitled, Trattdio della lingua Italidna, says, page 173, 
La seconda persona ddV imperfkto nel numero del piu, deve 
esser termindta in vate ; as, cantavdte, dicevate. E contra 
questa termwmone rfcfvdie universalmente da' regoldti 

dictori 



Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 27$ 

diclvri, hdnno alcuni modcrni usdto di serivere, cantavi, 
vedevi, il che e an manifesto errore. 

Ferrante Loneobardi, in bis book intitled // torto ed il 
dritto, condemns this manner of speaking, voi cantavi, as 
impertinent. 

For the same reason as that above given, you must not 
say, voi arndsti, voi credesti, voi vedesti, but voi amdste, 
voi credeste, voi vedeste. 

To express, we read, we remain, we say, we go out y 
vou must say, leggidnto, rimanidmo, dieidmo, usci&mo ; and 
not leghidmo, rimanghidmo, dichidmo, eschidmo ; and that 
for two incontestible reasons : 

First, because there are none but verbs terminated in 
the infinitive in care and gare, as, cercdre, purgdre, that 
take an k in the tenses and persons, where the letter c or 
g precedes an e and an-*, as I have said before. So that 
the verbs in ere and ire are not included in this rule. 

Secondly, because leghidmo comes from legdre, signi- 
fying to tie ; and so of the rest. 

' Neither must you say, as those of Lucca do, io direbbi, 
iofarSbbi, io sartbbi, to express, / should say, I should do 9 
I should be, instead of io direi, iofarei, io sarei. 

You must not say nor write dmono, cdmono, bdllono, in 
the third person plural of verbs of the first conjugation, 
which all terminate in ano ; therefore write and speak 
dmano, cdntano, bdlluno ; because there are none but the 
verbs in ere and in ire that end in ono in the third person 
plural of the indicative. 

Before I finish this second part, it will be proper to 
mention three things worthy of attention. The first re- 
lates to the letter h ; the second to the letter z, when used 
instead of ti ? and the third to the conjugating of all verbs 
in the first persons singular of the imperfect indicative. 
Let us begin with the first. 

The dispute concerning the letter h, is of no small 
consequence. The point is to know, whether it ought 
to be retrenched in those words where it is not pro- 
nounced ? Some pretend that it ought not to be re- 
trenched, because this will occasion ambiguity in se- 
veral words, and the reader will thereby be led into 
mistakes ; for instance, if we leave out the h in the 

word 



270 Of Improper and Ofsolete Words. 

words k&nno they have, and hcmno y a hook, anno, and 
dmo, there is no distinguishing them from dnno r a year, 
and d/no, I love. The same difficulty occurs in a great 
many other words, which for the sake of brevity we 
omit. 

See, page 28, what has been said in regard to the use of 
the ieUer h. 

Others (of which number are the members of the aca- 
demy of La Crusca) maintain, that it ought absolutely to 
be retrenched. Their reason is this, that they look upon? 
it as altogether superfluous in words where it is not pro- 
nounced : and moreover, by using it without necessity, it 
becomes a stumbling-block to foreigners, especially to the 
Germans and Swiss, who, being accustomed in their own 
language to pronounce it wherever they find it written, do 
the same in Italian * r which is w rong, if they intend to 
express themselves with any propriety. 

The second point 1 have to mention relates to the 
letter z, when used for t, followed by two vowels, th<r 
first of which is i, in words derived from the Latin, 
as gratia, vitio, which at present are written with a. 
z ; example, grdzza, tizio. There are a great many 
who condemn this change of orthography, and insist 
that these words ought to be spelled with a /,. as in* 
Latin; yet I think it is right to make use of the s, for 
otherwise it will be impossible to give a just and true 
pronunciation to those words. You will say, there is a 
rule which tells me, that the syllable ti is sounded before 
a vowel, as if there was an s in the middle : but how 
shall I know that I am not to pronounce this syllable 
in the same manner in the words natio, native : s , impatia y 
sympathy - y pariio, he went away ; and several others ? 
How comes it that we do not say,, natsio, simpatsia r 
passio ? Doubtless you will assign the common reason 
©f this difference, namely, that those words are not 
derived from the Latin, or if they be, they are still 
of Greek derivation, and that even in Latin they are 
pronounced differently from words of Latin original. 
This reason perhaps is good in itself, but is of no 
use to those who. are unacquainted with the Latin 

. tonguej 



Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 277 

tongue, and consequently incapable of tracing the etymo- 
logy °f words. 

I shall now proceed to the third difficulty, concerning 
the first person singular of the imperfect indicative of 
all verbs. In regard to this article, one might impli- 
citly follow the role, which commonly prevails at 
present ; that is, to terminate it in a, and not in o ; for 
example we might say, aveva, instead of avevo ; yet, 
to tell my sentiment freely, I can see no reason for 
making this alteration, which I apprehend ought rather 
to be considered as an abuse, than as a rule. If it is 
owing to examples that occur in good authors, these 
examples, I make no doubt, are owing to the mistakes 
of typographers. And, indeed, 1 can never imagine 
that Boccdcio, Villani, and some others, to whom a 
great many do pay a degree of veneration bordering 
upon idolatry, should take it into their heads to make 
use of the third person instead of the first. I can never 
believe they would attempt to introduce such an abuse, ex- 
cept by chance, and in poems, where the rhyme and mea- 
sure of the verse will plead excuse for a multitude of 
words, which would never be tolerated in prose. Con- 
vinced of this truth, I maintain, that we ought ever to make 
use of the termination o, and not that of a, till I see a 
better reason to justify this alteration. Hitherto I have 
met with none amoug 'the . best writers on this subject: 
and they who pretend that we should say amdva, aveva t 
&c. instead of amdvo, avevo, &c. are able to assign no' 
other reason than this, viz. that we sometimes meet with 
the expression in the best authors : upon which they take 
upon them boldly to pronounce, that amavo, avevo, &c 
are low words, and only used by the common people. 

For my part, I think quite the contrary, and am con- 
vinced, that the words amnva, aveva, &c. are more 
suitable to the vulgar, than to polite persons and people 
of education • because I cannot comprehend how those 
who ought naturally to surpass others so much in know- 
ledge, should attempt to defend an expression in many 
respects repugnant to good sense. Besides, I have three 
reasons for being of this opinion. The first is, that in 

all 



*7S K Of EXPLETIVES, &c. 

all verbs, and in what sense soever, I never could find that 
the third person was used instead of the first. The second 
is, that this change is productive of ambiguity in discourse, 
which ought always to be avoided, The third and last rea- 
son, which to me appears altogether definitive in regard to 
those who pay. so great a deference to the authority of 
writers of the first order, is, that since we often meet 
with both determinations in their works, and it will not be 
granted us, that either of them is owing to the mistakes 
of typographers, this is a demonstration, these writers 
looked upon both the one and the other termination as 
equally good, since they could not make use of cimdvo, 
which some modems are for absolutely prescribing, with- 
out thinking of amdva r which they would surely have 
adopted, had they thought it more elegant than the other* 
The best argument however in favour of the latter termina- 
tion is, that it. may deserve (he preference in phrases where 
a great number of words terminating in o might be dis- 
agreeable to the ear 5 but even then it will be proper to 
make use of the pronoun personal, in order to avoid the 
ambiguity I have mentioned. 



EIGHTH TREATISE. 

Of Expletives, Compound Words, Capitals, and Stops. 



CHAP. I. 

Of Expletives. 

T7XPLET1VES are certain particles, which, though 
not absolutely necessary for the grammatical construc- 
tion, do add great strength and elegance to discourse. 

There are three sorts of expletives. First, those 
which give energy to speech, so as to represent the 
thing, as it were, to your sight. Secondly, those which 
add grace and ornament, Thirdly, those which the 

Italians 



Of EXPLETIVES, &c. <#9. 

Italians call accompdgnanomi, and accompdgna verbi, and 
are certain particles added to nouns or verbs, redundsnt 
indeed in sense, but peculiar to the Italian idiom. 

I. Of the "first sort are the following ; ecco, behold, in 
th^ beginning of a sentence ; as, ecco, io non so dir, be- 
hold, I cannot tell. 

Bene, well, is used in the beginning of a sentence before 
an interrogation : bens chefai in qui ? well, what dost thcro 
here ? or in answering in the affirmative : bene, io il faro, 
well, I will do it : sometimes the particle si is added to 
it; disse Calandreno, si bene, Calandro said, yes indeed : 
sometimes ova is prefixed to it', as, ora bene, cmnefaremo ? 
well, what shall we do? 

Pure is equivalent to our indeed^ and adds evidence 
and clearness ; la com undo pur cost, the thing went so 
indeed : when it is prefixed to a particle of time, it 
signifies exactly; pcrciocche pur allora ri erano smonidti i 
signori, because the gentlemen were then exactly dis- 
mounted. 

Gid has also sometimes the force of indeed; orafbssero- 
essi pur gid disp&sti a venire, now if they were really 
disposed to come ; sometimes the particle tri&i is added 
to it, and then it signifies never; nom usdva giammdi, he 
never used. 

Mdi either prefixed to or put after sempre, gives it 
great force ; io sempre mdi faro c/o, I will always do this ; 
the si gidce mdi sempre in ghidecio, that is always covered 
with ice. 

Mica and puntp strengthen the negatives; no mica 
d"uomo, di poco ojfdrc, a man of no small business ; il r& 
non e punto mono, ma vivo, the king is not dead, but 
alive. 

Tutto adds strength ; la gentil giovane lutta timida, the 
young women altogether afraid. 

Vi't, joined to verbs, increases their force ; via a edsa 
del prete ne poridrono, they carried him away to the priest's 
house. 

If. Of the second sort of expletives are the following ; 

Egli is used sometimes for ornament, without regard 
to gender or number ; egli e il ver, it is true : 6gli non 

sona 



2S0 Or EXPLETIVES, &c. 

sdno ancora mold aanl passdti, it is not many years since ; 
igli e dra a cdsa di desinare, it is dinner-time at home. 

E'lla is therefore used as an ornamental expletive ; com- 
ftmicib a dire, ella non andrd cost, she began- to say, it shall 
not go. 

L'sso is used hi both genders and numbers, with the 
particle con before some pronouns, and even without the 
pronouns; 611a voleva con esso lid digiundre, she was 
willing to fast with him ; rise con esso lei, he Laughed with 
her; commincib a cantdre con esso loro, he began to sing 
with them ; che venga a desmdre con esso noi, let him come 
and dine with us ; la disaventura dra idnta,. e con esso la 
discord/a de' Fioremini, (he disaster was so great, and 
withal the discord of the Florentines. 

Ova is used in resuming or continuing a discourse, iif 
the same manner as novo in Eng'ish ; dra i& ve llio udito 
dire riiilfe volte, now I heard you say it a thousand times. 
Sometimes it gives a force to interrogations : disse aW6ra y 
6rn che vorrd air questo f he then said, now what does 
this mean I 

Si has a particular beauty as an expletive: otire a quelh 
clCegiifv Qtiimofilosofy, si fit egli leggiadrUsimo e costumdto y 
for besides his being an excellent philosopher, he was 
moreover very courteous and mannerly. 

Di is used in a manner peculiar to the Italian language r 
e do di, e di nolle, both day and night. 

Non .is often used as an expletive : questo fanciullo appena 
ancora non ha quatordici dnni, this child is hardly four- 
teen years old. This is worth observing, because we find 
thereby, that in Italian non does not ahvays imply a ne- 
gative. 

Alirimcnti is also used merely as an ornament : senza. 
sapcr ahrimenii chi egli si fosse, without knowing who he 
was. 



III. Of the third sort are the follow 



me wo r as 



k ^ 



TJ'tio and una, not as numeral ncuns, but as particles 
whose office it is to accompany nouns, without adding, 
any thing to the signification,, for which reason the Italians 
call them acconipagnrtJimni : io credo die gran ndja sia 
ad una bclla e Ueiicata donna, aver per viarito un mente- 

cdtto± 



Of COMPOUND WORDS. 2M 

<catto, I believe it is very -disagreeable for a fine sensible 
woman to have a fool for a husband. 

/Hcu'to h sometimes used instead of uno ; erano legdti 
in alexin luoga in publico, they were tried in a public place. 

The particles that accompany verbs without adding any 
thing to the signification, are mi % ci, ti, vi, si, and ne. 

Mi, io, mi, credo, eke le donne sien tutte a dormire, i 
believe the women are all asleep. Sometimes the particle 
ne is added to it ; but then we say me, and not mi: som~ 
?nene venuto, I am come. 

Ci, la donna e Pirro dicevano, noi ci seggidmo, the 
woman and Pyrrhus said, let us sit down. V\ ith the 
pronominal article, it makes ce : e poscia eel godremo qui, 
and afterwards we will enjoy ourselves. In like manner 
with the particle ne : vogiiumcene noi anddre ancdra ? shall 
we go yet ? 

Ti, che tu eon not ti rimdnga per qiitsta sera, stay with us 
this evening. Before the pronoun relative they say, te : 
tu te la penilvdiy thou wilt repent it : and with ne they also 
sayte: vientene meco, come along with me. 

Vi, io non so se voi conosceste il cavaliere, I know not 
whether you w^re acquainted with the gentleman. With 
fie they say ie : voi potiete torndrvene a edsa ; you may go 
home. 

Si del paldgio s'usc}, efuggissi a edsa sua, he went out 
of the palace, and ran home. With the pronoun relative, 
and with ne, it makes se : se gii ?nangid, he ate it ; Jece 
vista di bcrsela, he pretended to drink it ; i ire giovani se 
n anddrono, the three young men went away. 

Ne, chetamente riando, he went away quickly ; andidnne 



CHAP. II. 

Of Compound Words. 

n^HE Italians, for the sake of elegance and strength 
of expression, have often recourse to compound 
w r ords ; concerning which it is impossible to give any 
general rule ; the surest way is to make use of those 
which are established by custom ; as, ognuno, every 

one; 



282 Of CAPITALS and STOPS. 

one; gentiluom.0, a gentleman; sottevoce, softly; sotto- 
mdno, underhand; nondhneno nidUulimeno, nevertheless; 
trentdtto, eight and thirty ; quardnta cinque, forty-five ; 
sottesopra, topsy-turvy. However, we shall make a few 
remarks on this subject, which may be of use to the 
learner. 

When the first of the compounding words ends with a 
vowel, and the second begins with a consonant, the 
Italians are wont to proaounce them with greater empha- 
sis, and therefore they repeat the first consonant of the 
second word, as, dello, colassu, biggin, apple, &c. We ex- 
cept from this rule the verb, ridirizzdre. 

The first of the compounding words sometimes loseth 
the last vowel, whatever consonant it precedes ; and the 
first consonant of the second word is repeated, as sottirra^ 
seggo'a, soppdno, sozzopra, &c. 

When one of the compounaing words is a participle, 
and the last syllable of the word is accented, the consonant 
of the participle is repeated, unless it happens to be fol- 
lowed by another consonant: for example, we say ddmmi, 
give me; dirotti, I will tell thee: but not dirogli, because 
the participle has a double consonant, and therefore we say 
■dirogli. But if the word, to which the particle is joined, 
loseth its final vowel in the junction, the consonant of the 
particle is not repeated; for which reason dirdi,fardi,znd 
the like, with the junction of the particle, makes dirdh, 

fardne, &c. 

In some words, for the facility of ntteranee, a con- 
sonant is changed ; thus you put before the letter It, for 
instance, an m instead of an n ; or before a c you put an n 
insiead of an m 9 for the fake of the sound, as in pam- 
bolliio,amimci,farenlo 9 &c. instead of pambotlito, amiamci, 

far end 0, Sec. 



CHAP. III. 

Of Capitals and Steps. 

I. O/CAPITALS. 

T"! -.regard te Capital Letters, the following rules are 
e8tabU«fi£d b# the Italians ; 

f. Over 



Op CAPITALS and STOPS. 283 

1. Over capitals you are never to put any mark of accent 
or apostrophe. 

2. The proper names always begin with a capital. 

3. The names of nations, taken substantively, begin 
with a capital; as, i Francesi fdcero guerra, the French 
made war ; but taken adjectively they require a small 
letter, and therefore they write, mercatdnte francese. 

4. The expressing of a genus or species requires a ca- 
pital, hence they write VUomo e la piii. nobile deile vnferi- 
6ri creature, Man is the noblest of the inferior creatures ; 
il Cavallo e utile alia guerra, a Horse is useful for war; 
but the capital is dropped when they are applied to indivi- 
duals ; quest' t! un buon? uomo, this is a good man ; kcco un 
bel cavallo, thei'e is a fine horse. 

5. Those appellatives which are used instead of proper 
names, require a capital ; hence they write il Padre, il Me- 
dico, il Maestro, the Father, the Physician, the Master, 
when speaking of some particular person. 

6. All names of dignities, degrees, and honours, re- 
quire a capital ; thus they write Papa, Iviperadore, Re, 
Vescovo, &c. Pope, Emperor, King, Bishop, &c. 

7. At the beginning of a period, the first letter is always 
a capital. 

II. Of STOP S. 

The use of stops or points is to distinguish words and 
sentences, so as not to darken the sense. The Italians 
have five stops, or pauses ; 

1. The punto fermo, the same as our period, or full 
stop (.), and is used at the end of a period, to shew that 
the sentence is completely finished ; 

2. The mezzo punto, which is our colon (:), and is the 
pause made between two members of a period, that is, 
when the sense is complete, but the sentence not ended ; 

3. The punto e virgola, our semicolon (;), and denotes 
that short pause which is made ia the subdivision of the 
members or parts of a sentence ; 

4. The point of interrogation, thus(r); or the point of 
admiration, thus (!); 

5. The virgola, the same £s our comm a (,), and is 
the shortest pause of resting in speech, being used chiefly 

to 



an Of stops. 

to distinguish nouns, verbs, and adverbs, as also the parts 
of a shorter sentence. 

The use of those stops is much the same among the 
Italians as the English; if the former have any particula- 
rity, it is in regard to the virgolas or commas ; concern- 
ing which we shall make the following remarks. 

Whenever a word or proposition is inserted in a period 
of which it does not form a part, it is put- between two 
commas : asfaccidm dwique a cotesto mo do, ma con queslo, 
vedi, che tu non parta di me, let us proceed in this man- 
ner, but with this condition, take care, that you do not 
leave me. 

The conjunction e, and the disjunctions o or rib, require 
a comma before them; yet when these particles are re- 
peated, and the first stands as an expletive, it ought to 
have no corrrmas before it; as, qudnto egli, nelVuna, e nell' 
dl'ra interpretazione si scgnalnsse, non fa duopo clCio vi 
ridica, how much he distinguished himself both in one, 
and the other explication, there is no necessity for my 
telling you. In like manner, pesdndolo o colla stadera, o 
colla bilancia : perciocchc ne nelV uno, ne nelV dltro* 

The relatives che, and quale, require a comma before 
them, as they suppose some kind of pause, though very 
small ; but when che signifies what, it requires no com- 
ma, as uttento a vedere che di lui avvenisse, attentive to 
see what became of him ; avvegnane che pub, let what 
will happen. 

A comma is always to be prefixed to conjunctions, 
even when those conjunctions are not expressed, but un 
derstood j as, non sia ebridco ne taverniere, non giuocatore, 
non musnadiere, the conjunction e is understood. 

When conjunctions and adverbial expressions are re- 
peated, and correspond to one another, the first does not 
require a comma : era Cimone si per la sua forma, e si pei 
la nobiltd, e ricchezza del padre, quasi nato a ciascun del 
paese. Simon was known almost to every man in the 
country, as well on account of his person, as for the no- 
bility and wealth of his father. 

THE END OF THE SECOND PART. 



"\ 



THE 

ITALIAN MASTER. 



PART III. 



CONTAINING, 



I. A vocabulary of words most necessary to be 
known. 
II. The words most used in discourse. 

III. Familiar dialogues. 

IV. A collection of Italian phrases, in which the 

delicacy of that language consists. 
V. Several little stories, jests, sentences of divers 
authors, and a collection of the choicest 
Italian proverbs. 
VI. An introduction to the Italian poetry. 
VII. Fine thoughts from the Italian poets. 
VIII. Different inscriptions and titles used in Italian 
letters. 
IX. Letters of business and compliment. 



A VOCABULARY OF WORDS 

NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



Dei ciclo, e degli elemenli. 


Of the heavens and the elements 


Dio. Iddio, 


God. 


Giesu Crista, 


Jes\\b Christ. 


lo Sjiirito Santo, 


the Holy Ghost, 


la J'rlnitdy 


the Trinity, 


gli dnqeh, 


the angels. 


Uti prnfe/a, 


a prophet. 




N il cieh. 



286 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



il eUlo, 
il paradiso f 

V inferno, 
il mondOf 
i didvoli, 
il fuocoy 

V aria, 
la terra, 
ii mare, 
il sole, 
la luna, 
h stelle, 
i rdggi, 
le nxcoole, 
il vknto, 
lapioggia, 
il tuono, 

il baleno, il lampo, 

la grdndine, 

il fulmine, 

la neve, 

il gelo, 

il ghidccio, 

la brina, 

la ruggidda, 

la nebbia, 

il terremoto, 

il diluvio, 

il cdldoy 

il freddo, 



Del tempo, e delle stagioni. 

// giorno, 

la notte r 

il mezzo di, 

la mkzza notte, 

la mattina, 

la sera, 

un' ora, 

un quarto d* ora, 



heaven. 

paradise. 

hell. 

the world. 

the devils. 

the fire. 

the air. 

the earth. 

the sea. 

the sun. 

the moon. 

the stars, 

the rays. 

the clouds. 

the wind. 

the rain. 

the thunder. 

the lightning. 

the hail. 

the thunderbolt. 

the snow. 

the frost. 

the ice. 

the glazed frost. 

the dew. 

a fog or mist. 

the earthquake. 

a deluge or flood. 

the heat. 

the cold. 



Of the time and seasons. 
the day. 
the night. 
noon or mid-day. 
midnight, 
the morning, 
the evening, 
an hour, 
a quarter of an hour. 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



287 



iina tnezz' ora, 
tre qudrti d'ora, 

°ggh 
ieri, 

domdni, dimdni, 
jer Vdltro, V altro jeri, 
posdomdni, domdn i'dltro, 
questa sera, 
qu'esta mattina, 
dopo prdnsOf 
dopd cena, 
iina settimdna, 
un mise, 
mC dnno, 
tin momento, 
la primavera, 
la state, 
Vautiinno, 
Vinv&rno, il vkrno, 
giorno difesla, 
giorno di lavoro, 
ilfar del sole, 
il tramontdr del sole, ' 
V aurora, 



half an hour. 

three quarters of an hour. 

to-day. 

yesterday. 

to-morrow. 

the day before yesterday. 

the day after to-morrow, 

this evening. 

this morning. 

after dinner. 

after supper. 

a week. 

a month. 

a year. 

a moment. 

the spring. 

the summer. 

autumn. 

the winter. 

a holiday. 

a working day. 

the sun -rising. 

the sun-setting. 

the dawn, aurora. 



I giorni della settimana. 
Lunedi, Monday. 

Martedi, Tuesday. 
Mercordl, Wednesday. 
Giovedi, Thursday. 



The days of the week* 
Venerdi, Friday. 

Sdbato, Saturday, 

Dementia, Sunday, 



I mesi. 

Genndjo, January. 

Febbrdjo, February. 

Mdvzo, March. 

dprile, April. 

Md<rgio, May. 

Giiigno, June. 



Hie months. 

Luglio, July. 

Agosto, Augus/. 

Settembre, September. 

Ottobve, October. 

NovSmbre, November. 

Dec'emlrre, December. 
n 2 Le 



285 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



Le fcste dell' anno. 
il capo d'dnnoy 
il giorno dei Re, 
la Quarksima, 
le Qudttro tSmpora, 
la Dominica delle pdlme, 
il Vencrdl sdnto, 
il giorno di Pdsqua, 
la Pentecoste, 
il giorno de* Morti, 
Natdle, 
la vigilia, 
la mietitura, messe, 
le vendemmie, 



The holidays of the year. 
New-year's day. 
Twelfth-day. 
Lent. 

the- Ember-weeks. 
Palm-Sunday. 
Good Friday. 
Easter day. 
Whitsuntide. 
All-souls day. 
Christmas-day. 
the eve. 
the harvest, 
the vintage. 



Delle dignita ecclesiastiche. 


Of ecclesiastical dignities. 


// papa, 


the pope. 


un cardindle, 


a cardinal. 


un arcivescovo, 


an archbishop. 


un vescovo, 


a bishop. 


tin nim%io, 


a nuncio. 


un preldto, 


a prelate. 


un retiore, 


a rector. 


un vicdrio, 


a vicar. 


un vicdrio generdle, 


a vicar-general. 


un decdno, 


a dean. 


un canonicOf 


a canon. 


un prete, 


a priest. 


un cappella.no, 


a chaplain. 


un elanosiniere cappelldno, 


an almoner. 


un curdto, un pdroco, 


a curate. 


un predicutore, 


a preacher. 


un sagristdno, 


a sexton. 


un chierico, or cherico, 


a clerk. 


un musico, 


a musician. 



pane, 
dcqua, 



Names of some eatable.?. 
bread, 
water. 



vino, 



KECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



289' 



vino, 
cdrnti 

pesos, 

alesso, 

arrosto, 

un boccone dl pdm, 

vn pasticcio, 

una fetta dl pasticcio, 

iina minestra, 

un biodo, 

uri insaldta, 

vna salsa, 

uu in/ingolo, 

dellefrutta, 

del formdgglo, 



wine. 

meat or flesh. 

fish. 

boiled meal. 

roast meat. 

a mouthful of bread, 

a pie. 

a slice of pie. 

a soup. 

the broth. 

a salad. 

the sauce. 

a ragoo. 

fruit. 

cheese. 



V apparecchio della tavola, 

La tdvola, 

iina sedia, 

la tovaglia, 

la salvietta, 

un coltello, 

■Una forchetta, 

un cucchidjo, 

un tondo, 

un pidtto, 

una sail era, 

un accetajo, 

un zuccaHno, 

un candelier.e, 

iina candela, 

lo smoccolatqjo, 

uno scaldavivdnde, 

un bacile, 

un bicchiere, 

un fiasco, 

■Una tdzza, 

•una sottocoppa, 

■uno sciugetmtini, 

un seroizio, 



The covering of the tabk* 
the table, 
a chair. 

the table-cloth, 
a napkin. . 
a knife. 
a fork. 
a §poon. 
a plate. 
a dish. 
a salt-celler. 
a vinegar bottle, 
a sugar-Wox. 
a candlestick, 
a candle, 
the snuffers, 
a chafing-dish- 
a bason, 
a glass, 
a flask, 
a cup. 
a saucer, 
a towel, 
a service or course. 

n 3 un 



290 A VOCABULARY of WORDS 


un cestone, 


a basket. 


una foglietta, 


a half- pint. 


una pinta 9 


a pint. 


un boccdle, 


a jug. 


una bottiglia 9 


a bottle. 




" 


Quel che si mangia a ta- 


What is eaten at table for (he 


vola per l'alesso. 


boiled meat. 


bue 9 


beef. 


castrdiOy 


mutton* 


viiello, 


veal. 


aqneilG, 


lamb. 


una, gallim, 


a hen. 


un gdllo, 


a cock, 


Per gli antipasti. 


For thejirst course* 


Un manicarhto 9 


a ragoo. 


una frigassea 9 


a fricassee, 


un guazzetto, 


ragoo. 


uno stitfato 9 


stewed meat. 


un' animella di vitello 9 


sweet-bread. 


una crostdta 9 


a tart. 


de* pasticcetti 9 


petty- pattees. 


del presciutto. 


some ham. 


delle salsiccie 9 


sausages. j 


un salsicciotto di Bologna, 


a Bologna sausage. 


del sanguindcciOf 


black pudding. 


del fegato, 


liver. 


delle radicif 


radishes. 


un melone 9 


a melon. 


Quel che si fa arrostire. 


What is roasted. 


Un cappone, 


a capon. 


polldstri, 


pullets. 


piccionif 


pigeons. 


le beccdcie 9 


woodcocks. 


le pernici, 


partridges. 


i tordi, 


thrushes. 


k lodole^ 


forks,. h 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



291 



ie gudglie, 


quails, 


ifagiani) 


pheasants. 


un gallindccio, 


a cock turkey. 


utl oca, 


a goose. 


un p.dpero, 


a gosling. 


un' dnilra, 


a duck. 


una lepre, 


a hare. 


un coniglio, 


a rabbit. 


un porcoy 


a hog. 


an porchetto, 


a roasting pig* 


un cinghiale. 


a wild boar. 


un cervo, 


a stag. 


un cosciotto, 


a leg of mutton. 


un lombo di vitello, 


a loin of veal. 


una spaWta di castrato. 


a shoulder of mutton 


una braciuola, 


a steak. 


U uhaggiumc, 


game.' 


Per condirc le viva*nde. 


To season meat v. 


Del sale, 


salt. 


Del pepe, 


nepper. 


deW oglio, 


oil. 


deW aceto, 


vinegar* 


deW agresto. 


verjuice. 


della mostardd) 


mustard. 


dei garofani, 


cloves. 


della cannella, 


cinnamon. 


dei cdppari) 


capers. 


del lauroy 


laurel. 


deifunghi, 


mushrooms. 


dei tartufoli, 


truffles. 


delle cipolle, 


onions. 


degli scalogni. 


shalots. 


un dglio, 


garlick. 


del Idrdo, 


bacon. 


dei merdngoli, 


oranges. 


dei limoni, 


lemons. 


del prezzemolo, 


parsley. 


delle cipolleUe x 


young onions. 


delle uova, 


c gg s - 




N'4f 



Per 



292 A VOCAB 


ULARY of WORDS 


Per 1'insalata. 




For a salad 


DelV erbe, 


herbs. 


dcW indivia, 


endive. 


iclla lettuga, 


lettuce. 


de' selleri, 


celery. 


del cerfogtio, 


charvel. 


del cresciene, 

Per i giorni magri. 


cresses. 


For fast- day s. 


Del butirrOy 


butter. 


del latte, 


milk. 


delle udva da here, 


eggs in the shell. 


delle uova affogatc. 


poached eggs. 


una frittdta, 


an omelet. 


dei gambkri, 


crawfish. 


un hiccio, 


a pike. 


un cdrpic, 


a carp. 


una trotciy 


a trout. 


una sogliola, 
un' anguilla, 
una tinea, 


a sole. 


an*eel. 


a tench. 


uno storione, 


a sturgeon. 


un aringa, 


an herring. 


delle ostriche. 


oysters. 


del salmone, 


salmon. 


del merluzzo, 


cod-fish. 


delle alici, 


anchovies. . 


dei piselU, 


peas. 


deW fdve, 


beans. 


degli spindci, 


spinage. 


dei carciofoli, 


artichokes. 


degli spdragiy 


asparagus. 


dei cdvolij 


cabbages. 


dei broccoli, 


sprouts. 


dei cdvoli Jiori, 


cauliflowers. 


del jtnocehio. 


fennel. 


un arigusia, 


a lobster. 


Perde frutta. 


For the dessert. 


Delle mela, 


apples. 


delle pere. 


pears. 






dilk 



NECESSARY TO BI KNOWN. 



29$ 



delle persiche, 


peaches. 


dei bricocoli t 


apricots. 


delle cerdse, 


cherries. 


delle uvespine, 


gooseberries. 


deifichi, 


figs, 
plumbs. 


delle susine, u 


angeliebe, 


« raspberries. 


delle live, 


grapes, 
fritters. 


delle fritklle, 


una torta, 


a tart. 


dei zuccherini, 


sugar-phimbs. 


dei confetti, 


sweet-meats. 


delle noci, 


nuts. 


delle nocciuole, 


filberts. 


delle castdgne, 


chesnuts. 


dille mdndolc, 


almonds. 


delle nespole, 


medlars. 


delle more, 


blackberries. 


delle cotogne, 


quinces. 


delle melagrdne, 


pomegranates. 


dei meldngoli di Portogdllo, 


Portugal oranges. 


delle ulive, 


olives. 


delle more, 


mulberries. 


Gradi di parentado. 


Degrees ofkindned. 


// padre, 


the father. 


la mddre, 


the mother. 


F dvo, 


the grandfather. 


V dva, 


the grandmother. 


il bisdvo, 


the great-grandfather. 


la bis dva, 


the great-grandmother. 


zlfiglio, 


the son. 


la figlia, 


the daughter. 


ilfratello, 


the brother. 


la sorella, 


the sister. 


il primogemto, 


the eldest son. 


il cadet to, 


the youngest son.- 


il zio, 


the uncle. 


la zia, 


the aunt. 




n 5 ilmpoteif. 



29* 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



il nipote, 
la nipote, 
il pronipote, 
la pronip6t€ y 
il cugino, 
la cugina, 
il cogndto, 
la cogndta, 
il suocero, 
la suocera 9 
iljiglidstrO) 
la figMdstra, 
il nipotino, 
la nipotina, 
i genitoriy 

lo SpOSOy 

la sposa 7 

consorte, masc. & fern. 

ilfratello uterino, 

bastdrdo, 

il compare^ 

la corny are y 

il jiglioccio, 

la Jiglioccia, 

il sdntolo, 

la s ant ola, 

una donna di pdrto y 

la bdtta, 

la levatrke, 

il parente, 

la parente, 

VamicOy 

V arnica, 

il nemico, 

la nemica, 

un vcdovo, 

una vedova^ 

Pcrede,* 

Ferede, 

il pupillo, 

lapupilla, 



the nephew. 

the niece. 

the nephew's son. 

the niece's daughter. 

the cousin. 

the female cousin. 

ti C i brother-in-law. 

the sister-in-law. 

the father-in-law. 

the mother-in-law. 

the son-in-law. 

the daughter-in-law. 

the grand-son. 

the grand-daughter. 

the fathers and mothers. 

the spouse, masc. 

the spouse, fan. 

a consort. 

a twin brother. 

a bastard. 

a he-gossip. 

a she-gossip. 

a god-son. 

a god-daughter. 

the god-father. 

the god-mother. 

a lying-in woman. 

the nurse. 

a midwife. 

a relation. 

a female relation. 

a friend. 

a female friend. 

an enemy, masc. 

a female enemy. 

a widower. 

a widow. 

an heir. 

an heiress. 

a pupil, :nasc. 

a female pupil. 



NECESSARY TO BE KWOWIT, 



£95 



un parentddo, 
il matrimonio, 
lo sposalizio, 



an alliance, 
marriage, 
a wedding. 



Degli stati dell* no mo e dolla 

donna. 
L'aomOj 
la donna, 

un" uomo attempdto, 
una donna attempdta, 
un vecchio, 
una vecchia, 
un giovane, 
una giovan?, 
il ddmo, 
la ddmay 
il marito, 
la moglie, 

an bambino, masc. 7 
una bambina^ fern. ) 
un ragdzzo, 
un raggazzino, 
unafanciullina, 
una zittella, 
una vergine, 
il padrone, 
la padrona, 
il servo, 
la serva, 
il cittadino, 
il contadino, 
il forestiero, 
un barone, 
un monelloy 
un Indro, 



Quel che bisogna per 
vestirsi. 
Un vestito, 
un cappello 7 



Of the conditions of man and 

.woman, 
a man. 
a woman, 
an aged man. 
an aged woman, 
an old man. 
an old woman, 
a young man. 
a young girl, 
a spark, 
a mistress. 
a husband* 
a wife. 

an infant. 

a boy. 

a little feoy. 

a little girl, 

a maid. 

a virgin. 

a master. 

a mistress. 

a man servant. 

a female servant 

a citizen. 

a countryman. 

a stranger. 

a rogue. 

a sharper. 

a thief. 



What is necessary for dressing 

oneself, 
a suit of clothes, 
a hat. 

N 6 h 



296 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



lefdlde, 
un cordone, 
una perruccci) 
una cravdtta, 
unferrajolo, 
un giustacore, 
le calzette, 
le sottecalzette, 
gli scarping 
le scdrpe, 
le pianelle, 
una camicia, 
una camiciola, 
una veste, 
lima mdmca, 
h manickette, 
una berretta, 
una zimdrra, 
una saccdccia, 
it borsellino, 



the brims. 

a hat-band. 

a wig. 

a cravat. 

a coat. 

a close coat. 

stockings. 

under-stockings. 

the pumps. 

the shoes. 

the slippers. 

a shirt, 

an under-waistcoat 

a vest. 

a sleeve. 

the ruffles. 

a cap. 

a night-gown. 

a pocket. 

the fob. 



Con i vestiti bisogna, 
Dttk fetiucie, 
de' jnerlefti, 
dei bottom,' 
dSUe bottom ere, 
della frdngia, 
dei gudnti, 
unfazzoletto, 
■una jnostru, 
un manieotto, 
delle fibbie, . 
delle Itgdccie, '- 
un' anello % 
un pettine y 



With clothes, we must hav 
ribbons, 
lace, 
buttons, 
button-holes, 
fringe, 
gloves. 

a handkerchief. 
a watch. 
a muff, 
buckles, 
garters. 
a ring. 
a comb. 



Per quei che montano a 
cavallo. 
La spdda. 



For those that rids on horse- 
back. 
a sword, 

il 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWlf. 



297 



il pendone, 
una cintura, 
le pistole, 
la briqlia, 
la sella, 
le stdffe, 
la frusta, 
gli stivdli, 
gli speroni, 
la ginocehiera, 
la rotella, 
la gdmba, 
la suola, 
il calcdgno, 



a belt. 

a girdle. 

the pistols. 

a bridle. 

a saddle. 

the stirrups. 

the whip. 

the boots. 

the spurs. 

the top of the boot. 

the rowel of the spurs. 

the leg. 

the sole. 

the heel. 



Per le donne, 
Una eujfia, 
una gonnella, 
il busto, 
il grembidle, 
una mdschera, 
un velo, 
gli orecchini, 
i ricci, 
cartone, 
un venidglio, 
una stecca, 
gli smanigli, 
Tappareccial ojo, 
le spille, 
il gomitolo, 
le forbid, 
il ditdle, 
Vdgo, 
ilfilo, 
il liscio, 
le mosche, 
deque odorifcre, 
delta polvere, 
lo spillo di testa, 



For the ladies. 
a cap or head-dress, 
a petticoat. 

the stays. 

the apron. 

a mask. 

a veil. 

bobs. , 

the curls. 

pasteboard. 

a fan. 

a busk. 

bracelets. 

the toilet. 

pins. 

a pincushion. 

a pair of scissars. 

a thimble. * 

a needle. 

thread. 

paint. 

patches. 

sweet waters. 

powder. 

a bodkin. 



Vacconcicitiim 



29* 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



Vaceonciatura di capo, 

la scdfola, 

delle giqje, 

un giojello, 

un diamante, 

uno smerdldo, 

un rubino, 

una perla, 

uno stuzzicadenti, 

della tela, 

una conocchia, 

ilfuso, 

seta, 

land, 

deW dmido 9 

del sapone, 

lo stuccio, 



a head-dress, 
a box. 
jewels, 
a jewel, 
a diamond, 
an emerald, 
a ruby. 
a pearl, 
a tooth-pick, 
linen, 
a distaff, 
the spindle, 
silk. 
wool. . 
starch, 
soap, 
a case. 



Delle parti del corpo. 
La testa, 
il viso, 
la f route, 
gli occhi, 
le ciglia, 
le palpebre, 
la pupillcty 
le orecchie, 
i capelli, 
It tempia, 
le gudncie, 
il ndso, 
le narici, 
la bdrba, 
la bocca, 
i denti, 
la lingua, 
le labbra, 
ilpaldto, 
le basette, 
il mento, 
il collo, 



Of the parts of the body, 
the head, 
the face, 
the forehead, 
the eyes, 
the eye-brows, 
the eye-lids, 
the eye- ball, 
the ears, 
the hair, 
the temples, 
the cheeks, 
the nose, 
the nostrils, 
the beard, 
the mouth, 
the teeth, 
the tongue, 
the lips. 

the roof of the mouth, 
whiskers, 
the chin. 
the neck. 



la 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN, 



299 



la gola, 
le spdlle, 
le brdccia, 
il gomito, 
ilpugno % 
la mdno, 
il dito 9 
il polso, 
le unghie, 
lo stomaco, 
il petto, 
le zinne, 
il ventre, 
le coste, 
Vumbilico, 
il pettignone, 
le coscie t 
le ginocchia, 
la gdmba, 

la polpa delta gamba, 
la noce delpiede, 
il collo del piede, 
il piede, 
il calcdgno, 
la ciera, 
la complessione, 
Vdria, 

il portamento, 
la grassezza, 
la magrezza, 
la statura, 
V andatura, 
il gesto, 
il cervello, 
il sdngue, 
* le vene, 
le arterie, 
i nervi, 
i muscoli, 
la pelle, 
il cudre, 



the throat. 

the shoulders. 

the arms. 

the elbow, 

the wrist. 

the hand. 

the finger. 

the thumb. 

the nails. 

the stomach. 

the bosom. 

the breasts. 

the belly. 

the ribs, 

the navel. 

the groin, 

the thighs. 

the knees. 

the legs. 

the calf of the leg, 

the ancle-bone. 

the instep. 

the foot. 

the heel. 

the mien. 

the complexion. 

the air. 

the demeanour. 

the fatness. 

the leanness. 

the stature, 

the gait. 

the gesture. 

the Brain. 

the blood. 

the veins. 

the arteries. 

the nerves. 

the muscles. 

the skin. 

tke hear*. 



il 



300 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



ilfegato, 


the liver. 


il polmone, 


the lungs. 


la vescica, 


the bladder. 


ilfiile, 


the gall. 


la saliva, 


the spittle. 


il sudore, 


the sweat. 


la tosse, 


a cough. 


il catdrro, 


the rheum. 


ilfidto, 


the breath. 


la voce, 


the voice. 


la parola, 


the speech. 


il sospiro, 


a sigh. 


la vista, 


the sight. 


Vudito, 


the hearing. 


V odor at o, 


the smell.. 


il gusto, 


the taste. 


il sentimento, 


the opinion. 


Per studiare. 


For studying 


Jl gabinetto, 


the closet. 


un libro, 


a book. 


la carta, 


the paper. 


unfoglio, 


a leaf. 


una pdgina, 


a page. 


la coperta del libro, 


the cover of a book 


una pcnna, 


a pen. 


V incltiostro, 


ink. 


tin calamdjo, 


an ink- stand- 


un temperino, 


a pen-knife. 


lo spdgo, 


packthread. 


la polvere, 


powder. 


il polverino, 


the powder-box. 


la cera, 


the wax. 


un sigilfo, 


a seal. 


una lettera, 


a letter. 


un biglletto, 


a billet. 


la scrittura, 


the writing. 


il ricordo, 


the pocket-book. 


la cartapecora, * 


parchment. 


il ptnniilo, 


the pencil. 












NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



301 



una itzione, 
una traduzione, 
un tenia, 
una carte.Ua, 



Stromenti di musics. 
Un violino, 
una viola, 
un fiauto, 
un zuffolo,. 
una zampogna, 
una piva, 
una chitdrra, 
un clavicembalo^ 
una spinetta, 
un liuto, 
un' drpa, 
VorganO) 
una tromba,) 
un lambtirO) 



a lesson. 

a translation. 

a theme. 

a case for papers. 



Instruments of music* 
a violin, 
a bass-viol, 
a flute, 
a flageolet, 
a bagpipe, 
a hautboy, 
a guitar, 
a harpsichord, 
a spinet, 
a lute, 
a harp, 
an organ, 
a trumpet, 
a drum. 



Delle parti d611a casa. 
La casa, 

la porta, 
la camera, 
Vanticamera r 
la sdla, 
il gab ink to, 
la fenestra^ 
le invitridte, 
la cucina 7 
il cortile, 
il pozzo, 
la stdlla, 
la cantina, 
la scdiay 
le scale, 
il giardino, 
la font ana, 
la dispensa^ 



Of the parts of the house. 
the house. 
the gate, 
the chamber, 
the anti- chamber. 
the hall. 
the study, 
the window, 
the glasses, 
the kitchen, 
the yard, 
the well, 
the stable, 
the cellar, 
the stair-case, 
the stairs. 
the garden, 
the fountain, 
the pantry. 



302 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



ilprimo piano, 

il secondo piano. 

il terrdzzo, 

la soffkta, 

il tetto, 

le tegole, 

le gronddje, 

il muro, 

il camino, 

i mattom, 

il pdlco, 

la rimessa, 

ilforno, 

la trove, 

i travicelU, 

le tdvole, 

Vinsegna, 

lapigione, 

il gesso, 

la calcdna, 

il mdrrno, 

la pietra, 

il colombqjo, 

il polldjo t 



the first story. 

the second story, 

the terrace. 

the garrets 

the roof. 

the tiles. 

(he gutters. 

the wall. 

the chimney. 

the bricks. 

the floor. 

the coach-house. 

the oven. 

the beam. 

the joists. 

the planks. 

the sign. 

the rent. 

the plastering. 

the lime. 

the marble. 

the stone. 

the pigeon-house. 

the hen-house. 



I mobili della camera. 
La tapezzeria, 
lo specchio, 
il letto, 
le lenzudla, 
il materdsso, 
il coltricc, 
il pagliariccio, 
il capezzdle, 
il sopracielo del letto, 
le cortine, 
la bandinella, 
la coperta, 
il guancidle, 



The furniture of a chan&cr, 

the hangings. 

a looking-glass. 

the bed. 

the sheets. 

the mattress. 

the feather-bedv 

a straw-bed. 

the bolster. 

the tester of the bed. 

the curtains. 

the head curtain. 

the counterpane. 

the pillow. 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN* 



303 



le verghe, 
'a sponda del letlo, 
lo scaldaletto, 
i quddri) 
lu cornice, 
le sedie, 

una sedia d'appoggio, 
la t avola, 
il tappeto, 
la credenza, - 
un paravento, 
una cdssa, 
un baiile, 
una cassetta, 
la ricamatura, 
la pittura, 
I' indoratura, 
la scollura, 
( un busto, 
un piedestdllo, 
un vdso, 
una gdbbia, 
un y ucello, 
un rirdttiOy 



the curtain-rods, 
the bed-side. 
the warming-pan. 
the pictures, 
the frame, 
the chairs, 
an arm chair, 
the table, 
the carpet, 
a cupboard, 
a screen, 
a box. 
a trunk, 
a tittle box. 
embroidery, 
tfre painting, 
the gilding, 
the carving, 
a figure. 
a pedestal, 
a vessel, 
a cage, 
a bird. 
a portrait. 



Quel che si irova intorno 
al cam mi no. 
La porcelldna, 
un' lima, 
un vdw, 
imfuoco, 

I carbone, 

e cenere, 
ilfocoldre, 
un tizzone, 
unpezzo di le^na, 
unafascina di'iegna grossa, 
un soffietto, 
la paletta, 
le mollette^ 



JVJiat we find about the 
chimney. 
the China ware. 
an urn. 
a vessel. 
the fire, 
coals, 
ashes, 
the hearth, 
a firebrand, 
a log of wood, 
a faggot. 

a pair of bellows, 
the shovel, 
the tongs. 



deUa 



304 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



zolfarnelli, 

ilfocile, 

lapietrafocaja, 

i'esea, 

lafidmma, 

il parafuoco, 

ilfumo, 

la fuligme, 



matches, 
the steel, 
the flint, 
the tinder. 
the flame, 
a screen, 
the smoke, 
the soot. 






Quel che si tiova nella 
cucina. 
Lo spiedo, 
il voltaspiedo, 
il calddro, 
una padella, 
un trepiede, 
una graticola, 
una brocca, 
una secchia, 
una cor da, 
una girella, 
un catino, 
una pigndtta, 
una pentola, 
una cucchidra, 
una mostola, 
unaforcina, 
uno scaldavivdnde, 
un rampino, 
la catena, 
una gratuggia, 
una tort i era, 
un mortar o, 
unpistelloy 
uno sciacquatore, 
una scopa, 
uno strdccio, 
uno slrqfindccio % 



What we find in the 
kitchen. 
the spit, 
the jack, 
a kettle, 
a frying-pan. 
a trivet. 
a gridiron, 
a pitcher; 
a pail, 
a rope, 
a pulley, 
an earthen pan. 
a great pot. 
a pot. 
a spoon, 
a ladle. 
a fork. 

a chafing-dish, 
a hook. 

the pot-hanger, 
a grater, 
a pudding-pan. 
a mortar, 
a pestle, 
the sink. 
a broom, 
a rag. 
a dish-clout. 

Quel 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN, 



305 



si trova nella 
ntina. 



Si. 

Vln J, 

97238 r. OVO) 

vin rdvso, 

vin bianco, 

bin chiarettOj 

vino guastOy 

aceto, 

m6sto, 

un martello, 

metter mono ad una botte , 

cavdr vino, 



What we find in the 
cellar. 
a butt, 
a barrel. 
a funnel, 
a hoop, 
the dregs, 
wine, 
beer, 
cider, 
old wine, 
new wine, 
red wine, 
white wine. 
claret. 
sour wine, 
vinegar. 
sweet wine, 
a hammer. 
to tap a butt. 
to draw wine. 



Quel che si trova intorno 


What is found about a 


alia porta. 


gate. 


La chidve, 


the key. 


ki serratura, 


the lock. 


il catendcciOy 


the bolt. 


il saliscendi, 


the latch. 


il chiavistello, 


the bolt. 


i riscontriy 


the wards of a lock. 


il battitojo, 


the knocker. 


la campanula, 


the bell. 


la stdgna, 


the bar. 


il sdglio, 


the threshold. 


? gdngheri, 


the hinges. 



Quel che si trova nf Ha stalls. 

delfieno, 

delta bidduy 



What we find in the stable* 
hay. 
oats. 

delle 



\ 



SOS 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



dUla paglia, 


straw. 


una rastelhera, 


a rack. 


una mangiatoja^ 


a manger. 


la semola, 


the bran. 


il pettine, 


the comb. 


la striglia, 


the curry-comb. 


un vdglio, 


a' sieve. 


la briglia, 


the bridle. 


la sella, 


the saddle. 


il pettordle, 


the breast-plate. 


le cinghie, 


the girths. 


il cavicchio, 


the fetlocks. 


un chiodo, 


a nail. 


V arcione, 


the saddle-bow. 


una cavezza, 


a halter. 


il mozzo di stdlla, 


the groom. 


i cavdlli, 


the horses. 


la carrozza, 


the coach. 


un cdrro, 


a waggon. 


una carrjtta 9 


a cart. 


Quel che si trova nel giar- 


Wh a t is fovnd in the garden 


dino, i fiori, e gli alberi. 


the flowers, and the trees. 


Una spalliera, 


a row of wall-trees. 


una pergola, 


an arbour. 


una rosa, 


a rose. 


un gehomeno, 


a jessamin. 


dei garofani, 


pinks. 


delle tulipe, del tulipdni, 


tulips. 


dei gigli. 


lilies, 


delle -dole, 


violets. 


delle viole mammole, 


gilliflowers. 


delle gionchiglie, 


jonquils. 


dei papdveriy 


poppies. 


unpomdro, 


an apple-tree. 


un pero, 


a pear-tree. 


un ciregio, 


a cherry-tree. 


un susino, 


a plumb-tree. 


un bricocolo, 


an apricot- tree, 


un persico, 


a peach-tree. 



u 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



307 



un mora, 

unfico, 

un ulivo, 

il bosso, 

il lauro, 

V dbete, 

la querela , 

ilfdggio, 

Vormo, 

Vuva spina, 

I'ardncio, 

un rosdio, 

il semindrio, 

la vite, 

Vedera, 

un rdmo, 

un mdndorlo, 

un vidle, 

un boschetto, 

V6mbra 9 

il fresco, 

lafontdna, 

i canali, 

un cespugllo, 

tin mirto, 

la maggiordna,, 

del timo, 

la verdura, 

un mdzzo dijiorl, 



a mulberry-tree, 

a fig-tree. 

an olive tree. 

the box- tree. 

the laurel-tree. 

the fir-tree. 

the oak. 

the beech -tree. 

the elm. 

the gooseberry-tree. 

the orange tree. 

a rose-bush. 

the nursery. 

the vine. 

ivy. 

a branch. 

an almond-tree. 

an alley. 

a little wood. 

the shade. 

the cool. 

the fountain. 

the canals. 

a bush. 

a myrtle-tree. 

sweet-marjoram. 

thyme. 

verdure. 

a nose-gay. 



Dignita. temporali. 
Un imperatore, 
una imperatrice, 
un re, 
una regina, 
il delfino, 
il delfina, 
ilprincipe, 
la princtpessa, 
il ducca, 



Temporal dignities. 
an emperor, 
an empress, 
a king. 
a queen, 
the dauphin, 
the dauphiness. 
the prince, 
the princess. 
the duke. 



la 



308 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



la duchessa, 


the duchess. 


il marchese, 


the marquis. 


la marchesa, 


the marchioness. 


il conte, 


the earl. 


la contessa, 


the countess. 


il bar one, 


the baron. 


la haronessa, 


the baroness 


lamhascia dore, 


the am!: 


Vambasciadrice, 


the ambasi s. 


il governatore, 


the governoi 


la govematrice , 


the governor's lady. 


un invidto, 


an envoy. 


un residence, 


a resident. 


un agente, 


an agent. 


un marescidllo di Francia, 


a marshal of France. 


il capocdccia, 


the grand veneur, or chief 




hunter. 


Caricheed ufficiali di 


Offices, and officers of 


giustizia. 


justice. 


II canceltiere, 


the chancellor. 


il custdde di sigilli, 


the keeper of the seals. 


il segretdrio di stdto, 


the secretary of state. 


Vintendente, 


the surveyor. 


il tesoriere,. 


the treasurer. 


il presidente, 


the president. 


il consigliere, 


the counsellor. 


il maestro delle suppliche, 


the master of requests. 


il mahtro de conti, 


the master of accounts. 


il giudice, 


thejudge. 


il console, 


the consul. 


il luogotenente civile, 


the civil magistrate. 


il luogotenente criminate, 


the criminal magistrate. 


il podesa, 


the mayor. 


lo schiavino, 


the alderman. 


V avvocdto, 


the advocate. 


il procurator*, 


the attorney. 


il procurator Jiscdle, 


the attorney general. 


un sostituto, 


a deputy. 


un notdro, 


a notary. 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN, 



309 



un segrelano, 

un sollicitalore, 

una scrivdno, 

un copista, 

f use i ere, 

il sergente, il cursors, 

un cast ode di <;4rcere 9 

un lid gal ore, 

un prigioniere, 



I 



a secretary. 

a solicitor. 

a clerk. 

a hackney-writer. 

a door-keeper. 

the serjeant. 

a jailor. 

a pleader. „ 

a prisoner, 



Officiali di guerra. 
// generate, 
P ammirdglio, 
il luogotenenle di cdmpo, • 
un warescidlh di cdmpo, 
un brigadier -e, 
il colonello, 
un maestro di cdmpo, 
il viaggiore, 
I'ajutdnte maggiofe, 
il capiidno, 
il luovotenente, 
il cornetta, 
r alfitre, 
il serge Me, 
il capordle, 
un sottocapordlc, 
unforrere maggiore, 
un commissdrio, 
unforriere, 
un cavaliere, 
un fanfaccino, 
il cavalleggiero, 
un drag one, 
un moschetiiere, 
un trombettiere, trombetta, 
un tamburino, 
il pifaro, 
la sentinella, 
] a rondo* 



Officers ofivar* 
the general, 
the admiral, 
the lieutenant-general, 
a field-marshal, 
a brigadier, 
the colonel, 
a camp- master, 
the major, 
the adjutant, 
the captain. 
the lieutenant, 
the cornet: 
the ensign. 
the sergeant, 
the corporal, 
the under-corporal, 
a quarter-master, 
a commissary, 
a 1 harbinger. 
a horse-man. 
a foot-soldier, 
the light-horse, 
a dragoon, 
a musqueteer. 
a trumpeter, 
a drummer, 
the piper v 
the sentineh 
the round. 



© 



310 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



la pattuglia, 
una spia, 
un guastatore, 
un cannonicre, 
un minatore, 
gli avventurieri, 
i fdnti perduti, 



L'esercito. 
Un esercito, 
una armdta, 
il corpo di batldglia, 
la vangicdrdia, 
la retrogudrdia, 
il corpo di reserva, ' 
un cdmpo voldnte, 
la cavallcria, 
lafanteria, 
iino squadrone, 
un battaglione, 
la prima f da, or schiera, 
la secondafua, 
il bagdgl'io, 
il cannone, 
le tende, 
il padiglione, 
un regiment o, 
ima compagnia, 
un presidio, or guarmgione, 



Le fortificazioni. 
Una cittd, 
la cittadclla, 
un forte, 
una fort ezza, 
un castcllo, 
le mura, 
ilfosso, 
una palizzdta, uno steccdto % 



the patrole. 

a spy. 

a pioneer. 

a cannoneer. 

a miner. 

volunteers. 

the foriorn-hope. 



The army. 
a land army, 
a fleet. 

the main body, 
the van-guard, 
the rear-guard, 
the body of reserve. 
a flying-camp, 
the horse. 
the foot, 
a squadron, 
a battalion, 
the first rank, 
the second rank, 
the baggage, 
the cannon, 
the tents, 
the pavilion, 
a regiment, 
a company, 
a garrison. 



The fortifications* 
a city, 
the citadel, 
a fort, 
a fortress. 
a castle, 
the walls, 
the ditch, 
a paliisado. 



la 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



3U 



la cortina, 

la mezza I una, 

la casamdtta, 

la stdda coperta, 

un foriino, 

le trinciere, 

una mina, 

una contramina, 

una torre, 

un parapetto, 

il terrapie.no, 

una pidtta forma, 

un cavalitro, 

un bast i one, 

provision} da bocca, 

prozdsioni da guerra* 

un assedio, 

le capitolazioni, 

i soccorsi, 

una sortita, . 

urf assdlto, 



the curtain. 

the half moon. 

the casement. 

the covered way. 

a redoubt. 

the trenches. 

a mine. 

a counter- mine. 

a tower. 

a parapet. 

the rampart, 

a platform. 

a horseman. 

a bastion. 

provision. 

ammunition. 

a siege. 

the capitulations, 

succours. 

a sally. 

a storm. 



Profession!, e mjestieri, 
V'no stampatore, 
un medico, 
un cerusico, 
wio spezidle, 
un barbiere, 
un forndro, 
un pasticciere, 
un rosticciere, 
un marcelldro, 
un oste, 
un mercdnte, 
un sari ore, 
un caholdro, 
un ciabattino, 
un cappelldro, 
un mercidio, 
un selldjo, 



Professions, and trades, 
a printer, 
a physician, 
a surgeon, 
an apothecary. 
a barber, 
a baker. 
a pastry cook. 
a cook that roasts, 
a butcher, 
an innkeeper. 
a merchant, 
a taylor. 
a shoemaker, 
a cobler. 
a hatmaker* 
a mercer. 
a sadler. 

O 2 



m 



312 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



un tnaliscdlco, 

uno scultore in rame, 

un scultore, inlagliatore, 

un pittore, 

un ricamalore, 

unfalegndme^ 

un ?narangone 9 

un muratore, 

un magndno, un chiavdro, 

un molini.ro, 

ima lavanddra, 

un orologidro, 

un' ore/ice, 

un tapezziere, 

un rigattiere, 

un guantdjo, 

un commedidnte, 

un musico, 

uno spaddro, 

ima scuffidrd, 

unfacchino, 

un vetrdiO) . , 



a farrier. 

an engraver in brass, 

an engraver. 

a painter. 

an embroiderer. 

a joiner. 

a carpenter. 

a mason. 

a locksmith. 

a miller. 

a washer-woman. 

a watchmaker. 

a goldsmith. 

an upholsterer. 

a broker. 

a glover. 

a player. 

a musician. 

a sword-cutler. 

a milliner. 

a porter. 

a glazier. 



Officiali di casa. 
Un lacche, 
lino staffl ere. 
il poggio, 
il cocchiero, 
il palafreniero, 
la serva, 
la cameriera, 
il earner ierc, 

lo scudiere, il cavalierizzo, 
lo scdlco, 
il coppiere, 
il cantiniere, 
il credenziere, 
il maestro di edsa, 
il sacretdrio, 
il cappelidno, 



Officers of the house. 
a- running footman, 
a footman, 
the page, 
the coachman, 
the groom, 
the maid-servant, 
the chamber-maid, 
the waiting-man. 
the gentleman of the horse 
the carver, 
the cupbearer, 
the butler. 

the cupboard-keeper, 
the steward, 
the secretary, 
the almoner. 

il 






NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



31S 



il gentiluomo, 
V intend'ente, 
il ctwco, 
il giardiniere, 
il vignaruolo, 
il padrone, 
la padrona, 



the gentleman, 
the intendant. 
the cook, 
the gardiner. 
the vine-dresser, 
the master, 
the mistress. 



Qualita, difetti, ed imper- 
fezioni dell' uomo. 
Un guercio, 
un cieco, 
un gobbo, 
un zoppo, 
uno stroppidto, 
un mancino, 
un mdnco, 
un sordo, 
un mUo, 
uno scilingudto, 
un cdlvo, 
un ndno, 
un ladro, 
un guidoae, 
un boja, 
un furfdnte, 
un ruffidno, 
un mdgo, 
uno stregone, 
una strega, 
un cattivo, 
tin tristo. 



Qualities, defects, and imper- 
fections of man. 
a one-eyed man. 
a blind man. 
a hunch-backed man. 
a lame man. 
a cripple. 

a left-handed man. 
a one-handed man. 
a deaf man. 
a dumb man. 
a stammerer. 
a bald-pated man. 
a dwarf, 
a thief. 
a rascal, 
a hangman, 
a rogue, 
a pimp. 
a magician, 
a sorcerer, 
a witch. 

a wicked fellow. 
a sad wretch. 



Buona fort una, 
disgrdzia, 
la for tuna, 
un ammaldto, 
la malattia, 
lafobbre, 



good luck, 
bad luck, 
fortune, 
a sick person, 
sickness, 
a fever. 
O 3 



la 



314, 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



la terzdna, 

ia quartana, 

il tr emtio, 

unaferita, 

una conlusione, 

hi podagra, 

i dolori colici, 

(a rosolia, 

Ie vajudle, 

V infreddatura, il catdrro, 

la losse, 

la rognuzza, la scdbbfa y 

il pizzicore, 

uri apostema^ 

la mdrcia, 

il mat dipietra, 

la renella, 

un bernoccolo, un tumore? 

lina sgraftgnatura, 

una caduta, 

una sconciatura, 

■un hvffettOj 

iino schidffoy 

■un pugno 9 

un calcio, 

T&na Jioccdta, 

una pistokttdta, 

un' archibugidta, 

uno svenimento, 

un sudor freddo, 

la morte, 



a tertian ague. 

a quartan ague. 

the cold fit. 

a wound. 

a contusion. 

the gout. 

the cholic. 

the measles. 

the small-pox, 

the rheum, 

the cough. 

the itch. 

an itching. 

an imposthumeo 

the corruption. 

the stone. 

the gravel. 

a bunch. 

a scratch. 

a fall. 

a miscarriage, 

a fillip. 

a box on the ear, " 

a cuff. 

a kick. 

a thrust with a sword, 

a pistol-shot, 

a gun-shot. 

a swooning. 

a cold sweat. 

death. 



Degli uccelli. 
'UrC dquila, 
un* uccello, 
un uccellino, 
un cardello, 
unfanello, 
un canarino, 
un verzellino 9 



Of birds. 
an eagle, 
a bird, 
a little bird, 
a goldfinch. 
a linnet, 
a canary-bird, 
a yellow hammer. 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



315 



un lucarino, 

unusignolo, 

una stomas 

unfringuello, 

una pdssera, un passcrttto, 

un pappagdllo, 

un ?nerlo, 

una gdzza, 

una giuanddja, 

un tort ore lb, 

una tortorella^ 



a goldfinch. 

a nightingale, 

a starling. 

a chaffinch. 

a sparrow. 

a parrot. 

a blackbird. 

a magpye. 

a jay. 

a cock turtle clove. 

a hen turtle dove. 



De' quadrupedi. 
Un cd?ie, 
un cagnolino, 
una cagnolina, 
un gdtto 9 una gdtta, 
un sorciOf 
un tdpo, un soreio, 
una scimia, 
una pecora, 
un porco, 
una scro/df 
una volpe, 
un lupo 9 
un toroy 

un rnulo, una mula, 
un cammelo, 
una cdpra 9 
urf ekfdnte 9 
un leone, 
tin Icopdrdo, 
una tigre, 
Un cavdllo, 



Of four-footed animals. 
a dog. 
a little dog. 
a little bitch.' 
a boar cat, a she cat. 
a mouse, 
a rat. 
an ape. 
a sheep, 
a hog. 
a sow. 
a fox. 
a wolf, 
a bull. 

a mulej masc. zn&fem. 
a camel, 
a she-goat, 
an elephant, 
a lion, 
a leopard, 
a tyger. 
a horse. 






Degli animali rettili, ed Of reptiles and insects^ 

insetti. 
Un rospo, „ a toad. 

una ranoechia, rdna y a frog. 

O 4« una 



!6 



A VOCABULARY of \VORDS 



una lucertola, 


a lizard. 


una lumdca, 


a snail. 


una ckiocciota, 


a beetle. 


un scorpione, 


a scorpion, 


an rdgno, 


a spider. 


tin serpenie, una biscia, 


a serpenr. 


una farfdlla, 


a butterfly. 


una mosca, 


a fly. 


una zanzdra, zanzdla, 


a gnat. 


un uruco, 


a caterpillar, 


un vtrme, un lombrico, 


a worm. 


un pidocchio, 


a louse. 


U7i pulce, 


a flea. 


un citnice, 


a bug. 


una Undine, 


a nit. 


una formica. 


an ant. 


una tartaruga, 


a tortoise. 


Quel che si vede in cam- 


What one sees in the 


pagna. 


country. 


La sirdddi 


the road. 


la strdda maestra, 


the high-way. 


una pianura, 


a plain. 


una vdlle, 


a valley. 


una montdgna, 


a mountain. 


unpoggio, un colle, 


a little hill. 


un bosco, 


a wood. 


una selva, 


a forest. 


una f ratio, or siepe, 


a hedge. 


un cespuglio, 


a bush. 


un' dlbero, 


a tree. 


un rdmo, 


a branch. 


del grdno, 


corn. 


dtlformento, 


wheat. 


ddV orzo, 


barley. 


della bidda, delV avena, 


oats. 


una vigna) 


a vine. 


un giardino, 


a garden. 


un vidle, 


an alley, or walk. 


un caste.Uo, 


a castle. 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



317 



un campanile. 


a sfeeple.- 


un prdto, 


a meadow. 


un Idgo, 


a lake. 


lino stdgiio, 


a pond. 


un dirupo, 


a rock. 


un f 6 iso, 


a ditch. 


un ruscello, 


a brook. 


un fiume, 


a river. 


un poite, 


a bridge. 


una bdrca, 


a bark. 


una palude, pantdne, 


a marsh. 


un panidno, 


a slough. 


una terra, 


a village. 


un borgo, 


a town. 


Quel che si vede nelia 


What ivc see ir 


citta. 




Up date, 


the bridge. 


la porta, 


the gate. 


la strdda, 


the street. 


la cdsa, 


the house. 


il paldzzo, 


the pa face: 


to chiesa, 


the church. 


'il convento, 


the convent. 


lo sped die, , 


the hospital. 


il mercdto, 


the market. 


la fiera, 


the fair. 


la piazza d' drme, 


the place of arms 


la bottega, 


the shop. 


la dogma, 


the custom-house. 


la prigione, 


the prison. 


la font ana, 


the fountain. 


I colori. 


Colours. 


II bianco, 


white. 


il nero, 


black. 


il rosso, 


red. 


il verde, 


green. 


il gidllo, 


yellow. 




- O 5 









318 



A VOCABULARY of WORDS 



il turchino, 


blue. ^ 


ilfior di lino, 


gridelin. 


il bigio, 


grey. 


il pavondzzo, 


violet-colour. 


V incarndto, 


carnation. 


il color di fuoco, 


fire-colour. 


il cavallino,f6glia morta, 


fillemont. 


V olivdstro, 


olive- colour. 


il color di pdglia, 


straw-colour. 


il cremefino, 


crimson. 


il leondto, 


dun- colour. 


I metalli. 


Of metals. 


L'oro, 


gold. 


Vargcnto, 


silver. 


ilferro, 


iron. 


il pionibo, 


lead. 


il bronzo, 


cast copper. 


il rdme, 


brass. 


il rdme gidllo, 


copper. 


fottone, 


yellow brass. 


to stdgno, 


tin, or pewter. 


il mercurio, argento vivo, 


quicksilver. 


la calamita, 


a loadstone. 


la lacia, 


tin. 


il zolfo, 


brimstone. 


il verderame, 


verdigrease. 


il vitro, 


glass. 


Delle nazioni. 


Of nations. 


Jtalidno, an Italian. 


Borgognone, a Burgundian, 


Tedesco, a German. 


Suizzero, a Switzer. 


Francese, a Frenchman. 


Piemontese, a Piedmontese. 


Spagmioh, a Spaniard. 


Suedcse, a Swede. 


fortoghese, a Portuguese. 


Poldcco, a Polander. 


Jnglese, an Englishman. 


U'ngdro, a Hungarian. 


Irlandcse, an Irishman. 


Danese, a Dane. 


Scozzise, a Scotchman. 


Maltese, a Maltese. 


Olimdese* a Dutchman* 


Turco, a Turk. 



Fiamingo, 



NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



319 



Flamingo, a Fleming. 
Lorencse, a Lorrainer. 

La data delle lettere. 
II primo, 
i due, di due, 
i tre, di tre, 
i qudttro, ai qudttro, 
i cinque, ai cinque, 
i sei, ai sei, 
i sette, ai sette, 
gli otto, dgli otto, 
i nove, ai nove, 
i died, ai died, 
gli undid, dgli undid, 
i do did, ai do did, 
i tredici, ai tredici, 
i quattordici, ai quattordici 
i quindici, ai quindici, 

sedici, ai 16, 

diccisette, ai 17, 

dieciotto, ai IS, 

diecinove, ai 19, 

vend, ai 20, ; 

/ vent' lino, ai 2 1 , 

vend due, ai 22, 

venti tre, ai 23, 

venti qitdttro, ai 24, 

venti cinque, ai 25, 

venti sei, ai 26, 

venti sette, ai 27, 

venti otto, ai 28, 
i venti nove, ai 29, 
i trenC uno, ai trenC uno, 
or /' ultimo, 

One may put i, or a di, 



Tdrtaro, a Tartar. 






The date of letters, 

the first. 

the second. 

the third. 

the fourth. 

the fifth. 

the sixth. 

the seventh. 

the eighth. 

the ninth. 

the tenth. 

the eleventh. 

the twelfth. 

the thirteenth. 

the fourteenth. 

the fifteenth. 

the 16th. 

the 17th.. 

the 18 th. 

the 19th. 

the 20th. 

the 21st. 
• the 22d. 

the 23d. 

the 24th. 

the 25th. 

the 26th. 

the 27th. 

the 28th. 

the 29th. 

the 30th. 

the 3 1st; 
primo, due, tre, qudttro^ &c 



I giuochi. 
La pdlla a corda^ 
il biglidrdo, 



Tlte several games. 
tennis, 
billiards. 



G-6 



a 



dddi 



320 



A COLLECTION of VERBS, 



a' dadl, 

alle carte, 

all' ombra, 

alia basselta 9 

alia bestia, 

dgli scdcchi, a scdcchi, 

dlle dame, 

dlle trichetrdche, 

dlle piastrelle, 

dlle boccie, 

a chidma V oste, 

al voldnte, alia racchetla, 

alia ciecg, 

air oca, 



at dice. 

at cards. 

at ombre. 

at basset. 

at beast. 

at chess. 

at draughts. 

at tick-tack. 

at quoits. 

at bowls. 

an Italian game. 

a shuttlecock. 

al blind man's buff. 

a goose. 



COLLECTION 

OF 

VERBS, 



Most 



necessary to be first learnt. 



Per lo studio. 
Studlare, 
impardre, 
impardr* a merit e, 
ieggere, 
scrivere, 
scttoscri'cere, 
piegdre, 
sig'tlldre, 

fare il soprascrilto, 
eorrSggcre, 
scussdte, furtnccHdre^ 
irudurre, 
cominciare* 



For study. 
to study. 
to learn. 

to learn by heart, 
to read, 
to write. 

to sign or subscribe, 
to fold up. 
lostal. 

to put the superscription 
to correct, 
to blot out. ' , 
to translate, 
to begin. 

continudre } 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



121 



C6ntinudre y 


to go on. 


finire. 


to make an end. 


recitdre. 


to repeat. 


y&rej 


to do. 


sap ere, 


to know. 


potere t 


to be able. 


volere, 


to be willing. 


ricorddrsi, * 


to remember. 


dimenticdre, 


to forget. 


Per parlare. 


Tj speak* 


Prmmnzidre, 


to pronounce. 


accentudre. 


accent. 


proferire, 


to utter. 


dire, 


to say. 


ciarldre, 


to prattle. 


cicaldre, 


to chat. 


griddre, 


to cry out. 


aprire la bocca, 


to open one's mcutli, 


serrdre la bocca, 


to shut it. 


tacere, 


to be silent. 


chiamdre, 


to call. 


rispondere, 


to answer. 


Per bere, e mangiare. 


To drink, and eat, 


Masticdre, 


to chew. 


inghiottire, 


to swallow. 


taglidre, 


to cut. 


provdre, gustdre, 


to taste. 


sciacqudre. 


to rinse. 


here, 


to drink. 


mangiare. 


to eat. 


digiundre, 


to fast. 


far col 'a zi one, 


to breakfast. 


pnmzdre, desindre, 


to dine. 


mersnddre, 


to eat an afternoon's lun- 




cheon. 


cendre, 


to sup. 


imbriacdrsi) 


to fuddle one's self. 




satidrsij 



■I 



I 



322 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



sazidrsi, satolldrsi, 
aver fame, 
aver site, 
aver K appetito, 



Per andar' a dormire. 
Anddr al letto, 
dormire, 
vcglidre, 
risposdre, 
addormentdrsi, 
sogndre, 
rassdre, 
sveglidrsi, destdrsi, 



to fill one's self, 
to be hungry, 
to be dry. 
to have a stomach. 



hvdrsi, 



To go to sleep. 
to go to4>ed. 
to sleep, 
to watch, 
to rest, 
to fall asleep. 
to dream. 
to snore, 
to wake, 
to rise. 



Per vestirsi. 
Vestirsi, 
spoglidrsi, 
calzdrsi, 
scahdrsi, 
pettindrsi, 
acconcidrsi il capo, 
metier si la p 6 here, 
fdrsi i ricci, 
Uscidrsi, 

metter 7 suo cappello, 
coprirsi, 
abbottondrsi, 
fillacciarsi, qffibbidrsi, 



To dress one's self* 
to dress one's self. 
to undress one's self, 
to put on one's shoes. * 
to pull off one's shoes, 
to comb one's head, 
to dress one's head, 
to powder one's head, 
to curl it. 
to paint one's self. 
to put on one's hat. 
to be covered, 
to button one's self. 
to lace one's self. 



Azioni ordinarie all' 
uomo. 
Bidere, 
pidngere, 
sospirdre, 
sternutdre, 
sbadeglidre, 



The ordinary actions of 
men. 
to laugh, 
to weep, 
to sigh, 
to sneeze, 
to gape. 

SOtjich 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



zn 



sqffidre, 

fischidre, 

ascoltdre, 

odordre, 

sputdre, 

soffidrsi il ndso, 

uscir sdngue dal ndso, 

gli esce sangue dal ndso, 

suddre, 

asciugdre, 

tremdre, 

gonjidre, 

tossire, 

essere raffredddto, 

riguarddre, mi rare, 

pizzicdre, 

grattdre, 

solleticdre. 



to blow. 

to whistle. 

to hearken. 

to smell. 

to spit. 

to blow one's nose. 

to bleed at the nose. 

he bleeds at the nose. 

to sweat. 

to dry or wipe. 

to tremble. 

to swell. 

to cough. 

to have a cold * 

to look. 

to pinch. 

to scratch. 

to tickle. 






Azioni d' amore, e 
d'odio. 
Amdre, 
accarezzdre, 
lusingdre, 
far carezze, 
abbraccidre, 
bacidre, 
salutdre, 
insegndre, 
nudrire, 
correggere, 
punire, 
castigdre, 
frustdre, 
loddre, 
biasimdre, 
dare, concedere, 
negdre, 
difendere, 
strappazzdre, 



Actions of love and 
hatred. 
to love. 
to caress, 
to flatter. 

to show a kindness, 
to embrace, 
to kiss. 
to salute, 
to teach. 
to nourish. 
to correct, 
to punish, 
to chastise, 
to whip. 
to praise. 
to blame. 
to give, 
to deny. 
to forbid. 
to use ill. 

lattcre f 



324 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



bdttere, 

odidre, 

scaccidre, manddr via, 

perdondre, 

disputdre, 

contrast are, 

liiigdre, 

proteggere, ' 

abbandondre, 

bene dire, 

malt dire, 



to beat, 
to hate, 
to drive, 
to pardon, 
to dispute, 
to quarrel, 
to plead, 
to protect, 
to forsake, 
to bless. 
to curse. 



Per gli esercizj. 
Can tare, 
battdre, 

salt are, 

giuocdre, 

sonar e fa ehitdrru, 

sonar e 7 liuto, 

iirdr di spdda, 

caralcdre, montdr' a cat alio, 

giuocdr' almdglio, 

giuocdr' alia p alia a corda, 

giuoedr' d'la carte, 

giuocdr 1 a picchetto, 

giuocdr 1 all* ouibra, 

giuocdr* alia basse 'ita, 

giuocdr' a' ddd't, 

guadagndre, vincere, 

per dire, 

scommettere, 

risicdre, 

essere pace, 

scurtdre, 

mescoldre, 

ahure, 

irastulldrsi, 

scherzdre, 

burldrsi, 

■moUeirfridre, 



For diversions or exercises. 
to sing, 
to dance. 
to leap. 
to play. 

to play on the guitar, 
to play on the lute, 
to fence. 

to ride the great horse, 
to play at mall. 
to play at tennis, 
to play at cards. 
to play at picquef. 
to play at ombre, 
to play at basset. 
to play at dice. 
to win. 
to Jose. 

to lay a wager. 
to venture. 
to be quits. 
to lay out. 
to shuffle, 
to lift up. 

to divert cne's self, 
to joke, 
to laugh at. 
to make one laugh. 

sta 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



star in piedi, 
inchindrsi, 
girdre, 
\fcrmdrsi, trattenersi, 



to stand up. 

to stoop downwards. 

to turn. 

to stop. 



Per le malattie, 
Medicare 
guarire, 
star meglio, 
peggiordre, 
cavdr sdngue, 
piglldr medicina, 
pnrgdrc, 

far wi* incision?, 
fascidre, 
taglidre, 
pungere, 
tenidre, 
esamindre, 



For distempers.. 
to give one physic. 
to cure. 

to be better in health, 
to grow worse, 
to let blood, 
to take physic. 
to purge. 

to make an incision. 
to bind up. 
to cut. 
to prick. 
to probe, 
to examine. 



Per comprare. 
Bomanddre it ' prezzo, 
qudnlo vdle ? 
qudnto costa P 
prezzoldre, fare 7 prezzo, 

mercantdre. 
misurdre, 
comprare, 
pagdre, 
ojferire, 
soprajfdre, far una doman- 

da esorbitdnte, 
vender cdro, 
vender'' a buon metxdto, 
prestdre, 
torre in prestito, pigldr in 

prestito, 
impegndre, 



For buymg. 
to ask the price, 
how much is it worth, 
what does it cost ? 
to haggle. 

to measure. 

to buy. 

to pay. 

to bid or offer. 

to exact. 

to sell dear, 
to sell cheap.- 
to lend, 
to borrow. 

to pawn. 



des 



swipe gn are. 



26 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



desivipegndre,^ 

dare, 

ingunndre, 



Per la chiesa. 
Anddr' alia chiesa, 
sentirc 'la prcdica, 
pregdi'' Jddio, 
communicdrsi, 
predictire, 
sentir la predion, 
omtire, 
battezzdre, 
confermare, 
sondre le campdne, 
seppellire, 
sotterrdre, 
cant Are, 
inginocchidrsi, 
rizzdrsi, alztirsi, 



to take out of pawn, 
to give. 
to cheat. 



For the church. 
to go to church, 
to hear a sermon, 
to pray to God. 
to receive the sacrament, 
to preach, 
to hear a sermon, 
to adorn, 
to baptize, 
to confirm. 
to ring the bells. 
to bury, 
to inter. 
to sing. 
to kneel. 
to rise. 



Per le azioni di movi- 
mento. 
Arid are, 

stare, dimordre, 
venire, 
torndre, 
fermtirsz, . 
cummintire, 
cdrrere, 
seguitdre, 
fuggire, 
scappdre, 
par tire, 

andar 1 inndnzi, avanzare, 
andtir in dietro, rinculdre, 
allontandrsi, 

avvicindrsi, appressdrsi>ac~ 
costdrsi, 



For the actions of motion. 

to go. 

to stand, to dwell. 

to come. 

to return. 

to stop or stay. 

to walk. 

to run. 

to follow* 

to fly. 

to escape. 

to depart. 

to advance. 

to stand back. 

to be distant. 

to come near* 



voltdre. 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



vol tare, 

cu scare, cad ere, 

sdruccioldre, 

far si mdle t ferirsi, 

giiitigcre, arrhdre, or giu- 

; gnere, * 

incontrdre, anddr nil' in- 

contro, 
entrdre, 
uscire, 

satire, montdre, 
scendcre, 

trattenersi, star'' a bdda, 
sedere, 
spasseggidre, 
anddr' a spdsso, anddr a 

cammindre, a spasseggidre, 
affrettdrsi, 



to turn. 

to fall down. 

to slide. 

to hurt one's self. 

to wound one's self. 

to arrive. 

to go meet, 
to come in, 
to go out. 
to go up. 
to go down, 
to stand idle. 
to sit down. 
to walk, 
to go a- walking, 

to make haste. 



Azioni manuali. 
Lavordre, 
toccdre, 
maneggidre, 
legdre, 

sciorre, slegdre, sciogliere, 
attaccdre, 
staccdrc, 
allentdre, 

levdre, togliere, torre, 
priglidre, prendere, 
rubdre, 
raccogliere, 
straccidre, sirappdre, 
presentdre, dondre, 
ricevere, 

stringere, strignere, 
ienere, ferrdre, 
rompere, spezzdre, 
nascondere, 



Manual actions. 
to work, 
to touch, 
to handle. 
to tie or bind. 
to untie. 
to tie. 
to untie. 
to let loose. 
to take away, 
to take. 
to steal away. 
to gather again. 
to tear. 
to present, 
to receive, 
to squeeze or crowd. 
to hold, 
to break. 
' to hide. 



copri 



526 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



coprire, 

scoprire, manifestdre, 

sporcdre, insuciddrc, 

nettdve, pulire,forbtre, 

strojjiridre, stroppic idre, 

testdre s 

add it (ire, mostrdr' « diio, 

piziicare, 

soiled care, 

graffign&re, § sgraffidre, 



to cover. 

to discover. 

to dirty. 

to cleanse. 

to rub. 

to feel. 

to point with one's finger, 

to; pinch. 

to tickle. 

to scratch. 



Azioni di memoria e 
d'imaginazione. 
Riccrddrsi, 
di?nenticdre, 
pensdre,. 
credere, 
dubitdre, 
sospettdre, 
osservdre, 
avvertire, 
conoscere, 

Jigurdrsi, imagindrsi, 
bramdre, desiderdre, 
sperdre, 
feme* re, 
assicurdre, 
giudicdre, 
conchiudere, 
risolvere, 
fingere, 
intestdrsi, 
ostindrsi, 

adirdrsi, anddr in colkra, 
pacificdrsi, 
inganndrsi, 
perdcre la tramontdna, 8*1- 

broglidrsi, 
aver per certo, 



Actions of the memory and 
i?nagination, 
to remember, 
to forget, 
to think, 
to believe. 
to doubt, 
to suspect. 
to observe. 
to take care, 
to know, 
to imagine. 
to wish* 
to hope, 
to fear, 
to assure. 
to adjudge, 
to conclude, 
to resolve. 
to feign. 

to be conceited of. 
to be obstinate, 
to fly into a passion. 
to be appeased. 
to mistake, 
to embroil one's self. 



to be certain of. 



aver 



A COLLECTION of VERBS. 



S29 



aver su la pdnta detle dita, to have it at one's finger's 

end. 






esser geloso, 



to be jealous. 



Per le arti ed i mestieri. 

Dipingere, 

intagliare, scolpire, 

dlsegndre^far mi disSgno, 

abbozzdre i 

ricamdre, 

smaltdre f 

indordre, 

inargentdre, 

incessdre, 

stampdre, 
I legaV un libro, 
. lavordre, 



For arts and trades. 
To paint or draw. 
to engrave. 
to design. : 
to draw a sketch. 
to embroider. 
to enamel, 
to gild. 

to gild over with silver. 
to in lav. 
to print'. 
to bind a book. 
to labour. 



Per l'esercito. 
Far solddti, 

toccdre, bdtcere 'l/ambum, 
sondre la trombctiay 
rnarcidre, 
accampdre, 
alloggidre, 
montdr a cavdllo, 
smontdre, 
far giomdto, 
riportdre, la vitloria, 
scompiglidre, disordindre, 
sbaraglidre, sconfiggere, 
svaligidre, 
saccheggidre, 
dare 7 gudsto, 
circonv allure, strinqcre, 
assedidre, 
dar' un assdlto, 
prendcrd' assdlto, 
far volar la ?nina i 



For the army. 
to raise soidiers. 
to beat the drum, 
to sound the trumpet. 
to march. 
to encamp. 
to lodge. 

to get on horseback, 
to alight. 
to give battle. 
to gain the viciorv. 
to put in disorder. 
to rout. 
to rob. 
to sack. 
to plunder. 
to block up. 
to besiege. 
to storm. 
to take by storm. 
to spring a mine. 



sparar 



330 



DIALOGUES. 



sparare, 
capitoidre, 
rendersi a p&tti, 
caccidr man alia spdda : 

ammazzdre, uccidcre^ 
dar quarliere\ 
ferire, 

aprire la trinciera, 
sonar la racco!ta, 
incaizdre 7 nemico, 



to fire. 

to capitulate. 

to surrender on terms. 

to clap one's hand on one's 

sword, 
to kill. 

to give quarter. 
to wound. 

to open the trenches, 
to sound a retreat, 
to pursue the enemy. 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 
DIA!LOCHI FAMJGL1 A'RL 



DIALOGUE I. 

f 1 OOD morrow, sir. 
Good night, sir. 
How do you do, sir ? 
Well : not very well 



so, 



Very well to serve you. 
At your service. 
I am obliged to you. 
I thank you. 

How does your brother do ? 
He is well. 

He will be glad to see you. 
I shall have no time to see 
• him to day. 
Be pleased to sit down. 
Give a chair to the gentle- 
man. 
There's no occasion. 



DIALOGO L 

TjUON di a vosignoria. 

Buonaseraa vossignoria. 
Come sta V. S. ? 
Bene ; non troppo bene ; cosiy 

cosi. 
Benissimo per servirla. 
Al suo servizio. 
Son? ohbligdto a V. S. 
Ringrdzio V. S. 
Come st a suofratello ? 
Sid bene. 

Avrd gusto di vederla. 
Non avrb tempo di vederlo 

oggu 
V. S. seda. 
Date una stdia al signore. 



Non c necessdrio. 



I must 



DIALOGUES. 



331 



I must go to pay a visit in 
the neighbourhood. 

You are in haste. 

I will be back presently. 

Farewel, sir. 

I am glad to see you in 
good health. 

I kiss your hand. 

I am your servant. 

Your most humble servant. 

Your servant. 

Your most humble servant. 



Bisogna che vdda afar* una 

•visit a qui vicino. 
E molto affrcttdia V. S. 
Tomer o adesso adesso. 
Addio, signore. 
Ho gan gusto di vederla in 

buona salute. 
Bdcio le mdni a V. S. 
■Sono servo silo. 
U?nilissimo servo silo. 
Servo, sua. 
Umilissima serva sua. 



D I A L O G U E II. 



DI ALO GO It. 



To make a visit in the morn- 
ing. 

WHERE is your master. 

Is he asleep still ? 

No, sir, he is awake. . 

Is he up ? 

No, sir, he is a-bed. 

What a shame 'tis to be 

a-bed at this time of day 1 
I went to bed so late last 

night, I could not rise 

early this morning. 
What did you after supper ? 
We danced, we sung, we 

laugh'd, we play'd. 
At what game? 
We play'd at picquet with 

the knight. 
What did the rest do ? 
They play'd at chess. 
How griev'd am J, I did 

not know it. 
Who one ? who lost ? 



Per far/ una visita la mat- 
tin a. 

Ov'el tuo padrone ? pro- 
nounce Ovel. 
Dorme uncora ? 
Signor, no, e sveglidto. 
E' levdlo ? 

Signor, no, sta ancor al letto, 
Che vergogna di star at let to, 

a quest ora ! 
Anddi jeri al letto, tdnto tar- 

di, che non flo potiito le- 

v&rmi a buorC ora. 
Che si f ice qui dopb cena ? 
Si hallo, si canto, si rise, si 

giuocv. 
A che K giuoco ? 
Giuocammo a picchetio col 

signor cava Here. 
Chefecero git din ? 
Giuocdrono a sedechi, 
Qudnto mi displace non n- 

verlo sctptito* 
Chi ha i into f Che ha per- 

duto ? 

I won 



332 DIALOGUES. 

I won ten pistoles. I Jo gundagnmo dttcidoppie, 

Till what hour did you Lin a che oiii giuocasie ? 

play ? 

Till two in the morning. Fin alle due dopo mezza 

notte. 

At what o'clock did you go A che ora sicte andato al 

to bed ? letto ? 

At three, half an hour af- Alle ire, all'e tre e mezza, 

ter three. 

I don't wonder at your Non ml maraviglio che vi 

rising so late. levidte cost tardl. 

What's o'clock ? Che era e ? 

What do you think it is ? Che ora crede'le che sia ? 

Scarce eighr, I believe, yet. Credo che non siano ancor U 

6tto. 

How ! eight ! It has struck Come le otto ! sono sotwte le 

ten ! died ! 

Then I must rise with all Bisogna adunqae che mi tiui 

speed. qudnlo prbna. 



DIALOGUE III. D I ALO GO IIL 

To dress one's self. Per veslirsi. 

WHO is there? CHlela? 

What wili you please to Che commanda, V. S. 
have, sir ? 

fee quick, make a fire, Su,su, presto, fate fuoco, re- 
dress- me. stitemi. 

There is a fire, sir. Ce fuoco, signore. 

Give me my shirt. Ddtcmi la mia camiscia. 

Here 'tis, sir. Eccola, signore. 

Tis not warm, 'tis quite Nonecdlda,eanc6rafrldda, 
cold. 

If you please, sir, I'll warm Se V. S. brdma, la scalderb, 
it. 

No, no ; bring me my silk No, no, portdtemi le mie cal- 
stockings. zette di seta. 

They are torn. Sono rdtte. 

Stitch them a little, mend Dated un punto, ofdtele ac- 
them. concidre. 

I have 



DIALOGUES. 



333 



I have given them to the 
stocking-mender. 

You have done right — 
Where are my slippers? 

Where is my night-gown? 

Comb my head. 

Take another comb. 

Give me my handkerchief. 

There's a clean one, sir. 

Give me that which is in 
my pocket. 

I gave it to, the washer- 
woman, it was foul. 

Has she brought my linen ? 

Yes, sir, there wants no- 
thing. 

What cloaths will you wear 
to-day ? 

Those I wore yesterday. 

The faylor will bring your 
cloth suit presently. 

Somebody knocks, see who 
'tis. 

Who is it ? 

'Tis the taylor. 

Let him come in. 



Le ho date alia conciacaU 

zette. 
Avete fdtto bene. Ove sono 

le mic piane'llc ? 
Ov' e la mia zim&rra ? 
Peltindtemi. 

Piglidtc uri dltro pettine. 
Ddtemi 'I miofazzoletto. 
E'ccone un pulito, signore. 
Ddtemi quel cti e nella mia 

saccoccicu 
V ho dato alia lavanddra, 

era sporco. 
Ha portdto ella i miei pan- 

nilini ? 
Signor si, non ci mdnca 

niente. 
Che vestito metterd oggl 

V. S. ? 
Quel clC av evojcri. 
II sartore deve portdr presto 

quel dipdnno. 
Si pAcchia, vedete chi t. 

Chi e ? 
EH sartore, 
Fdtelo entrdre. 



DIALOGUE IV. 

The gentleman and the taylor. 

Do you bring my suit of 

cloaths ? 
Yes, sir; here 'tis. 
You make me wait a great 

while. 
I could not come sooner. 
It was not finished. 
The lining was not sewed. 
Will you be pleased to try 

the close coat on ? 



D I ALO GO IV. 

II gentiluomo ed il sartore. 

Portdte voi il mio vestito t 

Si signor, eccolo qui. 
Mi fate aspettdr molio, 

Non hopotuto venirpiuprestQt 
Non erafinko. 
La fodera non era cucita. 
Vuole V. S. provdre 'il gius- 

tacore. 

P • Let's 



'S3* DIALOGUES. 

Let's see whether it be well Vedidmo £ e ben/duo. 

made. 

I believe it will please you. Credo die V. S. ne sard con- 
tent a. 

It seems to me to be very Mi pare molto lungo. 

long. 

They wear them long now. Si portano hinghi adesso, 

Button me. . Abbottondfemi. 

It is too close. Mi strin^e troppo. 

To fit properly it ought to Per esser ben fdtto' bisogna 

be close. cite sia giusta. 

Are not the sleeves too wide. Le mdniche non sono elle 

troppo Idrghe t 

iS T o, sir, they fit very well. Signor no, stdnno benissimo. 

This suit becomes you Quest' dbito le sta benissimo. 

mighty well. 

'Tis too short, too long, too E troppo corto, troppo lungo, 

big, too little. iroppoldrgo, troppo stretto. 

Pardon me, sir, it fits very V, S.miperdoni, sta bene. 

well. 

How do you like my trim- Che dite del mio fornimento ? 

ming ? 

'Tis vejry fine and rich. E bellissimo, e ricchissimo. 

What did these ribbons cost Quest?, ndstri qudnto costano 

a yard r il brdccio f 

I paid a crown. Li ho pagdtouno scudo. 

That's not too much, 'tis Non e troppo, e buon mer- 

cheap. cdto. 

Where is the rest of my CV e 7 rksto del mio pdnno f 

cloth ? 

There is not a bit left. Non i'e niente affdtto d'd- 

vdnzoi 

Have you made your bill ? Avetefduo 7 vosiro coni.o ? 

No, sir, I had not time. Signor, no, non ho avuto 7 

tempo. 

Bring it to-morrow, I will Poridtelodomdni.zipagkerb. 

pay you. 



DIA- 



DIALOGUES. 335 



DIALOGUE V. DI ALOGO V. 



To <*o to breakfast. Per far colazione. 

BRING us something for Pcridteciqudlchecosadafar 

breakfast. colazione. 

Yes, sir, there are sausages Signor, si ; ecco salsicrie, e 

and petiy-pattees. pasticcietti. 

Do you chuse the gammon Vuol V. S. ch'io pari? I pre- 

of bacon ? sciu'to ? 

Yes, bring it, we will cut a Si, portdtelo; ns taglieremo 

slice of it, una fat a. 

Lav a napkin on th« table. Mettete una sahiettu sopru 

la tdvola. 

Give us plates, knives, and Dated toadi, cohelli, e for- 

fork6. chetie. 

Rinse the glasses. Sciacqudie i bicchieri. 

Give the gentleman a chair. Date una sedia al signore. 

Sit down, sir; sit by the fire. V* S. seda, si 'metta vicino 

alfuoco. 

1 am not cold, I am very ISonhofreddoyS&nobenissiino 

well here. qui. 

Let us see whether the wine Vedidqio se'l vino e bitono. 

be good. 

Give me that bottle, and Ddtemi quella bottiglia^ cd 

glass. un bicchiere. 

Taste that wine, pray. Digrdzia, F.S. assagiquhto 

vino. 

How do you like it? what Che gliene pare? che ne 

say you to it ? dice ? 

It is not bad, it is very Non e cattivo, v squisiiissimo 

good. 

Here are the sausages, take Eccole salsiccie, levute questo 

away ihis plate. pidtlo. 

Eat some sausages. V. S. mdrigi delle salsiccie. 

I have eat some, they are Ne ho mangidto^soao uu»,i:- 

very good. siiiie. 

Give me some drink, Ddtemi da here. 

Your health, sir. Alia sahita, di V. S. 

Sir. 1 thank von. Uingrdzio V. S. 

1 P 2 Gir e 



336 



DIALOGUES. 



Give the gentleman some 

drink. 
I drank but just now. 
The petty-pattees were very 

good. 
They were baked a little 

too much. 
You do not eat. 
I have eat so much I shall 

not be able to eat my 

dinner. 
You only jest, you have eat 

nothing at all. 
I have eat very heartily both 

of the pudding, and ham. 



Date da here al signore. 

Ho bevuto adesso. 

I pasticcietti erano luonis- 

simi. 
E'rano un tantino troppo 

cotti. 
V. S. non mdngia. 
Ho mdngiato tdnto, die non 

potrb pranzdre. 

V. S. si burin, non ha man- 

gidto niente. 
Ho mangidto benissimo del 

sanguindccio, e del presci- 

utto. 



DIALOGUE VI. 

To speak Italian. 

HOW goes on your Ita- 
lian ? 

Are you much improved in 
it now ? 

Not much ; I know nothing 
almost. 

It is said, however, you 
speak it very well. 

Would to God it were 
true ! 

Those that say so are much 
mistaken. 

I assure you I was told so. 

I can say a few words 
which I have learnt by 
heart. 

And so much as is neces- 
sary to begin to speak. 

The beginning is not all, you 
must make an end. 



DIALOGO VI. 

Per parlar* Italiano. 
COME vd V Italidno ? 

Ha V. S. fdtto molto pro- 

fitto ? 
Non troppo, non so quasi 

niente. 
Se dice perb die V. S. p&rla 

benissimo, 
Volesse Dio die fosse veto ! 

Quei che lo dicono, sHngdh- 

nano molto. 
Hassicuro die rn e siato detto. 
Posso dir' alcune parole dte so 

a mente. 

E qudnto bdsta per comincidr 

a parldre. 
Non e il tutto di principidre, 

bisognafinbre. 

Be 



DIALOGUES. 



337 



Be always speaking, whether 

well or ill. 
I am afraid of committing 

blunders. 
Never fear; the Italian lan- 
guage is not hard. 
I know it ; and that it has 

abundance of graces. 
It is true ; and especially 

from a lady's mouth. 
How happy should I be, if 

I were master of it ? 
Application is the only way 

of learning it. 
How long have you been 

learning ? 
Scarce a month yet. 
What is your master's 

name? 
His name is Veneroni. 
I have known him a great 

while. 
He has taught several friends 

of mine. 
Does not he tell you that 

you must constantly talk 

Italian ? 
Yes, he often tells me so. 
Why do not you talk then ? 
Who will you have me talk 

with ? 
With those that shall talk 

to you. 
I would fain talk, but dare 

not. 
You must not be afraid, you 

must be bold, 



Parli V. S. sempre, o bene o 

male. 
Temo cUfar'errori. 

V. S. non terna^ la lingua 
Italidna non e difficile. 

Lo so, e so cKha molte leg- 
giadrie. 

E vero, e particolarmente 
nella bocca dclle donne. 

O me felice se la sapessi ! • 

Bisogna studidre per impa- 
rdrla, 

Qudnto tempo e che V, S, 
impdra ? 

Non t! ancor' un mese. 

Come si chi/ima 'I suo mae- 
stro ? 

Si chidma y l signbr Veneroni* 

E un pizza che lo conosco. 

Ha insegndio a mold amid 

miei. 
Non dice egli a V. S. che 

bisogna sempre parldr' 

Jtalidno ? 
Signdr sl y vielo dice $pe&so„ 
Perche dunque non pdrla ? 
Con eld vubl V. S. chH& 

pdrli f 
Con quei che le parlerdnnoo 

Vorrei parldre, ma non ar~ 

disco. 
Non bisogna temere, bisogna 

essei*' ardito. 



rs 



DIA. 



338 



DIALOGU E-S. 



DIALOGUE VII. 

Of the vjeatJicr. 

WHAT sort of weather is 

it? 
It is fine weather." 
It is bad weather. 
Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
Is if not cold; it is not 

hot. 
Does it rain ? does 

rain ? 
I do not believe it. 
The wind is changed. 
We shall have rain. 
It will not rain to-dav. 
It rains, it pours. 
It snows. 
It thunders. 
It hails. 
It lightens. 
St is very hot. 
Did it freeze last night ? 
No, sir, but it freezes now. 
It appears to me to be a 

great fog. 
You are not mistaken, it is 

true. 
You have caught a violent 

cold. 
I have had it this fortnight. 

Tis the fruit of the season. 

What's o'clock ? 

'Tis early, 'tis not late. 

Is it breakfast-time ? 

'Twill be dinner-time im- 
mediately. 

What shall we do after din- 
ner ? 



DI A LO GO til 

Del tempo. 

CHE tempo J a ? 

Fa bel tempo. 
Fa cattivo tempo. 
Fdfreddo f fa cdldo ? 
IS on fdfreddo ; nonfd cdldo. 



it not Pwve ? non piote ?- 



Non lo credo. 

II vento e cambidto. 

Avremo dell a pioggia, 

hi on pioverd oggi. 

Piove, diluvla. 

Nevica, 

Taona. 

Grdnd/na. 

l.ampeggia. 

Fd molto cdldo. 

II a geld to st a nolte ? 

Sigiwr jib, ma gela adesso. 

Mi par die fa una gran 

nebbia. 
V. S. Non singdnna, e vero. 

V.S. e molto raffredddta. 

Sono quindici giorni die sono 

raffredddio. 
Sonofrutti della stagidne, 
Che or a i ? 

E di buon'ora, none tdrdi. 
J'] tempo difar eolazione ? 
Sard presto tempo di desindre. 

Chefnremo dupo pranzo ? : 

We'll 



DIALOGUES. 



3S9 



We'll take a walk. 
Let's take a turn now. 
We must not go abroad this, 
weather. 



Andremo a spd&so. 
Andidmo afar 'un giro adesso. 
Non bisogna uscir per qutsto 
tempo. 



DIALOGUE VIII. 



DIALOGO VI L 



Of the charms of a young 
lady. 

THERE'S a beautiful young 

lady. 
She is finely shaped. 
She is charming, she is 

pretty. 
Do you know her ? 
I don't know her ? 
She has fine eyes. 
I never saw a better shape. 

She has an easy carriage. 
She has a noble mien. 
The shape of her face is 

well proportioned. 
Her cheeks are plump and 

delicate. 
Her mouth is little, and 

red. ■ 
Her nose well made. 
Have you taken notice of 

her complexion ? 
It is the finest in the world. 
A complexion fair, and 

lively. 
What white hands she has ! 
The vermilion of her cheeks 

shames the lilies and the 

roses. 
She has teeth as white as 

snow. 
It may be said that she's a 

fair beauty. 



Delle bellezze d'una zit 
tella. 



E'cco una bella signdra. 



E benfatta. 

E tietzosa, e leggiddra. 

La conoscete ? 

Non la condsco. 

Ila bSgli ocelli. 

Non ho mdi visto una piu 

bella statura. 
E dis-involta. 
Ha un aspetto ndbile. 
J I conldrno del suo viso e 

btnfdlto. 
Lc sue gudncie sono piendlle 

e delicate. 
La sua bdcca t picciola, e 

vermiglia* 
11 hasp ben f dtlo. 
Avete osservdio la sua car- 

nagglone. 
El piu bel colore del mondo. 
Una carnaggidne bidncha, e 

vivace. 
O che belle m'dni ha ! 
J I vermiglio del suo viso fa 

senza dubbio torio ai gigli, 

ed dlle rose. 
Ha i denii bidnchi come la 

neve. 
Si pub dire cKella a una bella 

bidnda. 

P 4 She's. 



340 



DIALOGUES. 



She's the finest brown wo- 
man one can see. 

She has a noble gait. 

She has a sprightly coun- 
tenance. 

She has exquisite features. 

She's mightily cry'd up for 
her beauty. 

I think she has a great deal 
of wit. 

Beauty may be seen, but not 
wit. 

They say her wit is equal io 
her beauty, 

Then she's an epitome of 
all perfections. 



E la pile bella brum, che si 

possa vedere. 
Camm'ma con bel gdrbo. 
Ha una jlsonomia spiritoso, 

Hafattezze vdghe. 

E moko commend at a per /« 

sua belle zza. 
Credo clC abbia mollo spirito. 

Ben si pub vedere la bellezza, 

ma lo spirito no. 
Si dice che sia adequdto h 

spirito dlle sue bellezze, 
E adunque un compendio di 

tutto le perfezione. 



DIALOGUE IX, 



DI A LOGO IX, 



To enquire after news. 

WHAT news is stirring ? 
Do you know any ? 
I have heard none. 
What is the talk of the 

town ? 
There's no talk of any 

thing. 
Have you heard no talk of 

war ? 
I heard nothing of it. 
There's a talk however of a 

siege. 
It was reported so, but it is 

not true. 
On fhe contrary there's a 

talk of peace. 
Do you think we shall have 

peace ! 
I believe so. 
What say they at court ? 



Per domandar quel che si 
dice di nuovo. 

Che si dice di nuovo f 
Sapete niente di nuovo ? 
Non ho inteso niente. 
Di che si p aria ? 

Non si p dr la di niente. 

Av'ete sentito dire ch > avrema 

la guerra ? 
Non ne ho inteso parldre. 
Si pdrla .perb d? un assedio. 

Si diceva, ma non t vero. 

Al contrdrio, si pdrla di 

pace. 
Credcte cfiavrkmo kt pace f 



Credo di si. 

Che si dice in corte f 



They 



DIALOGUES, 



341 



They talk of a voyage. 
When do they think the. 

king will set out ? 
'Tis not known. They do 

not say when. 
Where do they say he'll go? 
Some say into Flanders, 

others into Germany. 
And what says the Ga- 
zette ? 
I have not read if. 
Is it true what is reported of 

Mr. ? 

What of him ? 

They say he's mortally 

wounded, i 
I should be sorry for that ; 

he's an honest man. 
Who wounded him ? 
Two rogues who set upon 

him. 
Is it known why ? 
The report is, that he gave 

one of them a box on the 

ear. 
I don't [believe it. Nor I 

neither. 
However, we shall soon 

know the truth. 



Si parla d'un vidggio. 
Qudndo si crede che partwd 

'Ire ? 
Non si sa. Non si dice. 

Dove si dice cJi andra ? 
Chi dice in Fiandra, chi in 

Ger -mania. 
E la Gazzetia cite, dice ? 

Non Vho letta. 

Sarebbe vero quel eke si dice 

del Sig. ? 

Che sene dice ? 

Si dice che sia feriio & 

morle. 
Mi dispiacerebbe, perch' d un 

galantuomo. 
Chi rhafcrito ? 
Duoi farfdnti che V hdmw 

assalito. 
Si sd 7 percht ? 
Carre voce che sia per aver 

ddto uno schidjfo ad uno 

di loro. 
Non lo credo, Nh men'io. 

Comunque si sia, si saprd 
presto. 



DIALOGUE X. 



D I A L O G X. 

Per domandare d'uno. 



To enquire after one, 

WHO is that gentleman CHI e quel gcntiluomo che vi 
that spoke to you a little par lava poc& fd t 
while ago ? 

He is a German. E un Tedcsco. 

I took him for an English- Lo eredevo Jn^lcse. 
man. 

He came from Saxony. E d/dla parte di Sassonia. 

P5 Ik 



342 



B I A L OC ITS 



He speaks French very 

well. 
He speaks French like the 

Frenchmen themselves. 
The Spaniards take him for 

a Spaniard, the English 

for an Englishman. 
It: is. difficult to be conver- 
sant in so many different 

languages. 
He has been a long time in 

those countries. 
Have you known him for 

any time ? 
About two years. 
He has a noble air, he has a 

good mien. 
He is a genteel person. 
He is neither too tall, nor 

too little. 
He is handsome, he is well 

shaped. 
He plays upon the lute, the 

guitar, and "several other 

instruments. 
I should be very glad to 

know him. 
1 will bring you acquainted 

with him. 
Where does he live ? 
He lives just by. 
When will you have us go 

and wait on him? 
Whenever yon please; for 

he is my intimate friend. 
Jt shall be when you have 

leisure. 
We'll go to-morrow morn- 
ing. 
I shall be obliged to you. 



Pdi la henimmo Fr 



ancese. 



V atidremo domaitina. 
Vi restcro obligate* 



Pdrla Fr ancese cjuanto i 

Francesi fnedesimi. 
Gil Spagnuoli lo stiinano 

Spagmmlo, c gl' Ingles?, 

Invlese. 
E pur difficile d'esser prat- 

ico in tdnte lingue cos), dif- 

ftrcuti. 
E stdlo un pezzo in quel 

paesi. 
E' un pezzo che lo conoscete ? 

Sono due dnni incirca. 

Ha buoii aria, ha buona 

ciera. 
FJ di bella prtsenza. 
Mon c ne. troppo grdnde, ne 

trbppo piccolo. 
FJ ben f duo, e la sua stalura 

<} disinvolta. 
Suona 7 liuid, la chitdrra, e 

moUi dltri siromenti. 

Avrei a cdro di conoscerlo. 

Vene procurer o la conoscenza. 

Ove sta di edsa ? 

Sid qui vicino. t 

Qudndo volete c)i andidmo a 

riverhlo ? 
Qudndo vi piacerd, perch' c 

amico mio intrinseco. 
Sard qudndo avrete tempo. 



DIA- 



DIALOGUES. 



343 



DIALOGUE XL 



DIALOGO XL 



To twite. 



Per scrivere. 



GIVE me a sheet of 
paper, a pen, and a little 
ink. 

Step into my closet, you'll 
find on the table what- 
ever ycu want. 

There are no pens. 

There are a great many in 
the standish. 

They are good for nothing. 

There are some others. 

They are not made. 

Where is your pen-knife ? 

Can you make pens ? 

I make them my own way. 

This is not bad. 
I While I finish this letter, 
do me the favour to 
make a pacquet of the 
rest. 

What seal will you have me 
put to it ? 

Seal it with my cypher or 
coat of arms. 

What wax shall I put to 
it? 

Put either red or black, no 
matter which. 

Have you put the dale ? 

I believe I have, but I have 
not signed it. 

What day of the month is 
this ? 

The eighth, the tenth, fif- 
teenth, twentieth. 



Ddtemi un foglio di carta, 
una penna § un poco d' 
inchiostro. 

Entrdte net mio cabinet to, 
irovcrke sopra la tdvola 
qudnto vi sdra di bisogno, 

Non vi sdno penne. 

E'ccone molte nel calamdjo. 

Non vdgliono niente. 
E'ccone dltre. 
Non sdno temperate. 
Ov' eH i ostro temper ino ? 
Sapete temper dr le penne ? 
Le tempero a inddo mio. 
Qutsta qui non t cattiva. 
Mentrefi/ikco qttesta lettera, 
■ favoritemi difar un piego 
di quelle dltre. 

Che sigillo volete the ci 

mkta ? 
Sigilldiele cdlla mia zijfcra 

ovcro colle mie drmi* 
Che cera ci mettero ? 

JMctletcne delta rossa, o delta 

nera, non importa. 
Avcle messo la data ? 
Credo di si, ma non ho sotto- 

scritto. 
Ai qudnto sidmo del mese ? 

Sidmo dggl agli otto, ai dicci % 
ai quindici, ai vend, 
V 6 Put 



DIALOGUES. 



Put the direction. 

Where is the powder ? 

You never have either pow- 
der or sand. 

There's some in the sand- 
box. 

There's your servant ; will 
you let him carry the let- 
ters to the post-house ? 

Carry my letters to the post- 
office, and don't forget to 
pay postage. 

I have no money. 

Hold your hand, there's a 

pistole. 
Go quickly, and return as 

soon as possible. 



Metteteci 'I soprascritto. 

Ov' e la pdlvere ? 

Non avete mdi ?it polvere, 

nt arena. 
VerU e nel polverino. 

E'ccoH vostro servo ; volete 
die port I le Utter e alia 
post a ? 

Port ate le mie lettere . alia 
posta, ty non vi dimeiiti- 
cdte di pagdre 7 yortcfi 

Non ho quattrini, signbre, 
non ho dandri. 

Pig Hate, ecco una dcppia. 

And ate presto, e torndte 
qudnio prima. 



DIALOGUE XII. 



D 1 A LOGO XII. 



To buy. 

WHAT do you want, sir ? 
V/hat would yon please to 

have ?. , 
I want a good fine cloth 

to make- me a suit of 

clothes. 
Be pleased to walk in, sir, 

you'll see the finest in 

London. 
Shew me the best you have. 

There's a very iine one, and 
what's worn at present. 1 

'Tis a good cloth, but I don't 
like the colour. 

There's another lighter 
piece. 

I kke that colour well, but 



Per comprare. 

CHE brdma V. S. eke 
chca ? 

Vorrei un pdnno bello e bu~ 
bno da far un vestito. 

V. S. entri, vedrd qui i piu 
belli pdnni di Londra. 

Mostrdtemil migliore ch' ab- 

bidtc* 
E'ccone unbellissiino,ecome si 

porta adesso. 
E bueno, ma 'I color non mi 

pidce. 
E'ccone 'un dltra p'ezza piu 

chidra. 
11 color mi pidce, mdl pan- 
the 



DIALOGUES. 



S4'3 



the cloth is 

'tis too thin. 
Look upon this piece, here, 

sir, you'll not find the 

like any where else. 
What do you ask for it as 

ell? 
Without exacting, 'tis worth 

twenty livres. 

Sir, lam not us'd to stand 

haggling ; pray tell me 

your lowest price. 
I have told yon, sir, tis 

worth that. 
'Tis too dear, I'll give you 

six crowns. 
I can't bate a farthing. 
You shall not have what you 

ask. 
You ask'd me the lowest 

price, and I have told 

you. 
Come, come, cut off two 

ells of it. 
I protest, on the word of 

an honest man I don't 

get a crown by you. 
There's four pistoles, give 

me the change. 
Be pleas'd, sir, to let me 

have another, this is too 

light, it wants weight. 
Here's another. 
Farewel, sir, your servant. 



no non d forte abbcisldnza, 

h trbppo sotile. 
Veda V. S. questa pezta, 

non ne iroverk cos\ bella 

altrove. 
Qudnto lo tendete il br ac- 
tio ? 
Senza dire a V. S. mi soldo 

di troppo, ella vale vend 

franchi. 
Signore, io non sono avv'ez- 

zo a prezzoldre, ditemi di 

grdzia Vultimo prezzo. 
rho detto a V, S. tdnto 

vale. 
E tropyo cdro, vene daro 'set 

scudi. 
Non ve un soldo da levdre* 
Non yvrete quel ch' avete 

domanddto. 
V. S. mlia domanddto VAlti- 

vio prezzo, gliel* ho detto. 

Via, via, taglidtene due 

hrdccia. 
Le giuro da galantuomo che 

non guaddgno uno scudo 

con lei. 
E'cco qudttro doppie, ddtemi 

'I resto, 
Di grdzia V. S. mi dia un' 

dltra doppia, questa e leg- 

gitra, non e di peso. 
E'ccone un dltra. 
Jddio, s ignore, sono servitor 

di V. S. 



DIA- 



T*1? 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE XIII. 



D I A LOGO XI II. 



To play. 

LET us play a game at 

picquet. 
What will you play for ? 
Let us play for half-a- crown 

(o pass away the time. 
Give us cards. 
Let us see who shall deal. 

You are to deal; I am to 

deal. 
Shuffle the cards, all a the 

court cards are together. 
They are shuffled enough. 
Cut, sir. 

Have you all your cards ? 
I believe I have. 
How many do you take ? 
I lake all. I leave one. 

I have a bad game. 

Deal again. 

Not this time. 

Have you laid out ? 

No, sir, my game puzzles 

me. 
You must have good cards, 

for I have nothing. 
Teil your point. 
Fifty, sixty. 

It is not good ; it is good. 
A quint major, a quint to 

a king, a small quint, 

fourteen by queens, a 

tierce to a knave. 
I have as much. 
Fourteen by kings, three 

aces, three queens. 



Per giuocare. 

Giuochiamo una 'partita a 

picc/i etto. 
Quanta volete giuocare ? 
Giuochiamo trenta soldi per 

passatempo, 
Ddteci carte. 
Vedidmo a chi tocdierd a 

Jdre. 
Tocca a voi, tocca a me. 

Mescoldte le carte, tutte le 
figure so ho insiemt: 

Sono mescoldte abbastdnza. 

Alzd/e, signore. 

Aveie le tostre carte! 

Credo di s}. 

Sudnte ne piglidte ? 

Piglio iutto, or le piglio tutte. 
Ne lascio una. 

Ho un cattivo giuoco. 

A monte. 

Signor no, per questa volia. 

Avete scartdto ? 

Signor no, il mio giuoco ?ii~ 
imbarrdzza. 

Dovete aver bcl giuoco, pci- 
clip non ho nicnte. 

Contdte 7 vqstro punto. 

Cinqudnta, sessdnta. 

Non idle ; e buono. 

Quinta maggiore, quint a ul 
re, quinta bdssa, qudrta 
alia ddma, ieiza alfdnie. 

Ne ho altrettdnto. 
S!uatt6rdici di re, tre dssi, ire 
dame. 

Play. 



DIALOGUES. 



34-7 



Play. Giuocdte. 

Hearts, spades, clubs, dia- Cuori, picckc.fiori y quddru 

monds. 

The ace, the king, the Vdsso y il n\ la dduta, il 

queen, the knave, the fdntc, li died, il novc, 

ten, the nine, the eight, VoUo, il setie. 

the seven. 

I have lost, you made a Ho perso, avettefdtto un pi- 

peek a re-peek. co, replco. 

You have won. Arete guadagndto. 

You owe me half-a crown. Mi dovete trenta soldi. 

You owed it me, pardon Scusdtcmi, melt dovevdte, 

me. 

We are quits, or even Sidmo pdce, or pari. 

then. 



DIALOGUE XIV. D I A LOG O XIV. 



For a journey. 

How many leagues is it 

from this place to N? 
ft is eight leagues. 
We shall not be able to get 

thither to-day, it is too 

late. 
It is not more than twelve 

o'clock, you have time 

enough yet. 
Is the road good? 
So, so ; {.here are woods and 

rivers to pass. 
Is there any danger upon 

that road ? 
There is no talk of it; it 

is a highway, where you 
' meet people every mo- 
ment. 
Do not they say there are 

robbers in the woods ? 
There is nothing to be 



Per un viaoo-io. 

oca - 

Qudn'e leghe soao da qui 

a N ? ' 
Ci sono duo leghe. 
Non vi pot re mo arrival 

oggi, t trdppo tdvdi. 

Non e piu di mezzo di, v'ar- 
riverete ancor' a buon' 
or a. 

E'bella lo s-'rdda ? 

Non troppo, m sono boschi, 
e fiumi a passdre. 

V't perkolo per quella strci- 
da ? 

Non sene pdrla, e una s/rd- 
da maestrct dove si irova 
gente ad ogni niominio. 

Non si dice die vi siano la- 

dri nei boschi ? 
Non v'c nulla da tenure^ nh 
feared. 



343 



DIALOGUES. 



feared, either by day or 

night* 
Which way must one take? 
When you come near the 

hill, you must take to the 

right hand. 
Is it not necessary to ascend 

a hill then ? 
No, sir, there is no other 

hill but a little declivity 

in the wood. 
Is the way difficult through 

the wood ? 
You cannot lose your way. 
"As soon as you are out of 

the wood remember to 

keep to the left hand. 
I thank you, sir, and am 

much obliged to you. 
Come, come, gentlemen, 

let us take horse. 
Where's the marquis ? 
He's gpne before. 
He will wait for you just out 

of town. 
What do we stay for now ? 

come, come, let's be gone, 

let's have done. 
Farewell, gentlemen, fare- 
well. 
I wish you a good journey. 



di giorno •, ne di nbtte. 

Che strdda bisogna piglidre ? 
Qudndo saretc vicini alia 

montdgna, piglicrete a man 

dritta, 
Non bisognerd dunque salir la 

?nontds/na. 
Signor no, non ve ch un 

picciol cblle nel bosco. 

JL' difficile la sirdda nel bos- 
co ? 

Non pot he smarrirla. 

Qudndo saretefuor del bosco , 
ricorddtevi di pigliar 1 a 
man mdnca. 

Vi ringrdzio, signore, e vi 
resto molto obligdto. 

Via, via, signori, montidmo 
a cavdllo.' 

Ov' eH signor nfarchese ? 

E' anddto inndnzi. 

V azpetterd fuori della citid. 

Ck y aspettidmo ? partidmo, 
andidmo, via, via, fini- 
dmolu. 

Addio, signori, addio. 

V } auguro unfelice vidggio. 



DIALOGUE XV. 



DIALOG XV. 



For supper and lodging. Delia cena e dell' alloggi- 

amento. 

So ; we are arrived at the E'Ccoci, giunti alV osteria. 

inn. 
Let us alight, gentlemen. Smontidmo, signori. 
Take these gentlemen's Pigiidte i cavdlli di questi 

horses, 



DIALOGUES, 



34-9 



horses, and take care of 
them. 

Now let's see what you will 
give us for supper. 

A capon, half a dozen of 
pigeons, a sallad, six 
quails, and a dozen of 
larks. 

Will you have nothing 
else ? 

That's enough, give us 
some good wine and 
some desert. 

Let me alone, I'll please you, 
I warrant ye. 

Light the gentlemen. 

Let's have our supper as 
soon as possible. 

Before you have pulled 
your boots off, supper 
shall be upon the table. 

Let our portmanteaus and 
pistols be carried up 
stairs. 

Pull off. my boots, and 
then you shall go and see 
whether they have given 
the horses any hay. 

You shall conduct them to 
the river, and take care 
they give them some 
oats. 

I'll take care of every 
thing, don't trouble your- 
self. 

Gentlemen, supper is rea- 
dy; it is upon the ta- 
ble. 

We'll come presently. 

Let us go to supper, gen- 



signori) ed abbidtene cu~ 

ra. 
Or sit vedldmo che ci darcte 

da cendre. 
Un cappone, una mezza doz~ 

zina dl piccioni, uri iri- 

saldca, set qudglie, ed una 

dozzina dl lodol'e. 
iJonvoglioiib dltro le signorie 

low ? 
Questo bdsta 9 dated del buon 

vinO) e dellefriUia. 

Ldscino far* a me, sardnno 

content i. 
Fate hime a qufoti signori. 
Fdieci cenar qudnto prima, 



Prima che si siano cavdti gli 
stivdli, la cena sard in 
or dine. 

Che si portino lassu le nostrc 
vatigie, e le nostre pistole,, 

Cavdtemi gli stivdll, ed an- 
drete dopo a vedere se 
avrdnno ddto del fieno ai 
cavdlli. 

Li condurrete al Jiume, ed 
nvrete cura che sia l6ro 
data la bidda. 

Arro cira del tutto, V. S. nori 
si pigli fastidio. 

Signorl, la cena e in ordine, 
t portdta in tdvola. 

Adesso, adesso, ceri andidmo. 

Andidmo a cendr, signori; 

tlemen ? 



j50 



DIALOGUE S. 



tlemen, that we may go 
to bed in good time. 

Give us water to wash our 
hands. 

Let's sit down, gentlemen, 
let's sit down at table. 

Give us some drink. 

To your health, gentle- 
men. 

Is the wine good ? 

It is not bad. 

The capon is not done 
enough. 

Give us some oranges, with 
a little pepper. 

Why don't you eat of these 
pigeons ] 

I have ate one pigeon and 
three larks. 

Go call for a chafing dish. 

Tell the landlord we want 
to speak with him. 



accioche possidmo anddr 
al Utto a bubn' bra. 
Dated V aequa dlle mani. 

Sedidmo, sigabri, entridmo 

a tdvola. 
Dated da here. 
Brindisi dlle signorie Ibro. 

FJ bubno 7 vino ? 

Non e caltivo. 

II cappbne non e cbtto ab~ 

bastdnza. 
Dated merdngoli con mi 

pbco di ptpe. 
Per die non mangldte di 

questi piccioncini? 
Ho mangidto un piccibne, e 

tie Ibdole. 
Anddte a domanddr' iino 

scaldavivdnde. 
Dite alV bste die venga a 

parldrci. 



DIALOGUE XVI. D I A LOGO XV L 



To reckon with the landlord. 

A Good evening, gentle- 
men, are you- satisfied 
with your supper 1 

We are, but we must satisfy 
you too. 

What's the reckoning? 

The reckoning is not 
great. 

See what you must have 
for us, our men, and our 
horses. 

Keckon yourselves, and you 



Per contar coll' oste. 

BUbna sera, signori, sbno 
contente le signorie Ibro 
dclla cena ? 

Sidmo contenti, ma bisbgna 
soddisfdrvi. 

Qudnto abbidmo speso ? 

La spesa non e grdnde. 

Vedete qudnto vi viene, per 
noi,per i nbstriservitori, 
e per i ncstri cavdlli. 

Contino le signorie Ibro, e 
will 



DIALOGUES. 



351 



will find it comes to se- 
ven crowns. 
Methinks you ask too much. 

On the contrary, I am very 
reasonable. 

How much do you make us 
pay for the wine ? 

Fifteen pence a bottle. 

Bring us another, and to- 
morrow morning we will 
pay you seven crowns, 
with breakfast included. 

Methinks the gentleman is 
not well. 

I am very well, but weary 
and fatigued. 

You must take courage. 

It would be better for me to 
be in bed than at table. 

Get your bed warmed, and 
go to bed. 

Bid my man come and un- 
dress me. 

He waits for you in your 
chamber. 

Good night, gentlemen, I 
wish you merry. 

Do you want any thing? 

Nothing at all but rest. 

Order them to give us clean 
sheets. 

The sheets you shall have 
are whitened, and wash- 
ed in lie. 

Let us be called to-morrow 
very early. 

I will not fail. Farewel, 
gentlemen ; good night. 



vedranno che sbno sette 

scudi. 
Mi pare che domanddfe 

troppo. 
Ainzifo buonissimo mercdto, 

Qudnto cifdte pagdr per il 
vino ? 

Qumdici soldi la botttglia. 

Portdiene un dltro fiasco, e 
vi dttremo domattina sette 
scudi facendo perb cola- 
zibne. 

Pare che'l signer non stia 
bene. 

Sto bene, ma son 1 affattiedto 
e stdnco. 

Bisbgnafdrsi dnimo. 

Certo che sarei meglio in let- 
to eli a tdvola. 

Fdccia seal dare 'I suo letto, 
e vdda a dornure. 

Dite almio servo che venga 
a spoglidrmi. 

L'aspeita net la di lei camera* 

Bubnanbtte, signbri, stiano 

allegramente. 
Avcte bisbgno di qudlche 

cos a ? 
Di niente off at to, che diri- 

posdre. 
Date vrdine che si diane 

lenzubla bidnche. 
Le lenzubla ch'avrdnno sbno 

di buceto. 

Fated sveglldre domdni a 

bubn' bra. 
Sardnnoserviti. Addio, sig- 

nbri,buo7ta sera, 

DIA- 



352 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE XVII. D I A LOGO XVII. 



To get on horseback. 

THERE is a horse me- 

thinks looks very bad. 
Give me another horse, I 

will not have that. 
He cannot go. 
He's broken winded; he's 

foundered. 
Are you not ashamed to 

give me such a hack as 

this? 
He has no shoes, he'sprickt 

in his foot. 
You must lead hiiii to the 

smith's. 
He goes lame, he's maimed, 

he's blind. 
This saddle will gall me. 
The stirrups are too long. 

too short. 
Let them out then, shorten 

them. 
The girths are rotten. , 
What a wretched bridle is 

here ! 
Give me my whip. 
Tie on my portmanteau, 

my cloak. 
Are your pistols loaded 1 
I forgot to buy powder and 

ball. 

Let us put on, let us go 

faster. 
I never saw a viler beast. 



Per montar a cavallo. 

E'CCO un cavallo che mi 

pare cattivo. 
Ddtemi uri dltro cavdllo, 

non voglio questo. 
Non pud cammindre, 
E' bblzo, e rappreso. 

Non avete vergogna di ddr* 
mi una carogna di quella 
s'orte ? 

E' sf err ate, t inchioddto. 

Bisbgna condurlo dal mart* 

scdlco. 
Zbppica, e stroppidioj cieco. 

Questa sella mi fara male. 
Lestdffesbno tfbppoliinghe, 

trbppo cbrte. 
AUongdte It stdffe, Urate 

su le stdffe. 
Le cinghie sono mdrcie. 
Che cattiva briglia ! 

Ddtemi la mia frusta. 
Attacdte la valtgia, il mie 

mantello. 
Sono cariedte I e sue pistole? 
Mi sono dimentiedto di com* 

prdr dtlla pblvere, e delle 

pdlle. 
Spronidmo, andidmo piii 

presto. 
IS on ho mdi visto una piu 

cattiva bestia. 



He 






DIALOGUES. 353 

He will neither go forward, Non vnol m andar innun- 

nor backward. zi, nc indietro. 

Let go the bridle a little. Lascidtegli la briglia. 
Hold the reins shorter. Piglidiele redinipiu cbrte. 

Spur him stoutly, make him Sprondte con vigore, fatelo 

go. andar' inndnzi. 

I have spurred him in vain. Pbsso btne spronare, non ne 

posso vemr' a capo. 
Alight, I will make him go. Scendete, chh lo faro bvri 

anddre. 
Take care he don't kick Avvertite die non vi tiri 

you. un cdlcio. 

He winches then, I find. Tira edict adunque per quel 

die vedo. 
See if I have not tamed VedetescVhomputedomdre. 

him. 

DIALOGUE XVIII. DIALGGO XVIII. 

To visit a sick person. Per visitar' un* ammalato. 

]HOW have you passed the CO' ME arete passdta la 

night ? - ndtte? 

Very badly, I have not slept Malamente, non ho dormito. 

at all. 
I have had a fever all night. Ho avido la j chore tiiita la 

nbiie. 
I have pains all over my Sentodoloriperiidtalavita. 

body. 
You mtrt be let blood. Bisbgna fdrvi cavdr sun-' 

fc> we. 

1 have been bled twice. M e stdto caidio sdngue due 

volte. 
Where does your apothe- Dove std di edsa 7 vostro 

cary live. spezidle. 

Go bid the surgeon come Anddte adir ol cirusico die 

and dress me. venga a medicdrmi. 

I cannot imagine why the Non so perche 7 medico non 

doctor does not come. viCnc. 

We do not know what health Non si sil cbsa' sia sariiin^ 

is, till Nve are \YU die quundo si sta male. 

You 



■*J4 



DIALOGUES. 



You must have a good Bisbgna first anim 
heart; it Mill be no- sard niente. 
thing*. 

My wound pains me prodi- Sento un gran dolbre nella 

giotisly. mia pidga. 

iave you been purged 1 Siete stato purgdto ? 

How much physic have you Quant e medicine arete preso? 
taken 1 

I am tired of physic. . Sbno faticdto di medicine. 

I am afraid of being light- Temo di dar' in dclirio. 
headed. 

~)rink some ptisan. Bevete dcqua cbtta. 

-i'ake nothing but broth. Nonpiglidte dltro the hrbd>. 

The doctor has ordered me II medico niha ordindto 7 
some whey. 

I am not able to stir my- 
self. 



siero. 
Non mi pbsso mubvere. 



Ddtemi un guancidle. 
Accommodate 7 mio capez- 

zdle. 
Tirdte le coriine. 



Give me a pillow. 
Put my bolster right. 

Draw the curtains. 

They want to bleed me in Ml si ruble far cavdr sdngue 

the foot. dal piede. 

Every thing I take seems Tut to cib che prendo mi par' 

bitter to me. amdro. 

How my mouth's out of O.qudnto sbno svoglidto ! 

taste ! 

It is a long sickness. Questaeunamalatttalunga. 

How tired I am of lying Qudnto mirincrtsce lo star 

abed! in Icito! 

How happy are you in the Bedto vbi the state bene ! 

enjoyment of health ! 

DIALOGUE XIX. D I A LOGO XIX. 

A person cheapens goods of Si parla con un mercatante 

a shopkeeper. per comprare. 



YOU see that I always VE DE bene che vengo scm~ 
come to your shop. pre da lei, 

I am 



DIALOGU E; S. 



355 



I am infinitely obliged to 
you. I shall endeavour 
to render myself wortby 
of the confidence you 
repose in me. 
I hope to please you as 

usual. 
You must not mind a little 
more or less, provided 
you are well served. 
I do not complain of the 
goods, but of the price 
only. 
You have no occasion to 
complain of me. Let us 
see in what I can serve 
you. 
I should like to make me 
two suits of cioaths, one 
for summer, the other 
for winter, but I do not 
know of what stuff to 
chuse. 

I should be glad to have a 
suit in taste, well chosen. 

You might make the close 
coat of a very good 
scarlet embroidered in 
gold. 

Or of another fashionable 
cloth, with a vest of gold 
tissue. 

I should rather have a sur- 
tout of black velvet. 

This would be also very 
elegant. 

For your, summer suit you 
may chuse a Brussels cam- 
let, with a little silver 
lace. 

Let us see the camlet. 



Le sbno sommamhitc tenuio. 
Aon mi renderb indtgno 
ddla conjldenza che V. S, 
ha in me. 

Spero che sard centfoito di 

me all ordindrio. 
Non bisbgna fisguardare a 

quahhc cvsa piu a menu, 

perchh sia ben servita. 
Non mi dolgo delta rbba, 

ma del prbzzo solamente. 

Non ha occasibne di lag* 
r, first di me. Vedidmo a 
che dtbbo seruirla. 

Vorrei f-'irmi due dbiti, imo 
di estate^ V altro d' inter ~ 
no, ma non saprei di che, 



Vorrei tin vestito di gusto, 
un vest it o ben inttso. 

Potrebbe fare 7 giustacbre 
dun ultimo scar Mi to ri- 
camdto d' bro. 

O di un' altro panne alia mo- 
da, con ina vtsfe di cana- 
vdecio d'bro. 

Avrti piu a euro fdrmi un 
surtii di velluto 7iero. 

Ancbr qu'sto sarebbe nubile. 

Per Vabilo di estate potrd 
prendere un camelletto di 
Brussells, con un piccbl 
gallbne d'argtnto. 

Vedidmo I cameUitio. 

This 



350 



DIALOGUES. 



Tiiis dark grey pleases me 
best. 

Don't you think that a 
grogram lining of a red 
colour wjll suit it best 1 

The grogram lining might 
do very well, but not of 
a red colour. 

For tins in the summer 
would be prejudicial to 
the sight. 

It is true; we will chuse 
another. 

And have you no occasion 
for a spring or autumn 
suit? 

No, I have enough of 
those. 

Now tell me the very lowest 
price. 

You know I do not like to 
make many words. 

Here it is not at all ne- 
cessary; we deal upon 
conscience, I will tell you 
in a word. 

You shall pay for the scar- 
let cloth two-and-twenty 
livres, and eighteen for 
the camlet. I shall not 
abate one penny. 

Cut me ten yards of one, 
and four of the other. 

We should previously settle 
the old account. I have 
a partner at present, and 
am no longer at liberty 
to give credit. 

I do not ask credit, I buy 
with ready money. 



Questo cenerognolo mi puke 

7 piil. 
Crede che lafodera di spo- 

miglioncino color difuoco 

convenga ? 
La fodera di spomiglion- 

cino starebbe bene, ma 

non rossa. 
Perchequhto colore I'estdte 
fa male alia vista. 

E vera, ne prendere'mo un 

dltra. 
E per un' dbito di mezzo 

tempo non ne ka bisognol 

No, ne ho abbastdnza. 

Or a mi dica 7 prezzo al piu 

gtiisto. 
Sa che non dmo molfo asti- 

racchidre* 
Qui non e necessdrio ; siven- 

de in coscienza. Le dirb 

de una par old, sola, 

Pagherci lo scarldtto venti 
due lire, el camellotto di- 
cidtto. Non vi t un soldo 
da levdre. 

Mene tdgli died brdecia dell' 
uno, fy quatiro dell' dltro. 

Bisognerebbe pr\ma soldare 
7 conto vecchio. Ord ho 
un compdgno, non sono 
piil in istdto di dare a 
credenza. 

Non domdndo credenza, corn- 
pro a dandri ccntdnti. 

I beg 



DIALOGUES. 



357 



I beg you will not be offend- 
ed ; we have been so of- 
ten imposed upon, that we 
no longer know whom to 
trust. 

I vow I do not gain ten 
pence a yard in the 
piece. 

Here is the money ; and 
I am obliged to you. 
Farewell. 

I hope you will be pleased 
with me. 

DIALOGUE XX. 

On civility. 

I AM overjoyed, sir, to 
meet you here, because I 
intended to wait upon you 
this very moment. 

You do me too much 
honour, far beyond any 
thing I can possibly 
merit. 

But what is your pleasure ? 
please to lay your com- 
mands on me. 

All I wanted, sir, was to 
assure you of my most 
humble respects. 

And at the same time to 
beg a favour of you, 
which was to recommend 
me to your mother's pro- 
tection. 

You may rest assured that 
my mother and myself 
are entirely at your' ser- 
vice. 



La supplico non offender sene; 
sidmo stdti tdnte volte in- 
ganndti, eke non sappidmo 
di chi piu JiddrcL 

Le givro die non guaddgno 
died soldi per brdecio nel 
pdnno. 

Ecco' 'I dandro, e le sono 
obligdto. A rivederci. • 

Spero che sard conUnta di 
me. 

DI ALO GO XX. 

Delia civilta. 

GO'DOj signore, ditrovdrlu 
qui per accidente, pevchh 
intenziondto ero d y anddr- 
mene in questo momtnto a 
edsa sua, 

V, S. mi fA troppa grdzia, 
ed un onore che non me- 
rito. 

Ma che comdnda, signore ? 
in che posso to ubbidirle ? 

Altro non volevo, padrbn mio y 
se non assicurdrla de' miei 
rispetti vmilissimi. . 

E nel medesiino tempo fdrle 
una preghiera ; cio & di 
raccommanddrmi alia pro- 
tezione della signora sua 
madre. 

Essa pud viver sicura eke 
tdnio mia madre, quant* 
io vividmo dipendenti d(C 
suoi cenni. 



Q 



I may 



358 



DIALOGUES. 



I may therefore expect 
your mother and you 
will, on this occasion, 
favour me with your 
interest? 

Do not make the least 
doubt of it : and believe 
me, that both my mo- 
ther and myself will re- 
ceive a particular plea- 
sure in serving you. 

By these noble expressions 
I am enabled to form a 
judgment of your gene- 
rosity and goodness. 

And from your strong 
professions of friendship, 
I can easily perceive, 
that you arc the worthy 
offspring of so worthy a 
mother. 

Truce, I pray you, sir, with 
your compliments; the 
event will afford you a 
sufficient proof of the sin- 
cerity of our friendship. 

I will be silent now, but 
when I have obtained the 
favour, I shall wait upon 
you with my thanks. 

Will you do me the favour 
to pay my respects to 
your mother ? 



Dunque pbsso sperare die la 
signora sua mddre, e lei 
mi fuvorirdnno in quest* 
cccasibne delta lor' ejjica- 
cissima interposizione ? 

Non ne dubiti punto, signor 
mio, e creda pure die la 
mddre tnia, ed io ci fare- 
mo un sensibilissimopiackre 
servendola. 

Conosco in vero dalle nobili 
sue esprcssioniy qudnto ge- 
nerosa sial'dnima die porta 
in petto. 

E ben nCaccorgo da suoi 
cordidli sentimenti, esscr 
V. S. d'tgno figlio delta 
degnissima sua genitrke. 



Nonpiu eomplimenti, signare; 
gli effetti le dardfino 
prove sicure delta nostra 
servitu. 

Tacero adesso ; ma, oztenuto 
die avrb la grdzia, verrb 
da lei per ringraziarnela. 

Mi favorisca di riverire di$- 
tintissimamenie per parte 
mia la signora sua mddre ? 



DIALOGUE XXI. 



DI A LOGO XXI. 



SPRING is of all seasons LA primavcraelapiu grata 
the most agreeable. di tutte le stagioni. 

Every thing then smiles in Tutto ride allc?*' ne'lla natura. 
nature. 

The 



DIALOGUES. 



S59 



The country looks like a 

vast garden. 
The meadows resemble a 

large green carpet. 
The weather is both verv 

mild and serene. 
The air is temperate. 
The trees are full of leaves. 

The melody of the birds en- 
raptures me. 

The weather is neither too 
hot, nor too cold. 

It is very healthy. 

All the living creatures are 
then in love. 

Nature seems to revive. 

We have no spring this 
year. 

The spring is backward, 

It is winter-like. 

I am fond of the country 
in summer-time, and of 
the town in winter. 

We have a very hot sum- 
mer. 

The heat makes me both dull 
and idle. 

The harvest will be very 
plentiful. 

It would be still more 
fertile if we had a little 
rain. 

There is a great plenty of 
fruit. 

We want a little rain. 

Rain would be -very bene- 
ficial. 

Tkey begin to cut down the 
corn. 



La campdgna e come un gran 
giardiao. 

I prdii somigliano ad ungrati 
(aj)eto vcrde. 

II tempo t molto dolce e molto 
"Sereno. 

Vdria e tempcrdla. 

Gil dlberl sono coperti di 
fog lie. 

II canto degV uccelli rriinna- 
mora. 

II tempo nonenetroppocaldO) 
ne troppofreddo. 

E molto sdno. 

Tutti gli animdli all6r y Jdnno 
V amove. 

La natura par che rindsca. 

Quest 1 anno non abbi&mo pun- 
to primavera. 

La primavera t> tardiva. 

L y un piccoV inverno. 

A'mo la campdgna nelV 
estate, e la cittd nelV in- 
verno. 

Abbidmo una est ate ben cdlda, 

II calore mi rende pesdnte e 

pigro. _; 
La raccolta sard molto ab- 

bonddnie. 
Lo sarebbe ancbr piu, se 

avessimo wi poco de piog- 
gia. f 
V 'c una grands abbonddnza, 

difrutti. 
Abbidmo bisogno d' wi po di 

pioggia. 
La pidggia ci farebbe molto 

bene. 
Si commincia a taglidr i 

gram, 
<* 2 Summer 



360 



DIALOGUES. 



Summer is gone. 
Summer did not last long. 

Autumn has taken its place. 

Autumn is the season of 

fruits. 
"Wine will be good this 

year. 
We shall drink good wine. 
The vines are very fine. 
They are loaded with large 

grapes. 
The days are very much 

shortened. 
We shall soon use candle at 

five o'clock. 
The mornings are cold. 
We shall soon be obliged to 

make a fire. 
Winter comes on. 
Winter draws near. 
The mornings are short. 
The evenings are long. 
The trees are divested of 

their leaves. 
Nature appears benumbed. 

Winter does not please me. 
It pleases nobody. 
Nevertheless it is pleasing to 

walk in the sun. 
It is soon night. 
The days are very short. 
We scarcely have eight 

hours full of daylight. 
Twilight does not make its 

appearance before seven 

o'clock in the morning. 



Vest ate e passdta. 

Vestdte non ha durato un 

pezzo. 
Vautunno ha preso il suo 

luogo. 
Vautunno e la stagione de' 

frutti. 
II vino sard buonoquesC anno, 

Beveremo buon vino. 
Le vigne sbno bellissime.- 
Sono car ic ate di grosse -Lve, 



Igiorni sono molto accorcidtu 



Accendercmo qudnto prima la 
candela a cinque ore. 

Le mattindte sonofredde. 

-Saremo ben tosto costretti 
d' avere delfuoco. 

V Jnverno viene. 

V hvoerno approssima. 
Le mattindte son cbrte, 
Le serdre son lung fie. 

Gli dlberi sbno spoglidli delle 

Ibrofbgie. 
La natura sembra intormen- 

tita. 

V Imerno non mi pidcc. 
Non pidce a nessuno. 
Nulla dimeno e dblce di passeg- 

gidre al sole. 
FJ presto presto notte. 

I gibrni sbno mblto cbrti. 
Appcna abbidmo nbi 01? ore 

di gibmo. 

II crepusculo non comm'mcia 
mat ad apparire avdnti le 
sette ore dclla mattina. 



They 



DIALOGUES. 



361. 



They light the candles at A cinque ore dopo prdnzo 

five in the afternoon. s'accendono le candcle. 

It is not daylight the next II giorno non ritbrna a com- 

day before eight o'clock. parir avdnti le ot£ ore del 

giorno dopo. 

The days are somewhat / giomi sono alqudnto slon- 

lengthened. gdti. 

That foretels the return of Questo ci annunzia il ritorno 

spring. della primavera. 

lis return will exhilarate Na- II suo ritorno rallegrerd la 

ture. naiura. 

DIALOGUE XXfl. D I A LOGO XXII. 



WHENCE do you come UO'nde vieneella? 

from? 
I come from the city, where Vengo ddlla citta ove incon- 



trdi suofratello. 
O ve va el la, 
ve cbrre cdsi frettolosa- 

rnenic? 
Di cite parte va ? 
Che via prende f 
Posso io and/ir con Hi ? 



J met your brother. 
Where are you going ? 
Where do you run so fast ? 

Which way do you go? 

Which way do you take ? 

Can I go with you ? 

Stay a little, I will go with Aspetti, che V accompagnerb. . 

you. 
Will you wait for me ten Vorrebbe dsptttdrmi died 

minutes? minuti ? 

I shall be ready in less than Sarb pronto in meno di died 

ten minutes, mintiti. 

Tell, me where you are Mi dica 6ve va? 

S oin 2\ 
I am going into the coun- Vddo alia campdgna. 

try. 



Come up in my room, I 
have something to tell 
you. 

Come in, and sit down. 

Don't you stir from thence. 

Stay there. 

Now, you may go out. 



Monti hella mia earner a^ ho 
qualche cosa da dirle. 

E'ntri) e si seda. 
Non si muova di Id. 
Stia Id. 
Pub uscire adesso. 



a3 



Come 



362 



DIALOGUES. 



Come down with me. 
Adieu, I wish you a happy 

journey. 
But, stop, come hither. 
Wait a little. 
Stop, that I may speak to 

you. 
Don't go so fast. 
You go too fast. 
What do you stop me for ? 
Don't touch me. 
You make me lose my 

time. 
My time is too precious for 

me to-mis-spend it. 
Leave that alone. 
Don't touch that. 
Touch nothing. 
Why do you recommend me 

that ? 
Because I recommend it to 

every body. 
I am well here. 
I Had myself very well 

here. 
The door is shut. 
Who has shut the door? 
1 can't open it. 
I can't turn the key. 
The lock is not good. 
Open the door. 
It is open. 
Shut the door. 
It is shut. 
Open the window. 
Shut the window. 
What do you look for ? 
What have you lost ? 
If you have lost any thing, 

I have not found it. 
I never find any thing. 



Smonti mtco. 

Addio, le auguro un buon 

vidggio. 
Ma; aspetti, tenga quu 
Aspetti un pbco. 
Sifermi, ch'io le pdrli. 

Non vdda cosi presto. 
V. S. va troppo presto. 
Perche miferma ella ? 
Non mi tocchi. 
Mi fa perder il mio tempo. 

Jl mio tempo e troppo prezioso 

per perderlo cosi. 
Ldsci quest o. 
Non tocchi quello. 
Non tocchi niente. 
Perche mi raccotnmanda ella 

questo ? 
Perche lo raceommdndo a 

tutti. 
Sco bene qui. 
Mi trovo tmlto Mm qui, 

La porta e thium. 

Cht ha chiuso la porta > 

Non posso aprirla. 

Non posso voltdre le chidvc. 

La serratura non h butma. 

A'pra la porta. 

Il aperta. 

Cluuda la porta. 

IP chtusa. 

A'pra lafmeslra. 

Serri lafmeslra. 

Che cerca, V. S. 

Che ha perdvto f 

Ss ha perduto qudkhe cosa f 

non l y ho trovdta. 
Non trovo mai niente. 

Speak 



DIALOGUES. 



36$ 



Speak aloud. 

Speak distinctly. 

Open your mouth. 

You speak too low. 

Why do you speak so low ? 

Don't be bashful* 

To whom do you speak ? 

Do vou speak to me ? 

Tell, is it to me that you are 

speaking ? 
Speak to me then. 
Speak to him. 
Speak to us. 
Speak to them. 
Do you speak French ? 
I speak it a little. 
What do you say? 
Do you say any thing? 
I say nothing. 
What have you said ? 
I have said nothing. 
I don't believe it. 
What does he say ? 
He says nothing. 
Does he not speak ? 
I thought he had spoken. 
What has he told you ? 
Has he told you nothing r 
What does she say ? 
She does not speak. 
What has she told you ? 
She said nothing to me. 
Dw-n't tell her that. 
I will tell it her. 
I won't tell it her. 
Don't tell it to them. 
Have you said that ? 
No, I have not told it. 
If I had said it, I would not 

deny it. 
What do you ? 



Pdrli forte. 

Parti distinlamcnte. 

A'pra la bocca. 

V. S. parla troppo piano. 

Perche parla ella cosi piano? 

Won sia tlmido. 

A chi parla ella ? 

Par I a a me ? 

Dica, e a vie clt e'la parla t 

Mi pdrli dunque. 

Gli pdrli. 

Cipdrli. 

Pdrli loro. 

Parla, V. S. Franche ? 

Lo pdrlo un poco. 

Che dice ? 

Dice, V. S. qudlche cosa ? 

Non dico nulla. 

Che ha ella detto ? 

Non ho dCtto niente. 

Non lo credo. 

Che dice egli. 

Non dice nulla. 

Non parla egli* 

Credevo cli avesse parldto. 

Che le ha detto ? 

Non le ha detto niente? 

Che dice ella ? 

Non parla . 

Che le ha detto essa ? 

Ella non m' ha detto niente. 

Non le dica (juhto. 

Glielo dirb. 

Nanglielo dirb. 

Non lo dka a loro. 

Ha detto questo ? 

No, non V ho detto, 

Se r avessi detto, non to neg~ 

herei, 
Chefa r V. &? 
a 4? I do 



364 



DIALOGUES. 



I do nothing. 
What have you done ? 
I have done nothing. 
Have you done your work ? 
No, I have been idle. 
Shall you soon have done ? 
Yes, in half an hour. 
Have you not done ? 
I thought you had done. 
You go very slow. 
You are very long. 
What does he do ? 
Is he doing nothing. 
Has he nothing to do ? 
Has he no business ? 

How does he spend his 

time? 
What is she doing? 
What is her amusement I 
Is she fond of music : 
Does she write? Does she 

read ? 
Does she go to the play ? 
What do you ask ? 
Do you ask for any thing ? 
Say what you ask. 
If you want any thing,speak. 

Answer me. 

Why don't you answer me ? 

Are you afraid, or do you 

scorn to answer me ? 
If you don't answer me, 

I'll speak to you no 

more. 



Nonfo nulla. 

Che hafdtto ? 

Non ho f duo niente. 

Ha ellafdtto il suo lavoro ? 

No, sdno stdtopigro. 

Avrd, V. S. finilo presto ? 

Si 9 in una mezz' or a, 

Non ha ellafinito. 

Credh'O che avessefnito. 

Va mclto adagio. 

E s molto Unto. 

Che fa egli ? 

Non fa egli niente ? 

Non ha egli niente a fare ? 

Non ha egli atcuna occupa- 

zione f 
Como passu egli 7 suo tem- 

poP 
Che fa ella ? 
Che e 7 suo passatempo ? 
A* ma ella la music a ? 
Strive ella ? Legg'-illa ? 

Va ella ai tediro f 
Che dimdnda, V, S. ? 
Bimdnda ella qudlche cosat 
Diva ella rib cite dimdnda. 
Se ha bisogno di qudlche cosa, 

pdrli. 
Mi risponda. 
Perchc non mi risponde ? 
Te/ne, 6 sdegna ella di ris- 

pondermi ? 
Se non mi risponde, non le 

par lei b piu. 



DIALOGUE XXIII. DIALOGO XXI IL 



I HAVE a good stomach. HO buon appetito. 
I could eat something, Mangerei volontieri qudlche 

cosa. 

I could 



DIALOGUES. 



365 



I could willingly eat. 

Eat something. 

Make no ceremonies. 

Do just as if you were at 
home. 

What will you to eat ? 

What would you wish to 
have ? 

Say what you like. 

Which will you have, some 
meat or fish ? 

Give me a knife, a spoon, 
and a fork. 

I have eaten enough. 

I have eaten sufficiently 

I can't eat any more. 

1 ate a good dinner. 

I am satisfied. 

You gave me a princely en- 
tertainment. 

Will you eat any more ? 

You eat very little. 

We had buta very indifferent 

dinner to-day. 
But, if you don't eat, do 

drink at least. 
What, will you neither eat 

nor drink? 
I could drink a glass of 

wine. 
I like red better than white 

wine. 
Drink which you please. 
I hope you like this wine. 

I have the honour to drink 

your health. 
I thank you. 
Drink another glass. 



Mangerei volontieri, 
Mdngi qudlche cosa. 
Nonfdccia cerimonie. 
Fdccia ella come se fosse a 

cdsa sua. 
Che vuole V» S. mangidre t 
Che desidera ella d'avire f 

Dica quel che dma. 

Vuole dilla came o del pescet 

Mi dia un cokello, un cuc- 

chidjo ed una forchetta* 
Ho mangidto assdi. 
Ho mangidto sufficientemente* 
Nonpotrei mangidr di piu. 
Ho ben pranzdto. 
Sono soddisfdito* 
Rfha trdttdto come un prin« 

cipe. - 
Vuole ella mangidre davan- 

taggio? _ 
Non ha mangidto quasi ni- 

ente. 
Abbidmo avuto un cuttivissi- 

mo prdnzo oggi. 
Ma se non mdngia, ahneno 

beta. 
Che ! non vuole m here, ne 

mangidre ? 
Beverei volontieri un bicchi- 

fc'rc di vino. 
Prcferisco il vino rosso al 

bianco. 
Beva di quel che le pidce< 
Spero cIik ifoverd buono ques- 

to vino. 
Ho I* onore di here alia sua 

sa ute. 
La ringrdzio. 

Ne beva un dltro bicchiere. 
Q. 5 I have 






D I A LOGUES, 



I have drunk enough. 

I drank more to-day than I 

commonly drink. 
It is a long while since I 

drank so much. 
My thirst is quenched. 
I would not drink for all the 

gold in the world. 
I earnestly entreat you will 

not make me drink any 

more. 
Your wine is exceeding 

good, or else I would not 

have drunk so much of 

it. 
Yet, I could not possibly 

drink any more of it. 



Ho bevitto assdc 

Ho bevuto oggi piu die non 
bevo communemente. 

E un pezzo che non ho be- 
vuto tdnto. 

La mia sete e seddta. 

Non beverei per tutto V oro 
del mondo. 

La prego instantemente di non 
fdrmipiu bere. 

II siio vino e ecceU'ente^ allri- 
mente non ne avrei bevuto 
tdnto. 

Nientedimeno,, ni sarebbe im~ 
possibile di berne davan- 
tdggio. 



DIALOGUE XXIV. DIALOG XXIV. 



DO you know that ? 

I don't know it. 

I know nothing of it. 

Did your friend know it ? 

Did he not know it ? 

He has never known it, 

nor shaft he ever know 

it. 
He shall know nothing of 

it. 
Have you seen my uncle ? 
Do you know him ? 
I know him very well. 
Have you ever seen my 

aunt? 
Do you know her. 
You speak of my sisters, 
Do you know them ? 
I don't know them. 
I have never seen them. 



SA ella quesio ? 
Non lo so. 
Non ne' so nulla. 
II siio amicQ lo snpeva ? 
Non lo sapeva ? 
Non V ha ?ndi saputo, ne lo 
saprd mau 

Non ne saprd niente. 

Ha V. S. veduto mio zlo ? 

Lo conosce ella ? 

Lo condsco molto bene. 

Ha ella mat veduto mia ziaf 

La conosco? 

E'lla pdrla di mie sorelle, 

Le conosce ? 

Non le conosco. 

Non le ho mdi vedute. 

As 



DIAL O G U E S: 



367- 



As to your cousin, I have 
known him. 

He has left a son, whom you 
ought io know. 

I know him by sight. 

He has also a very amiable 
sister , 

I know her by reputation. 

But, sir, you speajc to me as 
if you knew me. 

Do you know me ? 

I know you very well. 

Yet, I have forgotten your 
name. 

I am surprized at it. 

What ! is it thus you forget 
your friends? 

Have you entirely forgotten 
me ? 

Had you not sworn to me 
an eternal friendship? 

I have not transgressed my 
oath. 

I love you as much as I 
ever did before. 

Your brother does not re- 
collect me neither. 

He has forgotten me. 

He has made fresh ac- 
quaintances in my ab- 
sence. 

I have seen Mr. C. at Pa- 
ris. 

I have the honour of being 
known by him. 

Don't you recollect me ? 

We have played together at 
school. 

W r e are nearly of the same 
age. 

You are younger than I. 



A rigudrdo di suo cugino r l f ' 

ho conosciuto. 
Ha lascidto unfig-io cti ella 

deve conoscere, 
Lo conosco di vista. 
Ha parimente una sorella 

motto amdbile. 
La conosco di riputazione. 
Ma, signore, mi pdrla come 

se mi conoscesse. 
Mi conosce ella ? 
La conosco moito bene. 
Perb mi sono scorddto delsdo 

nome. 
Ne sono sopreso. 
Che ! si scorda cdsi dc' suoi 

amid. ! 
S'e interamente scorddto di 

me ? 
Non maveva ella giurdto 

una eterna amicizia ? ' 
Non ho violdto il mio giura- 

mento. 
V dmo qudnto V amdva q- 

vdnti. 
Suofratello non mi riconosce 

neppure. 
S't scorddto di me. 
Ha fdtto nudve conoscenze 

durante la viia atsenza. 

Ho veduto il signore C; a 

Parigi. 
Ho V onbre d'essere conosciuto 

da lui. 
Non mi riconosce ella ? 
Habbidmo giuocdto insieme 

alia scuola. 
Sidmo quasi dcW istessa eid, 

Ella e pin gidvane di me. 
a 6 U 



368 



DIALOGUES. 



If you are not younger, at 

least, you appear to be 

so. 
What are 

for. 
I have lost both the best 

of fathers and the best of 

mothers. 
'My father is dead. 
My mother is dead. 
My sister is married again. 

How many children have 
you ? 

I have four. 

Sons or daughters? 

I have a son and three 
daughters. 

How many brothers have 
you ? 

I had three, but now I have 
hone. 

They are all dead. 

Unmerciful death . has car- 
ried them off. 

The physicians, with the 
assistance of the surgeons 
and apothecaries, have 
cured them of all their 
diseases. 

Wear© all mortal. 



Se non t piu giovane, almi' 
no lo sernbra. 



you in mourning Perche c ella inlutto ? 



Ho perduto il ??iigliore de' 
pddri e la migliore dclle 
madri. 

Mio padre e morto. 

Mia madre c niona. 

Mia sorella t maritdta im 
dllra volta. 

Quanti jigliuoli ha ? 

Ne ho qudltro. 

M dec hi o feminine ? 

Ho unfiglio e trefiglie. 

Quanti fratelli ha ella ? 

Ne avevo tre, ma adesso non 

ne ho alcimo. 
S6no tutti mcrti. 
La spietdta morle li ha presi 

tutti. 
J medici ajutdti d<£ chirurghi 

e ddgli spezidli, li lidnno 

guariti de tutte le loro ma~ 

lattk. 

Sidmo tutti mortaJL 



£ 369 ] 

A 

COLLECTION 

OP" 

ITALIAN PHRASES, 



IDIOMS, which constitute the peculiar Delicacy of 
that Language. 



HP H E Italian language surpassing all others in the deli- 
cacy and elegance of its expressions, I apprehended 
it would be of public utility to print this small collection, 
which contains the true idioms, or modes of speaking, and 
the turns of the Italian phrases, divided according to their 
respective subjects. 

For Example. 

To pray or exhort* 



T\ E A R sir, do me that fa- 
vour, 
My love, 

My delight, my soul, 
I conjure you, 
I pray you, 
I beseech you, 
Do me the favour, 



QA'RO voi, fdtemi questo 

favore. 
ben mio, dnima mia, amor 

mio. 
tcsoro mio, dnima ?nia. 
deh ! vi scongiuro, 
deh .' vi prego. 
per cortesia. 
V. S, mifavorisca. 



ToJIiew civility. 
Your servant, sir, Servitor, padron mio, 

I am intireiy yours, eono tutto suo. 

Your slave, schidvo suo. 

I kiss your handsj bdccio k mdni a V. $. 



I thank 



570 



ITALIAN PHRASES, 



I thank you, 

You may depend upon me, 

See if it is in my power to 

serve you, 
Command me, 
Do what you please with 

your servant, 
I wait for your commands, 
Since jrou will have it so, 
You are the master, 
At your service, 
I am obliged to you, 

I am infinitely obliged to 

you, 
I will not be guilty of that 

fault, 
Away with these titles and 

ceremonies^ 
If is my business to serve 

you, 
You are very obliging, 
I know not how to make 

a proper return, for so 

many favours, 



laringrdzio. 

fdccia capitdle della mia per- 
sona, 

veda V. S. se son capdee di 
servirla. 

V. S. mi comdndi. 

V. S. disponga del suo se?vi~ 
tore. 

aspetto i suoi comdndi. 

poicti ella comdnda cosh - 

V, S. e padrone. 

al suo comdndo. 

resto con obbllgo appresso a 
V, S. son obbligdto a V. S. 

resto obligate infimlamente a 
V. S 

nonfarb questo mancamento, 

lasciamo questi titoli, questc, 

ceremonie. 
tdeca a me di servirla. 

V. S. t troppo cortese. 
non saprei come contracam- 
bidre tdnti obblighi. 



" To complain, hope, or defpair. 
How unfortunate am I, if Gudi a me y se questo e .' 

that be, 
Poor miserable wretch that poverettome 9 meschinomel 

I am! 
Poor miserable creatures that poveretti noi ! 
we are! 

r sventurdto, sciagurdto^ in- 
How unfortunate am 1 1 } felice. 

( disgrazidto me ! 
O my God, what sad pain ! o Dio y che penu ! 
Ah cursed fortune ? ahisorteaversa ! 

To what are we reduced I a che siam giunti; nddtti, 

conddtti ! 

We 



or MANNERS op SPEAKING. 



371 



We are undone ; we are 

ruined ! 
There wanted only that, 
We are at last come to it, 
That was the cause of my 

grief, 
There is what completes our 

ruin, 
That is the misfortune, 
It is really a pity, 

the poor child ! 

1 am the most unfortunate of 

men ! 
What is to be done ? 

We must have patience, 
We must conform ourselves 
to the will of God, 

Nothing farther can be 

done, 
I hope that God, I hope 

that heaven, 
It is enough, in the name 

of God, 
We must swallow that, 
We must die, sooner or 

later, 
We fiad bread to eat every 

where, 



sidmo morli; spedid ; rovi- 

ndti ! 
qnesto ci mancdva. 
ci sidm pur giunti. 
ecco dove mi doleva. 

ecco Vultima nostra rovincu 

questo e'/ male* 

e peccdto veramente, 

o povero figliuolo ! 

io* son pur it re delle disgrcU 

zie ! 
che c' e da fare ? eke faro ? 

chefaremo ? 
hisogna aver pazienza. 
bisogna conformdrsi, bisogna 

rimettersi alia volontd di 

Dio. 
non si pub far* dltro. 

spero in Dio, spero nel cielo. 

bdsta, in name di Dio, 



forza e che cela hevidmo. 
ad ogni modo bisogna niorire* 

dnche alirdve simdngia pane., 



To give tokens of affirmation, conjent, belief, or rtfufaL 

However it is true, 
It is but too true, 
To tell you the truth, 
Indeed it is so, 
There's no doubt of it, 
I believe yes, 
I believe no, 

V I lay 



E f pur zero. 
e pur troppo vero. 
a dirvi H vero. 
infdtlie cosi, cosi e. 
non v' e dub bio. 
credo di sh 
credo di nb t 



372 



ITALIAN PHRASES, 



I lay it is, 

I lay it is not, 

I think so, I think not, 

Not to tell an untruth, 

Nobody would say such an 
extravagant thing, 

Say likewise that the snow 
is not white, 

I can tell you she is very 
handsome, 

I would lay a wager, 

You jest, 

I speak in earnest, 

You have guessed right, 

I believe you, one may be- 
lieve you, 

Let it be then, so let it be, 

You shall be satisfied, 

Softly, not so fast, 

Nor that neither, 

I would not give thee a 
trifle, 

Yes, truly, 

They are trifles, 

Do not break my head, 

Po not make me giddy or 
deaf, 

Get thee to bed. 



scommetto di si. 

scommetto di 7io. 

penso di si, penso dinb. 

salvo V vero. 

niuno direbbe una stravagdn- 

za simile, 
dite dnche che la neve non £ 

bidnca. 
vi so dire cK ella e bellissima* 

scommetterei qudlche cosa. 

oh bur la V. Si 

pdrlo da senno. 

V avete indovihdta. 

lo credo, vi si pub credere. 

sia dunque, cost sia. 
V.J>, r ester & serttia. 
adagio, adagio, a belV agio* 
ne mdnco questo, 
non ti darei unfrullo. 

teramente si, senza dubbio. 

son cipolle. 

non mi rompete 'I cdpo, 

non mi star* ad introndre le 

orecchie, 
vd a dorm ire. 



To deny. 



I say not, 

It is not true, 

It is not so, it is so, 

Positively I will not, 

I joked, 

I did it only by way of jest, 



Dico di no, 
non t vero. 
questo no, questo si. 
non voglio in conto alcuno. 
I in nissun modo, in nissuna 

manCera. 
io burldvo. 
lofacevo da scherzo, 



or MANNERS of SPEAKING; 



373 



To confult. 



What is to be done ? 

What course shall we take ? 

Let's do so and so, 

Let's do one thing, 

It will be better that, 

Stay a little, 

It would be better that. 

Let me alone, 

I had rather, 

Were I in your place, 



Che c'e da fare ? 

che parlito piglieremo ? 
faccidmo cost, 
faccidmo una cosa. 

sard meglio che. 

sdldo un poco. 

sarehbe meglio che. 

lascidtefar' a me. 

vdrr i piu toslo. 

se iofossi in luogo vostro. 



Heavens preserve you, 
God send you good luck, 
I wish you every thing that's 

good ?> 
God assist you, 
God forgive you, 
God be with you, 
May you be happy, 
I wish you true content, 

God grant you all the pros- 
perity you desire, 

Till I see you again, 

I am your most humble ser- 
vant, 

You are welcome, 

Well met, 

Much good may do you, 



To wijli well to a per Jon, 

II cielo vi gudrdi. 

Iddio vifeliciti. 

m prego ogni vero bene. 



Iddlo v'djuti, 

lddio vi perdonu 

anddle con Dio. 

and ate f dice* 

vi prego ogni maggior con- 

teni'ezza* - 
prego D'so che vi conceda ogni 

prosper a a piu desiderdb He* 
a rivederci. 
la riverisco. 

ben venUto. 

ben irordlo. 

bum provifdecia, 



Upon my faith, 

In my conscience. 
Upon my life, 
Upon your life, 



To [wear. 

AUa fe y a fe di Dio y per 

?niafL 
in coscihza mia. 
per vita mia. 
per vita V93tra* 

I swear 



374 



ITALIAN PHRASES, 



I swear, as I am a gentle- vi giuro da cavaliere. 

man, 
As I am an honest man, 
As I am a man of honour, 
As I am a poor man, 
As I am an honest man, 
May my eyes be plucked 



out, if, 



That I may die, 
That I may be killed, 
By Bacchus, 
As God shall keep me, 
Shall save me, 



da galantuomo che sono, 

da ubmo onordto. 

da paver' uomo che sono. 

da iwmo dabbene. 

che mi sian cavati gli ocelli, 

se. 
possa in morire. 
pbssa io esser amazzdlo. 
pel cbrpo di Bdcco. 

> che Dio nCajuti) mi sdlvi* 



I will break thy head, 

I will beat thee, 

Thou wilt make me give 

thee fifty blows with a 

stick, 
May the plague take me, if 

I don't kill him, 
I will affront thee after such 

a rate, 
I will give thee a Rowland 

for thy Oliver, 
Let me alone, I will know 

if, 
Thou will pay it me, 
I swear thou shall repent 

it, 
Thou hast done it, 
I will give it thee, go, 
Thou wilt lauoii with me, 

but, 
If you put me into a pas- 
sion, 
If I put myself into a pas- 
sion, 
Do not stun me, 



To threaten or infult. 

Ti romperb la testa, 
ti batterb. 

tu mi caverdi dalle ?ndni tin- 
quanta bastondte. 



si io non V a?ndszOj ml pbssa 

tenir in rdbhUu 
tifarb uno sc6mo (ale. 

ti rendero pan perfocdecia, 

Idsciajar' a me, clC io saprb. 

tu melft pagherdi. 

giuro al mbndo che lenefarb 

pent ire. 
tu meV Itdifdtta. 
te la darb t va. 



se tu mi fdi andar' in col- 

kra. 
se mi comincia afumdre. 

non mi stuzzicdr le orecchie. 
Do 



or MANNERS of SPEAKING. 



375 



Do not waken a sleeping non destdre 7 can che dorms. 

lion, 
Softly, softly, 
Woe be to thee, 
Thou shalt not escape me, 
Hold your tongue, don't 

speak to me, 
5 Tis enough, 'tis sufficient, 
Thou art undone, 
In spite of thee, 
To his face, 



pian^piano. 
gudi a te. 

tu non mi scapperdi. 
non piu parole, tdcL 



bdsta, tanto bdsti. 
sei mono va. 
at tuo rndrcio dispetto. 
alia barba sua* 



To admire. 



O God I 

God! O blessed Jesus ! 
Jesus Maria ! 

Is it possible ? 

(These marks of admira- 
tion cannot be turned 
into English without los- 
ing all their beauties.) 

Who ever saw the like ! 

Who would have thought, 
believed, said ! 

Look a little now ! 

What a beast it is ! 

1 did wonder, 

strange ! 

1 don't wonder, 
How can that be ? 

So goes the world, 



Dio mio ! Dio buono 1 

Cristo benedetto ! 

Giesii Maria ! 

poter di Cristo, piio far' il 

morido, piio far' il cielo ? 
poter di Bdcco t poter del 

mondo cdspitta, cdppari. 



chi vide nidi cose tiimili f 
chi nvrhhbe pensdto, creduto^ 

ditto ! 
giiarddtemi un pdco ! 
che bdstiu ! 
Jo mx maravigliotvo. 
che moravJglm / 
nonjjii maraviglio, 
come pud essere ? com* e p$£- 

sibife ? 
cosi vdnno le cose del mondo^ 

cost va 7 mondo. 



To JJiew joy, or difplcafure* 

What pleasure ! O che gusto 

What glory ! 



What 



joy 



o che gloria ! 
o che allegrezza t 



376 



ITALIAN PHRASES, 



How pleased I am ! 
O, how happy am I ! 

happy day ! 
What happiness ! " 

O, how happy are you •' 

1 am sorry for it, 

That touches my very soul, 
It pierces me to the heart, 



che contento e 7 mio ! 

o me f dice ! 

o gibrnofellce ! 

o chefortuna ! 

bedlo voi .' 

mi displace^ mi rincresce. 

mi displace firi all' tmima, 

tni trafigge 7 cubre. 






dealing 



Is this their 

gentlemen ? 
Oughtest thou not to be 

ashamed ? 
To affront me thus! 
To such a man as I am, 
Tome, is it not ? 
Do you deal thus ? 
All, is it so ? 
So and so, is it not ? 
See the simpleton ! 
O, what fine manners ! 
What a fine way of proceed- 
ing ! ■ 
O, that is fine ! 
Thou oughtest not to treat 

me thus, 
Dost thou think that is well? 
We shall see immediately, 
What the devil has he 

done ? 
Do but see what a rascal 

he is, 
What, are you obstinate 

still? 



To reproach 
with Cos 



i si tratta cc? galdnt' uo~\ 
mini f 
?io?i ti dovresti vergogndre ? 

a me far quest' ajrbnto ! 

ad un pari mio. 

a ?ne, eh ? 

a questo mbdo si tratta ? 

a questo mbdO) th ? 

cost, eh f 

guar da minchione ! 

oh che heila crednza ! 

che bel mbdo diprceidcre ! - 

bel mo do certo. 
non doveresti usclr s'unili ter- 
mini me co. 
parti che stia befe ? 
adesso si tedrd. 
che didvolo hafdtto f 

mirdfe un poco che furf ante a 

costui. 
ancor* ostindto ? 



Hark, 
Listen, 



To call. 

Asculta. 
odi. 



Where 



or MANNERS of SPEAKING. 



377 



Where art thou 2 - 

Hark ye, 

Hear you, 

•Hark ye a little, 

A word, 

I will speak but two words 

to \ou, 
Stay, 
Stay you, 



bve set? 

sent He una par bla. 

sent it e, udite. 

sentite un pbco. 

una parbla. 

due parole solamenie, 

fermati. 
Jermdtevi. 



To shew uneasiness, trouble , or sorrow. 



I am sorry, 
Leave me alone, 
Prithee get thee gone, 
Do not break my head, 
Away, away, 

Go, go, God be with you, 
Get you out of my sight, 
Get thee gone from hence, 
Go, mind your own business, 
Do not make me giddy, 
Do not split my ears, 
How tiresome you are ! 
You have told it me a hun- 
dred times already. 



Mi dispidce, mi rincisce, 

lasciami in pace. 

va via, ti prego. 

nbn mi romper e 7 capo, 

via via, ti prego. 

via, vdttene con Dto. 

levdtevi d' inndnzi, 

levdtevi di qua. 

anddte afar* ifdtti vbstrL 

non mi st or dire. 

non m'introndr le orecckie* 

o che sei noibso ! 

meV hdi ditto cento volte, 



To give courage. 

Cheer up, sirs, A'nimo, signer i. 

Come on, gentlemen, come sil su, signbri. 

on, 

Come, let's see to work, or sh a nbi alle mdnu 

Let's give over, Jinidmola. 



To ask. 



What news ? 
What's that? 



Che si dice, di nuovo ? 
che e'e ? 

Where 



378 



ITALIAN PROVERBS. 



Where are you going t 

Whence come you 1 

What means? 

To what purpose ? 

What do you think 1 

To what end? 

Why do you make such 

ado? 
Tell me, may one know ? 
Tell me, may one ask you ? 

Who is it that has been so 
bold? 



dove si va ; dove andate? 

dbnde si viane? 

che vuol dire? 

a che serve ? 

che vi pare ? 

a che proposito? a che fine? 

a che tante stbrie, per che 

tante smbrfie ? 
ditemi se si pud sapere ? 
ditemi s'e lecito di doman- 

ddrvi ? 
che ha avuto cotdnto ardire ? 



To forbid. 



Let that alone, 

Do not touch, 

Say not a word, 

Do not stir from hence, 

In the name of God, do not 

doiti 
Have a care, 
Take a care, 
I forbid it, 



Lascidte stare. 

non toccdre. 

non dir niente. 

non ti partir di qua*. 

non lofdre in nbme di Die, 



guarddtevi bene, 
avvertite. 



lo proibisco. 



COLLECTION RACCO'LTA 

OF DI 

Italian Proverbs. Proverbj Itali&ni. 

nr*0 expect, and not to jSpettdre, e non venire ; 

come ; 

To lie a-bed, and not to Starinletto,enondormire; 
sleep ; 

To 



ITALIAN I'ROVERBS. 



«*/ 



To serve, and not to please ; 
Are three things enough to 

kill a man. 
Your mouth heals what it 

touches. 
A hackney horse brings in 

money, but does not last 

long/ 
A house built, and a vine 

planted, is never sold for 

what it cost. 
There's no one happy in 

this world, but he that 

dies m his swaddling 

clouts. 
Without bread and wine, 

love is cold. 
To travel post, requires the 

purse of a prince, and 

the strength of a porter. 
It is better going alone, than 

in bad company. 
Misfortunes aud pleasures 

never come single. 
Fine to fine is not good to 

make a lining. 
A woman is like a chesnut, 
Fair to the outside, foul 

within. 
We must not choose women 

nor linen by candle- 
light. 
Raw herbs, and sleeping on 

the ground, send a man 

to his grave. 
Love and greatness will not 

associate. 
A good stomach needs no 

sauce. 
We think no more of vows, 
when the danger is past. 



Serv'tre, e non gradtre ; 
Son tre cose da far morire. 

La v'ostra bbeca sdna quel 

che tbeca. 
Co v alio di vettura fa pro- 
fitto, ma non dura. 

Casafdtta, vigna pbsta. 
Non si pdga quant o cost a. 

Nel mbndo non £ felice, se 
non quel che mubre in 
fdscie. 

Senza Cerere e Bacco, Ve- 

nere e di ghidecio. 
La pbsta c una spesa da 

principc y ed un mestiere 

dafacchino. 
E meglio anddr solo, che 

mal accompagndto. 
Le sciagure, e le allegrezzt 

non vergono mat sole. 
Duro con auro f non c babri 

afar' muro. 
La donna ecbmelacastdgna, 
Bella di fubri, e dentro ha 

la magdzna. 
Ne donna, ne tela non com- 

prdre alia candela. 

E'rba cruda, e dorpiire in 
pidna terra, munda V 
ubmo sotto terra. 

Amor, e signm^a non vbg~ 
lion compagnia. 

Appettto non vubl sdlza. 

Passdto 7 pericolo, gabbdto 
7 sdnto. 

Old 



}S0 



ITALIAN PROVERBS. 



Old crimes, new penance. 

The beast once dead, the 

venom dies also. 
Fair words are very power- 
ful, and cost nothing. 
A hundred pounds of sor- 
row won't pay an ounce 

of debt. 
He that goes to bed without 

his supper, will toss and 

tumble all night. 
The ravens never pluck out 

one another's eyes. 
Tell me your company, and 

I shall know what you 

do. 
Let every one mind his own 

business. 
He is fallen out of the 

frying-pan into the fire. 
Time and straw ripen 

medlars. 
One scabby sheep infects a 

whole flock. 
Every bird likes his own 

nest. 
A barking dog never biles. 

Do not wake a sleeping 

lion. 
He that is fonder of you 

than usual, 
Either has cheated you, or 

designs it. 
To ask better bread than is 

made of corn. 
To ask my landlord if the 

wine be good. 
Sorrow for a dead woman 



Peccato vecchio, penitmia 

nubva. 
Mart a la btstia, mbrto 7 

ventno. 
Unbel parldre di bbcca assdi 

vale, poco cost a. 
C?nt' ore di malinconia nan 

pagdno un quattrino di 

debit o. 
CM vd a letto scnza cena, 

tidta la nbtte si dimma. 

Cbrvi con cqrvi non si cdvan 

mai gli bcchi. 
Dimmi can chi tu vai, saprb 

Quel chefdi. 

Ciascun' attenda a' fdtti 

subi. 
E caduto ddllapadclla sulla 

brdgia. 
Col tempo, e la pdglia si 

/maturano le nespole. 
Una ptcora mdrcia neguasta 

un brdnco. 
Ad bgni uccello suo nido t 

Ullo. 
Can cti abbdja, non mbrde 

mai. 
Non dtstdre 7 can chc dbrme. 

Chi ti fa carezze piu die 

non suble, 
O t'ha inganndto, o ingan- 

ndr ti vuble. 
Cercdr miglior pane die di 

fromento. 
Domandar all' bstc se ha 

bubn vino. 
DogUdidi donna mbrta dura 
gues 






ITALIAN PROVERBS. 



361 



goes no farther than the 
door. 
Good wine needs no bush. 

It is better one's foot slip 

than one's tongue, 
Wine brings out the truth. 
The poorest hog has the 

best pear. 
He that waits for another's 

porringer, often dines ill. 
He complains that his wife 

is too handsome. 
A hidden sin is half pardon- 
ed. 
He that buys land, buys 

trouble. 
He that cheats is often 

cheated. 
Who lies with dogs, rises 

with fleas. 
The maid surpasses the 

mistress. 
The Devil's not always at the 

poor man's gate. 
Fair words and foul play 
1 cheat both the young and 

the old. 
There are no roses without 

thorns. 
There are no roses but what 

become heps. 

With artifice aud deceit we 

live half the year ; 
With deceit and artifice we 

live the other half. 
He that serves the publick, 

obliges nobody. 
God preserve me from such 

people as flatter me to 



in fin* alia porta. 

Al bubn vine non hisogna 

Jrdsca. 
E meglio sdruccioldr co' 

piedi che col la lingua. 
II vmo £ una mkza cor da, 
Al piii tristo pbrco men la 

miglior per a, 
Chi per man d' altri s' im- 

bbeca, tdrdi si satblla. 
Si lamhita del brbdo grdsso, 

Peccdto celdto a mezzo per- 

dondto. 
Che cbmpra terra, compra 

guerra. 
Chi cerca d'inganndr, resta 

inganndto. 
Chi dor me cot cdni, si leva 

collepulci. 
La serva super a lapadrbna. 

Non sempre ria fori una un 

lubgo itene. 
Belle parole, e cattivi fdtti, 

ingdnnano savj, e mditi. 

Non si pub aver la rosa senza 

le spine. 
Non f a cost bella scdrpa, che 

non dkerddsse brutta cia- 

vdtta. 
Con arte, ed ingdnno, si 

vive mezzo V dnno ; 
Con ingdnno, e con arte, si 

vive l' dltra parte. 
Chi serve al comiine, non 

serve a nissimo. 
Dio mi gudrdi da quella 

gdtta, che dinndnzi mi 
R ray 



382 



ITALIAN PROVERBS. 



my face, and betray me 

behind my back. 
A good friend is worth a 

hundred relations. 
Fevers in autumn are long 

or mortal. 
To sell bladders for lan- 
terns. 
Every country has its fa^ 

shions. 
To mind two things at 

once. 
To be on both sides. 

To have two strings to 

one's bow. 
To cheat two at once. 

We must love the dog for 
his master's sake. 

To set the fox to keep the 
geese. 

The priest errs at the altar. 

We must hide nothing from 
our physician and our 
. lawyer. 

Nuns, monks, priests, and 
chickens, are never sa- 
tisfied. 

Short reckonings make long 
friends. 

Eggs of an hour, bread of 
a day, wine of a year, 
fish of ten, a woman of 
fifteen, and a friend of 
thirty. 

Wine of three virtues, that 
moistens, washes, and 
ne freshes, without any 
strength in it. 



lecca, e d'utro mi grtiffia. 

E' hiSgtio 11711)11011 amico che 

cento par hit i. 
Febbreautunndle, o elunga, 

o e mortdle. 
Vender luccioleper lanterne. 

Tal paese, taV usdnza. 

Aver un' be eh io alia phi tola, 
e V dltro alia gdtta. 

Dar un eblpo alia botte, ed 
un altro al cerchio. 

Tenere 'I piede in piit staff e. 

Pigliar due colbmbi ad iaia 

Java. 
Bisbgna portdr rispetto al 

can per ambr del padrone. 
Dar le laitughe in guard la 

di pdperi. 
E'rra ilprtte all' alt are. 
A! medico, ed all avoedto 

non tenere 7 ver celdto. 

Man ache, f rat i,preii, e pb Hi, 
non si veggon rndi sa- 
iblli. 

Pdtto chidro, amico Carp. 

Ubvo d'tm bra, pane d'un d), 
vino d'un anno, pesce di 
died, donna di quindici, 
amico di t rent a. 

Vino di tre virtu, bogna, 
lava, e rinfresca, ne ha 
forza alciina. 



Bread 



ITALIAN PROVERBS. 



383 



Bread that sees, wine that 
sparkles, cheese that 
weeps. 

A salad, to be well sea- 
soned, ought to have little 
vinegar and plenty of 
oil. 

It is better being a bird in 
the field, than in a cage. 

A bird in the hand is worth 
two in the bush. 

It is better to be friends at 
a distance, than enemies 
near at home. 

When it is fair weather, 
take thy cloke ; when it 
rains, wear it if you 
please. 

If thou wouldst be revenged 
of thy enemy, govern 
thvself. 



Pan eke veda, tin eke salti, 
forrnaggie eke pianga. 

Insaldta ben salata, poc* 
aeeto, ben' ogliata. 



E meglio esser' ueeello di 
eampagna, cite di gabbia. 

E meglio tin novo oggi, eke 
domani una gallina. 

E meglio esser amiei da Ion- 
tdnojche nemici d'appresso. 

Ne di state, ne. d'invtrno, 
non anddr senza mantello. 



Vuoi far vendetta del tuo 
nemico, govemati bene. 



R 2 



["• 384 ] 



A COLLECTION OF JESTS, 

Several diverting Stories, Sentences, and the 
choicest Italian Proverbs. 



D y un Birbante. 



U ! 



N Birbante, per meglio procacciarsi la Hmosina, 
andava accattando col suono d'un campanellino, 
mostrando co' suoi cenni esser muto, e sordo : il che 
vedendo un galantuomo, lo chiamo a se, ed in presenza 
d'alcuni amici suoi ai quali aveva detto ch'egli voleva 
far' un miracolo, disse al Birbante, mostrandogli nella 
destra un quatirino, e nella man sinistra una pezza di 
quattro soldi : vedi qual vuoi scegliere. Se tu sei vera- 
meute muto, saia. tuo '1 quattrino : ma se confessenii la 
verila, ti giuro da galantuomo di darti la pezza di quat- 
tro soldi. Ii Birbante, senza indugiare, confesso 11011 
esser muto; £bbe la pezzettiiia di quattro soldi, ed 
andossene via, poco curandosi delle risa degli altrL 



D'un Furbo. 

UN mendico tristo, e furbo contrafaceva con cosi 
verisimili maniere 1 moribondo nelle strade publiche di 
Parigi, e particolarmente appresso delle Chiese, che i 
Preti medesimi venivano a fargli la raccomandazione dell' 
anima. Mentre un' altro furbo, piangendo a diiotte 
lagrime, diceva esser suo fratello, ch'era cosi venuto meno, 
e tramortito di debolezza, per npn aver mangiato in tutto 
1 giorno antecedente. E per muovere maggiormente la 
gente a compassione, soggiungcva, ch'essendo essi d'ono- 
rata famiglia, non avevano avuto ardire di domandare la 
limosina. Sicche mosso a pieta ogn' uno nel veder due 
giovani ben fatti, con buoni vestiti adosso, si sforzava 
ciascheduno di dar loro quaiche cosa. Pochi giorni dopo 
furono quei medesimi furbi riconosciuti da un certo, 

signore, 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 385 

sjgnore appresso della Chiesa di san Luigi dell' Isola ; il 
quale come prima vide quel baronaccio disteso a terra, 
cbe pareva esalare gli ultimi spiriti, prego alcimi di quei 
ehe stavano attorno a quel furfantaccio d'ascoltar' una 
parola in disparle, e fatto loro palese 'i suo intento, 1'ap- 
provarono gli altri, e ne feeero consapevoli i loro amici. 
S' accosto quel sign6re al moribondo, nel tempo che tin 
Prete gli gridava con aita voce ; Giesu Maria. Fece '1 
sopraccennato signore cenno al prete : e ringendo aver 
compassione di quel giovinetto, domand6 un poco di 
p%iia, per mettergli sotto la testa, f u portata la paglia, 
ed accesa io un punto dalle due Mnde, per via di due 
candele. Sorse inimantiuente '1 briccone, ed a tutto 
potere si diede alia fuga. S'imagini chi legge, qiuii 
furono le risa, quale '1 rumor de' faneiulli, die gli cor- 
revano dietro, gridando. Al fuoco ; fermate, fermate, e 
un morto risuscitato. 



Bispdsta Morddce (Pun Servo. 
UN Napolitano, uomo molto ricco, e fac&o, aveva 
Uli servo fedelissimo, e mottegiatore al maggtor segno; 
€ perche cestui spesso pigliava a scherzo i detti e fotti 
altiui, il padr6ne lo faceva star zitto, col dlrgli : taei, 
taei, bal6r'do, che tu sei '1 Re de' niatti. Dispiaceva non 
poco al servo il vedersi chiamato Re de' pazzi, e dal 
padrone, e dagli altri servit6ri, Sicebe una v61ta die 
credeva'J padrone imp6rgli silenzio, tassandolo al suo 
golito di e de' pazzi; quello soggiunse: volesse Dio che 
fessi io '1 Re de' pazzi, e de' matti ? Sarebbe maggiors '1 
mio regno di quel di tutt'i Re della terra ; e vol anche, 
signor padrone, sareste iiiio vassallo. 



Astuzia (Vun Contadino. 
UN Contadino portando una soma di Iegna per ven- 
dere,.benche gridasse spesso, Guarda, guarda ;■ un besiiale 
non volendosi scostare, fu urt^to dal contadino, e gli .fu 
stracciato '1 manlello; e volendo che 'I contadino glielo, 
pagasse, lo condiisse innahzi al Podesia, il quale, udito '1 
caso dal querelante, domando al contadino se cio fosse 
vfcro, il quale non rispose mai. Onde 1 Giudice voltatosi 
R 3 a quel 



336 ORE DI RECREAZIONE, 

a quel del mantello : che vuoi tu, gli disse, ch'io faccia 
ad un muto ? che muto ? non e nmto : perche poco fa 
gridava a tutta voce : Guarda, guarda. S'egli gridava, 
dovevi dunque guardarti, e cosi non t'avrebbe stracciato 
'i mantello. 



D\in Francescdno, e (Piin ministro. 
UN Francescano, essendo in up bosco, montato su un 
asino, incontrd an ministro a cavallo sopra un bellissimo 
Ronziuo* EKSpo i complimenti ordinari, e piu raggio- 
nainenti ch' ebbero insieme, disputarouo un pezzo, su l- 
fattodeJle vera ed {mica religione Callolica, ne mai si 
potettero aecordare: con tutto che 1 rrancescano avesse 
con bupnissime ragioni, e per via de' testi de' santi Padri 
provato la coulinuazioiie della religione Roiuana, da san 
Pietro sin' adesso. II che negaudo '1 ministro ; non po- 
tette ii Francescano eontenersi di dirgli, ch' egli era un 
vera boja della. sua anima, giacche conoscendo la verita, 
non la voleva credere. Non ebbe tempo di rispondere 1 
ministro, perche ailora si trovarono con molte altre per- 
sone, vicini ad un Mine, che si passava per via d'una 
barca, nella quale entrarono, con tiitti quei che volevano 
passaY all' aitra banda. Vedeudo '1 ministro che l'asino 
del Francescano tremava tutto, crcdendo fargli nno 
scorao, in presenza di quanti erano nella barca, di cm la 
maggior parte era Calvimsta, disse: Padre, se son siete 
piu sicuro nella vostra religione che '1 yostro asino non e 
nella barca, dovreste pur tremare come fa egli. II Fran- 
cescano piu astfito del ministro, con be! garbo gli rispose : 
Se vi trovasie, come si trova questo asino, signore, coi 
ferri ai piedi, la corda al collo, un confessore da una parte, 
e '1 boja dali' altra, sicuramente avreste maggior paurache 
non ha i'asino. 



Di due Franceschii, e tVwn Contadino. 

UN Contadino gelato di freddo, smonto da cavallo 

per eamnmiar a piedi. II che vedendo due Francescani, 

che in Francia sono chiamati, Cordeliers, disse Tuno a! 

compagiio : se avejssi io un cavallo, non sarei tanto pazzo 

di 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 



3S7 



di condurlo per la briglia, ma bensi mi farei portare sin' 
al convento. L'altro ch'era d'umor allegro soggiimse ; 
mi basta l' animo di far' una buria a quel Gontadiup, e 
levargli '1 cavallo, purche vogliate darmi un poco d'ajiito. 
Acconsenti subito '1 frate, e pian piano saccostarono 
ambidue al Contadino, senza che sen' accorgesse. . Lev*) 1 
Francescano con destrezza la biiglia'al cavallo ; sela mise 
in testa seguitando ; i Contadino : mentie 1'aitro con la 
cavezza condusse '1 cavallo in disparte. Quindi a non 
molto, il Contadino volendo rimontar' a cavallo, si \61se 
in dietro ; ma ebbe da morire di paura, vedendo tanta 
metamorfosi. E sgridando con terribile voce, ohime ! 
ajuto ! fu fennato dal Francescano, che prostratosi in 
ginocchione richiedeva con grand' urniUa la sua liberta ; 
dicendo, che per i suoi disordini, e lenornnta de' suoi 
peccati era st ito condannalo a idle trasformazione ; e 
cli' ora essendo veriuto 1 tannine delta penitenza, era 
tomato all prinib essere. 11 Contadino alquanto rasserenato, 
non solo gli diede la dpmanctafa liberta, ma non accor- 
gendosi della burla, scioccamtote soggiimse : andate in 
santa pace, adesso non ini maraviglio, se dopo una vita 
tanto disordinata, siete riuscito un cosi cattivo animalaccro. 
II frate si parti, dichiaraudosegli obbligato, ed ando a 
ricercare 'il compaguo : quando viddero i frati dilungato 
'1 povero Contadino, per altra via si condussero ad una 
terra vicina. Pocbi giorni dopo, pregarono i Francescani 
un' amico loro, che si compiacesse d'andar' alia iiera 
per vendere '1 cavallo, e mentre andava col comprat6re 
per ricevere '1 pagamento, venne loro incontro '1 primo 
Contadino, che riconoscendo '1 cavallo disse al compratore, 
che lo pregava d'ascoltar una par 6!a in disparte ; e donian- 
datogli di chi fosse 'I cavallo : il compratore rispose ; l'ho 
comprato adesso adesso, ma non l'ho pagato. Deh per vita 
vostra, replico 'I Contadino, rendetelo, non lo pagate. 
Non siate tanto sciocco di credere, che quella carogna sia 
un cavallo, e Tanima d'un Francescano cli' e tomato nel!e 
sue dissolutezze. Rendetelo, vi dico io, ch' e'l phi tristo 
animalaccio di quanti n'abbia 'I mondo, ed a me ha falto 
venire la rabbia cento mila volte. 

R 4 D'un 



3S8 OKE D£ RECREAZIONE. 



D\cn Gentiluomo Francese. 

_ 

PER intelligenza di> questa storietta, basta sapere che 
la parola, digiunare, significa in Francese jeuner ; e che 
per esprimere, dejeimer, bisogna dire, far colazione. 

UN gentiluomo Francese, curioso di veder l'ltalia 
parti da Parigi, con intenzione d'osservare, e di far una 
memoria distinta $&\\e c6se pin memorabili ch' avesse 
vedute pe*r il viaggio. Arrivato in Bologna, voile trat- 
ten£rvisi. Partito dal suo albergo, il giorno seguente 
assai per t£mpo, ando per due ore camminando di qua, di 
la, per la citta. Dopo averne vista la maggior parte, 
tcrnd con grandissimo appetito all' osteria ; e subito neIF 
cntrare disse all' oste, Signor oste, oggi voglio digiunare. 
L'oste credendo che '1 gentiluomo per c€rta divozione 
volesse digiunare da dovero, rispose : V. S. n' e padrone. 
In quel mentre il gentiluomo sail su in camera sua, e 
scrisse per un buon pezzo le cose osservate da lui. Ma 
stimolato dall' appetito, e dalla seie, tralascid di scrivere, 
c s'aflacci6 alia rineslra, chiamando l'oste, a cui disse : 
hig:i6:-' 6ste, v'ho detto che volevo digiunare sta mattina, 
vene i icordate ? Lo so, sogghinse l'oste, e mene ricordo. 
II gentiluomo seriz' aspettar altro, tornd a scrivere ; ma un 
qyarto d'ora dopo, mosso e dalla fame, e daiia sete, chiamd 
di n novo l'oste, e con voce disdegnosa gli disse: Che modo 
di procedere e questo 1 non v'lio detto un' ora fa, che 
volevo digiunare sta mattina ? E' vero, replico l'oste, e 
V. S. e padrone di digiunar' snchetutto '1 giorno. Come, 
come, disse laltro, lutto '1 giorno! non ho mangiato 
ancora niente, mi burlate. Voglio mangiare, portatemi 
da mangiare, e da bere. Se V. S. vuol mangiare e bere, 
non vuole adunque digiunare, soggiunse Foste : perche 
digiunare vale a dire non mangiare, e non bere. Allora, 
il Francese, accortosi deli' equivoco, piacevolmente disse : 
Sia maledetto il digiunare : dovevo io dire far colazione. 
Mai piu diro digiunare, che troppo bene ho imparato a 
inie spese, che cosa e digiunare. 

Del 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 389 



Del Papa Giulio Se conch. 

UN nobile Romano, amico intrinseco del Papa Giulio 
Secondo, gli disse che molti si lamentavano che sua santita 
attendesse coti troppo calore alia guerra contro i Francesi; 
giacche Iddio gli aveva dato le chi&vi delta sua chiesa, 
per serrare le porte della discordia, ed aprire quelle dclla 
riconciliazione. II Papa rispose al nobile : Quei tali che 
dicono simili co.se, non sanuo forse che san Pietro, e san 
Paolo sono st£ti compagni, & ambidue principi della chiesa. 
I predecessori miei si sono serviti della chiave di san Pietro, 
acfcsso io voglio adoperare la spada di san Paolo. II nobile 
replied : V6stra santita sa perd che Cristo disse a Pietro : 
rime tti la tua spada nel fodero. E' vero, soggiunse '1 papa, 
ma ricordatevi che Cristo non lo disse prima, ma dopo 
che Pietro ebbe ferito, 



Di Sisto qulnto, e d'urf Agostiniano. 

FE'LICE Peretti fu prima porcaro, si fece poi fr6te 
dell' ordine di san Francesco, e subito fatto sacerdote, e 
Bacceiiere, si fece chiamare '1 padre Montalto. Perv<mne 
a tutle le dignita del suo ordine, fu teologo, ministro 
provinciale, procurator generale, generale, vescovo, 
cardinale, e dopo papa Sisto qulnto. Essendo procurator 
dell' ordine, ii padre Avosta allora generale che gli era 
capital nemico, tentava tutt' i mezzi possibili per scaval- 
carlo dal suo ofL'zio. E nel capitolo generale che fiY 
intimato a Firenze, accendendosi di piu in piu l'odio del 
padre Avosta, non atlendeva, ad altro che a strappazzare 
V padre Montalto. Sicche sdegnato costui, fatte alcune 
instanze in iscritto, ed affissele alia porta del Rifettacio, si 
parti da Firenze, II che risaputo dal generale, fu privato 
del carico 'i povero padre Montalto, e nel medesimo 
tempo furono mandati ordini a tutti i guardiani di rite- 
n£rlo in prigione. La qual c6sa presentita dal pddre 
Montalto, fuggi qu6sto incontro, andando ad alloggiar in 
altri hioghi. Una sera che donni in un conv£nto de' padri 
di sant' Agostino, dopo aver cenato, benche non vi fosse 
R 5 conosciuto, 



390 ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 

conosciuto, domando in grazia al padre Procuratore 
dieci scudi in prestito die subito gli furono prestati, e ne 
fece '1 padre Montaito una polizza soitoscritta non col 
suo, ma con un' altro nome imaginario ; di cui '1 padre 
Procurato per qualsivoglia diligenza che usasse, non 
potette mai averne nuova alcuna. II padre Montaito 
dopo essere stato creato papa, leggendo i suoi manuscritti, 
vi trovo questa partita. Diede subito ordine che si pi o- 
curasse con ogni diligenza d'aver nuova di quel padre, 
e caso che fosse vivo, si facesse venir a Roma con buona 
comitiva. Giunsero gli ordini del papa al vescovo in 
un tempo appunto, che passava poca buona intelligenza 
tra'l vescovo, e'l padre Procuratore sopracennato, che 
fu mandato a Roma come prigioniero in compagnia di 
quattro frati che gli facevano la guardia piu stretta che 
non avrebbero fatto dieci sbirri. II vescovo si credeva 
che questo si facesse per via de' suoi amici, ai quali aveva 
dato cattivissima infbrmazione di questo padre Procura- 
tore, accio procurassero con ogni sforzo d'allontanailo 
da lui. II simile credevauo i frati, non che i medesimo 
Procuratore ; ii quale condotto in presenza del papa, 
disse, beatissimo padre, domando perclono a vostra santiii 
di quanto ho fatto contra'l mio vescovo, per giustificarmi 
d una calumiia imputatami a torto essendone- io inuocen- 
ttssimo. II papa che non sapeva nulla di questo difTe- 
reute, gli rispose : non avete ragimie di prendervela col 
vostro vescovo ; ma vi vogliamo parlar d'altro. Siete 
accusato d'aver dissipato i beni del convent©. II povero 
Agostiniano sentendosi rinfacciaY un tal fallo dal papa, 
esclarno : O beatissimo padre, con licenza di vostra santita, 
non si trovera mai eh'io abbia fatto torto alcuno alia mia 
religione. Ailora 'i papa con finia voce disdegno^a, 
soggiunse : Ancor ardite negarlo ? non e vero ch'avete 
dato in prestito dieci scudi "ad un padre Francescano, ne 
mai piu gii avete riavuti ■? e troppo veio, beatissimo padre, 
lo credevo un galanluomo; ma ho conosciuto poi ch'cra 
un fiirbo. Piano, piano, disse '1 papa, lo conosciamo, e 
ci ha dato online di soddisfarvi, e quello siamo uoi. II 
padre Procuratore confuso al maggior segno, prostratosi 
■a terra, domandava perdouo : subito '1 papa gli ordino di 
lizzaisi in piedi, p6i gli parlo in questa mamera: voi ci 

accog- 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 



391 



accoglieste in tempo della nostra disgrazia nel vostro con* 
vento nella vostra camera; vi accoglierenio nel nostrc 
palazzo, nella nostra camera : intendo che siete in litigic 
col vostro vescovo, la' causa non va del pari, bisogna che 
ci vada, e adesso vi nominiamo vescovo, 
vescovato tra i buoni non mediocre. 



assegnandovi un 



D 1 lift cdso Fortuito. 

UN Mural ore cadde per disgrazia d'un alto tetfo clpve 
egli lavorava, e per for tuna sua casco addossd ad on uomo 
che sedeva di sotto : cosi, senza farsi molto male, am- 
mazzo quel pover' uomo. II figliupjo del quale fece citaY 
avanti al giudice criminale il Muratore, accusandolo 
d'omicidio. Ma '1 Muratore si difese in questo modo, 
diceiido : amico, se 10 ho peecalo, ne voglio far la 
peniteriza ; raonta fli stesso iri quel luogo donde io 
caddi: ed io sedero dove sedeva tuo padre, cosi preci- 
r>itauao!i abbasso, amniazzami, se tu puoi, clie io lie 
suno coutento. 



iy 



Ull 



Pittore. 



UN Pittore monstrundo un cattivo quadro in presenza 
a molti Piitori di gran grido, si pregiava d'averlo finito 
in poelnsjsjnro tempo; il che sentehdo Apl'lle, gli disse 
piacevofoiente : non occorre che tu ci dica d'averlo finito 
id poco tempo, che '1 quadro lnedesimo lo dice abbastauza 
da per se. 



/)' uno Sadt ore. 
DISEGNA'NDO i consoli di Firenze di far' una 
siaiua, chiamarono, Donatello, famoso ed eccelleute 
Scullore, il quale inteso 1 disegno, domando per la fat- 
tara cinquauta scudi. I consoli senza proferhgli nulla, 
la diedero a far' ad un' altro Scultore mediocre, Costui 
fatta che l'ebbe, il meglio che seppe, ne domando ot- 
tanta scudi. Maravigliatisi i consoli, gli dissero che 
questo e un buritu'si di loro, giacche Donatello, u6mo 
R <S tanto 



S92 OHE £>I R£Cft£AZlON£. 

tanto illustre, non aveva domandato per farla piu di 
cinquanta. In sorama non poiendesi accordare, rimisero 
la causa ad 6sso Donatcllo, il quale sentenzid che i con- 
soli dovessero pagare settanta scudi. Del che alteratisi, 
ricordandogli ch'£gli medesimo di cinquanta s'era voluto 
contentare ; Donatcllo graziosamente disse : e v£ro, ini 
potevo contentare, perche avrei fatto la statuta in in£nb 
d'un mtee : ma qu£sto pover' uomo che a p6na potrebbe 
essere mio scolare, ve stato piu di sei m6si. Cosi Dona- 
tcllo si vendicd argutam^nte dell' ingiuria ricevuta da* 
console 



Dhin Contadino. 
UN Contadino non potette contenersi di ridere nel 
vede> passar 1' arciv^scovo di Bologna, accompagnato da 
un certo numero di soldati. L'artivescovo accortosene 
v611e sap£r la ragi6ne delle sue risa, e domandatogli per- 
che ridesse cosi, il Contadino rispose, che gli pareva cosa 
strana, ch'un arcivescovo caminasse arniato, ed accom- 
pagnato, non da preti, ma da una man di soldati. Sog- 
giunse allora Tarcivescovo : sappi halordo, ch' io sono 
duca, ed arcivescovo insieme ; ch'in chiesa vado vestito 
da arcivescovo, e dico I'offizio col clero : ma in cam- 
pagna vado da duca co' miei soldati. Ho inteso, mon- 
signore, replic6 '1 Contadino, ma ditemi in grazia, 
quando '1 sign6r duca andra a casa del Diavolo, che sara 
<iei signor' arcivescovo. 



ffuna Donna. 
UN u6mo virtu6so, e ben fatto, sposo una Donna 
brutta per rispetto della sua dote, e per ragione d'alcuni 
vantaggi che questa gli prometteva. Pochi giorni dopo 
'1 matrimonio la nuova sposa s' innamoro d'un giovinetto, 
che spesso introduceva in c6sa. II marito accortosene, 
ed avendo Colto la moglie all' improviso insieme col suo 
Drudo, le disse ; che necessity v' era che tu ti cercassi un' 
u6mo a spese del tuo bene, se n'hai trovato uno che ti 
fa'l servizio gratis 1 

D'una 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 393 

iy una Zingara. 

UNA Zingara dopo aver pianto a dirotte lagrime la 
morte di suo marito, capitano dei Zingari, cioe di quello 
che tra i furbiera stato '1 maggior furbo; diede ordiue 
ad un amico del defftnto, che vestisse '1 meglior vestito 
del motto, & andasse in chiesa a dar gli ordini per Ie 
essequie, e che dicesse ch' essendo '1 defunto capitano di 
nobilissima, e ricchissima stirpe, tutt' i preti v'interve- 
nissero, accio si facessero con maggior p6mpa, e decoro, 
conforme aveva ordinato 1 Zingaro. Vennero i preti, 
accompaguarono, e portarono '1 cadavere del capitano 
alia sepoltura. Finite le essequie, venne '1 sagristano a 
tlomandar la paga. La Zingara veduta ia sonama impor- 
ter' assai piu di quella che s'era immaginata, disse : e ragio- 
nevole, signore, che ciascheduno abbia'l'suo dovere, e 
questo scleva spesso dire la buona anima di mio marito, 
che m'ha lasciato alquanii beni ; e giacche, signor mio, 
tutt' i preti s6no concorsi alle essequie del morto, vi prego 
avvisarli, accio vengano anche ttitti a ricevere 1 paga- 
mento. I preti inteso rintento della Zingara, tornarono 
ttitti nel luogo della sepoltura, dove con simulate lagrime 
s'era fermata la truppa de Zingari. Giunti che vi furono, 
la scaltra Zingara chiamo sua figlia, e le disse : figfia 
mia cara, resiiamo debitrici a questi signori ch'hanno 
cantato, e pregato per 1' anima di vostro padre. 
Giacche hauno cantato per 1' anima di mio padre, 
rispose la figlia, cosi informata dalla madre, bisogna 
soddisfarli. Cantate voi, ed io ballero; e cio dicendo, si 
mise a cantare 3a madre, ed intorno alia fossa ballando 
i Zingari con la figlia, col canto, e col ballo, pagarono 
i preti. 



IT an nobile Rom&no. 
IL poeta E'nnio ordino alia sua serva che dicesse ad ml 
nobile Romano che picchiava alia porta, ch' ei non era 
in casa* . II nobile benche poco innanzi avesse con gli 
occhi proprj visto entrare '1 poeta in casa: ricevuta 
ch ebbe la risposta della serva, si parti, dicendole : mi 
displace di molto che '1 vostro padrone non sia in casa. 

Alcuni 



594 ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 

Alcuni giorni di la, il poeta ando dal gentiluomo per 
parlargli di cosa ci gran conseguenza, con speranza di 
ritrovare, e patrocinio, ed ajuto ne suoi urgenti bisogni 
appresso del nubile. Nel medesimo tempo die picchio 
alia porta, s' aftaccio alia fenestra 'I nobile e disse al 
poeta : il padrone non e in casa. Come puo egli non 
essere in casa, giacche lo vedo, e mi parla, replied i poeta, 
il n6bile gli soggiunse ; cre'detti io ultimamente alia tua 
serva, deh perche non mi vuoi creder' a me stesso 1 sappi 
ad&nque ch'io sono in casa per ahri, ma non per te. 



Tf iin-Soldata. 

UN Soldato .ritrovandosi in alto mare con sua mogiie 
in tempo d'iina grandiSsima iempesta, vide the i marinari 
gittavano a tutio potere, quant e cose venivano 16ro neiie 
m£ni, non avendo rispetto alcuuo per qualsivogiia sorte 
di mercanzia; auzi gridavano tutti che si gitt&ssero 
quanto prima le cose piu gravi, se non volevano perdere 
la vita, ed i ber.i insieme ; il che udito dal Soidato prese 
sabito la mogiie, e la gito nel mare, dicendo niima cosa 
essergli in questo moudo ne piu grave, ne piu incomoda 
di sua mogiie. 



In Lode del Matrimonio, 

IL Matrimonio e stato islituiio nel Paiadiso terrestre, 
non meritando veramente d 'essere stabilito in luogo men 
riguard£vole. L'anello matrimoniale con la sua rotondita 
dinota, che siccome la rotondita. e infiuita, cosi infinite e 
'I contento che deve esser concordemente fra 1 inarilo, e 
la mogiie. 

Nel sacrifizio -di Giunone, Dea del Malrimonio, i 
sacerdoti di quei tempi gittavano '1 fiele degli animal i 
dietro agli altari, per dimonstrare, che nei Matrimonio 
non deve esser' amantadine. 

Apprtsso gli Antichi giudiziosi fu prima onorata Gi- 
unone, poi Venere, e Cupido, volendo signiiicare che '1 
Matrimonio figuraie per Giunone dtve andaY innanzi a 
tint' i piaceri. 

Perche 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 39-5 

Perch e Giove s" innamoro di bellczze mortdli. 

GXO'VE scendeva spesso in terra, sotto la forma or di 
que st o, or di quell' animate, perche V esser maritato con 
Giunone, gli era di tanta nqja, die piii tosto si conteu- 
tava di star' in terra sotto forma d'animaie, servendo a 
mortale bellezza, die pel eieio alia presenza della noiosa 
moglie reggendo l'universo. Liica Assarino dice a questo 
proposito quando tratta dei disgusti die nascono tra. 
Marito e moglie : die chi comincia a far l'amore con una 
donna, con intenzione di pigiiarla per moglie, si pud 
dire ch' egli arruola 1 ferro per uccidersi da se stesso. 



Am ante in cost ante. 

ISABE'LLA Andreini dice nelle sue lettere ; die 
amanti incostanti fanno come lo sp^cchio, che riceve 
tulte ie immagini, e non ne ritiene aicuna. 



t->' 



Donne a che son buone. 

NEL Romolo di Malvezzi si legge, che Ie donne in 
casa possono ajutare, fuori non fanno se non impedire. 
E adduce per ragione, che '1 uienarle a spasso & ai diporti, 
o condfirle alle fesie, niuove talora chi le vede, se 
s6:io bnitte, a disprezzo ; se belie, a libidine. E con 
tutto die sian' onestissirae, bisogna ricordarsi, die 1' one- 
sia e un color delicato, che teme l'aria, ed un cristailo 
che s'appatma per guardo iiupuro di coloro ch' hanno 
agitata la mente daiie lascivie. Devouo per questo fug- 
gtrsi le occasion! del pericolo, dove . 1 pericolo e 'dell' 
onore. Quando Isabella Andreini park dell' onore, dice 
che, 

II seggio dell' uomo e la terra, 

De' pesci, l'acqua, 

Degii uccelli, l'aria, 

Delia donna, 1' onore. 

Naiura, 



3£6* ORE DI RECREAZIONE, 

Nat ura, e costumi de > Franctsi. - 

ADRTA'NO Nego^inte, dottissimo astrologo, e di 
profondissimo ingegno, dice nelle congetture astrologiche, 
sciitte di suo proprio pugno, che la spica nobilissiraa 
Stella, e benefiea, lia dominio speci&le sopra '1 regno 
di Fr£ncia. II che facilmenle si pud comprendere dalla 
proprieta de' suoi influssi convenient niolto alia natura, 
e costumi di questa nazione, Mercuriale, Venerea, e 
Marziale ; imperrocche sono i Francesi, Mercuriali per 
Findustria, curiosita, agilita, inconstanza, eloquenza, e 
vivacila. dell' ingegno, e perfezione in tutte Ie artj. 
Venerea, per rornamento, civilta, eleganza, polizia, genti- 
Jezza, ed inclinazione alle delizie. Marziale, per il genio 
bellicoso ed esserclzio militare in cui non cedono in 
valore ad alcuna nazione antica, e modema. 



Simpaiia, ed Antipotia. 

SICCO'ME la Matrigna per soverchio odio non dis- 
cerne la virtu del ftgliastro, cosi la madre per soverchio 
amore, non comprende i difetti del fig!iu6!o. 



[ 397 ) 

COS T U'M I. 

de' 

FRANCE'SI, TEDEfSCHI, 
I T A L I A' N I, 

SPAGNUO'LI, ed LNGLE'SI, 



IN COSTU'MI. 



*N STATU'RA. 



IN VESTITL 



IN PAST!. 



JN UMO'JR-E. 



|L Francese h cortege, 
II Tedesco benevolo, 
L' ltaliano civile, 
Lo Spagnuolo disprezzante, 
L' Inglese altiero. 

I! Francese k di bel garbo, 
II Tedesco grande, 
ti' Italia no iiedi6Cre, 

Lo Spagnu61o piccolo, 

L' Inglese di bella presenza, 

II Francese e novat6re, 
11 Tedesco imitatore, 
L* ltaliano mesclifno, 
Lo Spagmioio lesinante, 
L' Inglese spenditore. 

II Francese e delicato, 
II Tedesco bevitore, 
L' ltaliano sobrio, 
Lo Spagnu6Io scarso, 
L' Inglese prodigo." 

II Francese e moiteggiatore, 
II Tedesco aftabile, 
L' ltaliano piacevole, 
Lo Spagnuolo grave, 
L' Inglese xnulabile. 



IN 



•398 



COSTU'MI DELLE NAZIONI. 



IN EELLE'ZZA. 



IN CONSL'GLIO. 



IN SCRITTU'EA. 



IN SCIE'NZA'. 



IN RELIGIONS. 



IN ARDI'RE. 



IN SERVITU'. 



II Francese e bell' uomo, 
11 Tedesco non £p cede, 
L' Italiano ne beilo ne bralto, 
Lo Spagnuolo ha del' brutto, 
L' Inglese dell' angelo. 

II Francese 11011 e lento, 
11 Tedesco e piu tardo, 
L' Italiano e soitiie, 
Lo Spagnuolo cauteloso, 
L' Inglese risoluto. 

'II Francese parla bene, scrive.miglio, 

II Tedesco scrive moltd, 

L' Italiano sodamcnte, 

Lo Spagnuolo poco, e buono, 

L' Inglese dottamente. 

II Francese sa di tutto, 
II Tedesco k maestro* 
L' Italiano c ddlto, 
Lo Spagnu6)o e prof6ndo, 
L' Inglese iilosofo. 

II Francese e zelante, 
II Tedesco religioso, 
V Italiano cerenioni6so, 
Lo Spagnuolo superstizi6so, 
L' Inglese e div6to. 

II Francese e come un' aquila, 
II Tedesco come un' orso, 
L' Italiano come (ma volpe, 
Lo Spagnuolo come un' elefante, 
L' Inglese come un bone. 

II Francese e fedele, 
II Tedesco buou comp^gno, 
L' Italiano rispeltoso, 
Lo Spagnuolo soggetto, 



logic. 



schii 



IN 



COSTU'MI DELLE NAZIONI. 3f;9' 

II Franeese e lifeero, 
II Tedesco e padrone, 
IN MATRIMO'NiO. L' Italiano carceriere, 

Lo Spagmidlo e tiraimo, 
- L' Inglesc servitore. 

In Francia, son le dame fastose, 
In Germania, risparmiano,- e sod 

LE DO'NNE. T **!$*> . . ., 

< In Itaha, pngionere, e cauive, 

jn Ispagna, schiave, ed a morose* 

In Inghiiterra, regine, e virtuose, 

Diccva Cdrlo-Quinto the parlerebbe. 

Francese ad un' amico, 
Tedesco al suo cavallo, 
IN LINGUA. Italiano alia sua signora, 

Spaguuolo a Dio, 
Jugllte agli uccelli, 



[ 400 ] 
E P I T E' T T I 

D E' L L E 

CITTA PIU PR1NCIPALI DITA'LIA. 

Roma la Santa. Padoua la D6tta. ; 

Napoli la Gentile. Bologna la Grassa. 

Firenze la Bella. Milano la Grande. 

Genova la Superba. f Ravenna 1' Antica. 
Venezia la Ricca. 






I 



Nomi dtlle Accademie d? Italia. 
N Ro'ma, Umorista, Lincei, Fantastici, Arcadi. 
Fire'nze, la Crusca, Immobili, Infocati, Alterati, 
Rinovati. 
Bolo'gna, Gelati, la Notte, Ottusi, Oziosi, Ind6miti. 
Vene'zia, Incogniti, Discordanti, Guss6ni. 
Pa'jwua, Incogniti, Orditi, Inflammati, Ricovr&ti. 
Na'poli, Ardenti, Oziosi, Intronati. 
Gf/noua, Addormentati. 
Rie'na, Intronati, Fiiomitt, Fisiocritici. 
Lu'ca, Oscdii, Freddi. 
Mila'no, Nascosti. 
Ma'ntova, Invaghiti. 
Macera'ta, Cahmati. 
Alessa'ndria^ Imm6bi!i. 
Anco'na, Caligin6si, 
Bre'scia, Occfilti. 
Cese'na, Offuscati. 
Fabria'no, Disuniti. 
Fae'nza, Filipp'6ni. 
Fe'ktvio, Raftrancati, 
F E R r a' E a , El e va ti , 
Pa'uma,' Innoniinati. 
Pavi'a, Assidati. 
Peru'gia, Insensati, 
Tr e v i'so, Perseveranti. 
Vero'na, Filarinonici. 
Vicf/nza, O limpid. 
Vite'rbo, Ostinati. 
UkBl'WO, Assorditi. 



[ 40L ] 
A SHORT 



INTRODUCTION 



ITALIAN POETRY. 



In this Treatise we shall consider, I. The Italian Ver- 
sification. 2. The different Compositions in Verse. 
3. The Poetic Licences. 

I. Of the Italian Versification. 

THE Italian verse consists of a certain number of 
syllables, and rhyme. But they have also their blank 
verse. 

There are eleven syllables in the heroic verse, which is 
used in Epic poems, theatrical pieces, sonnets, &c. 
Non e questa colei, che coil' ardore. 
Besides the heroic, there are lesser' verses, consisting of 
eight syllables, as 

A sfogdr I' antica pena. 
0,r of seven, as 

Amor nelk parole. 
Or of six, as 

A'lmo spendor mirdfr. 
Or of five, as 

Chi pud mirdrvi. 
Or of four, as 

In pid modi. 
The Italian verse, of whatever number of syllables it 
consists, has always the accent on the penultima, ex- 
cept it be what they call versi sdriiccioli, or slippery 

verses, 



402 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

verses, which are accented on the antepenultima ; but then 
they have a syllable more than the ordinary sort of verse. 
Thus if the ordinary sort of verse has eleven syllables, 
the sdrucciolo belonging to it lias twelve, as 

V drco ripiglia il fanciullin di Venere. 
If the ordinary verse has eight syllables, the sdrucciolo 
will have nine, and so on. 

The heroic verse, or that of eleven syllables, is divided 
into two parts; the place where this division is made, 
is called the cesura. The cesura is not always equal, 
that is, the first hemistich or half verse does not always 
contain the same number of syllables; for this depends 
on the predominating accent, as the cesura is always at 
the end of the word on which you find this accent. 
Now this accent may be either on the fourth, or on 
the sixth syllable of the verse ; which occasions several 
sorts of cesuras ; the best are those on the fifth or seventh 
syllable. 

On the fifth. 

Giunger gid pdrmi, e dirlc, o fida Clori. 
On the seventh. 

Qudlche nuovo sospiro imparerdi. 
Whenever a word ends with a vowel, and the next 
word begins also with a vowel, this admits an elision, 
as 

Presso e il di, che cangidto'l destino fio. 
Sometimes a concurrence of vowels forms but one 
syllable, whether in the same or in different words, as 
Disse, e ai vend spiego vele, ed andonne. 
Diphthongs form but one syllable in the middle of a- 
verse, and two in the end, as 

Ed io del mio dolor ministro fui, 
where io and mio form each but one syllable, and fdi two. 
Whereas in the following verse, 

Fdvola fui gran tempo, onde sovente, 
fui, because it is in the middle of the verse, makes but 
one syllable ; so in the following verse, 

Odd'- } l risponder dolce, o Ttrsi mio, 
mio, because it is at the end of a verse, makes two syl- 
lables. Tins is to be particularly minded. 

II. Of 



to the ITALIAN POETRY. 403 

II. Of the Rhyme. 

The Italian rhyme begins from the vowel of the penul- 
tima; hence amdnti does not rhyme to dhti, but to 
sembianti, and so on. 

The Italians do not rhyme, as we do, in couplets, but 
make several mixtures of. their rhymes ; and these form 
their different compositions in verse. 

III. Of the different compositions in verse. 

The Italians compose their heroic poems of stanzas of 
eight verses, which they call octaves. In these the first 
verse rhymes to the third and fifth, the second to the 
fourth and sixth, and the seventh to the eighth : as 

Cinta di vivo fonte, onde discende 

Onda mormoratrice in suo viaggio,. 

S' ergeforesia, che del sol. coniende 

NelV anno drdente ivi V entrdta til rdggio ; 

Doppo sentier, che s'interseca fende 

In qudttro parti il belV orror selvdggio, 

IE, di bell 3 deque crisia/line e cliidre 

Ha ciascuna net grembo un picciol mare. 

Chiabrera. 

There are other sorts of stanzas, called sestine, con- 
sisting of six verses, the first of which rhymes to the third, 
the second to the fourth, and the two last to each 
other; as, 

Dive che 'I sdcro ed onordto fonte 
Dove gloria si beve, in gudrdid avete 3 
Dal vostro ombroso e soljtdrio monte 

Un tempo meco afa'nicdr seendete, 

Un t'empio OV- immortal pdscia s' adori 

Qtiesta donna de' Gdlii, e dea de' cori. 

Marino. 

The Italians have a third manner of disposing their 
heroic verse, which they call terza rima, or terzetti. 
They put three verses ia every stanza, the first and 

third 



404 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

third rhyme to each other ; the second rhymes to the first 
and third of the second stanza ; and the second of the 
second stanza, to the first and third of the third stanza. 
But at the end of the canto or poem there must be a 
stanza of four verses, in order that every verse may have 
its rhyme ; as, 

Gli dnni son' al volar, si lievi e presti, 

Ch* alfine dltro non e ch' un volver d' occhi. 

Questo, che poi vi lascia afflitti e mesti. 
Pero pr'ia che C ojfesa in noi trabocchi, 

Annate 'I petto incontro dllafortuna, 

Che vdno e V aspettdr che } l colpo scocchi. 
Cosi dicendo, al rdggio de la luna, 

Che gli occhi miferia, rivclse il visa, 

Poi saluto le stelle ad una ad una; 

E lieto se n" ando nel paradiso. 

Sannazar. 

There are also ttrza rima in the verse called sdrueeiolo, 
or slippery ; as 

Quantunque pico mio si vecchio, e cdrico 
Di senno, e di pensier, ch'en te si covano, 
Deh pidngi or meco, e prc-ndi il mio rd?nmarico : 
Nel mondo oggi gli amid non si trovano, &c. 

A fourth manner of ranging their heroic verses in 
Italian, is what they call quarta rima, when the first 
rhymes to the fourth, and the second, to the third. This 
is made use of chiefly in elegies. 

Contra gli assdlti di Nettun spwndnti, 

Qudndo Austro a sdcgno, ed Aquilone il move ; 

E contra i Idmpi e } l fulmindr di Giove 

Ha l' ingi'gno mortdle, onde si vdnti, 
Ma contra i colpi dellafdlce oscura, 

Che drma di morte V implacdbil mdno, 

Invdno ingegno s'affcilka, invdno 

Stdme di vita contrastdr procura. 

Chiabrera. 

Rut the sonnet is the favourite composition of the 
Italians; it is divided into two quaternarii consisting 

each 



to the ITALIAN POETRY. 405 

f acli of four verses, and two terzetti, each of three verses. 
The two quatterndrii are ranged two different ways : the 
first and most usual is, when the first rhymes to the fourth, 
fifth, and eighth, and the second to the third, sixth, and 
seventh. The other, less usual, when the first rhymes to 
the third, sixth and eighth; the second to the fourth, 
fifth, and seventh. 

There are also two different sorts of arrangement, in 
Tegard to the two terzetti, or the six last verses ; one is 
to make the three verses of the first terzetto, of three 
different rhymes ; and the last terzetto answering to those 
three rhymes in whatever order you have a mind ; as, 

Solo e pensbso i piil deserti cdmpi 
Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e lenti, 
E'gli occhi pbrto per fuggire inlenti, 
Dove vestigio umdn V ar na stdmpi. 
A'ltre schermo non trbvo, eke mi scampi 
Dal manifesto accbrger de la genti : 
Perche negli dtti d' allegrezza spenti 
Difubr si legge, com io dfntro avvdmpi. 
Si ch'io credit omdi, che mbnti e pibgge, 
Efidmi e selve sdppian, di che Umpre 
Sia la mm vita, ch' e celdta altrui. 
Ma pur s) dspre vie, ne siselvdgge 

Cercdr non so, ch' amor non venga sempre 
Ragiondndo con me, ed' io con lui. 

Petrarch* 
The other arrangement of the two terzetti, is to mak? 
the first verse rhyme to the third and fifth, and the second 
to the fourth and sixth; as, 

Interditte speranzt, e van desio, 

Pensitr falldci, ituerie e cieche voglie, 
Ldgrime triste, e voi sospiri, e dbglie, 
Date omdi pace al lasso viver mio. 

jE s' al mio mdl non vdlforza d' oblio; 
Ne per disdegno it nbdo si discwglie ; 
Prenda mortc di me V uliime spoglie, 
Pur ch' dbbia fin mio stato a verba e rio, 

U'sin le stelle, e I ciel tutte lor prbue ; 

Che a quel ch' io senio, mi parr anno un giubco; 

S Dm 



406 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

Da si profonda parte il dubl si moue y 
Gatia amor 7 drco, e le saetie, t 'Ifbco : 

Drizza il tuo ingegno, e le tueforze alt rove ; 
Che nova pidga in me non ha put loco, 

Sannazar. 

In the two preceding sonnets the two quaternarii are 
ranged alike, that is, the first verse rhymes to the fointh, 
fifth, and eight. We shall give here an instance of the 
other sort of quaternarii, where the first verse rhymes 
to the third, sixth and eighth; the second to the fourth, 
fifth, and seventh. 

Se lamentdr augelli, a vtrdi frbnde 
Mover soavemente all' aha estiva, 

rbco mormordr di lucid' bnde 
S' ode d } unafiorxta, efresca riva ; 

La v io soggia dl amor pensoso, e scrim, 
Lei, che 7 del ne mostro, terra n' aseonde ; 
Veggio,td odo, ed intendo: ch' dncor viva 
Di si lontdno a sbspir miti rispbnde. 

Deh ! perch? inndnzi tempo ti consume ? 
Mi dice con pietdte : a che pur vtrsi 
Ddgli bcchi tristi un dolorosa Jiume? 

Di me non pidnger tu, ch' i miti di fersi 
Morendo, eterni ; e nelV ettrno lume, 
Qudndo mostrdidi chiuder gli bcchi, aphsi. 

Petrarch. 

There are likewise other compositions, consisting of 
an intermixture of larger and smaller verses, which may 
be infinitely varied ; some stanzas consisting of twelve 
or thirteen, some of seven, eight, or eleven verses. The 
most common are of twelve, which frequently consist 
of two sorts of verses, viz. those of eleven or seven 
syllables. 

Sulpunio di mia mbrte, 
O'cchi, d'nn guar do non mi fidte avdri, 
Esia di quel, che sono a vbi men cdri. 
Con sollecito studio amvr non Urga 

1 rdi di sua beltdte, 

Ecol 



to the ITALIAN POETRY. 407 

JE col riso, e col gibco, e col diletto, 

Ne di quella dolcezza egli V asptrga, 

Nit di quella pietdte, 

Che altrui ragibna i freddi cot nel petto; 

Solo un giro negletto 

Nefian morendo i miei sospir amdri. 

Chiabr. 

There is also a singular beauty in stanzas of seven, 
eight, or eleven verses ; examples of which may be seen 
in the Lyric Poets. Chiabrera particularly abounds with 
great variety in his canzonette ; as, 

O'cchi armdti di splendbre, i 

O'nde amove 

Per bedrle drde le genti, 

Se la gioia del mirdrvi 

Giitsto pdrvi 

(lie costdr dSbba tormenti. 

Or, 

Pokhv amor fra /' erbe e iJiSri 
Tra dolcezze, e lieti cdnti, 
Per temprdr del cor gli ardhi 
Scorti avea gli accesi amdnti 
Ne' sembidnti; 

J J to diich' H con lor sasside 
Sail' erfa'ifa, e scherzo, e rule. 

Or, 

Core di si tee alphtra, 

Ftrvido ad innasprir gli altrui tormenti, 

Con nuova crudeltdte 1 

Qmdi stanza e mia destra 

In sulla lira ad iterdr gli accenti 

U'si a sveglidr pietdte ; 

IStfemminil beltdte ; 

Spzrapregio sembidnte en Elicona, 

Se di qubi vdghijier tesse corona 

Per tuo gentil valbre. 

S 2 Or, 



408 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 



Or, 



Vdni desiri 

Co' rei martiri 

Non piii ci stieno intbrno ; 

Che pompa, ed ostro ? 

H viver nostro 

Pubssi chiamdr un gibrno 

Cingiti Clbri di bel mirto adbrno 

E di rubini 

Cospergi i crini 

Via piu eke lucid' bro, a mirdr cdri. 

Or, 

Qudndo V Alia in oriente, 
& dlmo sol s'apprfota a scbrgere ? 
Giu dal mar la veggidm sorgere, 
Cinta in gonna rilucdnte, 
O'nde Idmpi si diffondono, 
Che le stelle in cielo ascdndono. 

The Italians are famous for their madrigals, which are 
a kind of epigram, in one stanza, composed of all sorts 
of verses, long and short, according to the fancy of the 
poet. 

They have also their vtrso sciblto, or blank verse, of 
eleven syllables, where the measure is observed without 
time, as the following : 

Egia y la D?o mercd Idsciano i Ptni 
La lor fiertzza ; e la regina in prima 
S' imbeve d'un affetto e d' una mtnte. 

Annibal Caro. 

This verse is used in tragedy, and often in Epic 
poems. 

IV. Of the Poetic Licences. 

The Italians use very great liberties in their versifica- 
tion, not only as their poets adopt several words that are 
n ot allowed in prose; but likewise as they make such 

frequent 



to the ITALIAN POETRY. 409 

frequent use^of elisions ; these elisions are introduced for 
the sake of variety, but are never suffered at the end of a 
verse. 

But they not only drop the final vowel before words 
beginning with a vowel, but even before those that com- 
mence with a consonant, as fier' draconi, for fieri ; and 
sometimes they drop the consonant that precedes this final 
vowel, animai for animdli. 

They likewise lengthen a great many words that have 
a grave accent on the final, by adding an cor an o, as 
fue ioxfuyfee for/e, poteo for pote. It is customary with 
them also to have recourse to contractions and syncopes, 
as porre for ponere, pbnno for possono, vo* for vdgliono, 
ii for ove, and others, which may be learnt by the use of 
poets. Some words they write in a particular manner, 
as sui for suoi, nui for noi,ferdte for ferite,firo for/wro, 
spene for sptme, &c. In short, there is hardly a language, 
not even excepting the Greek, that uses more figures or 
changes of words in their poetry, than the Italian. 



[ 4io ] 

A 

COLLECTION 

OP 

BEAU T I FUL PASSAGES 

From the most celebrated Italian POETS. 



Per edminciaruri impresa. Guarini nel Pastor Fido. 

GIJI ben comincia, ha la meta deli' opra, 
Ne si comincia ben, se non-dal cielo. 



Per persuader € ad amare. Torqudto Tasso nell" 
Aminta, atto 1. scina t. 

FO'RSE se tu gustassi una solvolta 
La millessima parte delle gioie 
Che gusta un cor' amato riamando. 
Diresti ripentita sospirando : 
Perduto e tutto '1 tempo 
Che in ama> non si spende. 
O mia fuggita etade ; 
Qua nte veclove notti, 
Quanti di solitarj 
Ho consumato indarno, 
Che si poteano impiegaYin quest' fiso ! 
II qual piu replicato e piu scave. 
Cangia, cangia consiglio, 
Pazzarella che sei, 
Che'l pentirsi da sezzo nulla giova. 

ldem> atto primo, scena prima. 

~ MOSTRO'MMI l'ombra d'una breve n6tte, 
AUora quel che'l lungo corso, e'l lurae 
Di mille gi6rni non m'avea mostrato. 



D*un 



f ONCE'TTI POET I CI. 411 

II 
D'nn Medico, 



lO batezzo o!a maligno, 
? gni mal che non inteudo, 
La moneta in tanto prendo: 
E depoi tra me sogghigno ; 
Che vi sia geute si pazza, 
Che stipendii chi 1' amazza? 



Soliloquio cP Amarilli, nel Pastor Fido di Guarinu 

O MIRTI'LLO, Mirtillo, aninia mia, 
Se vedesti qui dentro, 
Come sta il cor di questa 
Che chiami crudelissima AmarilH ; 
So ben, che tu di lei 
Quella pieta che da lei chiedi, avrSsti. 
O aninie in amor troppo infelice 1 
Che giova a te, cor mio, l'esser amato I 
Che giova a me l'aver si caro amante f 
Perche crudo destino, 
Ne disunisci tu, s'arnor ne stringe? 
E tu perche ne stringi, 
Se ne p&rte il destin, perfido amore ? 
O fortunate voi fere selvagge, 
A cuii' alma natura 
Non die legge in amar se non d'amore, 
Legge umana inumana, 
Che dai per pena dell' amar la morte ! 
" Se'l peccar e si dolce, 
* c El non peccar si necessario, o troppo 
" Imperfetta natura, 
" Che repugni alia legge! 
" O troppo dura legge, 
" Che la natura offende !" 
Ma che? poco ama altrui, chi'l m6rirteme, 
Piacesse pur al ciel, Mirtillo mio, 
Che sol pena al peccar fosse la m6rte ! 
Santissima onesta, che solo sei 
D'alrna ben nata inviolabii Ntime : 
Quest' amorosa voglio, 

s4 Che 



412 CONCETTI POE'TICL 

Che sven&ta ho col ferro 

Del tuo santo rigor, qual innocent* 

Vittima a te consacro. 

E tu, MirtUlo, anima mia, perdona 

A chi t'e cruda sol dove pietosa 

E'sser non pud : perd6ria a questa sola 

Ne' detti, e nel sembiante 

Rigida tua nemica ; ma nel core 

Pietosissima amante. 

E se pur hai desio di vendicdrti, 

Deh ! qual vendetta aver puoi tu maggiort 

Del tuo pr6prio dolore ; 

Che se tu se'l cor mio, 

Come s& pur malgrado 

Del cielo, e della terra, 

Qual6r piaugi, e sospiri. 

Quelle lagrime tue sono il mio sangue, 

Que sospiri, il mio spirto, e quelle pene* 

E quel dolor che senti, 

Son miei, non tuoi tormenti, 



Le tre sorti (P Orologi additan la m6rit* 
OMBRE, rote, ed arene a passi lenti, 
Atre, dure, minute, il di togliete : 
In linee, in terri, in atomi cadenti, 
I moti, i c6rsi, I precipizj avete, 

Ombre letali al viver mio nascenti, 
R6te crudeli, che l'eta struggete : 
Arene gravi a' miseri viventi ; 
La pena, il crucio, e'l peso mio voi siete, 

Triplice m6rte occulta, edace, e trita, 
Che presta ogn'ora, manifestate, ingorda, 
Lacci, stracci, perigli alia mia vita. 

Qui m'intima l'orrore un' ombra s6rda : 
Cieca la rota il mio pass£ggio addita : 
E p6ca polve il mio morir raccorda. 



Dun 



CONCETTI POETICI. 413 

IX un che patisce di pietra. 
SON nelle reni mie dunque format! 
I duri sassi, alia mia morte infesti ; 
Che fansi ogn'or piu gravi, e piu molesti, 
Chan de' miei giorni termini segnati. 

S'altri con bianche pietre i di beati 
Nota, io noto con queste i dl funesti : 
Servono i sassi a fabricar, ma questi 
A distrugger mia fabrica son nati. 

Ahi che pos9o chiamar mia sorte dura ! 
S' ella di pietre ha preso a lapidarmi 
Nelle parti di dentro la natura. 

So che su queste pietre arruota l'armi 
La morte ; e ch'a formar la sepoltura, 
Nelle viscere mie nascono i marmi. 



Descritione (Tun Cristo logato alia Colonna. 
Madrigale. 
DI marmo e la Colonna, 
Di marmo son gli empj ministri, e rei { 
Etu pure, signor di marmo sei! 
Marmo ella h per natura, 
Marmo quei per durezza, 
Tu marmo, per costanza e per fortezza, 
Ed io, che di pietade, e di cordoglio 
Spettator ne rimaugo, 
Marmo son, se non p&ngo. 



O'cchi BZlli. Guarini ne' suoi Madrigali* 
0'CCHI,stellemortali, 
Ministri de' miei mali. 
Che'n sogno anco mostrdte, 
Che'l mio morir bram&te, 
Se chiiisi m' uccidete. 
Aperti che farete 1 

* 5 Amr're* 



414 CONCETTI P OFT I CI. 

Amove. Ligi AlniandL 
CHI vuol dar legge all' amoroso nudo. 
Non sa ben qual sia la sua natiira. 
L'un d'una cosa, ed io dell' altra godo, 
Chi ama lo spirto, e chi sol la figura. 
Chi diletta la vista, chi Y udire, 
Chi sfoga ogni desir solo in servire. 



Diibbj Amorosi. Petrarca. 

S'AMOR non e, che dunque e quel ch'io senlo ? 
Ma s' egli e Am or. per Dio che cosa £ quale? 
Se buona, ond' e Y e$etto aspro, mortale 1 
S'& ria, onde si dolce ogni.tormento? 

S'a raia voglia ardo, ond'e'l pianto, e'i lamento. 
S'a mal mio grado, ii latnentar che vale ? 
O viva morte ! o diLettoso male! 
Come puoi tant' in me, s'io no'l consentot 

E s'io'l consento, a gran torto mi doglio. 
Fra si contrarj venti, in frale barca 
Mitrovo in alto mar senza governo ; 

Si lieve di saper, d 'error si carca, 
Chi medesmo non so, 'quei ch'io mi vcglio? 
E tremo' a mezza state, ardeiido il verno. 

Amdnte alV amdta. Guarini, 

FELICETche Vi mira, 
Ma piu felice ehi per v6i sospira. 
Felicissimo poi. 
Ben' ebbe arnica stellaj 
Chi per donna st bella, 
Pud far content© in un l'6cchk>, e'i dcsio 
E sicuro pud dir, quel cor' e nyo. 



Am ante Perfido. Acihsio. 

L'AMANTE per aver quel che desia, 
Senva guardar che Dio tutt ode, e vede., 

Ayviluppa 



CONCE'TTI POE'TICI. 415 

Awiluppa plomesse, giurain6nti ; 
Che tutti spikgon poi per l'aria i v£nti. 



Amante Timido. Tasso. 
El che modesto e si, com' essa e bella, 
Brama assai, poco spera, e nulla chiede, 
Ne sa scoprirsi o non ardisce : ed ella 
O lo sprezza, o no '1 vede, o non s'avvede, 
Cosi sin' ora il misero ha servito, 
O Hon visto, o mal noto, o mal gradito. 



Marini nella Canzone sulV Tdalo, 
Tre'ma parlando, e i detti 
Fa tronchi, ed imperfetti ; 
Impallidisce, e poi rivien vermiglio, 
E mirando il suo Sole, abassa il ciglio. 



Donna Timida. Ariosto. 
Con cor tremante, e con tremante piede 
Fugge la tapiuella, e non sa dove ; 
In cio ch'intorno ascolta, in cid che vede, 
Vede di nuovo orror, sembianze nove, 
Lieve arboscel, cui debil aura siede. 
Lteve foglia che cade, o die si scote, 
Di terror doppio, il dubbio cor percote. 



Giiarini nel Pastor Fido. Atto 1. scena 4. 
La misera tacendo 
Per soverchio desio tutta si striigge, 
Cosi perde belta, se'l foco dura, 
E perdendo stagion, perde ventura. 



Amdnte assomigliato ad un Orologio. PetrdccL 

Orolo'gio son* io, 
I pensier son le rote, 
E la squilla e il mio core. 

S § 0V€ 



41(S CONCF/TTI POE'TICL 

Ove lasso percote 

L'6re, e i minuti col suo strai' amore : 

E la vostra bellezza ch'io sospiro, 

E il caro centro, intorno a cui m'aggiro. 






Amore assomiglidto all A'pe. Tdsso nelV Aminta. 

Pi'cciola e '1 A'pe, e fa col picciol morso 
Pur gravi, e pur moleste le ferite. 
Ma qual cosa e pin picciola d'ani6re, 
Se in ogni breve spazio entra, e s'asconde 
In ogni breve spazio : or sotto all' 6 m bra 
Delle palpebre, or tra minuti rivi 
D'un biondo crine, or dentro le pozzette, 
Che forma un dolce riso in bella guancia. 
E pur fa tanto grandi, e si mortali, 
O cosi immedicabili le piaghe. 



Dmina com" e fdtta. Tasso. 
Or non sai tu com' e fatla la donna I 
Fugge, e fuggendo vuol, ch' altri giunga. 
Niega, e negando vuol, ch'altri si toglia. 
Pugna, e pugnando vuol, ch' altri la vinca. 



Iperbole. 
Se gli alberi del mondo fosser penne, 
II cielo fosse carta, il mare inchiostro, 
Non basterjan descrivere la minima 
Parte dell* v6stre perfezionu 

Se tante Imgue avessi, e tante voci> 
Quant' occhi il cielo, e quante arene il mare, 
Perderian tutte il suono, e la favella, 
Kel dire a pien le vostre lodi immense. 



Guarani. 



Guarini nel Pastor Fido. Atto 5. scena 2. 
Se le parole mie 
Fosser anime tutte 

£ tutte 



CONCETTI POE'TICl. 417 

E tutte al vostro onore 

Oggl le consecrassi, alle dovute 

Grazie, non basterian di tanto d6no. 



Donna Picciola. Tasso. 
PICCIOLETTA Isabella, 
Picciola, o grande nominar degg'io 
La tua belt& ch'fiamma il mio desio 1 
Che picciola la fronte, ii crin, le ciglia, 
Piccioletta hai la man, la bocca, il piede, 
I passi, le fattezze, i bei semblanti, 
Gli abiti, il velo, i guanti, 
La cameretta, il letticiuol, la sede ; 
Ma pur gran maraviglia, 
Fra tante cose picciole si vede, 
Che quel, che rimirando io sento al core, 
Non epicciolo ardore. 



Descri%ione d'un Cespuglio. Ariosto. 

F/CCO n'ou lungi un bel Cespuglio vede, 
Di spin fioriti, e di vermiglie rose, 
Che de le liquid' onde a specchio siede, 
Chiuso dal sol fral'alte quercie ombrose : 
Cosi voto nel mezzo, che concede 
Fresca stanza fra I ombre piu nascose, 
E la f6glia coi rami in modo e mista, 
Che'l sol non v entra, non che minor vista, 
Dentro letto vi fan tenere erbette, 
Ch'invitano a posar chi s'appresenta. 



Descrizione dell' E'co. 
UNA Ninfa ch'al dir d'altrui risponde, 
Ma comminciare a dir ella non puote, 
Replica il tutto, ma il parlar confonde, 
E lascia solo uudir l'ultime note ; 
Che mentre l'uno e Taltro dir, attende, 
II parlar, che precede non s'intende* 

Costei 



418 CONCETTI POETICI. 

Costei ch' Eco chiamossi, e chiama ancora,, 
Che parla sol dall' altrui dir commossa. 
Voce sola non fix nuda com ora ; 
Ma forma e quantita di came, e d'ossa, 
Benche comor quell' infelice aI16ra, 
Desser prima ai parlar non avea possa ; 
L'ira il principio al dir tolto le avea, 
De la sempre gelosa, e mesta Dea. 



Bacio di vecchio sdentato. ATarini, 
I SUOI cauuti amori, 
Vecchio sdentato a la sua Ciizia avante, 
Cantava Alcou pargoleggiando amante ; 
L'udi la Ninfa; e'n lui volto il bel viso, 
Disse con un sorriso : 
Ben' ate si convieu di Cigno il vanto, 
Poi c'hai di Cigno il nei, di cigno il canto. 
Or de l'alta Armenia,, 
lo vo' che questo bacio il premio sia, 
Che se mi baei, i baci 
Temer non deggio almen, che sien mordaci. 



Semplicitaingrannata. Ario'sto, canto 32. stanza 39. 

FAC'IL ti fuingnnnar una Donzella, 
Di cili tu in signer eri idolo, e Nume ; 
A cui potevi far con tue parole 
Creder, che fosse scmo, e freddo il sole. 

In lode delle Donne, Ariosto, 
LE Donne antiche hanno mirabil cose 
Fatto neTarmi e ne' le sacremuse; 
E di lor' opre belle, e gloriose, 
Gran lunie in tutto il mondo si difm.se. 
Arpalice, e Camilla eon famose, 
Perche in battaglia erano esperte, ed use : 
Sa so, e Corinna, perche furon dotte, 
Splendono illustri, e # mai non veggon notte. 

Le Donne son veimte in excellenza 
Di ciascun' arte ov'ha'nno posto cura, 

E qua- 



CONCET'TI POE'TICI. 419 

E qualunque a l'istoria abbia avvertenza, 
Ne sente ancor la fama non oscura. 
Se'l mondo n'e gran tempo stato senza, 
Non pei 6 sempre il mal influsso dura, 
E forse ascosi han lor debiti onori 
L'invidia, o ii non saper degli scrfttoii. 

Ben mi par di veder, ch'al seeol nostro 
Tanta virtu fra belle donne emerga, 
Che pud dar opra a. carte, ed all' inchiostro, 
Perche ne' futuri anni si disperga ; 
Eperche odiose iingue, ilmai dir vostro 
Con vostra eterna infamia si sonimerga, 
E le lor lodi apparirauno in guisa, 
Che di gran liinga avanzeran Marfisa. 



In lode delta Liberia pastorale. Guarinl. 

CA'RE selve beate, 

E voi solinghi, e tacit urni orrori, 

Di riposo, e di pace alberghi veri \ 

O quante voleniieri 

A rivedervi io torno ! e se le stelk 

M' avesser daio m sorte 

Di viver' a me stessa, e di far vita 

Conforme a le mie voglie, 

I' gia co' canipi Elisi, 

Fortunato giardiu de' Seniidei, 

La vostra ombra gentil non cangerei 

" Che se ben dritto mi 10 

" Questi beni mortali, 

" Altro non son che niali. 

" Men, n'ha, chi piu possede, 

" Ricchezze no, ma lacci 

" De laltrui libertate. 

" Che val ne' piu verdi anni 

" Titolo di bellezza, 

" O fama d'onestate, 

ff E'n mortal sangue nobilta celeste ! 

" Tante grazie del cielo, e de la terra ! 

" Qui larghi, e lieti campi, 

" Ela 



2 10 CONCETTI POE'TICI. 

" E la feiici piagge, 

'* Fecondi paschi, e piu fecondo armento, 

" Sen tanti benijl cor non e content© ?" 

Fel ce pastorella, 

Cui cinge a pena il fianco 

Povera si, ma schietta, 

E Candida gonnella ; 

Iticca sol di se stessa, 

E delle grazie di natura adorna 

Che'n dolce povert'ade 

Ne poverla conosce, rie i disagi 

De le ricchezze sente ; 

Ma tuito quel possede, 

Per cui desio d'aver non la tornienta, 

Nuda si, ma contenta. 

Co' doui di natura, 

I doui di natura anco nudriva, 

Col latte, il latte avviva, 

E col dolce del' Api. 

Condisce il mel de le natie dolcezze. 

Quel fonte, ond' ella beve, 

Quel solo anco la bagna, e la consigiia ; 

Paga lei, pago il mondo. 

Per lei di nembi il ciel s'oscura indarno, 

E di grandine s'arma. 

Che la sua poverta nulla paventa : 
Nuda si, ma contenta. 

Solo una dolce, e d ogni affanno sgombra 

Cura le sta nel core. 

Pasce leverdi erbette. 

La greggia a lei commessa, ed ella pasce 

De' suoi begli occhi il pastorelk) amaote ; 

Non qual le destinaro 

O gli uomini, o le steile, 

Ma quel le diede amore. 

E tra l'ombrose piante, 

D'un favorito lor Mireto adorno 

Vaggheggiata il vagheggia ; ne per lui 

Sente foco d'amor, clie non gli scopra. 

Ne' della scopre ardor, ch' egli non senta : 

Nuda si, ma contenta. 

O vera 



CONCE'TTI POE'TICI. 421 

O vera vita, che non sa che sia, 

Morire innanzi morte. 

Potess'io pur cangiar teco mia sorte ! 



Amante irresoluto. Canzonetta pastorale* 

MIO core, die faremo ? 
Odieremo? ameremo? 
Per lo dubbioso calle 
Dell' amorosa valle. 
Andiamo, andiam, mio core, 
Dove consiglia amore. 

Vaga ; nol niego ; e bella 
E' la mia pastorella. 
Ma non meno e crudele ; 
E'mpia, ingrata, infedele, 
Odiamo: odiam, mio core ; 
Che lo consiglia amore.. 

E' nol niego ; crudele : 
Empia; kigrata; infedele, 
Ma non men vaga e ttella 
E'la mia pastorella ; 
A mia in o, amiam, mio core; 
Che lo consiglia amore. 

Sopra tutte e vezzosa ; 
Piu d'ogn' altra e festosa .* 
Ha modi amorosetti ; 
Costumi ha leggiadretti ; 
Amiamo, amiam, cio core ; 
CHe lo comanda amore. 



Stanze amorose. 
AMIA'M, o bella 161a, 
Amiam : che 'I tempo vola, 
Veloce piu che dardo, 
Che giugne il lieve pardo. 

Non e, non e immortale, 
Ma fior cadiito e frale, 
Quel fior di giovenezza, 
La vostra alta bellezza. 



Qua) 



422 



CONCETTI FOE'TICI. 



Qual la sera nelF acque. 
II gran pianeta giacque ; 
Tale, o piu vago ancora, 
Risorge coll' Aurora. 

D'ombrosa e verde fogiia 
La selva i'l verno spoglia : 
E la stagion novella 
Gliela rende piu bella. 

Dell' eta nostra il verde 
Mai piu nou si rinverde ; 
La morte a nostra luce 
Tenebre eterne adduce. 

E la giu neir inferno, 
In oblio sempiterno, 
In sempiterno or? ore, 
Non si pari a d 'am ore. 

Ah dunque mentre lice, 
Mentre non si disdice ; 
Mentre ch' ella e vezzosa, 
Cogliam d'amor la rosa. 

Delia eanuta schiera 
A gli arnanti severa, 
Sprezzin vani rom6ri 
Nostri aniorosi cori. , 

Amiam ; o bella 161a, 
Armani : che'l tempo vola, 
Veloce piuchedardo. 
Che giugne il lieve pardo. 



Capriccio amoroso. 



CHI pud mirarvi 
E non amai vi 1 « 
Jer vi mirai, 
Vi contemplai. 

Si, da dovvero, 
Son prigioniero, 
Delia Gentile, 
Bella Isifile 



Ma in ogni clima, 
Via piu si stima, 
Del conquistare 
II conservare. 

E pr ende in van© 
Leggiadra ma no, 
Se di tenere 
Non ha potere. 



Dunque 



CONCETTI POETIC I. 



423 



Dunque sentite. 
Se lo gradite, 
Qual vo' che sia. 
La donna mia. 

Sia graziosa, 
Vaga e vezzosa ? 
E sia modesta, 
Non perd mesta. 

Non sia ritrosa, 
Non isdegnosa 
Ma ritiosetta, 
E sdegnosetta. 

Picciol raartire 
Cresce il desire ; 
Ne il dolce e caro 
Senza l'amiro. 

Non sia crudele, 
Non infedele : 
E non si' ingrata, 
Ne dispietata. 

Ch'io sono ardente, 
Ch'io son fervente, 
Tiitto amoroso, 
Affettuoso. 

E'l Dio d'amore 
Non ha amatore 



Di me piu degno. 
Nel suo bel regno. 

Pietosamente, 
Ma vagamente, 
So lacrimare, 
E sospirare. 

Delle mie amatfe 
Nelle brigate 
In dolci modi 
Canto le lodi. 

In rima e'n verso 
Per T universo 
Delia mia dama 
Spargo la fama. 

Nol niego, amante 
Sono incostantc; 
E son geloso, 
E capriccioso. 

Ne per rivale, 
Giove immortal« 
Re degli Dei 
lo soffrirei. 

E'cco, ben, mio, 
Qual mi son'io, 
Qual voglio sia 
La donna mia. 



[ 424 j 






A Collection of Superscriptions 
of Italian Letters. 



TT is not my design to instruct you in the epistolary art, 
for in this every man follows his fancy, but to make 
you acquainted with titles and honourable appellations 
given to persons with whom we preserve an epistolary 
correspondence. But, since they are written with an 
abbreviation, I have here arranged them in an alphabe- 
tical order, that they may the more easily be understood. 



Affme, 


Affezionatissimo. 


Ajfettuo™- 


Affettuosissimo. 


Ajftttuo*' 


Affettuosissimamente. 


Jfto. 


Affezionato. 


A. 


Altezza. 


Amatmo. 


Amatissimo. \jima. 


V. A. Ser»"> 


Vostra Altezza Serenis- 


V. A. R. 


Vostra Altezza RedU. 


Beat™. 


Beatitudine. 


V. B. 


Vostra Beatitudine, 


Beat m0 . 


Beatissimo. 


Btat mo . P" . 


Beatissimo Padre, 


Car ™ . 


Carissimo. 


Car •>»«. 


Carts sima. 


Col™ . 


Colendissimo. 


Crist™. 


Cristianissimo. 


Crist ma > 


Cristianissima. 


Divot™- 


Divotissimo. 


Ecct«> 


EccelUnte. 




Ecc«* 



Of Titles and Distinctions, fyc, 4%a 






EccmO' 


Eccellentissimo. 




Ecc za - 


Eccellenza, 




V. Ecc*°- 


Vostra Eccellenza. 




£ m mo. 


Eminent! ssimo. 




Em za - 


Eminenza. 




V. Em™> 


Vostra Eminenza. 




Hire. 


Illitstre. 




Illma, 


Illustrissima. 




III™. 


Illustrissimo. 




M. M'd. 


Maesta. 




S.M. 


Sua Maesta. 




M. Crist*™* 


Maesta Cristianissima. 


Mag co > 
Mto. 


Magmfico. 
M'olto. 




Nro. 


N'ostro. 




Obbligmo- 
nor d°- 


Obligatissimo, 
Onortindo. 




Ossno- 


Osservandissimo. 




Pta. 


Patermta. 


V.P. 


Vostra Patermta. 




V. P. Rev**- 


Vostra PaternitaReveren- 


Pari™. 


Particolartssimo. 




Pre. 


Padre. 




Prone. 


Padrone. 




Prona. 


Padre na. 




Rev d <>- 


Reverendo. 




Rev mo > 


Reverendissimo. 




Rev ma ' 


Reverendissima. 




R lv mo. 


Reventissimo. 




Sia. 


Santita. 




P. Sta. 


Vostra Santita. 




Sant mo - 


Santiss'uno. 




Sanlmi. 


Saittissimi. 




Sermo. 


Serenissimo, 




Sergio. 


Serenita. 




Seryrt. 


Seroitore. 




S r <- 


Signs re, m. sing. 


Sigre. 



426 Of Titles and Distinctions, #<?. 

Sig Te * Signore, m. sing. 

S ra - Signbra. 

5 S"' Signori. 

6 S rt ' Signore^ f. plur. 
y» S. Vossignoria. 

V. S. Illma. Vossignoria Illustrissima 

Venedo. Ventrando. 



Of titles and honourable appellations used In Italian 
letters. 

Observe that the Italians put the date in the last 
line of the letter, and none but merchants and tradesmen 
put it at the top. 

To the pope. 

Alia santitd di nostra signore Benedette Dechnoqudrto. In 
tne beginning of a letter, and in the discourse, V. Santitd, 
or V. Beatitudine. In the conclusion, e con ogni umiltd 
le bdcio i santmmri piedt. 

Di Purigi, il pHtifo di Gennojo, 1807. 

Di v. sm 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
ossequiosissimo servo. 

To a prince-cardinaL 

Aii ecceHtrniismno ed eminent issimo principe, il signor car- 
dinal Rezzonico. Roma. 

Eccellent issimo ed emincntissimo principe. In the begin- 
ning, and in the discourse, V. E. 

At the end, E per fine le bdcio con ogni riverenza la 
sacra porpora, or il lemho delta sacra porpora. Di Parigi, 
i 2 Febrajo, 1807. 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

To a prince, who would have the title of V. A. S. if 
he had not been a cardinal, you must say, serenissimo, and 
not eccellentissimo. 

To a cardinal that is not a prince. 

.fir emihentimmo, e reverend issimo signor cardinal O'rsi. 

Eminentissmo 



Of Titles and Distinctions, fyc. 427 

Emiiientissimo signore, e padrone colendissimo. In the 
middle of the letter, V. Eminenza. E per fine a V. 
Eminenza bdcio la sacra porpora, e da Dio le. prego ogni 
maggior grandezza, e fdicitd ; or, per fine le bdcio umilissi- 
mamente le mdni. Di Parigi, i 3 Mdrzo, 1807. 
Di V. Eminenza, 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

A cardinal to a cardinal. 

AW emiiientissimo, e reverendissimo signor mio signor co- 
lendissimo il signor cardinal Albdni. Roma. 

Eminent issimo, e reverend tssitno signor mio signor colen- 
dissimo. 

Nel resto ben sa V. Eminenza, ch' in ogni tempo sard 
immutdbile la mia singoldr divozione verso di lei che in tdnto 
mi rassegno con bacidrle umilissimcLmente le mdni. 

Parigi, i 3 Apr He, 1307. 

Di V. Eminenza, 

Umilissimo, e divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

Observe, that when {he princes cardinals are at Rome, 
they are called by the title of Eminence and not Highness ', 
pope Innocent X. having ordered it so, to make them all 
equal. 

To a patriarch, an archbishop, a bishop, a nuncio, a 
prelate. 

Air iliustrissimo e reverendissimo signore prone mio colen- 
dissimo, moiisignore di Beaumont. Arcivkcovo di Parigi. 

All' iliustrissimo e reverendissimo signor prone mio colen- 
dissimo monsignor di Choiseul, vescovo di Chalons. 

Iliustrissimo rev. signore, prone mio colendissimo. 

E con profmido rispeito, e sommessa riverenza le bdcio le 
sdcre vesti. Di Parigi, i 6 Maggio, 1807. 

Di V. S. ill. S? rm. 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

F 

If 



4fS Of Titles and Distinctions, c\c. 

If it be a cardinal that is bishop or archbishop, you are 
to make use of titles belonging to such cardinals as are 
not princes. 

To a secular abbot. 

AW illustrissimo e reverendissimo sign ore prone mio colen- 
dissimo il signor abbdte di Beaulieu. Molto illustre reveren- 
dissimo, signwe prone mio colendissiino, e le bdcio umilissi- 
mamente le mdni. Di Parigi, i 6 Giugno, 1807. 
Di V. S. ill. e rev. 

Divotissimo, ed obbligatissimo 
servitore. 
If the abbot wears a initre, they put, Bdcio le sdore 
mdni. 

To a regular abbot. 

Al reverendissimo padre prone mio colendissimo il padre D. 
Anselmo N. abbdte di-N. 

Reverendissimo padre, e prone colendissimo. 
Riverentemente bacidndo le- tnani a V. P. Rma. la prego 
per singoldr grdzia volersi ricorddr di me ne* suoi colloquj 
con Dio. Di Parigi, i 7 Giugno, 1807. 
Di V. P. rev. 

Uniilissioio, ed obbligatissimo 
servit6re. 

To a canon, a curate, a priest. 

Al molto illustre e molto rrverendo signore, e prone colen- 
dissimo il signore V. canonico, or arciprete di, &c. 

If it be a person of distinction, you must say, alV ill mo 
e revmo. sig™- padrone colendissimo. 

To a general. 

Al reverendissimo padre mio osservandissimo il padre N. 
N. generdle de y P. P. 

In the beginning. 

Reverendissimo padre, e prone osservandissimo. 






O Titles akd Distinctions, §c. 429 

At the conclusion. 



m v. p. ta>. 

Umilissimo 

servitore. 



Umilissimo ed obbligatisskao 



To a prior, rector, guardian, or superior, 

Al molto revwendo padre e prone osservandissimo it padre 
N. priore, rettdre, or guardidno, &c. d' PP. N. 

In the beginning. 
Molto reverendo e prone osservandissimo. 

At the conclusion. 

E le bdcio wnilissimamente le mdni. Di Parigi, i 8 
Agosta, 1807. 

Di V. P. molto rev. 

Umilissimo eel obbligatissimo 
senritore. 

To a friar-priest. 

Al molto reverendo padre, or Al molto rev 4 ' padre c pfSne 
vsstrvandissimo il padre N. del 1 ordine di sari N* 

In the beginning. 
Molto reverendo padre. 

At the conclusion. 

£ per fine a V. P. bdcio con ogni qffctto le mdni t e mi 
racomdndo alle sue orazioni. 
Di V, P. molto rev, 

Umilissimo, ed obbligatissimo 
servitore. 

To a lay -brother. 

Al molto onordndofratello in Cristofra Agostino N. dell* 
vfdine di N. or nel convento de' PP. di, &c. 

In the beginning, 
Molto onordndofratello in Cristo. 

t At 



430 Of Titles and Distinction >, ffc. 

At the conclusion. 

E per fine vi bdcio qfcttuosissimamente le ?ndni. Di Pa~ 
rigi, il 9 di Settembre, 1807. 

Motto onordndo fratello in Cristo. 

Divotissimo ed aflettuosissimo 
servitore. 

To the emperor. 

Alia sacra Cesdrea ed Imperidle Maestd delV imperatore 
Sacra Cesdrea 7?iaestd. 

In the discourse, Vostra maestd. At the end, E per 
fine a V. M. bdcio wnilissimamente le ?t;dni, pregdndo Dio, 
die la colmi di tutte le maggiori e piu desiderdbili felicitd. Di 
Parigi, i 10 Luglio, 1.807. 
Di V. Cesdrea Maestd. 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
ossequiosissimo servitore. 

To the King of France. 

Alia sacra real Maestd del Re Christianissimo. 

Or, Alia Christianissima Maestd del Re di Frdncia. 

Or, Alia sacra Maestd del Re di Frdncia. 

In the discourse, Vostra maestd, or Sire. 

At the end, Colmi Dio N. sign ore le felicitd presente 
della maestd vostra, d'dltre nuove, o piu grdndi nelV av- 
renire. Di Parigi, gli 11 Novembre, 1807. 

Or, Conservi Iddio lungamente V. M. a quelle prosper itd, 
che sotto il felicissimo, e gloriosissimo suo governo ellafdgo- 
dere a y suoi popoli. 

D. V. M. Crist. 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
ossequiosissimo servitore. 

To the King of Spain. 

Alia sacra Cattolica real Maestd del Re di Spdgna. 

SI'RE, 
E per fine prego Iddio ch' a V. M. conceda ogni grandezza, 
e felicitd maggiore. Di Parigi, i 2 Decembre, 1807. 
Di V. M. Cattolica. ' 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
ossequiosissimo servitore. 

To 



Of Titles and Distinctions, fyc, 43 1 

To the king of Poland. 

Alia sacra real M. Ortodossa del Re di Polonia. 
SIRE, 
Prospcri Iddio lungammte la maestd vostra, ed a ?nisura 
dcW accrescimento degli dnni, accresca in lei la felicitd de* 
successi. Di Parigi, i 5 Mdrzo, 1807. 
Di vostra 3Iaestd Ortodossa. 

Urnilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

To other kings. 

Alia sacra real Maestd del Re di Portogdllo, d y bighil- 
terra, di Suezia, di Danimdrca, di Sardegna, di Prussia. 
In the beginning, Sl'RE. 
At the end, as above. , 

To the dauphin of France. 

Al serenlssimo principe Delfino di Frdncia. 

At the beginning, Serenissi7/io principe. 

In the middle, V.A.R. 

At the end, Conservi Iddio per lunghissimo tempo quel 
bene alia Frdncia, die le ha ddto in ddr la serenissima ui lei 
persona, a cud con profonda rivwenza m inchino. Di Parigi, 
gli, 8 Mdggio, 1807. 

Serenissimo principe, or di F. A. R. 

Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

To the duke of Burgundy. 
To the count of . Provencei 

AW altezza rcdle del sign ore ducadi ' Borgdgna, di Berri, Set.. 

In the body of the letter, V* A. R, 

At the end,, prosperi Iddio lungammte V Altezza V. : R. 
e le conceda quel pieno celmo di grdzie the meritano le redli 
virtu che'l mondo ammira nella serenissima sua persona. In 
the end, a V. A. R. bdcio umilissimamente le mam. Di Pa- 
rigi, Hi Giugno, i807 . 



Di V. A. R. 



Umilissimo^ divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissiiao servitore. 
T2 To 



432 Of Titles akd Distinctions, fye* 

To a prince of the blood. 

AlV Altezza Serenissima del signor duca d* Orleans. 

AlV Altezza Serenissima del sig?wr principe di Conde. 

Or, Al serenissimo principe sign ore, e prone mio colendissimo, 
il principe di Conti. One may also put, AlV Altezza 
serenissima, &c. as above. 

To the doge of Venice. 

Al serenissimo principe N.N. Dogedi Venezia. Serenissima 
principe. 

E con profondo inchbw le bacio riverentemente le mani* 
J)i Parigi 8 d\ Agosto, 1807. 
Di V. Serenitu. 

UmUissimo* divotissimo, ed 
obbligatissimo servitore. 

To sovereign ..dukes. 

AlV Altezza serenissima del Duca di Parma. 

di Modena, di Mdntova. 

In the beginning* 
Serenissimo principe, or S. A. 

At the conclusion. 

JE per fine a V. A. serenissima bacio rispettudsissimamentc 
le mani, pregdndole dal cielo ogni.vera contentezza. Di 
Parigi, &c. 

To the grand master of Malta. 

AlV eminentissimo sign4re, e prone mio colendissimo il Gran 
Maestro delta religwne di Malta, 

In the beginning. 
Eniinentissjmo signore, e prone mio colendissi?)io. 

A{ the conclusion. 

E per fine a V. eminenza prego dal cielo ognipiii desiderata 
prosperitd, e le bacio riverentemente le mdni. 
Di Parigi, li, &c. 
Di V. eminenza* 

I shall 



Of Titles and Distinctions, fye* 4S$ 

1 shall put the conclusion of letters no more ; you will- 
find a number of them at the end of this collection. 

To secular electors of the empire. 

All 1 Altezza serenissima Elcttordle del signor Daca di 
Baviera, principe Elettordle del sdcro Romano Imperio. 

To ecclesiastical electors of the empire. 

AW uillezza serenissfma Elettordle del signor Arcivescoio 
di Col on ia, principe Elettordle del sdao Romano Imperio. 

To dukes who are not sovereigns. 

AW iUustrksimoed eccellentksimo signore e prone colendissuno 
il signor duca, fyc. 

To ambassadors. 

AW 'illustrissimo edeccellentissimo signer pn drone colendissimo 
ii signer N, wnbasciudore di sua Maesid Christianissima, 

To aft carl, a marquis, or baron. 

4W illustrissimo signore prone mio colendissimo il signore 
C6nte ft. Murck&se X. Bardne N. 

To a governor, 
If he is an ecclesiastic, as those of Italy. 

Alt' ittu$trissimo:e revcrendksimo slgn6re prone colendissimo 

monsignor jV. governatore di Roma, 

If he is not an ecclesiastic. 

AlV illustrissiftto signore e prone mio colendissimo il signore 
JV* governatore di JV. 

To a privy- counsellor. 

AlV illustrissimo signore e prone mio colendissimo il signore 
N. del consiglio di stdto di sua Macstd Christianissima. 

In the beginning. 
Illustrissimo signore prone mio colendissimo. 

At the end. 

m v. s. jf* 

T3 To 



434 Of Titles and Distinctions, §c. 

To a president. 

Air illustrissimo signore e prone cokndissimo il signor N. 
Prmdente nella corte sovrdna del parlamento di Parigi. 

To a master of requests. 
All' illustrissimo siguore e padrone cokndissimo il signer N. 
Maestro delle suppliche, Consigiiere di S. M. Christ ianissima. 

To an ecclesiastical counsellor in parliament. 

AiT illustrissimo e reverendissimo signor padrone mio cofen- 
dissimo il signor abba tic N. Consigiiere nella corte sovrdna del 
parlamento di Parigi. 

To a counsellor of parliament. 

AW illustrissimo signore padrone mio coltndissimo il signor 
N. Consigiiere -nella cd te sovrdna del paiiamento di Parigi. 

To a counsellor of the court of aids. 

Alt' illustrissimo signore padrone mio colendissimo il signor 
JV. Consigiiere nella camera de' sussidj di Parigi. 

To a doctor of law or physic. 

Al molto illustre ed eccellendssimo signore N. dottore di 
Ugge, tiT dottor medico in Parigi. 

To a professor, a language- master. 

■ Al molto- illustre, e molto ecccilente signore il signore N. 
leitore di Teologia ncl collegio di N. 

If he is aianguage-master, Maesto insigne nella lingua 
Italidna, virtuojo di liuto, di chitdrra, di scherma, maestro 
a balldre. 

To an advocate, an attorney. 

Al molto illustre signore padrone colendissimo il signore jV. 
■Az-ocato, or Ptocuratorc del parlamento di Parigi. 

They "write, al mdlto illustre signore padrone osservan- 
dissimo, or singolarissimo, to a gentleman, a tradesman, a 

secretary $ 



DIFFERENT FORMS, -&c. 435 

secretary ; but if he is a secretary to prince, they write 
aW illuatrissimo, as to a resident and persons of distinction. 

To a tradesman. 

AP motto magni/tCQ signore, il signer N. scut ore, foiiia.ro, 
/riacel/dro, &c. 

Or, Al mdlto magnifico maestro Francesco N. tinazzdjQ, 
?narescdlco, sartore, &c. 

Bat it is better to write, alV illustre signor ?nio, &c. 
because the title of magnifico is become obsolete. 

To a waiting-man, or any other domestic. 
A Francesco N. Ortoldno cite Dio gudrdi. 

At the end, E sard sanpre disposiissimo a compiaccrvi. 



Different Forms of concluding Letters. 

/~\Bserve that these are the Forms used by the old 
writers, and such as in epistolary collections occur 
most frequently. 

£ per fine V. S. or a V. S. illustrissi?na, or a V. eccellenza, 

or V. A, or a V. Eminenza, or V. maestd bdcio umi- 

lissimamente le mdni. 
E qui per fine le bdcio con ogni piu riverente affitto le man?'. 
E te bdcio affeUuosamente le mdnL 
E bacidndole affettuosissimamente le mdni, le prego ogni bine, 

e contento. 
E per fine le bdecio con ogni maggior riverenza le mdni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio con ogni qffetto le ?ndni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio le mdni e le prego ogni teiv bene. 
E per fine k bdcio riverentemente le mani, 
E le bdcio wniUssimainente le mdni, 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio k mdni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio milk volte le mdni, 
E le bdcio le mdni. 

E con qucsto a V. & bdcio le mdni, eel al signor Pietro suo zir>> 
E con pari, e congiuntissimo affetto k bacidmo, cd atutti 

di edsa sua, le mdni. 

T 4 Man- 



436 DIFFERENT FORMS, &c. 

Mimtmgami V. & il luogo nella grdzia ch'io le bdcio' k 

mdni di atore. 
E le bdcio k 711dm, salutdndo la signora sua consorte. 
Eper fine nella buona grdzia di V. S. ?ni raccomdndo, e le 

bdcio le mdni. 
E mi vi raccomdndo cordialmente. 
E per fine a V. P. mi raccomdndo pregdndola aver memoria 

di me ne y suoi sdnti sacrifizj. 
E bacidndok le mdni, alle sue orazionimi raccomdndo. 
Ed a V. S. bdcio wnilissimammte le mdni come ancorafo al 

signor Antonio. 
E per fine saluto V. S. ed ella si compiaccrd, a nome viio- 
bacidre le jnani al signdr Giovanni mio cagino, ed 
alia signora Caterina sua consorte. 
E river entemcnte a V. eccellenza bdcio le mdnk 
Ed a V. eccellenza fd umilissimo inchino. 
Ed a V. eminenza riverentemente m* inchino, 
Ed alle sue orazioni mi raccomdndo. 
E le bdcio con la dovuta riverenza le mdni. 
E restofacendok umilissima riverenza. 

To a mean person they write. 

s al servizio. 

j, J afftttuosissimo per serving 

sono \ vdstro avorevole. 

* a' vcstri piaceri. 

The forms most used at* present are, E msscgndndok h 

mia servitu, fd a V. S. umilissima riverenza. 
E con tutta la stima mi dico. 
Econ tutto I osseauio mi do I'onare d' assicurdrla del mio pro- 

fondo rispitto. 
Epregandola de y di lei sfimatissijni comandamenti mipregio 

d'cssere. 
E resto con tutto 7 desiderio dipoter' incontrdre gudlche oc- 

casidne di servir V. S. 
To s6no con tutta la stimfi ed il rispetto che k devo. 
E per fine mi do V onore d' offnrle la mia debolissima servitu. 
JS sia persu.dsa che sano e sard sempre disposto ad ubbidirla. 

And others of the like kind, 



L FT T E It E MERCANTI'L I. 



VE N E' % I A, al Sigr. N. N. 

AMSTERODA' MO y 
il^aC Agoste, 1807. 

Stimatissimo Signore ! 

AVendo risoluto col nome d'Iddio d'erigere cdsa di 
negozio in questa Citta (Piazza) sotto '1 nome mio, 
con facolta, e governo tale di poter* intrappendere qua- 
Iunque onorevole negozio, e tenendo voi nel numero de' 
piu cari, e parziali Amfci, vetie porto l'aviso con questa 
mia, accio, nelle vostre occorrenze possiate valervi dell' 
opera mia si per provisi6ni mercanzie, per le quali ho 
m6do di farvi goder ogni vantaggio, come in Cambi, ed 
altro che vi possa di qua bisognare ! sicuro di riportarne 
cttimi e leali trattamenti, esibendovi la mia servitii, colle 
solite e consuete provision}, con che vi dichiariate pronto 
ad una reciproca corrispoudenza. In tanto faretc nota di 
non prestar fede ch' alia mia ferma, c611a quale sara la. 
presente sottoscritta, e mi direte come dovro contenermi 
per voi, per isfuggire gli errori. Attendo l'on6re de' vostri 
stimatissimi comandi per farvi sperimentare 'I genio parti- 
cohire c'ho delia vostra grata corrispoudenza, accertandovi 
ch'alle occasioni saro per ricorrer' »' vostri favori, mentre 
affetuosameiite saluUindovi, vi bacio le ruani. 



VERONA, N.N. 

AMSTERODA' MO. 

PER mancnnza d'occasioni non v* abbiamo pi\H 

arritto, servira questa 6ra per caramente sakitarvi, e 

dirvi, che per ordine del Signor N. N. di Roma v'ab- 

T 5 biaiuo 



438 LE'TTERE MERCANTTLI. 

biamo in Condotta di questi SS. N.N. spedita franca, c 
ben condizionata una balla con fiifkri roarca, e numero 
coutenente Panni d'Olanda clie vi piacera in tempo debito 
procurarla, per disporne a voglia del detto amico di Roma, 
dal quale vi valerete delle vostre spese con avvisare '1 se- 
guifo. Con questa occasione v'orYeriamo la serviiu nostra 
in tutto cit> che vi potesse occ6rrere, che prontissinii sem- 
pre ci avrete, e B. L. M. 



n O M A. 

A MSTERODA' MO. 
S'ENZA le carissime vostre si sono proviste le Pezze 
otto Panni ch' avete ordinato di perfettissima qualita, 
ed una Balla delta fuori marca e numero resta spedita a 
vostra disposizione in condotta di questi SS. N.N. ai 
SS. N.N. di Verona, che iarete a procurarla da* mede- 
simi per dircene a suo tempo la ricevuta, e soddisfazione, 
come non dubitiamo, avendovi procurato fior di robba, 
ed avantaggiatovi al possibile tanto nella compra, cbe 
n61Ie spese, il che sara motivo di continuarci in abbon- 
danza i vostri impieghi, e come dall' ingiunto conto 
vedrete, ov' abbiamo dato debito per il costo e speso di 
f . . . Bco. che di tanti ci darete credito, atteudendo che 
celi rimettiate al maggior nostro vantagio, e supra di voi, 
alia ricevuta del conto colla solita vostra puntualita, e 
favoriteci di nuovi, e maggiori vostri comandi, che pron- 
tissimi ci avrete con tutto l'aftetto, col quale caramente 
salutandovi, B. L. M. 



AMSTE RO D A' MO, S S. N. N. 

ii a m a. 

CO'Ll.A gratissima vostra dei . . ho ricevuto '1 conto 
delle Pezze 8. Panni d'Olanda che m'avete proviste, e 
spedite in Balla N .... al SS. N. N. di Verona a una 
disposizione, che la procurero da medesiiui. 

Non ho dubbio che saranno della pertetta qualita che 
dite, ed a suo tempo vi dir6 la ritrovata. in tanto per 
farvi valere '\ vostro avauzo ho ordinato al Sigre. N. 
di Venezla di provedervi subito f . . . Deo. importare 

delta 



XETTERE MERCANTI'U. 439 

delta Balla, rhe 1 efifettueia con ogni puntualita, atten- 
dendo da \6i avviso die sia seguiio, e che mene abbi&te 
dato crediio a fronte di d£t*a-parl'-a : nel ln&ntre vi 
piacera far nota di provedenri Pezze due Panni di Berri 
per Tabarri che potrete pagare f. 5. incirca il bniccio in 
bianco, e farii tingere scaiiatto come la mostra, ed in 
appresso vi dar6 r.uovo orpine per compire una ballet ta, 
raccomandandovi che deto Panm siano di buon c6rpo, 
buon lanaggio e ben coperti per darmi &nimo alia con- 
tinuazione de' miei impieghi che non saranno scarsi, se 
mi trovero hen favorito, ed oiFerendomi a' vostrj comandi, 
prontissimo vi saluto, e B. L. M. 



A M STERO D A' M O, SS. N.N. 

VEN EZJ A. 

PER ordine, e conto del Signore N. N. di Roma vi 
rimetto a uso D . . . . Banco da N. N. lettera N. N. a 
grossi .... ducata che ne procurerete promessa, e 
pagamento in tempo intendendovene con detto Amico 
avvisando '1 seguito, e preg-andovi de' vostri comandi vi 
saluto caramente, e B. L. M. 



ROMA, N. N. 

AM STERO D A' M O. 

CO'LLA vostra carissima dei . . . Corrente ci ri- 
metKte da questo N. N. f. Banco ad uso lettera vostra, 
sene procurera accettazione, ed a suo tempo ne cercheremo 
'i pagamento per creditarvene contro la Balletta tele d' 
Olanda mandatavi, e qaahdo altro in contraiio non 
sentiate, tenete 1'atfaie terminato. Non ci resta, die 
pregarvi della continuazione de' vostri stimatissinii coman- 
di per i quali prontissimi sempre ci avrete, salutandovi 
caramente vi B. L. M. 



T6 FTRE'NZE 



440 



LETTERE MERCANTI'U. 



FIRE'NZE, N.tf. 



AMSTERO DA' MO 

E' MOLTO tempo che non Vho scritto per mandtnza 
d' occasioni, servira questa per salut£rvi caramente, e 
dirvi die a persuasione, del S. N. N. di Livorno, ho riso- 
luto fa>e una piccola pruova della vostra fabrica, cora- 
mettendovi due c^sse drappi o mantini di bu6na qualita 
e de colori che vi mostra l'ingiunta faltura. Vi pia- 
cera fame nota per inoltrarle questa volta tolla maggiore 
celerita possibile per la solita Condotta facendomi alia 
spedizione Tratta dell' importo, che'l vostro carico 
incontrera il dovuto ricovero, raccomandandovi che i 
colori sieno ben vivaci, di buon peso e di perfetta qualita, 
cosi che mi facci&te vantaggio nel prezzo e risparmio 
aelle spese, se desiderate la continuazione de' niiei 
impieghi che saranno di qualche somma, se mi vedrd ben 
trattato, come non dubito del vostro affetto ; ed offeren- 
clovi la servitii mia in tutto cid che qui possa occorrervi 
affettuosamente vi B. L. M. 






Tiaccomandazionc d' uri Amico passaggiere, ed Assegnazione 
ftittagll dc' dandri necessdrj,Sfc. 

Mio Signore, 

SE'NZA ca>o vostro, mi rapporto sopra la mia ante- 
cedente, che fu ai 10 del passato. Questa serve solamente 
per pregarvi, che se '1 signor N. che parte 6ggi de 
qui per N. venisse a riverirvi da pa>te sua e nostra, con 
vicercaY i vostri consigli ed ajuti d' assisteilo nelie sue 
©ccorenze: s'egli avesse bis6gno di danari, di ibrnirgliene 
sin alia somma di fl. 1000 nioneta corrente c6ntro 
quittdnza, e di mettermeli a conto senza darmeue aviso. 
Vi resterd con obbligo per questo, e per gli altri favori 
ch' avrete la bonta di far' al detto Signore, che molto 
nostro amico. Raccomandandovi '1 ricapito dell' inclusa, 
caramente vi B. L. M. 

SE'NZA 



LETTERS MERCANTTLI. ui 

SE'NZA cara vostra, ia presente sara per dirvi ch at- 

tendo abbiate riscosso da' Signori N di costi fl — 

e datomene credito ed avviso. In questo mentre vi 
rimetto altri fl - -, sopra '1 Signor N. pur di costi, per 
lettera di qu£sti Signori N. di cui vi piacera di procurar 
l'accettazi6ne, e pagamento al suo tempo, ed imborsati 
die gli avr6te, raene dar£te parimente credito, ed 
avviso. In tanto farete nota di provedermi le sotto 
notate merci e di spedirmele in due Barili, quando 
pero mele vogliate dare al prezzo avisatovi : in diffetto, 
tralasciate auco di riscu6tere suddetta rimessa con riman- 
darmene la lettera : ma quando avrete risoluto di 
spedirmi i detti Barili al prezzo accerin&to, sarete rhn- 
borsato subito del vostro avanzo, e sara causa di darvi 
Comvnissioni di maggior sostenza. Marcher£te i Barili 
di Num. 10. 11. colla solita mia marca avanti, e per 
grazia non vi dimenticate della fede di sanit\ sopra cotesti 
Barili, dove si attesti che la r6bba sia slata costi fabricate, 
e resto.— • 

DA'LLA cortese vostra dei 7 passato sentiamo con 
gusto come siete pronti a favorirci non solamente nell' 
occasione di negozj, ma anco in provederci le gallanterie 
delle quali vi pregamnio, per il che vi restiamo inflnita- 
mente obbligati; e per corrispondere nel primo capo, 
andiamo procurando Commissi6m de' nostri Amici di 
fuori da' inviarvi, e per Taltro vi mandiamo qui unita, 
(or annessa) una speoificazione di qu&nto brameremo, 
rimetiendo '1 tutto al vostro genio e piacere, e pregSn- 
dovi di tante cose curiose, che si fabricano in cotesta 
Citta, di scegliere quelle ch'a voi parranno piu proprie 
a regalare e dilettare certe Darnigelle nobili, a cui le 
abbiamo destinate. Quando saranno pronte, ne farete 
una scatola, ed inviando ai Signori N. di Bolzano, farete 
lorola tratta del loro importo, che, compiranno a dovere 
per nostro ordine ; e per fine vi B. L. M. 

PER dar principio a prevalerci de' vostri fav6ri 
esibitici, risolviamo di commettervi i sotto notati 7, Ba- 
rili ..... e come vedrete dall' anessa nota, che vi 
si roinda in tutta confidenza, ci vengono offerte quelle 

robbe 



442 LETTERE MERCANTILE 

robbe da altri ai sottonotati prezzi, percio vi preghiamo 
d'avantaggiarci di qualche cosetta, se sara possibile per 
obbligarci a coiitinuare cou voi in commissioni piCi 
rilevanti, ed a passar' una buona corrispondenza a sodis- 
fazione comune. Quanto piu presto potrete, fated la 
spedizione di questi sette Barili, per ordinarvene subito, 
giunti quelli altri. Fate nota d'addrizzarci. detti Colli 
colla loro sede di sanita anticipate per N. al Signor N. 
dal quale vene faremo proveder costi colla dovuta pun- 
tualita I'ammontare. Vi preghiamo di procurar di ser- 
virci in liitta diligenza, e con tuiti gli estremi vantaggi, 
ma sopra tutto, tior di robba, accioche venga aggradita 
da questi nostri Avventori, e conforme le promesse fiitteci 
de' 10 Febrajo prossimo passaio. 

PER risposta della cara vostra de' 22. passato, godo 
di sentire abbiate rkevuto ed huborsito la cedola di 

cambio di fl. da me rimessivi sopra cotesti Signori 

N. Di grazia, s'egli e' possibile senza vostro pregiudizio, 
compiacetevi con sudetti fl. . . . saldarne la partita : 
meutre, come ben sapete, avete posto la robba piu 
cara a me che non avete fatto ad altri di qui avendo 
cio visto con gli occhi miei proprj, e v'assicuro, che se 
mi farete godere qualche vantiggio, non manchcrete 
mai di Commissioni dalla parte mia, cd in breve vene 
ordinero 2 Barili; ma saidate s 7 e possibile la partita 
suddetta, quando pero non lo vogliate tare, avisatemele, 
che subito vi faro pagare quel poco avanzo che preten- 
dete ; ma poi le mie Commissioni saranno scarse, perche 
non e di ragione ch' io paghi piu degli altri : e caramenle 
vi. B. L. M. 

SIA'MO ai 3\ di Lugli tuttavia senza vostre care, e 
cio sara causa di meno ciirvi. Solo questa servira per 
confermar 'I dettovi in copia, soggiungendo che dai 
.Signori N. di N. vi saranno puutualmenle provisti 

fl moncta corrente avendo anco quest' ordhi£rio 

scritto a cotesti Signori N. $$c. di pagarvi per nostro 

conto contro vostra s£mpiicc quittanza 6ltri fl 

civile quali due partite vi piaceia sollecjtare l'imborso 
per d ircene poi credito ed aviso, cosi colle nostre se- 
guenti vi iaremo altre riraesse per contrapporle tutte all' 

amniont&re 



LETTERS MERC ANTT LT. 443 

ftmmontare de' selte .Barili merci commessevi' de' quail 
sen' attende quanto prima la spedizione e questa volta, 
per pot£rvene committer di mane in mano altre in mag- 
gior numero ; ma bisogna assolutamfrite, che ci facciate 
godere tfitti gli estremi avanlaggi ne' prezzi e nelkt 
squisitezza della robba. Con attender d'ogni cosa gr&lo 
successo facciamo fine con B. L. M. 

IN risposta della cara vostra de' . . . . ho ottenuto 
aecettazione dei fl . . . correnti sopra questi Signori 
N. per leltera del Signor N. di N. al!o scadere della 
quale procurero '1 pagamento con darvene credito al suo 
luogo. Dal conto iuviatovi oggiolto, avrete veduro 
quanto mi si deve per mio avanzo, il quale prego di 
farmi entrar parimente e d'onorarmi d'altri vostri ca>i 
impieghi. Qui inclusa va (or c e) una fatturae fede di 
sanita sopra '1 Barile Num. 6. mandato ai Signori 
N. di N. a vostra disposizione di cui procurerele la rice- 
vuta : con darmi credito del suo ammontare : e per fiue vi 
B. L. M. 

CON gratissima vostra de' 17. staute. In risposta 
vediamo che per la morte di vostro Signor Padre, che 
Dio abbia in gloria, avete risoiuto di far con ere in 
avvenire '1 negozio sotto nome vosfcro; di cui seu'6 
fatta la dovuta nota, ed in particolare, di con credere 
per voi ad altra mano ch'alla vostra : e per n6i lo farete 
al solito. I qu&ttro Barili . . . giimsero poi in Bolzano, 
dove li facci&mo fermare per pro va rue la fine in iiera 
prossima mezza Quaresima, nella quale anco vediamo 
che vi varrete del vostro avanzo, il quale faremo ri- 
capit^ire puntualmente, e sta bene che procuriate qnanto 
prima d'inviar' anco gli altri sei Bardi per conto a meta, 
che di tutto ne procaccieremo lo sural timento a maggior 
benefizio comune, dandovi parte del seguito ; e pur fine 
vi B. L. M. 

CO'LLA gratissima vostra de' 9 corrente ci troviamo 
favoriti ; dalla qu&le vediamo i'inibrmazione che de- 
siderate di queste nostre tele supponendo bianche, e non 
grezze. Sopra cio vi dici^mo, che'n simili- niercanzie 
abbiamo da lunga mano buonissima occasione in far 
restar serviti gli^amici non solo con fior di robba, ma 

«uico 



4U LETTERE MERCANTFLf, 

anco con ogni vantaggio possibile, Servavi che i Colli 
per Chiozza si possoiio fare tanto pesanti che si vuole, 
perche -v&nno fino cola per carretoni e per dcqua ; ma 
quelli che si spediscono per Mi!aiio e Genova, non si 
possono fare che di l6(). libbre ii Barili. Circa la spe- 
dizione Messina, sogliamo niandar' i Barili per Genova, 
perche ivi e sempre qualche buona occasione da poter' 
instradarli : aile volte si gode anco la commodita d'una 
Galera da poter tragettar la robba senza assicurarla, 
ma per Felucca si potra, chi vorrii farla assicurare ; 
basta che amici buoni cola non vi maueheranno e se noi 
altri siamo abili a secondare '1 vostro disegno, siamo a* 
vostri servizj prontissimi, e vi B. L. M. 

SJA'MO a' 14. Novembre colle favoritissime vostre 
de' 10. del passato, dalle quali sentiamo come avete 
fatto nota della Commissione datavi per conto nostro di 
tre Barili. ... in conformita dalla fattura e mostre 
mandatevi . il che sta bene ; cost che avr^ste procurato 
diligentemente di provederci fior di robba, e vantag- 
gia>ci nel prezzo e nelle spese piu che sia possibile ; 
speriamo adunque con prossime vostre d'iutendere cio 
clr' avrete operato. Frattanto risolviamo ordin&rvi di 
provedere per il medesimo conto nostro altri due Barri- 
li . . . dell' istessa quanta dellesuddetteconformeiamostra 
the tenete ; con mandarceli per via di Genova per 
mezzo dei Signori N. a nostra disposizione ; ese irove- 
remo questa strada raeno dispendiosa che qutlia di 
Firenze, si continuera. Frocurateci in tanto ogni sod- 
disfazioiie, nella robba, e nel prezzo, e nelle spese ogni 
rispiirmio come si confida nel vostro affetto, prendendo 
'i vostro rimborso dai Signori N. di Vcnezia a' quali 
daremo buon' ordine per restinzioue del nustro debito. 
Vi preghiamo solamente, d'aver' a cuore '1 nostro inte- 
resse, accioche se'l negozio tornera piofittevole, come 
speriamo, si possar j replicarvi le Commission! con piu 
larga maiio. Faremo ancora riflesso a' prezzi che ci 

acceuuate che vagliano le .... cio e fl , e trovaii- 

dovi apparenza d utile, ci applicheremo anco a questo ; 
dovete pero sapere che altri amici cele darebbero, poste 
in Bologna, a fl . . . , . cioe . . . ., meuo che voi ci avete 

dinotato : 



LETTERE MERCANTIXf. 445 

dinotato: cbe percio quando risolverSmo darvene Com- 
missione ci dovrete far' ogni facilita ; e per^ine caram£nte 
salutdndovi, vi baciamo le mani. 



LA passata fu nostra ultima delk quale qui eongiunta 
vi mandiamo la copia, per servirvene in mancanza dell* 
originate: dapoi ci troviamo colla grata vostra de* 15* 
scaduto da Bolzano, in risposta : Dei fl . . . che ei rimet- 
tete in due partite, procureremo 1' accettazione, ed at su«* 
tempo '1 pagamento. Quanto ai fl . . . che ci dovete 
per pezze 60 tele grezze, consegnatevi franche d' ogni 
spesa, celi potrete provedere per Augusta o Norimberga^ 
per saldar taL conto e comminciare un nuovo, e per fine 
vi salutiamo caram£nte» 



RISPONDE'NDO alia gratissima nostra de 6 stante ; 
vi diremo, che'n questa nostra iiera gia terminata, abbiamo 
fatto fine de' due primi Barili . . . . e di Barili sei 
.... che ci provedeste per conto a meta; del Kit to sene 
formerd 'I conto per mandarvelo con altra. Vedtemo ora 
per detto c6nto a meta ch' avete provlsto e spedita per 
Bolzano ai Signor N. a n6stra disposizione altri due 
Barili . . . . e Barili otto . . . . dei quali come 'anco di 
quelli che restano, procureremo lo spaccio, il quale se- 
guito, vene daremo raggudglio con mandarvene T conto; 
come per tanto T abbiamo ricevuto del loro importare,. 
che rived remo per scritturarlo, in mancanza di errori 
{di vostra conformita) abbiamo fatto nota che de fl. 682 
ch' avanzate per la nostra meta di suddette merci, cene 
sara fatta tratta in fiera prossima di Bolzano dai Signori 
N. di N. la onde vi faremo le disposizi6ni necessarie, 
accioche resti puntualmente compita e secondo che s'an- 
dra esitando, s' ordineranno nuove proviste, come inten- 
derete, e nel r£sto in che vagliamo servirvi, comandateci 
liberamente, e per fine vi B. L. M. 



SIGNO'R mio, 
Sciiviamo a' 3 Dec6mbre privi di gr£te vostre» JLn 
preseute s6rve solo per dirvi, che per ordkie, e emit© del 
Signor N. N. v'abbiarao spedito due Colli di diverse 

.Mer- 



416 



LETTERE MERCANTI'LI. 



Mercanzie, come vedr6te a pie della presenle segnati 
con fuori marca, e vi saninno addiizzati dal Signor N. 
di N. si tosto che gli avrete ricevfrti; vi preghiamo di 
seguirne l'ordine, cbe supponiamo gia vi sara dato dal 
detto Sign ore, dandoci aviso del seguito. Prevaleretevi 
per le vostre spese dietro ia robba, o sopra la Mercanzia. 
Non occorrendo per adesso altra cosa, restiamo sempre 
disposti a servirvi, e caramente salutando vi baciamo le 
mani. N. N. 

P. S. Le nuove d! Italia sono molto contrarie alia 
Spagna, nientre riceviamo in questo mom en to l'avviso da 
imo de' .nostrr amici di Milano, che'l Genetale N. e 
stato t'alto prigioniere di guerra con cinque mila Spag- 
inioli. 



Signor mio, 
SO'PRA la copia della nostra ultima del primo Seltem^ 
bre scadttto, e per adesso vi diamo aviso che 'i Signor 
N. v'ha indrizzato per Carrettiere N. una cassa No. I. 
ch' abbiamo commesso per proprio conto, sendovi denho 
mille nove cento settanta sette marchi d'argento con 
(litre robbe di prezzo, come vedrete dalla nola qui s6tto 
uuita, e vi pieghiSmo di fame celere inoltrazione, e 
eolia minore spesa che si potra. Servavi Iaviso, e coman- 
date dove ci troverete cap&ci per. rendervi servizj 
gradili, non dubitate che saremo sempre disposli ad 
efretuyrli con tutta quell' aiunzione che meritate, e 
nella ttessa maniera, con cui ci fa\orite sempre, mentre 
carafnente vi salutiaino, ed augurandovi im fe lice via g- 
gio, ed 6gni vactaggio possibile alia prossima fiera di 
N. dove forse alcuno di noi avra '1 piacere di vedervi, 
restiamo. 



IL fallimento del Signor N. seguito in Parigi i ip 
del Corrente ci ha quasi rovinati, perche ci ha ratio 
perdere d6dici mila scudi da qualche. tempo ^ia spirati, 
ojtre un' altra partita di quattro mila otto cento florini, 
che dovra maturare al natale di qu6st' anno. Ma pa- 
zidnza, Iddio ha voluto cosi, cosi sia. Vi diremo, che 
tempo fa, deinmo Ordine al Signor N. d' addrizzarvi un 

C6II0, 



LE'TTERE MERCANTFLI. U7 

Collo, quello ch' anco ci scrive d'aver fatto. Vi piaccia 
dunque andarloprocurando a suo tempo ben condizionato, 
e celo rispedirete quanto prima per Lindo a nostra dis- 
posizione. Vi preghiamo a restringere quanto mai sani 
possibile l'aggravio delta Condotta, non dimenticando d* 
nnirvi, (o d' aggiungervi) la bolletta di sanita. Avreie visf o 
colla nostra antecedente un Barile di Carle ail' indrizzo 
del Signor N. e mentre siamo entrati nel nuovo anno, 
v'auguriamo felicissimo capo d' esso coinio d' ogni bene e 
bramdta prosperita. L'istesso facciamo a quelli che 
v'appartengono, e siamo di cuore. 

Prima Lett era di Cam bio a due mesi di data. 

Pisa. Gennajo 1797' per mil!e Piastre. 
A DUE m£si di data pagate per qu6sta prima di 
Cambio all' ordiue del Signor N. mille Piastre, valore 
ricevuto contanle dal detto Signore, e li passerete secondo 
F ordine di. 

Al Signor N. . KomulIno. 

. a CAdice. 



Prima Letter a a Vista. 
Li6ne i 10. Marzo 1S07. per 300 Ducati di Banco. 

A Vi' ST A pag&te per questa prima lettera di Cambio 
air ordiue de* Sign6ri N. N. Fratelli, trecento Ducati di 
banco, valore ricevuto da' detti Siguori, che passerete 
sec6ndo 1' aviso di 

Al Signor N. Cristo'fouo Pauli. 

A Vmteia. 



Formula d\ Assegnazidne. 
SIGNO'R Filipno N. vi preghiamo di pag£re contra 
nostra Assegnazi6ne al Sign6r Daniele N, ad Ordine, 
ducento Scudi quaranta cinque Cruciferi in moneta, che 
passerete e6me per aviso di 

Francqforto, i 4 Agosto, Ca'rlo N. 

1797 , 



Scudi 200. 45, Cruqftro Moneta. 

Formula 



448 



LETTERE MERCANT1XI 



Formula di Quittdnza. 



CONFE'SSO e dichiaro per la presente d' aver rice* 
vuto oggi dal Sign6r N. Mercante di N» la Sonima di 
quaranta cinque Scuddi, che rai doveva dopo la Fiera 
passata per diverse mercanze. 

Lipsia, i 9 Novtmbre, Ferdina'wdq N. 

iwf. 



Formula di Ricevtita-, 

HO ricevuto dal Signor N. raille fiorini a C6nk> cfr 
ante mi deve. • 



quanto 

Argentina, 
gli otto DeccmbiTp 
1807. 



Anto'mo N. 



^&ra Ricevfita. 

HO ricevuto dal Sign6r N. un plico di K per if S%- 
n6r Principe N. che m' obb'ligo di fargli tener' in wani 
pr6prie a mio risingo e pcricoto. 

Augusta,. Anse'lmo N* 

i lOSetttmbre, im7- 



Le.ttcva di Pettura per Terra. 

Frdncofort, i 15 Qiu- 
gno> 18<>7* 
Sign6re, 

ALL* A gu&rdia di Dio e condotta di Micbele 
Carrettiere di questa Citta, riceverete una Balla 
B. T. di Mercansie mercata come in margine, pesante 
quattro cento cinquanta libre, la quale avendo 
ricevuta ben condizionata, ed in tempo dovuto, 
gli pagherete per la sua Vettura a ragione di due 
Scudi per Quintile, come per aviso del 

Vostro umiV™ Servo 

Jttttera 



LETTERE di CIVILTA. 41$ 

Lettera di Vetiura per Acqua. 

Amsterodamo i 20 d* Agosto, 
Siguore, .1807. 

VI m&ido per la NaVe (o b&rca) di Giovanni 
N. Barcaruolo di N. quattordici Casse di Zuc- 
D. P. chero marcate come in margine, le quali avendo 
ricevuto i 25 del Corrente in buono stato, gli 
pagherete per la sua vettura a ragi6ne di duoi 
fiorini per Cassa, ma solameute a la meta, se non 
le consegua al detto tempo* Sono 

Vvslro until™ 6 Servztore, 
N. N. 



LE'TTEHA DI CIVILT A. 



Lettera civile ad un Uomo* 

I llustrissimo Signore, 

Padrone mio Colendissimo. 

LE rendo inille distintissime grazie per tutt* i fav6ri 
| usati verso mio figlio, mentre e staio Collegiale in 
questa sua regia Accademia, d6ve mi pare abbia fatto 
non mediocre profitto. Puo esser* ben assicurata V. S» 
Illustrissima, che mi ford sempre gloria di serviria in 
tutte le occasion!, nelle qu4ii vorra onorarmi de' suoi 
pregiatissimi Comandamenti, per testific&rle V indelebile 
gratitudine che conservar debbo verso 1* innata di 
iei gentilezza, ed in manc&nza mia lo stesso mio figlio, 
che si dichiara da lei favoritissimo, non manchera 
mai di compire Y obbligo suo per non rendersi imme- 
ritevolc della di- 16i continuata protezi6ne. Gradisca 
fratt&nto m segno della mia servitu e divozione ^un 
fornimeuto di bott6ni dell* ultima moda, venfcta, sola* 
mente la settimana scorsa da Ldndra, ne voglia far' 
attsnzione alL qualita del dono al di lei merito in nissun 

inodb 



450 LETTERE Di CIVILTA. 

modo proporzionato, ma al cuor del Donatore fin' alie 
Ceneri. 

Di V. S. III™. 
Napoli, i 7 Agosto J 807. Divot mo Umil 1 ? ed 

osservandissimo 
Servitore. 



Lettera civile ad una Bonna'. 

Illustrissima Signora, 

Padrona mia Colendissima. 

PER farle vedeje quanto stimo 1' onore de' di lei 
pregiatissimi Cenni, al ricevimento dell' ultima sua in 
data dei 15. Maggior, ho pregato '1 Giudice di questa 
nostra Citta Amico mio stretto, affinche spedisca la sua 
causa ventilante nel suo Tribunale, e m'ha promesso che 
lo fara il mese prossimo, di maniera tale che spero, che 
V. S. Ill mo sara. servita senza dubbio, e le dico per suo 
riposo, che le manderd a suo tempo Copia della sentenza, 
colla quale potra essa interamente assicurarsi, che vivo 
impazientissimo d'ubbidirle, e renderla persuasa, e certi- 
ficata del rispetto, della venerazione, e stima con cui ho 
1* onore di protestarmele. 

Di V. S. lll m \ 
Firenze Divotissimo ed obbligatissimo 

i 14 Luglio Servitore 

1807. 

Sempro'nio N. 



P. S. 






Sua Figlia glide assai buona salute, griizie al Cielo, 
e per esser degna figlia d una degnissima Mad re, viene 
stim&ta ed amata non solam6nte da tutte queste Religiose 
che quasi V adorano, ma da tutli quelli c'hanno la bella 
sorte di conoscerla. 
td Tiittcra 



LE'TTERE di CIVJLTA. 451 

Lettera 

Del Serenissimo Principe LEOPO'LDO al 

Signor" Egidio Mendgio, 

SIGNO'R Menagio : Gli amo- 

revoli sentimenti die V. S. mi signltica di compatimento 
e di duolo per la morte del Serenissimo Principe Multias, 
inio fratello, di felice memoria, sono pi oprj delK animo 
suo cortese, espei imentato da me in tante occasioni ; onde 
li recevo io con affettuosa parzialita ; e le rendo grazie 
ben grandi: desiderando di poter corrispoudere alia 
cordialita di V. S. colla pienezza della mia, in tutto cio 
che sia di suo gusto. Ed in tanto le auguro dal Cielo 
tutte quelle prosperity piu perfette die ella sappia bra- 
mare. Di Firenze, ai 25 Novembre 1807. 

Aruorevole di V. S. 

IL P R F N C I P E L E P'O L D 0. 



Lettera del Sig r MENA'GIO alia Signora Con- 
tessa della FAE'TTA. 

SO'NO obbligatissimo alia gentilezza di V. S. Ill" 5 * 
della grazia singolare che s'e compiaciuta di farmi 
colla sua cortesissima lettera. Che veramerite e fare 
(ma grazia singolare agli assenti, avergli irt memoria in 
cosi ameuo luogo, qua!" e la Villa di Fresne ; ed in 
compagnia di cosi amabili persone, quali sono Madama 
duPlessis e Madamigella le Gendrt: tut te cose capacissime 
d'occupare interameute 1' amnio suo, per grande che 
sia. Quant' a me, non dird gia a V. S. Ill ma ch'-' ogni 
dl spesse fiate anch' ella mi torna a mente, non essen- 
done n\ai partita. Le diro bene che sono a VUrt, luogo 
altresl ameno ; dove fra d6tii Pastori e vaghe Pastorelle 
si fanno tutt' i balli e giuochi che si scrivono del paese 
di Celadone e d' Astrea : ma che ogni lu6go mattrista 
dov' io non vedo V. S. Ill ma e che in questo amenissimo 
luogo, vo fuggendo tutt' i piaceri e passatempi di cosi 
riguardevoli Pastori e Pastorelle. 

Soto 



462 LETTERE m CIVILTA* 

Solo e pensoso, i piu diswti cdmpi 
Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e leriti. 

Quindi pud ben cOnocere V. S. Ill ma : chlo non so» 
ineno ad£sso delle di lei virtu e gentilezze invaghito, ch* 
io n* era, allora cbe dimorando elk in Angib nella deli- 
ciosissima Villa di Ciuanpire. Tornero a Parigi, subito 
che vi sara ella tornata. Fra tanto le mando il Madri- 
gale Italiano, da me fatto per Ma dam a di Sevigni, ad 
imitazione di quello del Guarini, Occhi sttlk mortal), fye. 
tanto stimato e tanto lodato da V. S. Illustrissima. Epcr 
fine le prego dgni piu desiderata felicita. 

MADJUGA'LE DEL MENA'GIO. 

Pianto di bella Donna* 

Ah del Regno d' Amor prodigio tristof 

Sparger Idgrhm amdre 

§lue y dolci lumi ko visto ; 

ha* trd le Grdzie assiso 

Solea scherzdre il Riso. 

Spargean di pianto one 3 bogli occhi un mare? 

Ma pur co* rdggi ardenti 

Spargean fidmme cocenti : 

JS quel fatdle ardore 

Tdsto m* accese il core. 

misera mia vita! 
{yccki, lumi immortdli. 
JDeh qual per i miei mali 
Rosso sperdre dltaf 
Se nubilosi ardete, 
Sereni che f arete ? 






FINIS. 



>T. C. HAVSAtn, ftrintw, 
3 ¥eterborou|h-court 
t, Fleetitreet, 



1UL 291948 



■* 



m*- i 



^o l . 



: ^ <* !: 




"X 










°a 










•'VV-., V 














^•c* ^l 1 



<£<3* 






^ Jp 







> A'H 



v-° - m&M * ^ ° * 



a* ^ 



6 Q, 






p "Civ V 



^„,<? 










w 






•s aG v . * 












Si S S aG 



*< %% y^><3'"^ 






a*<3* 



«4 Q 



^ %> 




.% 0°. >So. rP V 



> ^W/KS^ -OX <! 






1^ ^ 




,£ 



^^ 




■^o^ 






